Technical Manual

Helical Piles and Anchors
Hydraulically Driven Push Piers

Polyurethane Injection
Supplemental Support Systems
FSI Technical Manual
Second Edition
July 2014
NOTICE AND DISCLAIMER
The information contained in this manual (manual) prepared by Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.
(FSI) has been written solely for general informational purposes to assist with project design and
writing specifications. While FSI believes the information in this manual is accurate as of the date
of publication, the user should not rely upon it for any specific application without examination and
verification of its accuracy and applicability by an engineer, designer, or architect licensed in the state
of the proposed project. Further, because design and application of foundation support products are
typically dependent upon site-specific project conditions, including without limitation geotechnical
properties of soil which can vary significantly between sampling points, it is up to the user, prior to
installation, to seek independent engineering analysis and to verify compliance with applicable rules
and regulations.
THIS MANUAL IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS. FSI DOES NOT WARRANT THE INFORMATION
IN THIS MANUAL AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES
OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. FSI expressly disclaims liability for: 1) the adoption, revision, implementation,
use or misuse of the information in this manual; 2) the installation of FSI products by end-users; and
3) as permitted by law, any consequential, special, or incidental damages.
This manual and all the materials and inventions disclosed herein (excluding third party information),
including all intellectual property rights thereto, are the sole property of FSI and protected by federal
patent, trademark, and copyright laws (FSI Property). Any unauthorized use of FSI Property or
the copying of all or any part of this manual in any form is expressly forbidden without the written
permission of FSI, unless otherwise stated in this manual.
FSI is constantly innovating in order to stay on the leading edge of the foundation support and repair
industry and, so, it reserves the right to change or modify product design and specifications without
notice. Moreover, some of the third-party material incorporated in this manual may be modified
or amended from time to time. Please contact FSI staff to verify use of the most recent design
information and product specifications.
Corporate Headquarters:
Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.
12330 Cary Circle
Omaha, NE 68128
800-281-8545
www.foundationsupportworks.com
www.fsicommercial.com
www.OnStableGround.com
Technical Manual pi © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Second Edition All Rights Reserved
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notice and Disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Chapter 1 – Introduction
1.1 About Foundation Supportworks®, Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 FSI Engineering Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Continuing Education Opportunities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chapter 2 – Helical Foundation Systems

2.1 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Summary Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3 Helical Foundation System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.3.1 Helix Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.3.2 Central Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3.2.1 Coupler Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3.2.2 Round vs. Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.3.3 Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.4 Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.5 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.6 Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.6.1 Spacing and Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.6.2 New Construction vs. Retrofit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.7 Helical Bearing Capacity Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.7.1 Individual Bearing Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.7.1.1 Critical Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.7.2 Cylindrical Shear Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.7.3 Torque Correlation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.8 Helical Tiebacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.8.1 Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.9 Helical Soil Nails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.9.1 Construction Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.9.2 Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.9.2.1 Temporary and Permanent Wall Facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.9.2.2 Limit States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.10 Load Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.11 Design Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.11.1 Helical Piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.11.2 Helical Tiebacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Technical Manual p ii © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

2.12 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.12.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.12.1.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.12.1.2 Crowd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.12.1.3 Penetration Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.12.2 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.12.2.1 Drive Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.12.2.2 Installation Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.12.2.3 Monitoring Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.12.3 Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.12.3.1 New Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.12.3.2 Retrofit Helical Piers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.12.3.3 Helical Tiebacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Appendix 2A – Helical Product Ratings, Properties and Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Appendix 2B – Lift Assembly Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Appendix 2C – HelixPro® Helical Foundation Design Software for Professionals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Appendix 2D – Pile Bucking Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Appendix 2E – Corrosion Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Appendix 2F – Model Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Helical Pile Foundations – Compression Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Helical Anchor Foundations – Tension Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Helical Soil Nails – Earth Retention Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Appendix 2G – Guidelines and Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Geotechnical Investigation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Preliminary Design Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Preliminary Design Request Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Load Test Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Appendix 2H – Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

ICC-ES Evaluation Report ESR-3074 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Evaluation Report CCMC 13556-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Technical Manual p iii © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Chapter 3 – Hydraulically-Driven Push Piers
3.1 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
3.2 Summary Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
3.2.1 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
3.3 Push Pier System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
3.3.1 Bracket Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
3.3.1.1 Eccentric Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
3.3.1.2 External Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
3.3.2 Starter Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
3.3.2.1 Friction Reduction Collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
3.3.3 Pier Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
3.3.3.1 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
3.4 Foundation and Slab Push Pier Bracket Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
3.5 Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
3.6 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
3.7 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
3.8 Push Pier Installation Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
3.8.1 Drive and Lift Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
3.8.2 Hydraulic Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
3.8.2.1 FSI Gasoline Powered Hydraulic Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
3.8.2.2 FSI Electric Powered Hydraulic Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
3.8.3 Remote Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
3.8.4 Hoses and Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
3.8.5 Drive Stands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
3.8.6 Lift Cylinder Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
3.9 Push Pier Capacity and Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
3.9.1 Factor of Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
3.9.2 Bolting the Under-Footing Bracket to the Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
3.10 Under-Footing Push Pier Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
3.11 PP288 Flush-Mount Push Pier Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
3.12 PP288 Slab Push Pier Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
3.13 Push Pier Load Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Appendix 3A – Bracket Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Appendix 3B – Drive Stand Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Appendix 3C – Lift Assembly Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Appendix 3D – Model Specification – Hydraulically-Driven Push Pier Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Technical Manual p iv © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Chapter 4 – Miscellaneous Structural Support Products
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.2 Geo-Lock® Wall Anchor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.2.1 Summary Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.2.1.1 Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.2.2 Design Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.2.3 Why It Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
4.2.4 Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
4.2.4.1 Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
4.2.4.2 Torque Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
4.2.4.3 Depth and Location of Earth Anchor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
4.2.5 Installation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
4.2.5.1 Solutions for Extreme Wall Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
4.2.5.2 Hide-A-Way® Wall Anchor Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
4.3 PowerBrace™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
4.4 CarbonArmor® Wall Reinforcing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
4.4.1.1 Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4.4.2.1 ArmorLock™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
4.4.2.2 Special Installation Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
4.5 SmartJack® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
4.5.1.1 Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Appendix 4A – Geo-Lock® Wall Anchor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Appendix 4B – PowerBrace™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Technical Specifications and Spacing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Appendix 4C – CarbonArmor® Wall Reinforcing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Technical Specifications and Spacing Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Appendix 4D – SmartJack® Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Model 288 Technical Specifications and Design Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Model 350 Technical Specifications and Design Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Technical Manual pv © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Chapter 5 – PolyLEVEL® Polyurethane Foam and Resin
5.1 Summary Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
5.2 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
5.3 Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
5.4 Product Use Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
5.5 Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
5.6 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
5.7 Installation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Appendix 5A – Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

PolyLEVEL® 100-SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
PolyLEVEL® 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
PolyLEVEL® 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
PolyLEVEL® 400H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
PolyLEVEL® Trench-Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Appendix 5B – Model Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Polyurethane Void Filling or Soil Stabilization Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Polyurethane Installation for Concrete Pavement/Slab Stabilization Applications . . . . . . . . . 359
Supplemental information for products and systems not published in this manual can be found
on the Foundation Supportworks®, Inc. commercial website, www.OnStableGround.com.
Technical Manual p vi © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 – About Foundation quality products to the marketplace, but to also
provide a network of installing contractors with
Supportworks®, Inc. the proper tools and training to assist them in
Foundation Supportworks, Inc. (FSI) is a building more successful businesses. Greg and
leading manufacturer of helical pile systems, Larry each already owned successful basement
hydraulically-driven push pier systems, wall waterproofing and foundation repair companies.
anchoring and wall bracing systems, and Greg Thrasher started his business in 1975
supplemental crawl space support systems. in Earling, Iowa and then moved to Omaha,
Within the line of wall bracing products, FSI has Nebraska in 1980. Thrasher Basement Systems,
Inc. has since grown to become one of the largest
residential foundation stabilization companies
in the United States. With continued company
growth, Foundation Supportworks® by Thrasher
was formed as the commercial division of the
business. Larry Janesky started his career as a
self-employed carpenter and builder in 1982. In
1987, Larry founded Basement Systems, Inc.
in Seymour, Connecticut. Basement Systems,
Inc. is now the largest network of waterproofing
Omaha, NE
the exclusive rights to market and distribute

PowerBrace™ Foundation Wall Bracing Systems
and CarbonArmor® and ArmorLock™ carbon
fiber wall reinforcement. Outside of the more
traditional offerings of foundation support and
repair products, FSI formulates and distributes the
PolyLEVEL® product line of polyurethane foams
and resins. Each of the products or systems listed
above are included in chapters of this Second Seymour, CT
Edition FSI Technical Manual. FSI was founded
on the principles of integrity, quality and service and crawlspace repair contractors in the world.
and it is our mission to provide the industry In addition to being a successful businessman,
with innovative solutions that are appropriately Larry holds 29 patents and is the author of
designed and tested, expertly installed, and six books. Please visit the FSI website at
dependable to perform as promised. www.OnStableGround.com for more biographical
information about the company founders.
FSI began in April 2008 with the partnership
of Greg Thrasher and Larry Janesky, both FSI’s commitment to its network of installing
feeling there was a need for a manufacturer in contractors and, ultimately, the end consumer,
the foundation support and foundation repair is apparent by employing a team of customer
industry to not only bring fully-engineered, service and dealer support staff that is
Chapter 1 p1 © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Introduction All Rights Reserved
unparalleled in the industry. Our staff of full-time 1.2 – FSI Engineering Roles
professionals include:
Foundation Supportworks has both
• Geotechnical and Structural Engineers,
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 1
geotechnical and structural engineers on

• Corporate Trainers,
staff for product design, quality assurance of
• Dealer Support (Product Line Managers and
products and support to our network of FSI
Product Installation Experts),
installing contractors. Our in-house engineers
• Sales Development Specialists,
are available to assist with preliminary design
• Video Production Specialists,
applications and to provide technical support
• Graphic Designers,
to engineers, architects, building departments
• 3D Graphics and 3D Animation Experts,
and general contractors local to the projects.
• Computer Programmers, and
Our engineers are experts in the industry and
• a team of Website Developers.
routinely present technical information at
As of the printing date of this manual, there are industry trade conferences, engineering and
over 100 independent contractors throughout architectural meetings and conferences, as well
the United States and Canada utilizing as to contractors and home inspectors. Please
Foundation Supportworks’ products for their visit the FSI website for biographical information
projects/applications. With installing contractors about our engineers.
from coast to coast, Foundation Supportworks
FSI engineers act on behalf of the product
is focused on training, gathering and sharing the
manufacturer and therefore are unable to
best practices in the industry. Your authorized
serve as the engineer of record by signing and
FSI installing contractor is therefore operating
stamping project-specific drawings and details.
with the resources of literally hundreds of years
Rather, they can provide preliminary designs,
of combined experience.
consultation, and the technical information
With major dealer support facilities in Omaha, and support necessary for the local design
Nebraska and Seymour, Connecticut, professional to feel comfortable specifying
Foundation Supportworks operates with a and utilizing FSI products for their projects
long-term vision. The coupled effect of the and applications. Preliminary design services
expertise of the Foundation Supportworks staff and consultation for prospective piering and
and our installing contractor network’s years anchoring projects are free of charge to design
of combined experience and leadership in the professionals and FSI installing contractors. A
structural stabilization industry translates to description of this service and its process are
quality products, dependable service, expert provided in the Preliminary Design Services
installations and a team you can trust. letter in Appendix 2G.
Our Mission Statement: To simplify the design process for helical

piles and tiebacks, Foundation Supportworks
To champion dealer success through genuine
created HelixPro® Helical Foundation Design
relationships and radical support.
Software for Professionals, a web-based helical
It is our core belief that if we provide a level of foundation design tool available free of charge
support that is unheard of and unexpected in this to design professionals. For more information on
industry, our dealers will be equipped and able HelixPro, refer to Appendix 2C.
to fully focus on their main objective – serving
the customers and design professionals in their
markets with unparalleled quality and expertise.

1.3 Continuing Education FSI offers both distant and in-person learning
opportunities. We host regularly scheduled
Opportunities monthly webinars on the following topics at
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Foundation Supportworks is a leading provider 11:30 am and 1:30 pm Central Time:
of continuing education for design professionals 1st Wednesday of each month
in North America on the topics of helical An Introduction to Helical Foundation Systems
foundation systems, push pier systems, and
polyurethane injection. We know there are many 2nd Wednesday of each month
individuals and companies who claim to offer An Introduction to Polyurethane Injection
great learning opportunities, but we find that it is 3rd Wednesday of each month
the collaboration of both subject matter experts An Introduction to Push Pier Systems
and curriculum design experts that yields the
best results in terms of attendees meeting For more in-depth knowledge about product
learning objectives. design, installation and applications for the
systems FSI provides, we offer half day in-
person presentations several times each year
in various locations throughout North America.
We also speak regularly for professional
organizations throughout the nation during
their monthly, quarterly or annual meetings.
To see if there is an upcoming presentation
near you, please visit our commercial website
at www.OnStableGround.com and click on the
“Events” button.
To register for any continuing education

opportunity, please contact your local FSI
installing contractor or send us an email at
training@foundationsupportworks.com.
Engineering Seminars All learning opportunities provided by Foundation
Supportworks are free of charge, and best of
Our curriculum and education methods have all, can be submitted as hours to fulfill your
been evaluated by national institutions such CEU/PDH requirements.
as the American Council of Engineering
Companies’ (ACEC) Registered Continuing
Education Program (RCEP) and the American
Institute of Architects (AIA), and FSI has been
named an approved provider of continuing
education through both of these organizations.
Our curriculum has also been evaluated and
approved directly by the Florida State Board of
Engineers, as Florida was the one state where
RCEP approval was not recognized.

CHAPTER 2 HELICAL FOUNDATION SYSTEMS
2.1 – History
The use of helical piles and anchors in
CHAPTER 2
HELICAL FOUNDATION SYSTEMS
construction dates back nearly 200 years. In the
1830s, the earliest versions of today’s helical
piles were used in England for moorings and
for the foundations of lighthouse structures.
Early patent of screw (helical) piles
product and the installation equipment. In

2007, the International Code Council Evaluation
Lighthouse supported by Service (ICC-ES) approved AC358, Acceptance
helical pile foundations
Criteria for Helical Pile Systems and Devices.
Usage spread throughout the world through the AC358 provides helical pile manufacturers
later 19th century for similar type applications. with standardized methods for the design and
Developments and improvements in other deep testing of helical piles, resulting in product
foundation alternatives then resulted in a general capacity ratings that are generally considered
decrease in the use of helical piles in the first conservative, yet appropriate. Interested parties
half of the 20th century. Following World War may purchase a copy of AC358 from the ICC-ES
II, advancements in hydraulic motors and the website: www.icc-es.org. Helical piles have also
explosive expansion of the national utility grid been included of the International Building Code
caused a resurgence in the use of helical piles, since the 2009 edition.
primarily in tension applications for guying towers
and poles. Today, helical piles are used in both
tension and compression load applications and
are gaining worldwide acceptance throughout
the construction industry and engineering
community due to the versatility of both the

Helical Foundation Systems All Rights Reserved
2.2 – Summary Description The terms helical piles, screw piles, helical piers,
helical anchors, helix piers, and helix anchors
Helical piles are a factory-manufactured are often used interchangeably by specifiers.
steel foundation designed to resist axial However, the term “pier” more often refers to a
compression, axial tension, and/or lateral loads helical pile loaded in axial compression, while
from residential and commercial structures. The
CHAPTER 2
the term “anchor” more often refers to a helical

system consists of a central shaft, one or more pile loaded in axial tension. The term “pile”
helix-shaped bearing plates, and a bracket that traditionally describes a deep foundation that
allows attachment to structures. The helix plates can resist both tension and compression loads.
are commonly referred to as blades or flights
and are welded to the lead section. Extension
shafts, with or without additional helix plates,
are used to extend the pile to competent load
bearing soil and to achieve design depth and
Helical tieback installation

with hand-held equipment
Helical tiebacks and helical soil nails are

types of helical anchors differentiated by their
specific design methodology and/or installation
New construction helical pile installation
orientation. Helical tiebacks are designed similarly
but differ from vertically-installed helical piles in
capacity. Brackets are used at the tops of the
that they are typically installed in a horizontal to
piles for attachment to structures, either for new
45-degree downward from horizontal orientation
construction or retrofit applications. Helical piles
to laterally support the tops of earth retaining
are advanced (screwed) into the ground with the
structures; e.g., retaining walls, foundation walls,
application of torque.
sheet pile walls, soldier pile walls with wood
lagging, etc. Helix plates are typically limited to
the lead section or the lead and first extension
of the tieback. Multi-helix leads for piles and
tiebacks generally consist of increasing plate
sizes from the tip. Helical soil nails are designed
with same-sized helix plates, typically 6 or 8
inches in diameter, spaced evenly along the
entire length of the nail, including the lead and
extensions. Soil nails are typically installed in a
closely-spaced grid pattern to reinforce the soil
and provide a stable earth mass. Helical tiebacks
and helical soil nails are presented in their own
Sheet pile wall stabilization
with helical tiebacks sections later in this chapter.

2.3 – Helical Foundation between a well-formed helix and poorly-formed
helix are visually obvious and are shown in
System Components Figure 2.3.1.a.
A true helix shape can be described as a three-

2.3.1 – Helix Plates
dimensional curve that travels along and sweeps
CHAPTER 2
The initial installation of a helical pile is performed around an axis where any radial line remains
by applying downward force (crowd) and rotating perpendicular to that axis.
the pile into the earth via the helix plates. Once
the helix plates penetrate to a depth of about
two to three feet, the piles generally require less
crowd and installation is accomplished mostly
by the downward force generated from the helix
plates, similar to the effect of turning a screw
into a block of wood. Therefore, the helix plate
performs a vital role in providing the downward
force or thrust needed to advance the pile to
the bearing depth. The helix plate geometry Figure 2.3.1.b
Helix Plate Geometry
A helix plate is further defined by geometric

parameters including diameter, thickness, pitch,
helix angle and edge geometry (Figure 2.3.1.b).
Helix plate diameters can vary from 6 to 16
inches for most commonly used shaft sizes. The
majority of helix plates have thicknesses of either
3/8 or ½ inch, however, thicker plates are used for
larger diameter piles. The pitch is the distance
or separation between the leading and trailing
edges and controls the depth of installation per
revolution of the helix plate. The helix angle is
the blade angle formed relative to the shaft and
will vary within the blade for any given radius.
The edge geometry refers both to the perimeter
geometry of the helix and the shape of the
leading and trailing edges. Most helix flights are
manufactured with a perimeter geometry that is
generally circular. The leading edge can have
Correct Incorrect
varying cuts and shapes including blunt (flat),
Figure 2.3.1.a sharpened, standard cut, V-style cut, etc. to
provide options for changing soil conditions. The
further affects the rate of penetration, soil
trailing edge is generally a standard cut, blunt or
disturbance and torque to capacity correlation.
sharpened, and has no effect on installation in
The consequences of a poorly-formed helix are
varying soils.
twofold; (1) the helix plate severely disturbs the
soil with an augering effect which (2) directly A helix plate is formed by cold pressing the
results in more movement upon loading than a steel plate with matching machined dies. Both
pile with well-formed helices. The differences the shape of the die and the amount of applied

force during the press operations are important Foundation Supportworks’ helical piles feature
to ensure parallel leading and trailing edges and plates manufactured with a helix shape conforming
the required pitch tolerances. The amount of die to the geometry criteria of ICC-ES AC358.
press; i.e., the pressed shape and deflection, must Conversely, plates that are not a helix shape are
also be adjusted for changing plate thicknesses, often formed to a “duckbill” appearance. These
CHAPTER 2
steel grades and anticipated spring back. plates create a great deal of soil disturbance, do
not conform to the helix geometry requirements
ICC-ES AC358 establishes design and testing
of ICC-ES AC358, and their torque to capacity
criteria for helical piles evaluated in accordance
relationships are not well documented.
with the International Building Code. AC358
provides the following criteria for helix plates in The helix plate diameter, thickness and cut are
order to be considered as a “conforming system”. selected based upon the soil and load conditions
for the project. FSI currently offers:
• True helix shaped plates that are normal with
the shaft such that the leading and trailing • Helix plate diameters ranging from 6 inches to
edges are within ¼ inch of parallel. 16 inches
• Helix plate diameters may be between 8 and • Helix plate thicknesses of 5/16 inch, 3/8 inch, and
14 inches with thicknesses between 3/8 inch ½ inch
and ½ inch.
• Plate steel yield strengths of at least 50 ksi
• Helix plates and shafts are smooth and absent (Grade 50).
of irregularities that extend more than 1/16
inch from the surface excluding connection
hardware and fittings.
• Helix spacing along the shaft shall be between

2.4 to 3.6 times the helix diameter.
• The helix pitch is 3 inches ± ¼ inch.
• All helix plates have the same pitch.

Figure 2.3.1.c
• Helical plates are arranged such that they Standard H-style and V-style plates
theoretically track the same path as the

• Standard H-style cut and V-style cut plates
leading helix.
(Figure 2.3.1.c). V-style plates are special
• For shafts with multiple helices, the smallest order to assist in penetrating dense or rocky
diameter helix shall be mounted to the leading soils. The leading edges of all helix plates are
end of the shaft with progressively larger sharpened (cut) to a 45-degree angle.
diameter helices above.
• Helical foundation shaft advancement equals

or exceeds 85% of helix pitch revolution at
time of final torque measurement.
• Helix plates have generally circular edge

geometry.
Non-conforming systems may also seek an

ICC-ES product evaluation, but must undergo
additional product testing.

2.3.2 Central Shaft connections. For these “equivalent” products,
there can be dramatic differences in material
The central shaft of a helical pile typically properties, tolerances, spacing of bolt holes,
consists of either solid square bar or hollow oversize of bolt holes, general fit-up, weld
round sections of tube or pipe. The shaft size quality, etc.
is selected to (1) resist the torsional forces
CHAPTER 2
applied during installation and (2) transfer Some of the more common coupler details
the axial loads applied by the structure down for round shaft include external welded,
to the helix plates and surrounding soils. The external detached, internal detached, and
central shaft of an installed helical pile is forged and upset. External couplers utilize
comprised of a lead section and extensions. tube or pipe sections with an internal diameter
The lead section includes a 45-degree bevel slightly larger than the outside diameter of the
cut tip and one or more helix plates welded central shaft material (Figures 2.3.2.1.a1 and
along its length. The 45-degree bevel cut tip 2.3.2.1.a2). These couplers can be sized to
further assists with pile advancement and provide tight connections that reduce angular
penetration through the soil. Lead sections are deformation and variances from straightness.
generally fabricated in 5, 7 and 10-foot lengths. Such displacements at the couplers introduce
Extensions, which may include additional helix eccentricities to the system which can
plates to provide increased pile capacity in significantly reduce the allowable compressive
weaker soil conditions, are used to advance capacity of the pile, especially considering
the pile to the design depth, length, and/or the slenderness of the more widely used shaft
until the desired torque is achieved. Extensions material (typically 3.5-inch outside diameter
are generally fabricated in 3, 5, 7 and 10-foot and smaller).
lengths. Custom lead and extension lengths
up to about 20 feet may also be considered
to reduce or eliminate coupled connections,
thereby minimizing overall product costs and
improving installation efficiencies. Generally,
a large track excavator would be required to
provide the reach necessary to install these
longer sections.
Figure 2.3.2.1.a1
FSI external welded coupler
2.3.2.1 Coupler Detail
The coupler detail is yet another extremely

important feature when considering helical piles
and when selecting or specifying a product
manufacturer. Manufacturers may advertise
that they carry the same or equivalent helical
shaft. However, shaft and coupler details are
not consistent between manufacturers and
Figure 2.3.2.1.a2
these differences may not be readily apparent FSI external detached coupler
by simply reviewing marketing brochures and
product capacity tables. Some manufacturers Internal detached couplers are made from solid
rate their products based upon the capacities round stock or tube or pipe material but with an
of the gross section of the shaft, thereby outside diameter smaller than the inside diameter
ignoring any limitations caused by the coupled of the central shaft material (Figure 2.3.2.1.b).

Internal coupler diameters may be significantly With this method of manufacturing, it is difficult to
undersized to prevent interferences with internal create tight connections to strict tolerances. It is
weld beads of the central shaft or due to the not uncommon to have 1/8 inch or more difference
variations that are typical in wall thicknesses between the outside diameter of the shaft and the
and inside diameters of pipe sections. Larger inside diameter of the upset coupler of the round
CHAPTER 2
gaps between the inside diameter of the shaft shaft (Figure 2.3.2.1.d).
and the outside diameter of the coupler can
result in a connection with more potential for
angular displacements.
B
Figure 2.3.2.1.d Coupler tolerances; (A) Competitor

upset coupler, (B) FSI external welded coupler
Again, the greater the freedom allowed in the

connection, the greater the potential variance
from straightness and the higher the potential
for bending or buckling of the pile under high
compressive loads (Figure 2.3.2.1.e). The risk of
pile buckling further increases if the pile extends
through soil strata consisting of very soft clay
Figure 2.3.2.1.b Internal detached
coupler detail of FSI HP450 or very loose sand, or with unsupported pile
lengths through water, through fluid soils or
Forged and upset couplers are formed by heating above the ground surface.
one end of the shaft, placing this end in a form
and then enlarging the end with a hammer-like
tool or press (Figure 2.3.2.1.c).
Figure 2.3.2.1.e Competitor upset

coupler variance from straightness
FSI round shaft helical piles are manufactured

Figure 2.3.2.1.c Upset coupler with with external welded, external detached or
oversized closely-spaced bolt holes
internal detached couplers. Piles with shaft
Chapter 2 p 10 © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

outside diameters (O.D.) of 2.875 inches and
smaller have external welded couplers while
3.5-inch O.D. and 4.5-inch O.D. shafts have
external detached and internal detached couplers,
respectively. FSI offers larger diameter helical piles
CHAPTER 2
by special order with shaft sizes up to 12 inches.
These larger diameter piles; e.g., 6.625-inch, 7-inch,
10-inch and 12-inch O.D., may be designed
with external detached couplers, internal
detached couplers or connections with complete
joint penetration welds (Figure 2.3.2.1.f).
Figure 2.3.2.1.g Coupler detail showing

shaft contact within coupler
Figure 2.3.2.1.h1
Figure 2.3.2.1.f FSI HP700 with complete FSI external welded coupler
joint penetration welds between sections
All of these systems are designed and manufactured

to strict tolerances to allow the pile shafts to be
in direct contact when coupled, similar to Figure
2.3.2.1.g. Why is this important? Except for product
with joint penetration welds at the couplings, the
load path for piles under compression is then
directly through the shafts of the extensions and
lead section without having to pass through welds
and bolts at each connection. The annular space
between the pile shaft and coupler is also kept as
tight as practical to maintain pile rigidity while also
providing connections that are easily joined in the
field (Figures 2.3.2.1.h1 and 2.3.2.1.h2).
Figure 2.3.2.1.h2
FSI external detached coupler

The most common coupler detail for solid
square shaft utilizes a forged and upset
end (Figures 2.3.2.1.i1 and 2.3.2.1.i2). Cast
detached couplers and weldments have also
been used in lieu of the upsetting process.
The upset end of square shaft is created in a
CHAPTER 2
similar manner as for the round shaft, except

for forming a square socket connection.
Figure 2.3.2.1.j clearly shows a comparison of
coupling rigidity between an FSI external welder
Figure 2.3.2.1.i1 Schematic of square
coupler for round shaft and a typical upset coupler shaft forged and upset coupler
for square shaft. A similar draping effect is typical
for round shaft helical piles with upset couplers.
FSI recommends that the design engineer

request product drawings and review coupling
details, tolerances and general fit-up prior to
product selection. As you have read in the
preceding paragraphs, seemingly equivalent
products may actually turn out to have very
different connection details, material properties
and capacities. Figure 2.3.2.1.i2
Square shaft forged and upset coupler
Round Shaft
Square Shaft
Figure 2.3.2.1.j
Coupler Rigidity Comparison: FSI round shaft external welded coupler vs. typical upset coupler for square shaft

2.3.2.2 Round vs. Square applications in soil profiles that offer sufficient
lateral support for these loads; e.g., Standard
Solid square shaft helical piles have been used
Penetration Test (SPT) blow count values ≥
successfully for decades in tension applications;
10 blows/foot (ASTM D1586).
i.e., as anchors, tiebacks and soil nails, and
have proven to be a suitable and reliable support • As stated in the Coupler Detail section, The
CHAPTER 2
alternative for such projects. Not surprisingly, FSI round shaft helical piles are designed so
some manufacturers then adapted the use of the pile shafts are in direct contact within the
square shaft helical products to be installed coupling connections (Figure 2.3.2.1.g). The
vertically for the support of compression loads. load path for round shaft piles in compression
There is much discussion amongst design is then directly through the shafts without
professionals and even professionals within having to pass through the welds or bolts
the helical pile industry about appropriate at each coupling. Shaft to shaft contact
applications for square and round shaft products. is more difficult to achieve within forged,
With just a little understanding of the design and upset couplers. For square shaft piles, both
manufacturing of these two systems, it quickly compression and tension loads are then
becomes apparent for what applications the transferred through the one or two coupling
products are better suited. bolts in double shear.
Square shaft helical piles have traditionally • The area of steel for a round shaft is located
been used in tension applications whereas outward from the centroid, thereby providing
hollow round shaft piles have been used in a greater structural section modulus and a
both tension and compression. In general, higher moment of inertia. In layman’s terms,
FSI believes that hollow round shafts are a round shaft pile is more resistant to bending
better suited for compression whereas solid (Figure 2.3.2.2.a). This is an important
square shaft may provide some advantages consideration for piles with unsupported
in certain tension applications. That said, lengths, piles penetrating loose or soft soils,
project parameters and site-specific soil or for piles that are eccentrically loaded such
conditions vary, which may push the merits as in a retrofit application.
and advantages of one system over the other,
and the design professional should select the
product best suited for the project. Please
contact the FSI Engineering Department with
any questions regarding product selection.
Hollow round shaft helical piles are particularly

suited to compression loading applications and
offer the following advantages over comparably-
sized square shaft piles.
• Round shaft helical piles, excluding those

with upset couplers, generally have more rigid
coupling connections. Square shaft helical Figure 2.3.2.2.a Section comparison between 2.875”
diameter, 0.276” wall round shaft and 1.5” square shaft
piles typically have a socket and pin coupling
which increases variances from straightness,
• Round shaft typically has a higher installation
introduces eccentricity to the system, and
torque rating than a comparably-sized square
increases buckling potential. Refer back to
shaft. For certain product comparisons, this
Figure 2.3.2.1.j. Square shaft piles may be
results in higher pile capacities.
considered for some light compression load

• Round shaft offers a higher lateral resistance 2.3.3 Brackets
with more shaft area exposed to the
surrounding soil. If necessary, hollow round A load transfer device (bracket) is used as a
shafts can also be grout-filled to further mechanism to transfer the structural load to the
improve the pile stiffness. pile shaft. In new construction applications,
a bracket; i.e., cap plate or T-cap, is welded or
CHAPTER 2
Solid square shaft helical piles do offer some bolted to the top of the pile and then cast into
advantages over their round shaft counterparts. the structural concrete, into the grade beam or
• Square shaft is a more compact section than pile cap. New construction brackets often consist
comparably-sized round shafts and will therefore of round shaft sleeve material with a flat plate
achieve greater soil penetration for a given welded to the top (Figures 2.3.3.a1 and 2.3.3.a2).
amount of torque. This benefit is particularly Steel reinforcing bars may also be welded to the
important in tieback applications where the piles sleeve or plate to further engage the concrete.
must be installed to certain embedment criteria In compression load applications, the new
as well as torque/capacity criteria. construction bracket could theoretically be set
on top of the pile without welding or bolting.
• Square shaft, again due to its more compact
shape, may penetrate through or into dense
soils or soft or weathered bedrock layers
more easily.
• Square shaft has less surface area exposed to

corrosion and corrosion can only occur from the
outside surface inward. Conversely, corrosion
is possible for round shaft on both the outside
and inside surfaces, although actually limited
on the inside surfaces of closed pipe sections
due to lack of oxygen. See Appendix 2E for
additional information on corrosion.
• The degree of shaft twist may be considered

as another rough indication of applied torque
since permanent deformation begins within
a known narrow range for each product.
Figure 2.3.3.a1 Rendering of new construction
Contractors know they have past this threshold helical piles cast into a structural grade beam
when the shaft twist is not recovered when
the installation torque is released. Although
these observations can be used as a guide
or point of reference during installation,
FSI does not recommend that shaft twist
be used solely as a measure or estimate of
applied torque.
• Square shaft can withstand more deformation/

twist before shaft failure. Square shaft
is therefore much more forgiving during
installation, allowing less experienced
installers to decrease the applied torque
before shaft damage may occur. Figure 2.3.3.a2 Schematic of new construction bracket

However, FSI still recommends that a positive Retrofit brackets are used for underpinning
connection be made so the bracket is not lifted existing structures. These brackets are often
or floated off the top of the pile during concrete referred to as side-load or “L” brackets and are
placement operations. Welding or bolting of the typically designed to support the foundation
bracket to the helical pile is required to resist from below (Figures 2.3.3.b1 and 2.3.3.b2). The
CHAPTER 2
tension loads. horizontal leg of the “L” is positioned below the
footing or foundation wall while the vertical leg
is positioned against the vertical face of the
footing or foundation wall. Footings that extend
beyond the face of the foundation wall are
typically notched-out at the bracket locations
to create a smooth, flat surface and so the
bracket is positioned as far as practical below
the wall. Helical piers with retrofit brackets are
often used to re-support existing structures that
have undergone settlement. These same retrofit
systems can be used to support additional
loads transferred to an existing structure due
to a building renovation or construction of an
Figure 2.3.3.b1
Rendering of retrofit helical piers adjacent addition.
Figure 2.3.3.c
Rendering of helical tieback installation
Wall stabilization, earth retention, or

embankment stabilization projects often
utilize helical tiebacks or helical soil nails as
system components (Figure 2.3.3.c). Helical
tiebacks and helical soil nails may consist
of either hollow round shaft or solid square
shaft, although square is more common due
to its socket-and-pin style coupling (quick
connection) and the ability to penetrate further
into the soil with a similar amount of installation
torque than a comparably-sized round shaft.
The end of the shaft is typically fitted with an
Figure 2.3.3.b2
Retrofit bracket detail adaptor to transition the shaft to threaded rod.

Plate brackets can be cast into the concrete of Specialty brackets may be required for certain
a poured concrete wall or mounted to the face projects. Some of the more common specialty
of an existing concrete wall, sheet pile wall, or brackets are often modified in their dimensions,
soldier beam and lagging wall. Waler beams material properties, material thicknesses,
may also be considered to more uniformly and/or connection details from project to
CHAPTER 2
spread the tieback or soil nail load to the wall project due to variations in the design loading
(Figure 2.3.3.d). and/or construction. Specialty brackets are
available for deck supports, boardwalk projects
(Figures 2.3.3.e1 and 2.3.3.e2), elevated
structures in high tide or hurricane-prone areas,
pipe buoyancy control, guy wires, tie downs,
etc. Contact FSI with any questions regarding
bracket details or availability.
Figure 2.3.3.d Schematic of helical

tieback and pre-tension assembly
Foundation Supportworks recommends that

all helical anchors and tiebacks (excluding
soil nails) be pre-tensioned or proof-tested
following installation. Pre-tensioning to 1.0 to
1.33 times the design working load minimizes
deflection of the tiebacks and structure as
the tiebacks are put into service and the soil
strength around the helix plates is mobilized. Figure 2.3.3.e1 Boardwalk supported on
2.375” O.D. vertical and battered helical piles
Tiebacks installed to support existing walls
are typically locked off at 0.75 to 1.1 times
the design working load after proof-testing.
Helical anchors and tiebacks to be cast
into new concrete retaining walls may be
completely unloaded, or locked off with a
modest seating load, after proof-testing.
Tiebacks can be “pull tested” or load tested
to typically two (2) times the design working
load or more to identify the ultimate system
capacity, better assess soil conditions and
soil/anchor interaction, and validate design
assumptions and parameters. Tiebacks that
undergo load testing to greater than 1.5 Figure 2.3.3.e2 Custom saddle bracket
connected with clevis to battered helical pile
times the design working load, or failure, are
generally considered sacrificial and should
not be used as production tiebacks.

2.4 Benefits
The use of helical piles in construction continues
to increase due to product and equipment
versatility and the various benefits that the
systems offer. Some of the benefits/advantages
CHAPTER 2
of helical piles include:
• High capacity deep foundation alternative –

Allowable torque-rated capacities on the order
of 60 kips may be achieved with helical shaft
sizes up to 3.5 inches in diameter, as noted in Figure 2.4.a1 Skid steer installing helical
ICC-ES AC358 for conforming products. Even piles within limited space at a substation
higher capacities may be achieved with larger

shaft sections.
• Predictable capacity – With adequate

soil information and designer experience,
system capacities may be estimated very
closely to capacities determined from full-
scale load testing.
• Lead sections and extensions can be

configured to achieve design depth and
capacity – The design professional will
choose the helical pile shaft size and helix Figure 2.4.a2 Mini-excavator lowered by
plate configuration appropriate for the soil crane into excavation to install helical tiebacks
conditions. Additional helix plates may be

considered on extensions when bearing in
weaker soils. Special “V-style” plates are
available to assist in penetrating dense soils.
• Well-established torque to capacity

relationship – Empirical torque factors
have been established through years of
product testing. Default capacity to torque
ratios are listed in ICC-ES AC358 for
conforming products.
• All-weather installation – Helical piles can Figure 2.4.a3 Helical piles installed with hand-held
be installed through inclement weather and equipment to support new elevator within existing school
freezing temperatures.
• Low mobilization costs – Helical piles have
• Installed in areas of limited or tight access in part become a popular deep foundation
– Helical piles can be installed with hand- option because of the ability to achieve
held equipment, mini-excavators, skid steers, moderate to high capacities, yet be installed
backhoes and larger track equipment (Figures with smaller equipment. Mobilization costs are
2.4.a1, 2.4.a2 and 2.4.a3). The equipment and then much lower than other deep foundation
drive heads can be sized according to the alternatives, which in turn makes helical piles
project design loads as well as site access. an economical solution for many projects.

• Vibration-free installation – Rotary installation 2.5 Limitations
of helical piles does not produce ground
vibrations, unlike traditional driven piles or Helical piles will not be the best-suited, most
rammed aggregate soil improvement options. economical deep foundation option for every
project or soil profile. In the same way, other
• Install quickly without generating spoils –
deep foundation alternatives such as driven
CHAPTER 2
Helical piles do not auger soils to the surface.

piles, auger-cast piles, drilled shafts, and drilled
Therefore, there are no hauling or disposal
and grouted micropiles, have their own benefits
costs for spoils similar to auger-cast piles or
and limitations and may be more or less suited
drilled shafts. For contaminated sites, disposal
for certain project conditions.
and/or treatment of disturbed material can be
extremely costly or make the project cost- • Helical piles are a steel foundation that will
prohibitive. Helical piles simply pass through be exposed to the atmosphere or buried
contaminated soils and do not bring them to within the earth. AC358 defines corrosive soil
the surface. environments by: (1) soil resistivity less than
1,000 ohm-cm; (2) soil pH less than 5.5; (3)
• Support of temporary structures – Helical
soils with high organic content; (4) soil sulfate
piles can be removed from the ground by
concentrations greater than 1,000 ppm; (5)
reversing the installation process.
soils located in landfills, or (6) soil containing
• Load tests can be conducted immediately mine waste. In such environments, the steel
following installation – Installed steel piles can be protected with a hot-dip galvanized
do not require a curing period like drilled zinc coating or with other measures such as
shafts or auger-cast piles. It is common to sacrificial anodes. A site-specific evaluation
install a helical test pile and then test it later of the soil can be conducted in order to
that day or the very next day. However, know determine an appropriate level of protection.
that especially on clay sites or clayey sand Refer to Appendix 2E for additional information
sites, the soils will “heal” or “set up” around about corrosion.
the shaft and helix plates over time. In general,
• AC358 is currently limited to use of helical
within practical hold periods allowed by
foundation systems and devices supporting
construction schedules, the longer the pile sits
structures in IBC Seismic Design Categories A,
before testing, the higher the pile capacity for
B, or C, or UBC Seismic Zones 0, 1, or 2. Even
a given amount of deflection.
so, helical piles have been used successfully
• Foundation concrete can be poured across North America for decades and in
immediately following installation – Installed regions considered seismically active.
steel piles do not require a curing period
• Helical piles will not easily penetrate
like drilled shafts or auger-cast piles. On
construction debris, wood, dense gravelly
schedule-sensitive projects, the contractor
soils, or soils containing large, hard fractions
may place reinforcing steel and pour
such as cobbles and boulders. These
foundation concrete directly behind the helical
materials could hinder installation or cause
pile installation.
damage to the helical pile shaft or helix plates.
• Clean installation – Installation of helical When such conditions exist, a thicker or larger
piles, helical tie-backs and helical soil-nails pile shaft may be considered to resist impact
does not include concrete or grout, thereby loading and torque spikes. Thicker helix plates
minimizing equipment, vehicles and mess on with a V-style cut could more easily penetrate
the construction site. dense soils and, again, resist impact loading.
A solid square bar “stinger” lead section
coupled immediately to round shaft extensions

may also be considered to pass through or • The slenderness of helical piles and their limited
penetrate into dense soil (Figure 2.5.a). Where exposed area to the surrounding soil does not
large obstructions are encountered, the helical allow for generation of high lateral capacities.
piles may have to be offset from plan locations. In competent soils, allowable lateral capacities
The project engineer should first be notified to may range from less than 1 kip to more than
CHAPTER 2
determine if other piles should be relocated or 5 kips for 2.875-inch to 3.5-inch O.D. round
if additional piles will be required. shafts. Higher capacities may be achieved
as the central shaft size of the pile increases.
These capacities are typically achieved with
lateral deflections of one inch or more. Where
higher lateral loads are anticipated, or lower
deflection criteria required, lateral loads could
be resisted by (1) extending the structural
concrete grade beams or pile caps deeper to
take advantage of the passive resistance of
the soil, (2) incorporating battered helical piles
into the foundation design, (3) using structural
elements in the current design, such as floor
slabs with hairpin bars, or (4) incorporating
other structural elements to create fully-braced
conditions. Site-specific lateral load tests can
be completed to document the lateral capacity
to deflection relationship prior to installing
production piles.
Figure 2.5.a Combination pile with HA175 stinger

coupled immediately to 3.5” O.D. shaft
• Helical piles will not typically penetrate hard

rock, defined by auger refusal by the drill
rig or Standard Penetration Test (SPT) blow
count values ≥ 50 blows/6 inches of sampler
penetration (ASTM D1586). Helical piles may
penetrate into hard clay, dense sand and soft or
weathered bedrock; however, larger installation
equipment is generally recommended to
provide “crowd” or axial force on the pile during
advancement into these soils. A square bar
stinger lead section may again be considered
along with the larger installation equipment.

2.6 Design Considerations
2.6.1 Spacing and Depth

Helical piles are designed such that most
CHAPTER 2
of the axial capacity of the pile is generated

through bearing of the helix plates against
the soil. The helix plates are typically spaced
three diameters apart along the pile shaft to
prevent one plate from contributing significant
stress to the bearing soil of the adjacent plate.
Significant stress influence is limited to a “bulb”
of soil within about two helix diameters from the
bearing surface in the axial direction and one
helix diameter from the center of the pile shaft
in the lateral direction. Each helix plate therefore
acts independently in bearing along the pile
shaft (Figure 2.6.1.a). Helical piles designed with
helix plate spacing in accordance with AC358
could therefore use either the Individual Bearing
or Cylindrical Shear Methods of calculating
capacity. Helical piles manufactured with more
closely-spaced helix plates should consider the
Cylindrical Shear Method only. These design
methods are presented in Section 2.7.
Axially loaded helical piles shall have a center

Figure 2.6.1.a Helix plate spacing with
to center spacing at the helix depth of at least bulbs of significant stress influence
three (3) times the diameter of the largest helix
ES AC358). Default torque correlation factors
plate to avoid group efficiency effects (ICC-ES
(capacity to torque ratios) have been verified
AC358). The tops of the piles may be closer at
for conforming systems tested and evaluated in
the ground surface, but the piles be installed at
tension applications at and below these depths.
a batter away from each other in order to meet
Design professionals may still determine that
the spacing criteria at the helix depth.
shallower installations are appropriate for the
The center to center spacing of laterally loaded project given the site-specific soil conditions.
piles shall be at least eight (8) times the diameter
The uppermost helix plate shall be embedded in
of the pile shaft at the ground surface and four
the ground to a depth of at least five (5) diameters
(4) times the diameter of the largest helix plate
to create a deep foundation bearing condition.
measured at the plate depths (ICC-ES AC358).
The upper helix plate shall also be located
If both of these criteria are not met, an analysis
below the depth of seasonal frost penetration
should be completed to determine if there should
and below the “active zone”; i.e., the depth of
be a reduction in the lateral capacity per pile.
soil that undergoes seasonal volume changes
For tension applications, the uppermost helix with changes in moisture content. The depth of
plate shall be installed to a depth at least twelve the uppermost helix plate would therefore be
(12) diameters below the ground surface (ICC- determined from the greatest of these values.

2.6.2 New Construction load and bending. Herein lies the problem. The
pier shaft has quantifiable axial and bending
vs. Retrofit
capacities, and independent of the other, may be
New construction helical piles are generally significant. However, when both of these forces
designed to be concentrically loaded; i.e., are applied concurrently to the same section,
CHAPTER 2
the load is transferred axially down the pile both the allowable compressive capacity and
shaft without inducing bending. These piles allowable bending capacity are reduced. In
are commonly installed longitudinally along a fact, according to AISC design methods, the
grade beam and directly below the wall load, or allowable compressive capacity may be reduced
multiple piles may be incorporated into a rigid by one-half or more for certain pile sections
pile cap to support and balance a column load. when applying a bending moment generated by
New construction piles that are concentrically an eccentricity of only two inches, which is less
loaded will behave purely as columns and will be than what would be considered typical for most
capable of supporting loads up to the maximum retrofit piering systems.
allowable mechanical capacity per AISC design
methods. The maximum allowable mechanical
capacity should consider the bracket capacity,
the shaft and coupling capacity, and the helix
plate capacity. The connection to the structure
must also be designed appropriately with proper
pile head embedment in the concrete, concrete
strength, reinforcing steel, etc. Consideration
of the maximum allowable mechanical capacity
assumes that the soil is also capable of
supporting the load and that the shaft is laterally
supported or braced along its entire length. In
practice, the maximum allowable mechanical
capacity of the pile is seldom achieved as the
pile capacity is typically limited by soil strength.
Helical piles used in retrofit applications utilize

side-load brackets that introduce eccentricity to
the system. The pile shaft is not located directly
under the footing or structural load. Therefore,
retrofit piering systems are eccentrically loaded
and must be designed to resist the bending
forces generated by this loading condition
(Figure 2.6.2.a).
Figure 2.6.2.a
Schematic of retrofit helical pier installation
Most helical piles, especially in retrofit
applications, have outer dimensions of 3.5
Foundation Supportworks addresses the issue
inches or less. These sections are therefore very
of retrofit helical pier eccentricities either of two
sensitive to the bending moments introduced
ways. The first is to increase the stiffness of the
by this eccentricity, thereby reducing the
pier system and then allow more of the resulting
capacity of the pier to carry axial load. The
bending forces to be transferred through the
retrofit pier does not act as a pure column as
pier system itself. This is accomplished by
in a new construction application, but rather
incorporating an external sleeve to resist the
as a beam-column that must resist both axial

bending forces. The external sleeve extends 2.7 Helical Bearing Capacity
through and below the foundation bracket to
essentially create a bracket that is 30 inches
Design Overview
tall. Since the external sleeve and the pier shaft There are three common methods for predicting
are confined by the earth, the bending moment helical pile capacity; the individual bearing
CHAPTER 2
dissipates quickly into the surrounding soils and method, the cylindrical shear method and
generally within the first few feet. The depth the torque correlation method. The first two
at which the bending moment dissipates is a methods are rooted in traditional geotechnical
function of the soil strength and is greater in methodology, slightly modified with empirical
soft soils and less in stiff soils. With the external data. The individual bearing and cylindrical
sleeve present to resist most of the bending shear methods are generally used to calculate
forces, the capacity of the pier section is or estimate the pile capacity during the design
preserved to resist the axial compressive forces. phase. The individual bearing method relies on
The second way to address retrofit helical each helix plate to act independently in bearing
pier eccentricities is to increase rigidity of the with no overlap of significant stress influence
bracket connection to the foundation. With an between adjacent helices. The cylindrical shear
adequately designed rigid connection, much method is applicable for multi-helix piles and
of the eccentricity is transferred back to the assumes that the top or bottom helix plate acts
foundation and less to the pier section. This in bearing (depending upon direction of loading)
connection detail typically consists of several and a cylindrical shear surface develops
strategically-located, deeply embedded adhesive between the top and bottom helix. The helical
anchors. For example, the FSI HP350B helical pile designer must have adequate subsurface
bracket is attached to a foundation with six (6) information or a thorough knowledge of the local
5/8-inch adhesive anchors embedded 7.5 inches. soil conditions in order to select the geotechnical
parameters for use in these design equations.
The torque correlation method is fully empirical

and generally used to confirm or verify capacity
during field installation. The torque correlation
method uses the linear relationship between
installation torque and capacity; i.e., the
capacity is calculated as the product of the
installation torque and an empirical torque
factor established through decades of full scale
load testing. The torque correlation method has
even been used on projects with insufficient
soil information as the sole determination of
pile capacity. However, there are increased
risks with relying on this method alone due to
potential weak soil layers that may be present
below the bottom of pile elevation.
Foundation Supportworks recommends

that subsurface information be determined
to a depth of at least 5 to 10 feet below the
anticipated helical pile depth. Soil borings
should be extended into competent bearing
soils capable of supporting the design working

loads with an adequate factor of safety. a helical pile if torque is monitored during the
Helical test probes may also be considered to helical pile installation. Higher or lower factors of
back-calculate the soil shear strength from safety may also be considered at the discretion
the pile installation torque determined from of the helical pile designer or as dictated by
calibrated equipment. Helical test probes local code requirements. Lower factors of safety
CHAPTER 2
should be extended to depths at least 10 feet may be considered for non-critical structures
below the anticipated depths of the helical or temporary applications. Higher factors of
production piles. Refer to “Geotechnical safety may be considered for critical structures,
Investigation Guidelines for Helical Pile, Helical structures sensitive to movement, or where soil
Anchor and Push Pier Design” in Appendix 2G conditions suggest that creep movement may be
for additional information. a concern. Total stress parameters should be used
for short-term and transient load applications and
The helix plate spacing along the pile shaft can
effective stress parameters should be used for
control whether a helical pile acts in individual
long-term, permanent load applications.
bearing or cylindrical shear. Closely spaced
helix plates will exhibit cylindrical shear behavior Like other deep foundation alternatives,
while well-spaced helix plates will typically fail there are many factors to be considered
the soil in individual bearing. Research has in designing a helical pile foundation.
shown that the transition between cylindrical Foundation Supportworks recommends
shear and individual bearing generally occurs that helical pile design be completed by an
at helix spacings of 2.5D to 3.5D, where D is experienced geotechnical engineer or other
the diameter of the lead helix plate. Within qualified design professional.
that range, either method may be considered
applicable. Foundation Supportworks’ helical
piles, tiebacks and soil nails are generally
manufactured with helix plate spacings of 3.0D.
The individual bearing method essentially

utilizes the traditional bearing capacity equation
introduced by Carl Terzaghi in 1943 to determine
the bearing capacity of shallow spread footings.
This method is also used to determine the end
bearing capacity of deep foundations. The other
two capacity prediction methods (cylindrical
shear and torque correlation) were developed
specifically for helical piles used in tension load
applications. These methods were then later
considered to predict compression capacity as
well. The use of the cylindrical shear method
and torque correlation method for compression
capacity determination may then be considered
conservative since at least one helix plate
(bottom plate) is bearing against undisturbed
soil, while in tension applications, all helix plates
are bearing against partially disturbed soil.
A factor of safety of 2.0 is typically used to

calculate the allowable soil bearing capacity of

2.7.1 Individual Bearing Method For purely granular (frictional) soils with c = 0,
the equation can be rewritten as:
The individual bearing method (Adams and Klym
1972; Hoyt and Clemence 1989) states that the Qu = ∑Ah(q’Nq)
ultimate pile capacity is equal to the sum of the
individual helix plate capacities. Spacing of the
CHAPTER 2
helix plates along the shaft is generally 3 times

the diameter of the leading plate, the uppermost
helix plate is embedded to a depth of at least
5 diameters, and skin friction along the shaft is
generally ignored for shaft sizes less than 6 inches
in outside diameter. Figure 2.7.1.a illustrates the
load transfer mechanism for the individual bearing
method in compression loading.
Helical pile capacity by the individual bearing

method can be calculated from:
Qu = ∑Ah(cNc + q’Nq + 0.5γBNγ)

Where,
Q u = Ultimate Pile Capacity (lb)
c = Cohesion at Helix Depth (lb/ft2) Figure 2.7.1.a

Individual Bearing Method
q’ = Effective Vertical Overburden Bearing capacity factors Nc and Nq are typically
Stress at Helix Depth (lb/ft2) provided in foundation design textbooks and these
γ = Soil Unit Weight (lb/ft3) values may not be appropriate for use in helical
pile design. Research has shown that Nq may not
B = Diameter of Helix Plate (ft)
only be a function of the soil friction angle, but also
A h = Area of Helix Plate (ft2) pile embedment depth, pile type and installation
method (drilled, driven, etc.). Unfortunately, there
N c, N q, N γ = Dimensionless Bearing Capacity
has been little research to investigate how Nq might
Factors
vary for helical piles. Since helical piles are generally
The last part of the equation that includes the helix considered low-displacement to displacement piles
diameter (B) is often ignored in the calculation of due to the helix plates and shaft, one could theorize
end-bearing capacity of deep foundations. The similar Nq values as determined by Meyerhof
diameter or width of the pile is relatively small and (1976) for driven piles, with a reduction to account
therefore this portion of the equation contributes for soil disturbance created by the helix plates.
little to the overall pile capacity. With that portion Foundation Supportworks recommends Nc and Nq
of the equation conservatively ignored, the bearing capacity factors calculated by the following
equation further simplifies to: equations and shown graphically in Figure 2.7.1.b:
Qu = ∑Ah(cNc + q’Nq) Nc = (Nq – 1)cotΦ ≥ 9
For purely cohesive soils with Φ = 0 and c = su Nq = 1 + 0.56(12Φ)Φ/54
(soil undrained shear strength), Nc ≈ 9 and Nq =
1. The equation can conservatively be rewritten These values of Nc and Nq are slightly lower and
again as: therefore more conservative than the values
typically provided in textbooks.
Qu = ∑Ah(9c)

CHAPTER 2
Figure 2.7.1.b Recommended Bearing Capacity
Factors Nc and Nq versus Soil Friction Angle
2.7.1.1 Critical Depth the granular soil increases with depth, you would
expect an increase in pile capacity, but not due
In granular soils the helical pile capacity is largely to an increase in the overburden stress. This
a function of the vertical effective overburden concept is well-documented in many foundation
stress at the helix plate depth. Therefore, design textbooks and design manuals.
one may expect that the pile capacity would
increase without bound as the effective stress Critical depth may range from 10D to 40D (where
increases with increasing pile depth. According D is the largest helix plate diameter), depending
to the Individual Bearing and Cylindrical Shear upon the relative density and position of the
Method equations, the helical pile capacity water table. FSI recommends critical depths of
should increase by simply extending the pile 20D to 30D be considered for design purposes.
deeper into granular soils. In reality, there is a For example, if the helix plate depth is greater
critical depth within uniform granular soils where than an assumed critical depth of 20D, limit the
a further increase in vertical effective stress vertical effective stress at the helix plate to that
results in little to no increase in the end bearing value corresponding to the critical depth of 20D.
capacity of the pile. Certainly, if the strength of

2.7.2 Cylindrical Shear Method The helical pile capacity by the cylindrical shear
method can be calculated as:
The design equation for determining helical pile
capacity by the cylindrical shear method was Qu = 2πRL(c+Koq’tanΦ)+Ah(cNc+q’Nq)
originally developed by Mitsch and Clemence Where,
(1985) and later modified for simplicity.
CHAPTER 2
The cylindrical shear method assumes the Qu = Ultimate Pile Capacity (lb)
development of a soil friction column (cylinder) R = Average Helix Radius (ft)
between the upper and lower helix plates along
with individual bearing of either the upper or L = Total Spacing Between All Helix
lower helix, depending upon loading direction. Plates (ft)
The ultimate bearing capacity is then determined c = Cohesion at the Helix Depth (lb/ft2)
by the summation of shear strength of the soil
cylinder, shaft adhesion/friction and end bearing K o = Dimensionless At-Rest Earth
of either the upper or lower helix. For deep Pressure Coefficient
cylindrical shear failure to occur, spacing of the Φ = Soil Friction Angle (degrees)
helix plates along the shaft is generally less than
or equal to 3 times the diameter of the leading A h = Area of the Top or Bottom Helix
plate and the uppermost helix plate is embedded Plate (ft2)
to a depth of at least 5 diameters. Skin friction q’ = Effective Vertical Overburden Stress
along the shaft is generally ignored for shaft at Ah (lb/ft2)
sizes less than 6 inches in outside diameter.
Figure 2.7.2.a illustrates the load transfer Nc, Nq = Dimensionless Bearing Capacity
mechanism for the cylindrical shear method in Factors
compression loading. Refer to Section 2.7.1 for discussions
regarding Bearing Capacity Factors and
Critical Depth.
Based upon previous research, the individual

bearing method and cylindrical shear method
should provide similar results at helix spacings
of 2.5D to 3.5D. FSI promotes the use of the
individual bearing method for determination of
pile capacity due to its relative simplicity and
since the original form from which this method
is derived is already widely accepted by the
geotechnical engineering community.
Figure 2.7.2.a
Cylindrical Shear Method

2.7.3 Torque It must be recognized that the recommended
Kt values in the Hoyt and Clemence paper were
Correlation Method
based on a wide range of soil conditions and
The torque correlation method has become a pile configurations (configurations that may
well-documented and accepted method for not be considered as conforming products per
CHAPTER 2
estimating or verifying helical pile capacity ICC-ES AC358) and should only be used with
during installation. In simple terms, the confirmation from site-specific, full-scale load
torsional resistance generated during helical testing. Some of the recommended Hoyt and
pile installation is a measure of soil undrained Clemence Kt values differ from the default values
shear strength and can be related to the bearing provided in ICC-ES AC358.
capacity of the pile with the following equation:
ICC-ES AC358 recognizes the following
Qu = Kt x T helical pile shaft sizes and default Kt factors
for conforming systems, since the installation
Where,
torque to capacity ratios have been established
Qu = Ultimate Pile Capacity (lb) with documented research:
Kt = Empirical Torque Correlation Factor (ft-1) • 1.5 and 1.75-inch solid square Kt = 10 ft-1
T = Final Installation Torque (ft-lb) • 2.875-inch O.D. round Kt = 9 ft-1
The relationship between installation torque and • 3.0-inch O.D. round Kt = 8 ft-1
helical pile capacity was generally considered
• 3.5-inch O.D. round Kt = 7 ft-1
proprietary information by helical foundation
manufacturers until the results of an extensive The Kt factors above may be considered
study performed by Hoyt and Clemence were conservative for most applications, and even
released in the late 1980s (Hoyt and Clemence though they are often presented as constants,
1989). The Hoyt and Clemence study included Kt can vary depending upon the soil conditions.
tension load test results for 91 multi-helix piles Kt factors are generally higher in sands, gravels
at 24 different sites with varying soil conditions, and overconsolidated clays, and lower in
embedment depths, shaft sizes, helix spacings underconsolidated clays, normally consolidated
and number of helices. The helix plate spacing clays and sensitive clays and silts. Kt is also
along the pile shafts varied from 1.5D to 4.5D inversely proportional to the shaft dimension/
and the number of helices varied from two to 14 diameter as shown above.
with the diameters ranging from 6 to 20 inches.
Factors that affect installation torque may also
Shaft sizes consisted of 1.5, 1.75 and 2.0-inch
have an effect on the resultant Kt determined
square and 3.5 and 8.625-inch round. The
from a field load test. In addition to soil type
load test results were compared with capacity
and shaft dimension, studies have indicated
predictions using the torque correlation method,
that other factors such as the number of helix
the individual bearing method and the cylindrical
plates, helix thickness, helix pitch, helix spacing
shear method (Mitsch and Clemence 1985). The
along the shaft, helix diameter, depth of pile
statistical results of this study show that the
embedment, applied downward force during
torque correlation method is the more precise
installation (crowd), and test load direction may
predictor of capacity of the three methods. The
have an effect on installation torque and/or the
researchers recommended torque correlation
resultant Kt. Other studies have discounted some
factors (Kt) of 10 ft-1 for all size square bar shafts
or most of these factors as inconsequential.
and round shafts less than 3.5 inches in diameter,
Kt of 7 ft-1 for 3.5-inch diameter round shafts and The use of uncalibrated torque monitoring
Kt of 3 ft-1 for 8.625-inch diameter round shafts. equipment or uncertified gear motors will likely

affect Kt determined from field load testing. The (crowd) as different soil layers are encountered
helical pile industry has long used the differential and penetrated. The helical pile manufacturer
pressure across the gear motor for correlation should provide a helix plate geometry that is
to installation torque. The installation torque a true ramped-spiral with uniform pitch. The
is then correlated to pile capacity. In other geometry of the helix plate is instrumental in
CHAPTER 2
words, the differential pressure across the gear providing the downward thrust or pull into the
motor is commonly used to determine the pile ground and should be controlled to increase the
capacity. The current state-of-practice involves installation efficiency and subsequent Kt. Refer
using a gear motor multiplier (GMM) to convert to Section 2.3.1 for an in-depth discussion
from differential pressure to torque. The GMMs about helix plate geometry. Proper installation
are provided by the gear motor manufacturers procedures and well-formed helix plates are
based on theoretical equations and will vary with critical to minimize soil disturbance.
the planetary gear ratio, motor displacement
and motor efficiency. Gear motor manufacturers
typically show a linear fit between the differential
pressure and output torque with no scaling
effect. Research has shown that the gear motor
differential pressure to torque relationship is
generally linear, however, there is a scaling
adjustment needed (Deardorff 2007). This results
in a range of GMMs from low to high differential
pressure. The discrepancy between actual
installation torque and torque determined by
correlation to differential pressure is highest at
low differential pressures. This difference often
decreases steadily as the differential pressure
increases up to the point of maximum motor
efficiency. Therefore, it is highly recommended
that gear motors be certified on an annual
basis, or whenever changes occur to alter
their performance, in order to establish their
true differential pressure to torque relationship.
Calibrated in-line torque monitoring devices
may also be used as an alternative to having the
drive motors certified.
Finally, the installation practices of the specialty

contractor and the quality control of the helical
pile manufacturer will affect Kt. Helical piles
should ideally be installed at a rate equal
to the pitch of the helix plate (3 inches per
revolution) with no more than 25 revolutions
per minute (rpm). The installation rate should
be reduced to about 10 rpm during final seating
of the helical plates. The rate of advancement
can be controlled by the installing contractor
by adjusting the speed and downward force

2.8 Helical Tiebacks
Helical anchors/tiebacks are commonly used in
tension applications to provide either temporary
or permanent lateral or tie-down support for
applications including:
CHAPTER 2
• Earth retention systems such as concrete
retaining walls, soldier pile and timber lagging,
and sheet piling (Figures 2.8.a1 and 2.8.a2)
Figure 2.8.b Helical tiebacks

stabilize marina seawall
Helical tiebacks are manufactured with similar

helix plate sizes and helix spacing as helical
piles installed vertically to support foundation
loads. Tiebacks differ from helical piles in that
they are typically installed in a horizontal to
45-degree downward from horizontal orientation
to laterally support the tops of earth retaining
structures. Helix plates are typically limited to
Figure 2.8.a1 Rendering of helical tieback the lead section or the lead and first extension
installation for soldier pile and timber lagging wall of the tieback. The helix plate design depends
on the soil strength parameters and the required
working capacity. Multi-helix leads generally
consist of increasing plate sizes from the tip.
Helical tiebacks may consist of either hollow
round shaft or solid square shaft, although
square is more common due to its socket-
and-pin style coupling (quicker and easier to
connect) and the ability to penetrate further into
the soil with a similar installation torque than a
comparably-sized round shaft. The end of the
shaft is typically coupled to an adaptor that
transitions the shaft to threaded rod. Refer back
to Figure 2.3.3.d.
Figure 2.8.a2 Multi-tier helical tieback
installation to support sheet pile wall Both the individual bearing method and the
cylindrical shear method are appropriate for
• Seismic loading restraint for foundation uplift determining helical tieback capacity. The torque
and lateral support systems correlation method is commonly used to verify
capacity during tieback installation. These
• Guy anchor support for power line and
methods are discussed in Section 2.7.
communication towers
Helical tiebacks are often used to stabilize
• Seawalls and marine bulkhead support
existing earth retaining structures that have
(Figure 2.8.b)
experienced excessive movement; i.e., walls

that are cracked, leaning and/or bowing (Figures 2.8.1 Design Considerations
2.8.c1 and 2.8.c2). The wall distress may be a
result of changes in soil moisture conditions, The helix plates along the tieback shaft must be
rise in groundwater levels, plugging of the wall located beyond the active wedge or failure plane
drainage system over time, plumbing leaks, to provide proper anchorage. The last helix plate
from the tip (closest to the wall) shall be at least
CHAPTER 2
expansive clay soils, frost-jacking, or surcharge

loads above the wall. five (5) times its diameter beyond the failure
plane (Figure 2.8.1.a). The helix plates should
also be located at least five (5) diameters below
the ground surface of the retained soils to model
deep foundation behavior. Multiple tiebacks
shall have a center to center spacing at the
helices of at least three (3) times the diameter of
the largest helix plate to avoid significant stress
overlap within the bearing soils.
Helical tiebacks are often installed at a

downward angle from horizontal, typically on the
order of 5 to 15 degrees. This downward angle is
often considered in order achieve the 5D depth
criteria below the surface of the retained soils,
Figure 2.8.c1 Helical tiebacks stabilize
sheet pile wall below historic home to increase the vertical effective overburden
stress at the helix depths (in granular soils), or
to extend the helix plates to a deeper, more
competent soil layer. A slight downward angle
may also be considered to simply minimize the
potential for groundwater to follow the shaft and
seep through the wall penetration.
Tiebacks designed with a downward angle

should be installed to a capacity higher than the
calculated/required horizontal tieback capacity
(Figure 2.8.1.b). The calculated horizontal
tieback capacity (TCH) is determined from
Figure 2.8.c2 Helical tiebacks and tube steel analysis considering the various loads on the
walers stabilize concrete retaining wall
wall. If the tieback is designed for an installation
angle, alpha (α), then the tieback should be
installed to a capacity TR and its corresponding
value of torque if the torque correlation method
is used for capacity verification. Remember
that the torque-correlated ultimate capacity
should exceed the design working load by an
appropriate factor of safety.
TR = TCH / cosα
The vertical component of the tieback force
should also be considered so as not to overstress
the wall or the wall bearing soils. The vertical

CHAPTER 2
Figure 2.8.1.a Helical tieback
design considerations
component of the tieback force will increase more uniformly transfer the tension loads.
with increasing installation angle, provided the Beveled washers are especially critical when
installed tieback force, TR, is held constant. the tiebacks are pre-tensioned with a torque
The vertical force on the wall generated by the wrench. Uniform bearing of the nut to the
tieback may be calculated by: beveled washer to the bearing plate provides
a more accurate reading of resistance and
TCV = TCH tanα
torque, which in turn is a more accurate
or determination of axial force on the tieback.
TCV = TR sinα
Where,
TR = Installed capacity of tieback at angle α
α = Angle of tieback installation measured

downward from horizontal
Figure 2.8.1.b
TCH = Calculated horizontal tieback capacity Vector mechanics of tieback forces
determined from wall analysis
The design of the tieback system should
TCV = Calculated vertical load on the wall due
consider the structural details of the wall, the
to tieback installation
wall reinforcing, present wall condition, and the
Angled or beveled washers are recommended effect of any penetrations necessary to install
at the tieback-to-bearing plate interface to the tiebacks. Cantilevered concrete retaining

walls, for example, are generally designed with the order of 1.3 to 1.5 for temporary applications
significant reinforcing steel on the backfilled and 2.0 for permanent applications.
side of the wall where tension and bending
Foundation Supportworks recommends that
are greatest. Reinforcing steel within the
all helical anchors and tiebacks (excluding
compression side of the wall is generally the
soil nails) be pre-tensioned or proof-tested
CHAPTER 2
minimum required by code. Tieback installation

following installation (Figure 2.8.1.c).
induces a negative bending in the cantilevered
Pre-tensioning to 1.0 to 1.33 times the design
wall for which the wall was not originally
working load minimizes deflection of the
designed. Walls to be stabilized with tiebacks, or
tiebacks and structure as the tiebacks are put
walls that will be designed with tieback support,
into service and the soil strength around the
should be reviewed by a design professional.
helix plates is mobilized. Tiebacks installed
The assumed failure plane behind an earth to support existing walls are typically locked
retaining wall is dependent upon soil conditions off at 0.75 to 1.1 times the design working
and wall type. As a general rule of thumb, a failure load after proof-testing. Helical anchors
plane can be projected from the bottom back face and tiebacks to be cast into new concrete
of the wall upward at an angle of 45-Φ/2 (degrees) retaining walls may be completely unloaded,
from vertical for both active and at-rest conditions. or locked off with a modest seating load, after
For retaining walls and basement walls, this failure proof-testing. Tiebacks can be “pull tested”
plane is usually assumed to begin at the bottom or load tested to typically two (2) times the
of wall. For sheet pile walls, the failure plane is design working load or more to identify the
usually assumed to begin at the mud line. ultimate system capacity, better assess soil
conditions and soil/anchor interaction, and
Failure modes for restrained walls should be
validate design assumptions and parameters.
evaluated for internal stability, external stability,
Tiebacks that undergo load testing to
bearing capacity and global stability. It is the
greater than 1.5 times the design working
responsibility of the design professional of record
load, or failure, are generally considered
to perform these evaluations. Typical factors of
sacrificial and should not be used as
safety for helical tiebacks used in conjunction
production tiebacks.
with earth retention systems are generally on
Figure 2.8.1.c
Pre-tensioning helical tieback

2.9 Helical Soil Nails Soil nail walls offer the following advantages
over tieback walls as well as other top down
Soil nailing is a method of earth retention that construction techniques:
relies on a grid of individual reinforcing strands
• Soil nail walls are more economical than
or members installed within a soil mass to
conventional concrete gravity walls and are
create an internally stable gravity wall/retaining
CHAPTER 2
often more economical than tieback walls due
system. Soil nail wall technology began in
to reduced wall facing requirements. There
Europe with use of the New Austrian Tunneling
would likely be more soil nails than tiebacks for
Method in rock formations in 1961. The
a given project, but this additional cost for the
technology then carried over to applications
nails is outweighed by the difference in cost of a
involving unconsolidated soil retention,
shotcrete facing versus a more substantial soldier
primarily in France and Germany. Soil nail walls
pile, sheet pile, or reinforced concrete wall detail.
were first used in North America for temporary
excavation support in the late 1960s and • Soil nails are typically shorter than tiebacks for
continued to gain recognition and acceptance similar wall heights so there will be reduced
during the 1970s and 1980s for higher profile right-of-way (ROW) requirements.
projects including highway applications. Much
• There is less impact to adjacent structures since
of the soil nail wall research performed in North
soil nail walls are not installed with vibratory
America was funded by the Federal Highway
energy like soldier piles or sheet piles.
Administration (FHWA) and other state highway
agencies during the 1990s. Although helical • Overhead clearance requirements are less than
piles have been used as tiebacks since the driven soldier pile or sheet-pile wall construction.
early 1950s, helical soil nails are a relatively Soil nail walls can therefore be installed easily
new alternative to their grouted counterparts. below bridges and even within existing buildings.
Figure 2.9.a2
Figure 2.9.a1
Helical soil nail wall installation

• There is no need to embed structural elements 2.9.1 Construction
below the proposed ground surface elevation
Methodology
on the low side of the soil nail wall. Soldier
pile and sheet-pile walls require minimum Soil nail walls are constructed from the top
embedment depths for wall stability. down where the excavation proceeds as shown
CHAPTER 2
in Figure 2.9.1.a. The construction sequence for

• Soil nail wall construction is typically quicker
a typical helical soil nail wall includes:
than other earth retention methods.
• Initial excavation about 3 to 5 feet deep
• Soil nail walls can be constructed in remote
depending upon design parameters and
areas with smaller equipment.
soil conditions
• Soil nail walls have performed well during
• Installation of the first row of helical soil nails
seismic loading events due to the overall
to the required inclination angle, torque and
system flexibility.
embedment length
• Placement of drainage medium (if required)
• Placement of wall reinforcement and bearing

plates
• Placement of shotcrete to the required design

wall thickness
• After shotcrete has cured, repeat sequence

for successive rows of soil nails. Continue
process to the final design depth (wall height).
Figure 2.9.a2
Nail head to wall detail
A helical soil nail typically consists of square shaft

lead and extension sections with small diameter
(6 to 8 inches) helix plates spaced evenly
along the entire shaft length (Figures 2.9.a1
and 2.9.a2). The helical soil nail is installed by
application of torque, similar to the installation of
a helical tieback. The helical soil nail is a passive
bearing element, which relies on movement
of the soil mass and active earth pressures to
mobilize the soil shear strength along the nail. In
contrast, a tieback is pre-tensioned to mobilize
the soil shear strength around the helix plates.
Excavation, soil nail installation and application
of wall facing is completed in steps from the top
of the wall downward.

CHAPTER 2
Figure 2.9.1.a Typical soil nail

wall installation sequence
2.9.2 Design Considerations lateral movement than tieback walls of similar

height. By allowing this movement, the highest
Helical soil nails are passive bearing elements stress in the soil nail is near the failure plane,
which rely on movement of the soil mass to centered between the opposing tensile forces.
mobilize the soil shear strength along the nail. As Conversely, the highest stress in a tieback is at the
a result, soil nail walls typically experience more wall face. Therefore, soil nails have less nail head

force than tiebacks for a similar size wall, which • Top of wall lateral movements on the order
results in potential cost savings by using soil nails of 0.2% to 0.3% of the wall height should be
due to reduced wall thickness requirements. expected with soil nail lengths to wall height
ratios between 0.7 to 1.0, negligible surcharge
The following should be considered when
loading and a design including a global factor
designing soil nail walls.
CHAPTER 2
of safety of at least 1.5. As a general guide, the

• Not all soil conditions are suitable for soil mass located between the failure plane
construction of helical soil nail walls. and the wall facing may slump approximately
Excavations are generally made in 3 to 5-foot 1/8-inch laterally and 1/8-inch vertically for each
steps, depending upon soil type and strength. 5-foot depth of excavation.
The soil should be able to stand unsupported
• Soil nail walls may be designed with a slight
for a period of at least one day after the
batter to account for anticipated lateral wall
vertical cut is made. Soil conditions that
movement.
may not be favorable for helical soil nail wall
construction include: • There may be restrictions to the design soil
nail lengths, including property lines, right-
oo Dry, poorly-graded cohesionless soils; e.g.,
of-way (ROW), underground utility corridors,
clean sands or sands with SPT N-values
bridge abutments or existing structures.
less than 5 blows/foot
• Consider temporary and/or permanent
oo Highly plastic clays, expansive soils, organic
surcharge loads from adjacent structures,
soils, or soils with a liquidity index of 0.2
roadways, construction equipment, fill
or greater
placement, etc.
oo Clays with SPT N-values less than 4
• Maximum wall heights for helical soil nail
blows/foot
walls are practically limited to 20 to 30 feet.
oo Soil profiles with high groundwater levels Increased heights may be considered with a
- dewatering may be required to facilitate stepped wall design.
installation
• Helical soil nails are typically installed in a grid
oo Soil with cobbles, boulders or weathered pattern, spaced 3 to 5 feet vertically and 4 to
rock lenses 7 feet horizontally.
oo Highly corrosive soils • Helical soil nails are typically installed at an

angle of 10 to 15 degrees downward from
oo Collapsible soils
horizontal, although a batter in not required.
oo Very dense sands and hard clays - may be The downward installation angle is a carryover
difficult to penetrate without pre-drilling a from grouted nail design where an angle is
pilot hole required to prevent wet grout from flowing out
the hole.
• A failure plane generally develops at the top
of the wall at a horizontal distance of about • Soil nails may be installed with consistent
0.7 to 0.8 times the height of the wall away lengths for all rows, or be longer at the top
from the wall face (Lazarte, Elias et al. 2003). of the wall, becoming shorter with successive
This distance may be reduced by battering the rows toward the bottom. Nail length
wall face. Any structure, utility, roadway, etc. determination depends upon soil strength
that would be impacted by the wall movement parameters, location of the failure plane, and
and/or failure plane should be considered design for critical limit states as discussed in
during the design phase. Section 2.9.2.2.

The design procedure for helical soil nails is As the construction of the wall progresses, the
similar to that for grouted nails. For a helical soil upper soil nails become less important for the
nail, the bond stress with the soil is assumed stabilization of the soil mass, and depending
to act along a cylindrical surface area defined upon wall height, may not contribute to the global
by the outside edge of the helix plates. Bearing stability at the final excavation phase. However,
CHAPTER 2
capacity of the soil nail is determined using the the upper soil nails are instrumental in providing
Individual Bearing Method described in Section stability during the early phases of excavation
2.7 and is correlated to bond stress by: and contribute to limiting wall deflections. Figure
2.9.2.a shows the distribution of tensile force in
qu = Qu / LπDhFS
Nail 1, cumulative wall movement and the critical
Where, failure surfaces as the soil nail wall construction
progresses. The upper schematic of Figure
qu = Ultimate Bond Stress (psi)
2.9.2.a illustrates the tensile force distribution
Qu = Ultimate Capacity of the Helical Soil Nail along the top soil nail as construction continues
by Individual Bearing Method (lb) through the various excavation phases. Phase
N in the upper schematic does not reflect the
L = Soil Nail Length (in)
maximum soil nail tensile force since additional
Dh = Helix Diameter (in) loading occurs after construction to reach long
term equilibrium of soil nail forces.
FS = Factor of Safety for Uncertainties in Soil
Conditions (Typically 1.5 to 2.0 Based on The design of helical soil nail walls should
Quality of Soil Information) be performed in general accordance with
Figure 2.9.2.a Potential failure surfaces and soil

nail tensile forces (Lazarte, Elias et al. 2003)

requirements detailed in FHWA Geotechnical geometry capability than SNAIL. The program
Engineering Circular No. 7 (Lazarte, Elias et al. can only model a circular failure surface which
2003). Several computer programs are available must pass at the toe of the wall or above the
for design of soil nail walls, with the more toe. This limits the ability to evaluate sliding
common programs being SNAIL (CALTRANS and bearing capacity failure modes. Data input
CHAPTER 2
1999) and GoldNail (Golder 1996). variables and output reports are generally similar
to SNAIL.
SNAIL is a Windows-based program developed
by the California Department of Transportation FHWA Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 7
(CALTRANS) and is available free to the public. (Lazarte, Elias et al. 2003) provides design tables
SNAIL is a two dimensional limit equilibrium and charts that can be used for preliminary
program that uses force equilibrium exclusively. estimation of the wall design. The tables and
Either metric or English units can be used during charts were developed using SNAIL simulations
the design process. Soil nail reinforcement and include the following assumptions:
inputs include location, diameter, inclination
• The soil is homogenous (only one soil type and
angle, vertical and horizontal spacing, cross
strength parameter)
sectional area, yield strength and tensile
• There are no surcharge loads or sloped
strength. The soil parameter inputs include
backfill conditions
soil unit weight, cohesion, friction angle, bond
• There are no seismic forces/loads
strength and the bond strength reduction factor.
• The soil nails are of uniform length, spacing
The soil strength parameters are modeled
and inclination for each row
with the conventional linear Mohr-Coulomb
• There is no groundwater present
envelope. The only data entered for the wall
design is the face punching shear, therefore an There should always be a final design
initial wall facing design must be used for the prior to construction activities which take
trial runs. The program allows for consideration into consideration any deviations from the
of up to seven soil layers and provides inputs assumptions listed above and determination of
for two uniform vertical surcharge loads and the Limit States described in Section 2.9.2.2.
an internal or external point load. The program
The design of helical soil nails should
output provides the global factor of safety, an
be completed by experienced design
estimated location of the failure plane and the
professionals. Installation of FSI helical
tensile forces for each nail for each of the 10
soil nails shall be by certified FSI Installing
most critical failure surfaces analyzed.
Contractors trained specifically for helical soil
GoldNail is a Windows-based proprietary nail installations. FSI recommends that the wall
program developed by Golder Associates which design follow the general guidelines detailed in
satisfies both moment and force equilibrium. the FHWA Geotechnical Engineering Circular
The program can work in one of three modes; No. 7 (Lazarte, Elias et al. 2003).
design, factor of safety and nail service load.
Preliminary design recommendations are
The program allows factored strengths for Load
available to FSI Installing Contractors to
and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD). The soil
assist with costing of helical soil nail wall
strength parameters can be modeled with the
projects. However, the final design must be
conventional linear Mohr-Coulomb envelope or
completed and/or approved by the engineer
using a bi-linear strength envelope. Up to 13
of record.
soil layers can be modeled with more complex

2.9.2.1 Temporary and Permanent 2.9.2.2 Limit States
Wall Facing The design of the helical soil nail wall must
Helical soil nail walls can be categorized as consider two distinct limiting conditions;
temporary or permanent, and the design of the Strength Limit States and Service Limit States.
The Strength Limit States refer to failure of
CHAPTER 2
wall facing and nail head connection details will
vary based upon this determination. Whether the system due to loading forces greater than
the soil nail wall is temporary or permanent, the strength of the system or its individual
the wall facing and helical soil nail connection components. Specifically, the following potential
detail must be completed and/or approved by failure modes must be evaluated:
the engineer of record. • External failure modes
Helical soil nail walls are used most often in • Internal failure modes
temporary shoring applications, with reinforced • Facing failure modes
shotcrete the most common temporary wall External failure modes include global stability,
facing material. Shotcrete is concrete conveyed sliding and bearing failure. Internal failure modes
through a hose and projected through a nozzle include soil nail pullout failure, soil nail tensile
at high velocity onto a working surface. The failure and soil nail shear failure along the failure
shotcrete is applied/sprayed in thin lifts until the plane. Facing failure modes include flexure failure,
design thickness requirement is met for the wall. punching shear failure and head stud failure.
For temporary wall applications, the shotcrete
is typically applied to a thickness of 3 to 4 The service limit states do not include failure of
inches. Internal reinforcement of the shotcrete the structure, but rather consider serviceability
may consist of welded wire fabric (WWF), steel issues such as wall deformation, wall settlements
reinforcing bars (rebar), or fiber reinforcement. or cracking of the facing.
WWF with rebar walers at the nail heads is For further information related to designing for
typically favored due to ease of installation. these potential failure modes, please refer to
Permanent helical soil nail walls may either have FHWA Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 7
an additional thickness of shotcrete applied (Lazarte, Elias et al. 2003).
or another facing attached to the temporary
shotcrete layer. For permanent soil nail walls
with shotcrete facing, the typical wall thickness
varies from 6 to 12 inches, not including the
thickness of the temporary facing. Cast in place
and precast concrete facings can also be used
in conjunction with the temporary shotcrete wall
facing. Facings can be attached to the shotcrete
wall to form decorative facades.

2.10 Load Tests • ASTM D3689, Standard Test Methods for
Deep Foundations Under Static Axial Tensile
Load tests are routinely completed on helical Load (Figures 2.10.b1 and 2.10.b2)
piles to establish ultimate and allowable pile
capacities, determine pile head movement
under load, verify design assumptions and
CHAPTER 2
capacities, and establish site-specific torque

correlation factors (Kt). ICC-ES AC358 states
that full-scale load tests on helical piles shall
be conducted in general accordance with the
following standards:
• ASTM D1143, Standard Test Methods for Deep

Foundations Under Static Axial Compressive
Load (Figures 2.10.a1 and 2.10.a2) Figure 2.10.b1
Tension load test
Figure 2.10.a1
Compression load test
Figure 2.10.b2
Tension load test within basement
• ASTM D3966, Standard Test Methods for

Deep Foundations Under Lateral Load
AC358 further states that the Quick Test method

of ASTM D1143 shall be used for compression
tests. Additional discussion and guidance
regarding the test procedures are provided in
AC358 and within the respective standards.
For axial compression and tension tests, AC358

defines the ultimate pile capacity as the load
achieved when plunging of the helix plate occurs
or when the net deflection exceeds 10 percent
of the average helix diameter, whichever occurs
first. Net deflection is defined as the total pile
head deflection minus the elastic shortening or
lengthening of the shaft.
Figure 2.10.a2 Close up of test pile, hydraulic cylinder,
dial gauges and hemispherical bearing plate

2.11 Design Examples 2.11.1 Helical Piles
Three common methods for determining helical Example 1
pile capacity are presented in Section 2.7. The Helical piles are proposed to support a new
individual bearing and cylindrical shear methods structure. The proposed pile layout is shown
are used during the design phase to calculate or on the foundation plan along with a design
CHAPTER 2
estimate the pile capacity. The torque correlation working load of 30 kips per pile with a factor of
method is generally used to confirm or verify pile safety (FOS) = 2. Preliminary product selection
capacity during field installation. FSI promotes suggests that the HP288 helical pile is the best
the use of the individual bearing method for fit for this load condition with an ultimate torque
design calculations, therefore, that method rated capacity of 71.1 kips. The allowable torque
will be used in the following examples. Helical rated capacity would then be 35.5 kips with a
pile product ratings, properties and details are FOS = 2. A geotechnical investigation was
provided in Appendix 2A. completed for the project and the soil profile is
shown in Figure 2.11.1.a.
HelixPro® Helical Foundation Design Software
for Professionals was created by Foundation The helical piles will penetrate the upper fill and
Supportworks to simplify the design process medium stiff clay to bear within the deeper very
for helical piles and tiebacks. HelixPro is a stiff clay. With the helix plates bearing entirely
web-based helical foundation design tool within the very stiff clay soil below a depth of 15
available free of charge to design professionals. feet, we can use the equation from Section 2.7.1
For more information on HelixPro, please refer for purely cohesive soils with Φ = 0:
to Appendix 2C.
Qu = ∑Ah(9c)
Solve for the required helix plate area:
Loose Sand Fill Ah = Qu/9c
(Highly Variable)
Qu = Design Working Load (30,000 lb) x FOS
6’ (2) = 60,000 lb
c = 3,000 lb/ft2
Medium Stiff Clay Ah = 60,000 / (9)(3,000)

c= 750 lb/ft2 Ah = 2.22 ft2
Φ=0
Helix plate areas for the various shaft sizes can
γ moist = 115 Ib/ft3
be found in Appendix 2A. For the HP288 shaft
(2.875-inch O.D.), a total helix plate area of
15’
2.22 ft2 can be most efficiently achieved with a
10/12/14 triple-helix plate configuration.
Very Stiff Clay A10” = 0.50 ft2

c= 3,000 lb/ft2
A12” = 0.74 ft2
Φ=0

A14” = 1.02 ft2

∑Ah = 2.26 ft2
Figure 2.11.1.a
Example 1. Helical Pile Capacity

Solve for the ultimate and allowable pile Example 2
capacities: Grain conveyor towers will be constructed at
an ethanol facility. The towers will be designed
Qu = (2.26)(9)(3,000) = 61,000 lb = 61 kips
with four support legs, each leg designed for
The allowable pile capacity, working loads of 40 kips in compression and 15
CHAPTER 2
kips in tension/uplift. A FOS = 2 is required for

Qa = Qu / FOS
both the compression and uplift pile capacities.
Qa = 61,000 / 2 = 30,500 lb = 30.5 kips…OK A geotechnical exploration was completed
for the project and the soil profile is shown in
Determine the required final installation
Figure 2.11.1.b. Groundwater was encountered
torque in accordance with the equations and
at a depth of 10 feet below the surface.
procedures of Section 2.7.3:
Preliminary product selection suggests that the
Q u = K tT HP350 helical pile is best suited to support the
proposed loads. The HP350 has an ultimate
The equation can be rewritten to solve for torque:
torque rated capacity of 122.5 kips and an
T = Qu / Kt allowable capacity of 60 kips (FOS = 2.04; see
footnote 7 on page 61). Allowable mechanical
Without site-specific load testing and
compression and tension capacities are well
determination of Kt, we use the default value
above the service loads to be resisted. The
from ICC-ES AC358 for a 2.875-inch O.D.
helical piles will be embedded into the dense
shaft, Kt = 9 ft-1:
sand as shown in Figure 2.11.1.b.
T = 60,000 / 9 = 6,667 ft-lb
For purely granular (frictional) soils with c = 0,
Install the helical piles to a final installation the ultimate pile capacity can be determined
torque of at least 6,700 ft-lb. from equation:
Qu = ∑Ah(q’Nq)
Solve for the required helix plate area:
Loose Sand
c= 0 Ah = Qu/q’Nq
Φ = 30°
The helix plates should be embedded several
γ moist = 110 Ib/ft3 plate diameters into the dense sand to provide
γ sat = 115 Ib/ft3 uplift resistance. This depth depends upon the
pile load. We can fine tune the embedment
10’ Groundwater depth at a later point, but for an uplift load of
Table 15 kips, we’ll consider a minimum helix plate
embedment of three diameters. A pile with an
13’
ultimate capacity of 80 kips often has three helix
plates on the lead section. A 10/12/14 lead has
Dense Sand
a distance of 5.5 feet between the uppermost
c= 0
and bottommost plates. With these parameters
Φ = 38° in mind, we’ll choose a trial depth of:
13 feet + 3.5 feet (depth of 14-inch plate into
γ sat = 130 Ib/ft3
dense sand) + 2.75 feet (half the distance
between bearing plates) = 19.5 feet.
Figure 2.11.1.b
Example 2. Helical Pile Capacity
Rev. 10/14/16

The vertical effective overburden stress, q’, at Qu = ∑Ah(q’Nq)
19.5 feet:
q’12” = (110)(10) + (115-62.4)(3) + (130-62.4)
q’ = (110 lb/ft )(10 ft) + ((115-62.4) lb/ft )(3 ft)
3 3
(5.25) = 1612 lb/ft2
+ ((130-62.4) lb/ft3)(6.5 ft) = 1,697 lb/ft2
q’10” = (110)(10) + (115-62.4)(3) + (130-62.4)
CHAPTER 2
Qu = Design Working Load (40,000 lb) x FOS (7.75) = 1781 lb/ft2
(2) = 80,000 lb
Nq, 12” = 15.7 (for Φ = 30°)
Nq = 1+0.56(12Φ)Φ/54 = 42.6 (for Φ = 38°)
Nq, 10” = 42.6 (for Φ = 38°)
Ah = 80,000 / (1,697)(42.6)
Q u = (0.71)(1612)(15.7) + (0.47)(1781)(42.6) =
Ah = 1.11 ft 2
53,600 lb = 53.6 kips
For the HP350 shaft (3.5-inch O.D.), a total helix Qa,uplift = 53,600 / 2 = 26,800 lb or 26.8 kips…OK
plate area of at least 1.11 ft2 can be achieved
Determine the required final installation
with a 10/12 double-helix plate configuration.
torque in accordance with the equations and
A10” = 0.47 ft2 procedures of Section 2.7.3:
A12” = 0.71 ft2 Q u = K tT

The equation can be rewritten to solve for torque:
∑Ah = 1.18 ft2
T = Qu / Kt
Solve for the ultimate and allowable pile
Without site-specific load testing and
capacities:
determination of Kt, we use the default value
Q u = (1.18)(1,697)(42.6) = 85,000 lb = from ICC-ES AC358 for a 3.5-inch O.D. shaft,
85 kips Kt = 7 ft-1:
Qa, compression = 85,000 / 2 = 42,500 lb = 42.5 T = 80,000 / 7 = 11,428 ft-lb
kips…OK
Install the helical piles to a final installation
To maintain the average vertical effective torque of at least 11,500 ft-lb.
overburden stress at a depth of 19.5 feet, the
12-inch blade would be installed to a depth
of 18.25 feet and the 10-inch blade would be
installed to a depth of 20.75 feet. The upper
helix plate is now 5.25 feet below the loose
sand to dense sand interface. With this depth
of embedment, we would expect the allowable
uplift capacity to be similar to the allowable
compressive capacity.
To be very conservative and consider that the

loose sand above the 12-inch plate could have
some effect on the uplift capacity, we could
model the soil strength (friction angle) above the
12-inch plate to represent the loose sand.

2.11.2 Helical Tiebacks q’14” = (120)(7.17) = 860 lb/ft2
Example 3 q’12” = (120)(7.67) = 920 lb/ft2

Helical tiebacks are being considered to stabilize q’10” = (120)(8.08) = 969 lb/ft2
an existing reinforced concrete retaining wall.
The tiebacks can extend no further than 20 feet N q = 1+0.56(12Φ)Φ/54 = 15.7
CHAPTER 2
from the front face of the wall due to property Q u = (1.05)(860)(15.7) + (0.77)(920)(15.7) +
line issues. A geotechnical investigation found (0.53)(969)(15.7) = 33,300 lb = 33.3 kips
the retained soils to consist of silty sand. The
design engineer proposed an HA150 shaft Q a = 33,300 / 2 (FOS) = 16,650 lb = 16.6 kips
(1.5-inch solid square) with a 10/12/14 helix The horizontal and vertical components of the
plate configuration. The soil parameters and tieback force can be calculated in accordance
preliminary tieback design are shown on Figure with Section 2.8.1.
2.11.2.a. The engineer must determine the
allowable tieback capacity so tieback spacing
can be established.
Qu = ∑Ah(q’Nq)
A14” = 1.05 ft2
A12” = 0.77 ft2
A10” = 0.53 ft2
Retained Soils:
Silty Sand
c= 0
Φ = 30°
Figure 2.11.2.a
Example 3. Helical Tieback Capacity

2.12 Installation number is a national “Call Before You Dig” phone
number designated by the FCC to eliminate
the confusion of multiple “Call Before You Dig”
2.12.1 General Information numbers, minimize damages to underground
utilities and help save lives. One easy phone
CHAPTER 2
2.12.1.1 Preparation call to 811 quickly begins the process of getting
underground utility lines marked. Local One
Prior to any excavation or installation of helical Call Center personnel will then notify affected
piles or tiebacks, all utilities, pipelines, cables, utility companies, who will send crews to mark
or any other service lines or structures shall be underground lines for free.
identified and marked. The appropriate utility
locating agency should be contacted in advance Foremen and installers should be mindful of
of the project, allowing adequate notification potential hazards and understand the meanings
time frames mandated by the agency. and definitions of common tags provided by
the American National Standards Institute
Call number “811” is a federally mandated (ANSI) and the Occupational Safety and Health
FCC designated N-11 number. The 811 Administration (OSHA) (Figure 2.12.1.1.a).
ANSI Z535.5 Definitions:

• Danger: Indicate[s] a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury. The signal word "DANGER" is to be limited to the
most extreme situations. DANGER [signs] should not be used for property
damage hazards unless personal injury risk appropriate to these levels is
also involved.
• Warning: Indicate[s] a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury. WARNING [signs] should not be used for
property damage hazards unless personal injury risk appropriate to this level
is also involved.
• Caution: Indicate[s] a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION [signs] without a safety alert symbol
may be used to alert against unsafe practices that can result in property
damage only.
• Notice: [this header is] preferred to address practices not related to
personal injury. The safety alert symbol shall not be used with this signal
word. As an alternative to “NOTICE” the word “CAUTION” without the safety
alert symbol may be used to indicate a message not related to personal
injury.
The OSHA 1910.145 definitions for tags are as follows:

• Danger: "shall be used in major hazard situations where an immediate
hazard presents a threat of death or serious injury to employees. Danger
tags shall be used only in these situations."
• Warning: "may be used to represent a hazard level between "Caution" and

"Danger," instead of the required "Caution" tag, provided that they have a
signal word of "Warning," an appropriate major message, and otherwise
meet the general tag criteria of paragraph (f)(4) of this section."
• Caution: "shall be used in minor hazard situations where a non-immediate
or potential hazard or unsafe practice presents a lesser threat of employee
injury."
Figure 2.12.1.1.a

2.12.1.2 Crowd 2.12.1.3 Penetration Rate
During the installation of a helical pile or tieback, Helical piles or tiebacks should ideally be
axial force or “crowd” is applied to the pile/ advanced into the soil at a rate equal to the pitch
tieback shaft to advance the helix plates into the of a properly formed, conforming helix plate; i.e.,
soil. The density or stiffness of the soil dictates 3 inches per revolution. ICC-ES AC358 further
CHAPTER 2
the amount of crowd necessary to advance states that the pile advancement shall equal or
the pile to a depth where the helix plates can exceed 85 percent of the helix pitch per revolution
then provide the downward thrust. Multi-helix at the time of final torque measurement. Crowd
pile configurations often install easier than may be required to maintain adequate pile
single-helix configurations due to the thrust penetration or advancement. Installation speeds
provided by the additional helix plates. At a should be limited to less than 25 revolutions
depth typically just a few feet below the surface, per minute (rpm) within the last several feet of
little to no external force is necessary unless pile installation to minimize soil disturbance. It
deeper, dense soil layers or obstructions are is good practice to further reduce installation
encountered. Additional crowd may be required speeds to 10 rpm or less within the final 3 to
to either penetrate the dense layers or fully 5 feet so the operator can concentrate on pile
embed the helix plates into dense bearing soil. alignment, crowd and rate of advancement.
In soft soil conditions, it is important not to over- Installation speeds may be further restricted by
crowd or restrain the advancement of the pile. soil conditions or operating equipment.
Applying the proper crowd is critical to maintain
the penetration rate and minimize disturbance or
mixing of the soils, especially within the final 3
to 5 feet of installation prior to pile termination.
Installation equipment not only needs to be sized

correctly to provide the proper hydraulic flow
and hydraulic fluid pressure for the drive head,
but also to provide the proper crowd for pile
advancement. The lack of appropriate machine
weight during installation into dense soils or
weathered bedrock may limit pile penetration,
resulting in less than anticipated tensile or
compressive capacities.

2.12.2 Equipment
2.12.2.1 Drive Heads
FSI currently offers drive heads that range in
CHAPTER 2
capacity from 5,000 to 20,000 ft-lb of torque.
This range allows for installation of the most
common helical products to their maximum
torsional ratings. Larger capacity drive heads Figure 2.12.2.1.a
Skid steer
are available upon request.
Proper selection of the drive head should

consider the torsional rating of the helical shaft,
project installation torque requirements, and the
output pressure and flow rate of the hydraulic
system to be used. All drive heads have
optimum operating specifications that should be
partnered with an appropriate hydraulic system
to achieve maximum performance in the field.
FSI recommends that drive heads have a rated Figure 2.12.2.1.b
torque output capacity at least 15 percent higher Mini-excavator
than what is required by project specifications.
Hydraulic hoses and fittings should be rated

for the operating pressures required and
specified by the drive head manufacturer.
Hoses and fittings should be checked
periodically for damage and replaced when
in question. Failure to follow manufacturer’s
specifications may result in equipment failure
and/or personal injury. Figure 2.12.2.1.c
Backhoe
Drive heads are generally designed with bail
assemblies for mounting to machinery such as
skid steers (Figure 2.12.2.1.a), mini-excavators
(Figure 2.12.2.1.b), backhoes (Figure 2.12.2.1.c),
and full-size excavators (Figure 2.12.2.1.d).
Smaller, lighter-weight drive heads may also
be used with hand-held equipment for interior
or limited access installations. Machinery used
to power and operate drive heads should have
sufficient weight and structural capacity to handle
the output torque. A basic rule of thumb has
been a pound of machine weight for each ft-lb of
torque from the drive head. Although a somewhat
conservative rule, machine weight and structural
capacity become increasingly more important with
Figure 2.12.2.1.d
greater output torque. Excavator

The following machine specifications are required: (Figure 2.12.2.1.f) is secured against the ground, a
wall or other suitable structure or device capable
• The machine should have a bi-directional
of resisting the torsional forces transferred to
auxiliary circuit to power the drive head.
the end of the torque arm by the drive head.
• Hydraulic fluid pressure output from the circuit Hand-held equipment is typically limited to a
CHAPTER 2
used to power the drive head should meet the maximum installation torque of 6,000 ft-lb, or less.
drive head specifications. On some machines, Consult FSI with any questions regarding the rated
it may be necessary to adjust the relief valve capacities of FSI hand-held equipment.
on the machine’s auxiliary system hydraulic
pump to provide the appropriate pressure
specified by the drive head manufacturer.
• The flow rate of hydraulic fluid to the drive head

should meet the drive head specifications for
optimum performance during installation.
• The machine should have adequate weight to

resist torsional forces from the drive head and
to allow for proper crowd during installation.
FSI offers portable hand-held equipment for Figure 2.12.2.1.f

operating smaller, lighter-weight drive heads Torque arm
when access with machinery is not feasible. Installers and personnel in the immediate
The drive heads can be powered by auxiliary work area should be properly trained in
hydraulic circuits of machinery or by portable the safe operation and use of hand-held
hydraulic power packs. The power source equipment. The torque arm shall be properly
should meet the operating specifications of the restrained for the direction of arm rotation.
drive head. A portable, remote valve assembly Reversing the rotation also requires
allows for safe operation of the drive head when restraining of the torque arm in the opposite
used with the hand-held equipment. direction. Personnel in the work area
should understand the direction that the
torque arm will tend to swing and position
themselves in a safe location (considering
any possibility that the torque arm could
break free from its restraint). Appropriate
installation geometry should be maintained
during pile installation. The ideal position for
the torque arm is as follows:
1) Arm is fully extended and is restrained at

its maximum radius from the pile shaft.
Figure 2.12.2.1.e 2) Arm is at an angle which is perpendicular
Hand-held equipment
to the pile shaft.
The drive head is mounted to the frame of the
hand-held equipment (Figure 2.12.2.1.e) so that it Actual installation geometry is adjustable
can be supported and operated by at least two and will vary, but in no circumstance shall the
technicians. To provide the reaction for the output torque arm be placed at an angle in excess
torque, a telescoping torque arm is attached to the of 35 degrees from perpendicular and in no
frame of the hand-held equipment. The torque arm circumstance shall the torque arm restraint

be placed at a distance less than 7 feet from as for solid square shaft. The ends of round shaft
the axis of the pile shaft. The capacity of the helical piles generally slide into the product adaptors
hand-held equipment decreases significantly and are connected with temporary hitch pins or
when used outside of these parameters. The bolts for installation (Figure 2.12.2.2.b). Solid-stock
force that will be required to restrain the internal product adaptors may also be used for
CHAPTER 2
torque arm will also vary, but even within the certain sizes of the round shaft helical product line.
operation parameters just described, restraint The ends of square shaft helical piles and tiebacks
forces can approach 1,000 lb. The torque arm slide into a square, socket-like product adaptor
restraint is therefore recommended to be (Figure 2.12.2.2.c).
capable of resisting a force of at least 1,500 lb.
Lateral restraint is not only required at the end
of the torque arm. The drive head shall also be
restrained from lateral movement.
Drive heads used with hand-held installation

equipment should not be operated at speeds
exceeding 10 rpm. Operators shall be ready
at the controls and prepared to shut down
the equipment at any moment.
Failure to properly restrain and operate the

hand held installation equipment per these
guidelines can result in serious injury or death.
2.12.2.2 Installation Tooling
Installation tooling consists of the components that

are attached in-line between the drive head and the
helical pile, generally a hex adaptor and a product
adaptor. The drive head output shaft is typically a Figure 2.12.2.2.b
hexagonal shape with measurements ranging from Round shaft product adaptor
2 inches to 3 inches across flats. The hex adaptor

Installation tooling may also include an in-line
slides over and is pinned to the output shaft of the
torque monitoring device as discussed in the
drive head (Figure 2.12.2.2.a). The flange plate of the
following section.
Figure 2.12.2.2.a
Hex adaptor
hex adaptor has a bolt hole pattern with hole spacing

and diameters to allow bolting to the appropriate
product adaptor for the dimensions of helical pile
shaft to be installed. Product adaptors are available
for the various sizes of hollow round shaft as well Figure 2.12.2.2.c
Square shaft adaptor

2.12.2.3 Monitoring Torque
Monitoring torque is a key process during the

installation of helical piles since the installation
torque directly correlates to pile capacity in
accordance with the torque correlation method
CHAPTER 2
described in Section 2.7.3. A number of devices

are available to assist in determining torque and,
ultimately, the calculation of pile capacity. These
devices range from simple pressure gauges
to shear pin indicators to more sophisticated
electronic data acquisition systems. Figure 2.12.2.3.a2 Monitoring pressure gauges
while installing square shaft helical anchor
Dual hydraulic pressure gauges (Figures
2.12.2.3.a1 and 2.12.2.3.a2) can be used to The return line gauge is an indicator of the
measure the “pressure drop” across a hydraulic hydraulic system “back pressure”, which is
torque motor. This method is based on the variable with each machine and may average
principle that the work output of the torque from 50 psi to over 800 psi. Systems with high
motor is directly related to measurement of return line pressures may damage a hydraulic
the pressure drop across the motor as force torque motor. The installation of a “case drain” on
is applied. To measure the pressure drop, one the hydraulic torque motor can prevent damage
gauge is placed in line with the feed from the to the motor seal. A case drain line is simply
hydraulic pump or machine to the drive head. directed back to the hydraulic fluid reservoir.
A second gauge is placed in line with the Some operators choose to use a single gauge
return from the drive head back to the pump. on the feed line side only, rather than to use a
second gauge to measure back pressure. This
can result in decreased accuracy and over-
estimation of applied torque if back pressure is
under-estimated or ignored all together.
Differential pressure cylinders such as the

DP-1, are hydraulic cylinders with opposing
pistons within the cylinder body that measure
the differential pressure on a single gauge.
Similar to the use of dual pressure gauges, the
determination of torque is based on the pressure
drop across the motor and, subsequently, the
Figure 2.12.2.3.a1 differential pressure to torque correlation.
Dual pressure gauges
Differential pressure gauge technology
The return line pressure is subtracted from the is based on similar principals as the DP-1.
feed line pressure resulting in the determination Differential pressure gauges still measure the
of “differential” pressure. The installation feed and return line pressures to determine the
torque can be calculated relative to the pressure drop across the motor, but with ports
differential pressure by applying the gear motor for the lines within a single-gauge body. This
multiplier (GMM) provided by the drive head differential pressure, as in the case of the Tru
manufacturer. Most drive head manufacturers Torque model (Figure 2.12.2.3.b), is related to
provide correlation charts for quick conversion torque by the GMM for a specific drive head. The
of differential pressure to torque.

Shear pin torque limiters are mechanical in-
line devices consisting of two independent plate
assemblies mounted to a central shaft, but allowed
to rotate independently. Each plate has a series of
holes around the perimeter that allow for insertion
CHAPTER 2
of steel pins with a given shear strength. The pins
are placed in the holes of the top plate to extend
past the interface between plates and into the
holes of the bottom plate. The pins bridge across
the interface and restrict the independent rotation
of the plates until sufficient torque is applied. The
Figure 2.12.2.3.b pins will theoretically shear simultaneously when
Tru Torque gauge
the torque applied exceeds the summed capacity
dial face then provides a reading of torque rather rating of the pins. For example, if 3,000 ft-lb of
than pressure. A different differential pressure torque is required for a helical pile installation, six
gauge is therefore needed for each drive head. pins rated at 500 ft-lb each would be inserted into
the housing. The pins should shear simultaneously
Electronic pressure indicators measure the
when 3,000 ft-lb of torque is reached.
feed and return line pressures with electronic
pressure transducers. Low voltage power is Mechanical dial indicators are in-line mechanical
supplied to the unit by either a portable battery devices consisting of a torsion bar mounted
pack or a direct connection to an appropriate between two separate, bolted flange plates. An
low voltage source generated by the installation in-line dial indicator measures the twist of the
equipment. Instead of analog gauges, electronic torsion bar and reads torque in units of ft-lb on the
indicators such as the PT Tracker by Marian dial gauge. This device can be used to establish a
Technologies (Figure 2.12.2.3.c) typically have torque correlation between pressure gauges and
a digital screen output to provide a direct a specific drive head through dynamic testing.
reading of torque, which is generated by a pre-
programmed relationship of the pressure drop
across the motor and the GMM for the drive
head being used. Some units have a selector
switch that allows for torque readings with
various motors. Some models also allow for
data acquisition and/or blue tooth technology.
Figure 2.12.2.3.d
Shaft twist
The shaft twist method is simply a visual

observation of the shaft deformation or twist that
occurs with square bar helical products (Figure
2.12.2.3.d) during installation. With this method,
the installer must know the range of torque
required to initiate plastic deformation in the
Figure 2.12.2.3.c shaft for the given product. This method does
PT tracker

not provide an accurate or reliable indication 2.12.3 Installation Guidelines
of torque and should not be used solely as a
measure or estimate of applied torque.
2.12.3.1 New Construction
Electronic torque transducers such as the Pro-
Dig intelli-Tork® are placed in line with the tool Installing the Lead Section:
CHAPTER 2
string. Torque is a true real time measurement and • Align the lead section with the product adaptor
is generated continually during the installation of and install the temporary hitch pins or bolts.
a helical pile or tieback. The intelli-Tork (Figures • Position the installation equipment and pile
2.12.2.3.e1 and 2.12.2.3.e2) measures the torque directly over the marked location.
applied between two flanges and transmits the
torque reading to a hand held unit for display • Apply a small amount of crowd to seat the pile
and logging. A built in torque sensor within the shaft tip into the soil.
housing of the flanged instrument transfers data • Use a level or digital gauge to plumb or set the
via blue tooth wireless technology to the PDA installation angle (batter) of the pile shaft.
system. The PDA based system and software
• Advance the pile in a continuous even manner,
making periodic adjustments to maintain
alignment throughout the installation. Record
torque as required by project specifications
or as dictated by changing soil conditions.
Although the final installation torque is
arguably the most critical, it is good practice
to record pressure or torque during the entire
installation. This allows for development of a
relative soil strength profile with depth. The
Figure 2.12.2.3.e1
Electronic torque transducer interval of readings is often dictated by the soil
provide a remote visual indication of the torque variability; i.e., more readings should be taken
during the installation. Software provided with the in heterogeneous soils and fewer readings are
instrument has the ability to log the torque, depth required in uniform, homogeneous soils. At a
and installation angle. Torque transducers can be minimum, record torque for every lead section
re-calibrated as needed to ensure accuracy. In and extension.
turn, a properly calibrated torque transducer can • Terminate installation of the lead section before
be used to calibrate analog gauge systems relative the product adaptor penetrates the soil.
to differential pressure.
• Remove the hitch pins or bolts and carefully
remove and raise the drive head.
Installing Extension Sections:

• Place the first extension on top of the buried
lead. Align the coupler bolt holes with the bolt
holes of the lead section. Use a spud wrench
if necessary.
• Install coupler bolts taking care not to

damage threads. Tighten nuts to snug
condition (Figure 2.12.3.1.a).
Figure 2.12.2.3.e2 Torque transducer providing direct reading of
torque for helical pile project at Reagan National Airport

CHAPTER 2
Figure 2.12.3.1.a Figure 2.12.3.1.b
Install coupler bolts Install new construction bracket
• Align the drive head and product adaptor over to achieve design elevation and tension loads
the extension shaft to allow for installation of will be applied, bolt holes should be drilled
hitch pins or bolts. using drills and drill fixtures as recommended
by FSI to maintain bolt hole size, location and
• Advance the extension and any additional
spacing tolerances.
extensions following the alignment adjustment
and coupling procedures described above. • Complete field installation logs.
Termination of Installation: Should field conditions present unanticipated

• Over the final 3 to 5 feet of installation, obstacles that require relocating of piles or
assuming depth and minimum torque tiebacks, consult the engineer of record for
requirements are being met, reduce rotational approval before proceeding.
speed to approximately 10 rpm. Provide
proper alignment and crowd. Refer to the
Model Specifications for Helical Pile
Foundations in Appendix 2F for termination
criteria when the minimum overall length or
minimum torsional resistance is not met.
• Remove equipment from pile, establish top of

pile elevation and cut pile shaft to specified
elevation (if necessary).
• Install new construction bracket as specified

(Figure 2.12.3.1.b). For compression
applications, the new construction bracket
could technically be set on top of the pile
without bolting or welding. However, FSI feels
that it is good practice to provide positive
attachment of the bracket to the top of the pile
to prevent the bracket from being lifted off the
pile during concrete placement. Tack welds, a
single bolt, or use of compression-only plate
bracket assemblies are generally adequate for
this purpose. Where the top of pile has been cut

2.12.3.2 Retro-Fit Helical Piers do not require notching of the concrete,
but should still be prepared so the face of
Excavation: the footing has full contact with the back,
• Hand or machine-excavate to expose the vertical plate of the bracket.
bottom of the footing. Individual holes should
be approximately 3 feet square while a • Clean and prepare bottom of footing to allow
CHAPTER 2
continuous trench excavation should extend full contact and seating of the bracket.
at least 3 feet away from the structure. Installation of Helical Pier:
• Depth of excavation should locally extend 13 • Attach lead section to drive head and
inches below bottom of footing and 9 inches product adaptor.
back under bottom of footing where brackets • Place lead section’s first blade under the footing
will be placed (Figure 2.12.3.2.a). and the shaft of the lead 1½ inches away from
bottom edge of footing (Figure 2.12.3.2.c). This
will allow alignment of the lead to the required
Figure 2.12.3.2.a
Excavation at bracket
Follow OSHA Trench Safety Procedures.

Failure to follow trench safety procedures
could result in death or serious injury.
Preparation of Footing:
• Notch spread footings 16 to 22 inches wide
(depending upon width of retrofit bracket)
and approximately flush with the face of the
foundation wall (Figure 2.12.3.2.b). Thick
Figure 2.12.3.2.c
column footings or trench footings often Alignment of lead
angle of inclination of 3.0 ± 1.0 degrees from

vertical. As additional plates on the lead
section advance down the face of the footing
and pass the bottom of the footing, forward
crowd will be required to realign the shaft to the
appropriate inclination. In the case of a vertical
pile installation, a pilot hole is required to set
all plates of the lead below the bottom of the
footing before advancement of the pile. The
pile shaft is still set 1½ inches from the face of
Figure 2.12.3.2.b
the footing.
Footing preparation

• Advance lead section and extensions to design • Raise bracket to the footing and hold the
depth and minimum torque requirements. bracket in place while attaching the thread
rods and cap plate. A bracket RAYser™ is a
• Record pressure or torque readings. Although
great tool to hold the bracket in place during
the final installation torque is arguably the most
this operation (Figure 2.12.3.2.e).
critical, it is good practice to record pressure or
CHAPTER 2
torque during the entire installation. This allows
for development of a relative soil strength
profile with depth. The interval of readings is
often dictated by the soil variability; i.e., more
readings should be taken in heterogeneous
soils and fewer readings are required in uniform,
homogeneous soils. At a minimum, record
torque for every lead section and extension.
• If necessary, cut the last extension shaft to

an elevation approx. 13 inches above bottom
of footing.
Figure 2.12.3.2.e
Bracket RAYser™
• Ideally, the last coupler on the helical pile shall
be at least 23 inches below the bottom of • Tap the external sleeve down until the top
the footing to allow installation of the 30-inch flange rests on the bracket.
external sleeve.
• Install the cap plate and all thread rods and
Installation of Underpinning/Retrofit Bracket: tighten nuts to snug the bracket to the bottom
• Place external sleeve through bracket. of the footing (Figure 2.12.3.2.f).
• Lower bracket and external sleeve assembly

over the pier shaft with bracket bearing
plate facing away from the footing (Figure
2.12.3.2.d).
Figure 2.12.3.2.f
Install cap plate and rods
Figure 2.12.3.2.d • Remove bracket RAYser™, backfill and

Lower assembly over pile shaft
compact soil up to the bottom of the bracket.
• Rotate the bracket body 180 degrees toward
the footing.

Load transfer and Lift: • When possible, establish grades to allow positive
• Set lift cylinders and apply load to project surface drainage away from the structure.
specifications. Discontinue if structure begins
• Clean up and haul away construction debris
to lift prior to achieving the design working
from the piering operation.
load. Alternatively, load can be increased until
CHAPTER 2
the structure lifts and the desired elevation is Should field conditions present unanticipated
met (Figure 2.12.3.2.g). obstacles that require relocating any of
the proposed piers, consult the engineer of
record for approval before proceeding.
Figure 2.12.3.2.g
Set hydraulic lift cylinders
• Lock off and transfer load to piers by tightening

nuts down to cap plate.
• Remove lifting hardware and hydraulics.
• Complete field installation logs.
• Establish bench marks (if required).
Backfill and cleanup:

• Backfill holes or trenches with the excavated,
on-site material or imported soil.
• Follow proper backfill/compaction procedures

and tamp in maximum 6 to 12-inch lifts
depending upon type and weight of compaction
equipment (Figure 2.12.3.2.h).
Figure 2.12.3.2.h
Backfill and compact soil

2.12.3.3 Helical Tiebacks
Helical tiebacks can be installed using either

machine-mounted or hand-held drive heads. Basic
installation procedures consist of the following:
CHAPTER 2
• Attach lead section to product adaptor and
install hitch pin or bolt.
• Elevate lead section along with drive head

assembly and place tip of tieback at marked
location.
• Establish angle of inclination and align lead

section per design specifications.
• Provide minimal crowd to seat lead shaft tip.
• Install lead section while maintaining

installation angle.
• Connect extension section to the lead and

tighten bolted connection at coupler.
• Continue adding extensions until embedment

length and minimal torque requirements are
met. Refer to the Model Specifications for
Helical Anchor Foundations in Appendix 2F
for termination criteria when the minimum
overall length or minimum torsional
resistance is not met.
• Remove installation equipment and install

threaded transition assembly on end of
extension. Tighten coupling bolt.
• Install threaded rod into transition so threads

are fully engaged.
• Place wall plate, bracket or waler system over

threaded rod. Place nut on threaded rod and
tighten to bearing plate.
• Tighten nut to a predetermined torque to

correlate to an axial tensile force. For larger
projects, a calibrated hydraulic cylinder may
be used to pre-tension the tieback to the
design working load or to run a load test.
• Remove equipment and cut threaded rod.

APPENDIX 2A
HELICAL PRODUCT RATINGS, PROPERTIES AND DETAILS
Appendix 2A
Helical Product Ratings,
Properties and Details
Helical Pile Capacities Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
HA150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
HA175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
HP237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
HP287 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
HP288 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
HP350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HP450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
HP662 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
HP700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Helix Plate Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Helical Pile Capacities Summary
Maximum Shaft Max Allowable Capacity(4)

Installation Pn/Ω
Soil
Torque
Capacity(7)
Compression(3) Tension
APPENDIX 2A
Corroded(1,2)
Corroded(1,2)
Correlation
Galvanized
Galvanized
Corroded(1)
Corroded(1)
Max Rated
Allowable
Ultimate
Torque
Factor
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Kt T Qu Qa
(ft-1) (ft-lb) (kips) (kips) (kips) (kips) (kips) (kips) (kips) (kips)
HA150 10(5) 6,500 65.0 32.5 29.8(8) 27.0(8) 27.1(8) 29.8 27.0 27.1
HA175 10(5) 10,000 100.0 50.0 59.6(8) 54.1(8) 54.2(8) 59.6 54.1 54.2
HP237 10(6) 2,500 25.0 12.5 35.1 26.3 32.6 19.3 13.6 16.9
HP287 9(5) 5,600 50.4 25.2 55.8 45.2 52.9 30.6 23.6 27.6
Shaft
HP288 9(5) 7,900 71.1 35.5 74.0 63.6 71.1 41.6 34.1 38.1
HP350 7(5) 17,500 122.5 60.0 118.5 105.0 114.8 73.0 62.8 69.1
HP450 6(6) 22,000 132.0 66.0 123.3 109.1 119.3 59.1 50.8 56.7
HP662(9) N/A 35,000 N/A N/A 182.6 157.4 175.6 98.7 83.3 93.0
HP700(9) N/A 50,000 N/A N/A 246.9 220.5 239.6 135.0 118.8 130.5
(1) Corroded capacities include a 50-year scheduled sacrificial loss in thickness per ICC-ES AC358.
(2) Hot-dip galvanized coating in accordance with ASTM A123. Coatings on fasteners vary by product line. See individual shaft specification
sheets for more details.
(3) Allowable mechanical compression capacities consider continuous lateral soil confinement in soils with SPT blow counts ≥ 4. Piles with
exposed unbraced lengths or piles placed in weaker or fluid soils should be evaluated on a case by case basis by the project engineer.
(4) Listed mechanical capacities are for the shaft and coupled connections only. System capacity should also not exceed the installed
allowable torque-correlated soil capacity or the allowable capacity of the respective bracket (see additional bracket tables).
(5) Listed default Kt factors are consistent with those listed in ICC-ES AC358. These values are generally conservative. Site-specific Kt factors
can be determined for a given project with full-scale load testing.
(6) Listed Kt factors are those recommended by FSI. Site-specific Kt factors can be determined for a given project with full-scale load testing.
(7) Maximum ultimate soil capacity is the product of the torque correlation factor and the shaft maximum torque rating per the equation Qu = Kt x T.
The maximum allowable soil capacity for the HP350 shaft is limited to 60 kips per AC358. The maximum allowable soil capacity for all other
shaft sizes is obtained by dividing the maximum ultimate soil capacity by a factor of safety of 2.0. Although a factor of safety of 2.0 is commonly
used, a higher or lower factor of safety may be considered at the discretion of the helical pile designer or as dictated by local code requirements.
System capacity should also not exceed the mechanical capacity of the shaft or those listed in the respective bracket capacity tables.
(8) Square shaft piles may be considered for compression applications in soil profiles that offer sufficient continuous lateral support; e.g., in
soils with SPT blow counts ≥ 10. In profiles or conditions that limit pile stability, buckling analyses should be considered by the project
engineer, taking into account discontinuities and potential eccentricities created by the couplers.
(9) FSI’s larger diameter product lines are fully customized on a project specific basis. All values provided for these products are for general
informational purposes only. Actual capacities (including any related to installation torque) will vary based on several project specific
variables such as coupler details, end termination details, site specific soil profiles, and even material availability. Full scale load tests are
recommended to confirm soil capacities determined in the design phase of the project.
Rev. 10/14/16

HA150 Shaft Specifications and Capacities
Shaft Material: Helix Plates: Shaft Coupling Hardware:
1.50” round corner square bar ASTM A572 Grade 50 material (1) - Ø3/4” Grade 8 bolt with nut
ASTM A29 3/8” thick (standard) Mechanically galvanized per ASTM B695
Yield strength = 90 ksi (min) 1/2” thick (available)
Tensile strength = 115 ksi (min) Helix plate geometry conforming to Surface Finish of Shaft
APPENDIX 2A
ICC-ES AC358 Segments:

Available plain or hot-dip galvanized(2)
Plain Galvanized
Plain
Corroded(1) Corroded(1,2)
t (in) 1.500 1.464 1.490
G (in) 1.914 1.878 1.904
R (in) 0.250 0.232 0.245
A (in2) 2.20 2.10 2.17
Ix, Iy (in )
4
0.40 0.36 0.39
Iz (in4) 0.40 0.36 0.39
Sx, Sy (in )
3
0.53 0.49 0.52
Sz (in3) 0.41 0.38 0.41
Zx, Zy (in )
3
0.81 0.75 0.79
Zz (in )
3
0.77 0.72 0.75
rx, ry (in) 0.42 0.42 0.42
rz (in) 0.42 0.42 0.42
Shaft Max Allowable Compression Capacity(3,4) Pn/Ω (kips) 29.8 27.0 27.1
Shaft Max Allowable Tension Capacity Pn/Ω (kips)

(4)
29.8 27.0 27.1
Default Torque Correlation Factor(5) Kt = 10 (ft-1) Maximum Ultimate Soil Capacity(6) Qu = 65.0 (kips)
Maximum Installation Torque T = 6,500 (ft-lb) Maximum Allowable Soil Capacity(6) Qa = 32.5 (kips) FOS = 2.0
(1) Corroded properties and capacities include a 50-year scheduled sacrificial loss in thickness per ICC-ES AC358.
(2) Hot-dip galvanized coating in accordance with ASTM A123.
(3) Square shaft piles may be considered for compression applications in soil profiles that offer sufficient continuous lateral support; e.g., in soils
with SPT blow counts ≥ 10. In profiles or conditions that limit pile stability, buckling analyses should be considered by the project engineer,
taking into account discontinuities and potential eccentricities created by the couplers.
(4) Listed mechanical capacities are for the shaft and coupled connections only. System capacity should also not exceed the installed allowable
torque-correlated soil capacity or the allowable capacity of the respective bracket (see additional bracket tables).
(5) Listed default Kt factor is consistent with that listed in ICC-ES AC358. This value is generally conservative. Site-specific Kt factors can be
determined for a given project with full-scale load testing.
(6) Soil capacities listed are at maximum installation torque. Ultimate soil capacity is based on the equation Qu = Kt x T. Allowable soil capacity
is obtained by dividing the ultimate value by the appropriate factor of safety (Qa = Qu / FOS). FOS is most commonly taken as 2.0, although
a higher or lower FOS may be considered at the discretion of the helical pile designer or as dictated by local code or project requirements.


HA150NCB Bracket Specifications and Capacities
when used with the HA150 Helical Pile System
Bracket Sleeve Material:
Ø2.750” x 0.313” wall
ASTM A513 Type 5 Grade 1026
Yield strength = 70 ksi (min)
APPENDIX 2A
Tensile strength = 80 ksi (min)
Cap Plate Material:

3/4” x 6.00” square
ASTM A36
Bracket Hardware:
(1) - Ø3/4” Grade 8 bolt with nut
Mechanically galvanized per ASTM B695
Bracket Finish:
Concrete Bearing Area(5) (Compression) = 36.0 in2

Concrete Bearing Area(5) (Tension) = 30.1 in2
Allowable Bracket Capacity(4) Rn/Ω
Compression(3) Concrete Bearing(5) Tension Concrete Bearing(5)

(kips) (ksi) (kips) (ksi)
Plain 29.6 0.82 29.6 0.98
Plain Corroded(1) 24.9 0.70 24.9 0.84
Galvanized Corroded(1,2) 27.1 0.76 27.1 0.91
(4) Listed capacities include limiting mechanical capacities of the shaft when the shaft and bracket are combined as a system. System
capacity should also not exceed the installed allowable torque-correlated soil capacity (See Shaft Specifications and Capacities).
(5) Concrete bearing values provided are the uniform bearing stresses required to achieve the full corresponding bracket capacity. Allowable
concrete bearing is a function of several project specific variables including depth of embedment, edge distance, and concrete compressive
strength (f’c). When allowable concrete bearing stresses are lower than these values, corresponding bracket capacities can be obtained
by multiplying the actual allowable concrete bearing stress by the respective bearing areas provided, but should not exceed the capacities
listed in this table. Other concrete design checks including shear, bending, and punching of the supported structure are also project
specific and shall be the responsibility of the project engineer.

HA150 Helix Plate Net Bearing Areas
H-Style Plates
Plate
Area
Diameter
APPENDIX 2A
(ft2)
(inches)
6 0.18
8 0.33
10 0.53
12 0.77
14 1.05
16 1.38
V-Style Plates(1)
Plate
Area
Diameter
(ft2)
(inches)
6 0.16
8 0.30
10 0.47
12 0.68
14 0.92
16 1.20
(1) V-Style plates feature a special cut on the leading edge (or cutting edge). This edge is cut at two successive 45° angles to roughly simulate
a spiral. This is in addition to the 45° bevel on the leading edge which is a standard feature for helix plates of both styles. V-Style plates are
appropriate for use in applications where rocky or rubble-filled soils are anticipated, or where very dense layers need to be penetrated.

HA175 Shaft Specifications and Capacities
Shaft Material: Helix Plates: Shaft Coupling Hardware:
1.75” round corner square bar ASTM A572 Grade 50 material (2) - Ø3/4” Grade 8 bolts with nuts
ASTM A29 3/8” thick (standard) Mechanically galvanized per ASTM B695
Tensile strength = 115 ksi (min) Helix plate geometry conforming to Surface Finish of Shaft
APPENDIX 2A
ICC-ES AC358 Segments:
Plain Galvanized
Plain
t (in) 1.750 1.714 1.740
G (in) 2.268 2.232 2.258
R (in) 0.250 0.232 0.245
A (in2) 3.01 2.89 2.98
Ix, Iy (in )
4
0.75 0.69 0.73
Iz (in4) 0.75 0.69 0.73
Sx, Sy (in )
3
0.85 0.80 0.84
Sz (in3) 0.66 0.62 0.65
Zx, Zy (in )
3
1.30 1.22 1.27
Zz (in )
3
1.23 1.16 1.21
rx, ry (in) 0.50 0.49 0.50
rz (in) 0.50 0.49 0.50
Shaft Max Allowable Tension Capacity Pn/Ω (kips)

(4)
59.6 54.1 54.2
(3) Square shaft piles may be considered for compression applications in soil profiles that offer sufficient continuous lateral support; e.g., in soils
with SPT blow counts ≥ 10. In profiles or conditions that limit pile stability, buckling analyses should be considered by the project engineer,
taking into account discontinuities and potential eccentricities created by the couplers.


HA175NCB Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Ø3.000” x 0.313” wall
APPENDIX 2A
Cap Plate Material:

3/4” x 6.00” square
ASTM A36
Bracket Hardware:
(2) - Ø3/4” Grade 8 bolts with nuts
Bracket Finish:


Plain 59.2 1.64 54.3 1.88

2 Bolt
Plain Corroded(1) 49.8 1.40 48.7 1.71
Plain 29.6 0.82 29.6 1.02

1 Bolts
Plain Corroded(1) 24.9 0.70 24.9 0.87

HA175NCB8 Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Ø3.000” x 0.313” wall
APPENDIX 2A
Cap Plate Material:

3/4” x 8.00” square
ASTM A36
Bracket Hardware:
Bracket Finish:


Plain 49.6 0.78 44.2 0.78

2 Bolt
Plain Corroded(1) 44.7 0.70 39.7 0.70
Plain 29.6 0.46 29.6 0.52

1 Bolts
Plain Corroded(1) 24.9 0.39 24.9 0.44

HA175 Helix Plate Net Bearing Areas
H-Style Plates
Plate
Area
Diameter
APPENDIX 2A
(ft2)
(inches)
6 0.18
8 0.33
10 0.52
12 0.76
14 1.05
16 1.38
V-Style Plates(1)
Plate
Area
Diameter
(ft2)
(inches)
6 0.16
8 0.29
10 0.46
12 0.67
14 0.92
16 1.20

HP237 Shaft Specifications and Capacities
Shaft Material: Helix Plates: Surface Finish of Shaft
Ø2.375” x 0.154” wall ASTM A572 Grade 50 material Segments:
ASTM A500 Grade B or C 5/16” thick (standard) Available plain or hot-dip galvanized(2)
Tensile strength = 70 ksi (min) Helix plate geometry conforming to
APPENDIX 2A
ICC-ES AC358
Shaft Coupler Material:
Ø2.750” x 0.156” wall Shaft Coupling Hardware: Nominal Thickness 0.154 (in)
ASTM A513 Type 5 Grade 1026 (2) - Ø5/8” ASTM A325 bolts with nuts
Design Thickness (3)
0.143 (in)
Yield strength = 70 ksi (min) Hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A153
Plain Galvanized
Plain
OD (in) 2.375 2.339 2.365
t (in) 0.143 0.107 0.133
ID (in) 2.089 2.125 2.099
A (in2) 1.00 0.75 0.93
I (in )
4
0.63 0.47 0.58
S (in3) 0.53 0.40 0.49
Z (in )
3
0.71 0.53 0.66
r (in) 0.79 0.79 0.79
Shaft Max Allowable Compression Capacity (4,5)

Pn/Ω (kips) 35.1 26.3 32.6
Shaft Max Allowable Tension Capacity(5) Pn/Ω (kips) 19.3 13.6 16.9
Torque Correlation Factor(6) Kt = 10 (ft-1) Maximum Ultimate Soil Capacity(7) Qu = 25.0 (kips)
(3) Design thickness for HSS and Pipe based on 93% of nominal thickness per AISC.
(6) Listed Kt factor is that recommended by FSI. Site-specific Kt factors can be determined for a given project with full-scale load testing.
Rev. 5/26/15

HP238NCB Bracket Specifications and Capacities
when used with the HP237 Helical Pile System
Ø2.750” x 0.156” wall
APPENDIX 2A
Cap Plate Material:

1/2” x 4.00” square
ASTM A36
Bracket Hardware:
(2) - Ø5/8” ASTM A325 bolts with nuts
Hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A153
Bracket Finish:


Plain 35.1 2.19 19.3 1.92

2 Bolts
Plain Corroded(1) 26.3 1.67 13.6 1.39
Plain 35.1 2.19 9.7 0.96

1 Bolt
Plain Corroded(1) 26.3 1.67 6.8 0.70
Plain 35.1 2.19 0 0

0 Bolts(5)
Plain Corroded(1) 26.3 1.67 0 0
Galvanized Corroded(1,2) 32.6 2.05 0 0
(3) Allowable compression capacities consider continuous lateral soil confinement in soils with SPT blow counts ≥ 4. Piles with exposed
unbraced lengths or piles placed in weaker or fluid soils should be evaluated on a case by case basis by the project engineer.
(5) Applications utilizing no bolts should either be tack welded or utilize some other mechanism to immobilize the bracket and maintain firm
contact between the cap plate and pile shaft throughout construction and concrete placement.
Rev. 5/26/15

HP238B2 Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Bracket:
Weldment manufactured from 3/8”
ASTM A36 plate.
APPENDIX 2A
Integrated External Sleeve:
Ø2.875” x 0.203” wall x 20” long
ASTM A500 Grade B or C
Cap Plate:
1” x 3.00” x 9.00” ASTM A572 Grade 50
with confining ring welded to one side.
Bracket Hardware(3):
(2) - Ø3/4” x 16” long all-thread rod
Grade B7, tensile strength = 125 ksi (min)
Electrozinc plated per ASTM B633
Bracket Finish:
Allowable Bracket Capacity(4,5,6,7)

Rn/Ω
(kips)
Plain 10.9
Plain Corroded (1) 8.3
Galvanized
10.2
Corroded (1,2)
(3) Optional hardware utilizes similar sized contour (coil) thread made from AISI 1045, tensile strength = 120 ksi. Slightly lower tensile strength
material does not govern the listed capacities.
(4) Brackets shall be used for support of structures that are considered to be fixed from translation. Structures that are not fixed from
translation shall be braced in some manner prior to installing retrofit brackets systems.
(5) Allowable capacities consider continuous lateral soil confinement in soils with SPT blow counts ≥ 4. Piles with exposed unbraced lengths or piles
placed in weaker or fluid soils should be evaluated on a case by case basis by the project engineer.
(6) Concrete bearing assumes a minimum compressive strength (f’c) of 2,500 psi. Local concrete bending and other local design checks should be
evaluated on a case by case basis by the project engineer.
(7) Listed allowable capacities are for the specific shaft/bracket combination shown. System capacity should also not exceed the installed
torque-correlated soil capacity (See Shaft Specifications and Capacities).

HP238BML Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Bracket:
Weldment manufactured from 3/8” and 1”
ASTM A36 plate.
APPENDIX 2A

Ø2.875” x 0.203” wall x 15” long
Bracket Hardware:
(1) - Ø11/4” x 6” long lifting bolt
Grade 5, tensile strength = 120 ksi (min)
Available electrozinc plated per ASTM B633
or hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A153
Bracket Finish:

Rn/Ω
(kips)
Plain 6.0
Galvanized
5.6
Corroded (1,2)
(3) Brackets shall be used for support of structures that are considered to be fixed from translation. Structures that are not fixed from translation
shall be braced in some manner prior to installing retrofit brackets systems.
(5) Concrete bearing assumes a minimum compressive strength (f’c) of 2,500 psi. Local concrete bending and other local design checks should
be evaluated on a case by case basis by the project engineer.

HP237 Helix Plate Net Bearing Areas
H-Style Plates
Plate
Area
Diameter
APPENDIX 2A
(ft2)
(inches)
6 0.17
8 0.32
10 0.51
12 0.75
14 1.04
16 1.37
V-Style Plates(1)
Plate
Area
Diameter
(ft2)
(inches)
6 0.15
8 0.29
10 0.46
12 0.67
14 0.92
16 1.20

APPENDIX 2A
ICC-ES AC358
ASTM A513 Type 5 Grade 1026 (2) - Ø3/4” Grade 8 bolts with nuts
0.189 (in)
Yield strength = 70 ksi (min) Electrozinc plated per ASTM B633
Plain Galvanized
Plain
OD (in) 2.875 2.839 2.865
t (in) 0.189 0.153 0.179
ID (in) 2.497 2.533 2.507
A (in2) 1.59 1.29 1.51
I (in )
4
1.45 1.17 1.37
S (in3) 1.01 0.82 0.96
Z (in )
3
1.37 1.11 1.29
r (in) 0.95 0.95 0.95

Pn/Ω (kips) 55.8 45.2 52.9

Ø3.500” x 0.250” wall
APPENDIX 2A
Cap Plate Material:

3/4” x 6.00” square
ASTM A36
Bracket Hardware:
Bracket Finish:


Plain 55.8 1.55 30.6 1.16

2 Bolts
Plain Corroded(1) 45.2 1.27 23.6 0.91
Plain 55.8 1.55 15.3 0.58

1 Bolt
Plain Corroded(1) 45.2 1.27 11.8 0.45
Plain 55.8 1.55 0 0

0 Bolts(5)

HP288NCB8 Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Ø3.500” x 0.250” wall
APPENDIX 2A
Cap Plate Material:

3/4” x 8.00” square
ASTM A36
Bracket Hardware:
Bracket Finish:


Plain 47.9 0.75 30.6 0.56

2 Bolts
Plain Corroded(1) 43.1 0.68 23.6 0.44
Plain 47.9 0.75 15.3 0.28

1 Bolt
Plain Corroded(1) 43.1 0.68 11.8 0.22
Plain 47.9 0.75 0 0

0 Bolts(5)

HP288NCBE Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Cap Plate Material:
3/4” x 6.00” square
ASTM A36
APPENDIX 2A
1/2” square bar stock with tapped
hole and Ø1/4” retention bolt
Bracket Finish:

Concrete Bearing Area(6) (Tension) = N/A

Plain 54.0 1.10 0 0
(5) Supplied bracket hardware does not contribute to the system strength and is only intended to immobilize the bracket. Other methods, such
as tack welds, may be substituted to maintain firm contact between the cap plate and pile shaft throughout construction and concrete
placement at the discretion of the project engineer.

HP288NCBE8 Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Cap Plate Material:
3/4” x 8.00” square
ASTM A36
APPENDIX 2A
Bracket Finish:


Plain 47.9 0.75 0 0

FS288B Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Bracket:
Weldment manufactured from 1/4”, 3/8”, and 1/2” ASTM A36 plate.
External Sleeve:
APPENDIX 2A
Ø3.500” x 0.216” wall x 30” long
with welded collar or trumpet flare at one end.
Cap Plate:
1” x 5.00” x 9.00” ASTM A572 Grade 50
Bracket Finish:

Rn/Ω
(kips)
Plain 25.5
Galvanized
24.2
Corroded (1,2)

FS288BL Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Bracket:
Weldment manufactured from 1/4”, 3/8”, and 1/2”
ASTM A36 plate.
APPENDIX 2A
External Sleeve:
Ø3.500” x 0.216” wall x 30” long
Cap Plate:
1” x 5.00” x 9.00” ASTM A572 Grade 50
Bracket Finish:

Rn/Ω
(kips)
Plain 25.5
Galvanized
24.2
Corroded (1,2)

Bracket:
ASTM A36 plate.
APPENDIX 2A
Ø3.500” x 0.216” wall x 20” long
Cap Plate:
1” x 4.00” x 9.00” ASTM A572 Grade 50
Bracket Finish:

Rn/Ω
(kips)
Plain 21.0
Galvanized
19.9
Corroded (1,2)

HP288BML Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Bracket:
ASTM A36 plate.
APPENDIX 2A

Ø3.500” x 0.216” wall x 20” long
Bracket Hardware:
(1) - Ø11/4” x 6” long lifting bolt with nut
Grade 5, tensile strength = 120 ksi (min)
Available electrozinc plated per ASTM B633
or hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A153
Bracket Finish:

Rn/Ω
(kips)
Plain 12.0
Galvanized
11.4
Corroded (1,2)

H-Style Plates
Plate
Area
Diameter
APPENDIX 2A
(ft2)
(inches)
6 0.15
8 0.30
10 0.50
12 0.74
14 1.02
16 1.35
V-Style Plates(1)
Plate
Area
Diameter
(ft2)
(inches)
6 0.14
8 0.28
10 0.45
12 0.66
14 0.91
16 1.19

APPENDIX 2A
ICC-ES AC358
ASTM A513 Type 5 Grade 1026 (2) - Ø3/4” Grade 8 bolts with nuts
0.257 (in)
Plain Galvanized
Plain
OD (in) 2.875 2.839 2.865
t (in) 0.257 0.221 0.247
ID (in) 2.361 2.397 2.371
A (in2) 2.11 1.82 2.03
I (in )
4
1.83 1.57 1.76
S (in3) 1.27 1.10 1.23
Z (in )
3
1.77 1.52 1.70
r (in) 0.93 0.93 0.93

Pn/Ω (kips) 74.0 63.6 71.1

Ø3.500” x 0.250” wall
APPENDIX 2A
Cap Plate Material:

3/4” x 6.00” square
ASTM A36
Bracket Hardware:
Bracket Finish:


Plain 64.0 1.78 41.6 1.58

2 Bolts
Plain Corroded(1) 57.5 1.62 34.1 1.31
Plain 64.0 1.78 20.8 0.79

1 Bolt
Plain Corroded(1) 57.5 1.62 17.0 0.66
Plain 64.0 1.78 0 0

0 Bolts(5)

Ø3.500” x 0.250” wall
APPENDIX 2A
Cap Plate Material:

3/4” x 8.00” square
ASTM A36
Bracket Hardware:
Bracket Finish:


Plain 47.9 0.75 41.6 0.77

2 Bolts
Plain Corroded(1) 43.1 0.68 34.1 0.63
Plain 47.9 0.75 20.8 0.38

1 Bolt
Plain Corroded(1) 43.1 0.68 17.0 0.32
Plain 47.9 0.75 0 0

0 Bolts(5)

Cap Plate Material:
3/4” x 6.00” square
ASTM A36
APPENDIX 2A
Bracket Finish:


Plain 64.0 1.78 0 0

Cap Plate Material:
3/4” x 8.00” square
ASTM A36
APPENDIX 2A
Bracket Finish:


Plain 47.9 0.75 0 0

Bracket:
ASTM A36 plate.
APPENDIX 2A
External Sleeve:
Ø3.500” x 0.216” wall x 30” long
Cap Plate:
1” x 5.00” x 9.00” ASTM A572 Grade 50
Bracket Finish:

Rn/Ω
(kips)
Plain 28.8
Galvanized
27.9
Corroded (1,2)

Bracket:
ASTM A36 plate.
APPENDIX 2A
External Sleeve:
Ø3.500” x 0.216” wall x 30” long
Cap Plate:
1” x 5.00” x 9.00” ASTM A572 Grade 50
Bracket Finish:

Rn/Ω
(kips)
Plain 29.2
Galvanized
28.2
Corroded (1,2)

Bracket:
ASTM A36 plate.
APPENDIX 2A
Ø3.500” x 0.216” wall x 20” long
Cap Plate:
1” x 4.00” x 9.00” ASTM A572 Grade 50
Bracket Finish:

Rn/Ω
(kips)
Plain 28.8
Galvanized
27.9
Corroded (1,2)

H-Style Plates
Plate
Area
Diameter
APPENDIX 2A
(ft2)
(inches)
6 0.15
8 0.30
10 0.50
12 0.74
14 1.02
16 1.35
V-Style Plates(1)
Plate
Area
Diameter
(ft2)
(inches)
6 0.14
8 0.28
10 0.45
12 0.66
14 0.91
16 1.19

APPENDIX 2A
ICC-ES AC358
ASTM A513 Type 5 Grade 1026 (4) - Ø1” Grade 5 bolts with nuts
0.316 (in)
Plain Galvanized
Plain
OD (in) 3.500 3.464 3.490
t (in) 0.316 0.28 0.306
ID (in) 2.868 2.904 2.876
A (in2) 3.16 2.80 3.06
I (in )
4
4.05 3.58 3.91
S (in3) 2.31 2.07 2.24
Z (in )
3
3.21 2.85 3.11
r (in) 1.13 1.13 1.13
(7) Soil capacities listed are at maximum installation torque. Ultimate soil capacity is based on the equation Qu = Kt x T. Allowable soil capacity is
obtained by dividing the ultimate capacity by an appropriate factor of safety, but should not exceed 60 kips per AC358. Although a factor of
safety of 2.0 is commonly used, a higher or lower factor of safety may be considered at the discretion of the helical pile designer or as dictated
by local code requirements. System capacity should also not exceed the mechanical capacity of the shaft or those listed in the respective
bracket capacity tables.
Rev. 10/14/16

Ø4.250” x 0.313” wall
APPENDIX 2A
Cap Plate Material:

3/4” x 7.00” square
ASTM A36
Bracket Hardware:
(2) - Ø1” Grade 5 bolts with nuts
Bracket Finish:


Plain 67.6 1.38 64.2 1.85

2 Bolts
Plain Corroded(1) 60.8 1.25 58.6 1.71
Plain 67.6 1.38 26.7 0.77

1 Bolt
Plain Corroded(1) 60.8 1.25 22.7 0.66
Plain 67.6 1.38 0 0

0 Bolts(5)
Rev. 10/14/16

Ø4.250” x 0.313” wall
APPENDIX 2A
Cap Plate Material:

3/4” x 8.00” square
ASTM A36
Bracket Hardware:
(2) - Ø1” Grade 5 bolts with nuts
Bracket Finish:


Plain 57.6 0.90 57.3 1.15

2 Bolts
Plain Corroded(1) 51.9 0.82 51.5 1.05
Plain 57.6 0.90 26.7 0.54

1 Bolt
Plain Corroded(1) 51.9 0.82 22.7 0.46
Plain 57.6 0.90 0 0

0 Bolts(5)
Rev. 10/14/16

Cap Plate Material:
3/4” x 7.00” square
ASTM A36
APPENDIX 2A
Bracket Finish:


Plain 67.6 1.38 0 0

Cap Plate Material:
3/4” x 8.00” square
ASTM A36
APPENDIX 2A
Bracket Finish:


Plain 57.6 0.90 0 0

HP350BS Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Bracket:
Weldment manufactured from 3/8” and 1/2” ASTM A36 plate.
External Sleeve:
APPENDIX 2A
Ø4.000” x 0.226” wall x 30” long

with welded collar at one end.
Cap Plate:
1-1/4” x 4.00” x 8.50” ASTM A572 Grade 50
with capture plate welded to one side.
Bracket Hardware:
Bracket Finish:

Rn/Ω
(kips)
Plain 50.7
Galvanized
49.2
Corroded (1,2)
Rev. 10/14/16

HP350B Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Bracket:
Weldment manufactured from 3/8” and 1/2”
ASTM A36 plate.
APPENDIX 2A
Concrete Anchorage(7) (Optional):
Cap Plate:
1-1/4” x 4.00” x 8.50” ASTM A572 Grade 50
with capture plate welded to one side.
Bracket Hardware:
Bracket Finish:

Rn/Ω
NO Adhesive WITH Adhesive

Anchors Anchors(7)
(kips) (kips)
Plain 36.5 45.0
Plain Corroded (1) 32.6 40.2
Galvanized
35.4 43.7
Corroded (1,2)
(7) Specified anchors installed to a minimum embedment of 7.5” into concrete with a minimum compressive strength f’c = 2,500 psi utilizing
Simpson AT adhesive.

H-Style Plates
Plate
Area
Diameter
APPENDIX 2A
(ft2)
(inches)
6 0.13
8 0.28
10 0.48
12 0.72
14 1.00
16 1.33
V-Style Plates(1)
Plate
Area
Diameter
(ft2)
(inches)
6* 0.12
8 0.26
10 0.43
12 0.65
14 0.89
16 1.18
a spiral. This is in addition to the 45° bevel on the leading edge which is a standard feature for helix plates of both styles. V-Style plates
are appropriate for use in applications where rocky or rubble-filled soils are anticipated, or where very dense layers need to be penetrated.
Some smaller plate diameters indicated by an asterisk (*), are not typically available in a V-Style.

APPENDIX 2A
ICC-ES AC358
ASTM A513 Type 5 Grade 1026 (4) - Ø1-1/8” Grade 5 bolts with nuts
0.313 (in)
Plain Galvanized
Plain
OD (in) 4.500 4.464 4.490
t (in) 0.313 0.277 0.303
ID (in) 3.874 3.910 3.884
A (in2) 4.12 3.64 3.99
I (in )
4
9.07 8.02 8.78
S (in3) 4.03 3.59 3.91
Z (in )
3
5.50 4.86 5.32
r (in) 1.48 1.48 1.48

Pn/Ω (kips) 123.3 109.1 119.3
Torque Correlation Factor(6) Kt = 6 (ft-1) Maximum Ultimate Soil Capacity(7) Qu = 132.0 (kips)
(6) Listed Kt factor is that recommended by FSI. Site-specific Kt factors can be determined for a given project with full-scale load testing.

Ø5.000” x 0.188” wall
APPENDIX 2A
Cap Plate Material:

3/4” x 8.00” square
ASTM A36
Bracket Hardware:
(2) - Ø1-1/8” Grade 5 bolts with nuts
Bracket Finish:


Plain 80.4 1.26 47.0 1.06

2 Bolts
Plain Corroded(1) 72.5 1.14 37.0 0.84
Plain 80.4 1.26 16.0 0.36

1 Bolt
Plain Corroded(1) 72.5 1.14 12.4 0.28
Plain 80.4 1.26 0 0

0 Bolts(5)
Rev. 8/21/14

Cap Plate Material:
3/4” x 8.00” square
ASTM A36
APPENDIX 2A
Bracket Finish:


Plain 80.4 1.26 0 0

H-Style Plates
Plate
Area
Diameter
APPENDIX 2A
(ft2)
(inches)
8 0.24
10 0.43
12 0.67
14 0.96
16 1.29
V-Style Plates(1)
Plate
Area
Diameter
(ft2)
(inches)
8* 0.22
10 0.40
12 0.62
14 0.87
16 1.15

Shaft Material(6): Helix Plates(6): Surface Finish of Shaft
Yield strength = 60 ksi (min) Helix plate geometry conforming to
Tensile strength = 70 ksi (min) ICC-ES AC358
APPENDIX 2A
Shaft Coupler Material(6): Shaft Coupling Hardware(6):
Ø6.000” x 0.375” wall (4) - Ø1-3/4” ASTM A307 bolts with nuts
Nominal Thickness 0.280 (in)
ASTM A513 Type 5 Grade 1026 Electrozinc plated per ASTM B633
0.261 (in)
Plain Galvanized
Plain
OD (in) 6.625 6.589 6.615
t (in) 0.261 0.225 0.251
ID (in) 6.103 6.139 6.113
A (in2) 5.22 4.50 5.02
I (in )
4
26.46 22.80 25.44
S (in3) 7.99 6.92 7.69
Z (in )
3
10.58 9.12 10.17
r (in) 2.25 2.25 2.25

Pn/Ω (kips) 182.6 157.4 175.6
Torque Correlation Factor(6) Kt = N/A (ft-1) Maximum Ultimate Soil Capacity(6) Qu = N/A (kips)
Maximum Installation Torque(6) T = 35,000 (ft-lb) Maximum Allowable Soil Capacity(6) Qa = N/A (kips)
soil capacity or the allowable capacity of the respective bracket (see additional bracket tables).
informational purposes only. Actual capacities (including any related to installation torque) will vary based on several project specific variables
such as coupler details, end termination details, site specific soil profiles, and even material availability. Full scale load tests are recommended
to confirm soil capacities determined in the design phase of the project.
Rev. 5/26/15

H-Style Plates
Plate
Area
Diameter
APPENDIX 2A
(ft2)
(inches)
10 0.31
12 0.55
14 0.83
16 1.16
V-Style Plates(1)
Plate
Area
Diameter
(ft2)
(inches)
10* 0.29
12 0.51
14 0.77
16 1.06

Shaft Material(6): Helix Plates(6): Surface Finish of Shaft
ASTM A252 Grade 3 1/2” thick (standard) Available plain or hot-dip galvanized(2)
Yield strength = 60 ksi (min) Helix plate geometry conforming to
Tensile strength = 70 ksi (min) ICC-ES AC358
APPENDIX 2A
Shaft Coupler Material(6): Shaft Coupling Hardware(6):
Ø7.750” x 0.313” wall (4) - Ø2” ASTM A307 bolts with nuts
Nominal Thickness 0.362 (in)
ASTM A513 Type 5 Grade 1026 Electrozinc plated per ASTM B633
0.337 (in)
Plain Galvanized
Plain
OD (in) 7.000 6.964 6.990
t (in) 0.337 0.301 0.327
ID (in) 6.326 6.362 6.336
A (in2) 7.05 6.30 6.84
I (in )
4
39.25 35.04 38.08
S (in3) 11.21 10.06 10.89
Z (in )
3
14.97 13.37 14.53
r (in) 2.36 2.36 2.36

Pn/Ω (kips) 246.9 220.5 239.6
Torque Correlation Factor(6) Kt = N/A (ft-1) Maximum Ultimate Soil Capacity(6) Qu = N/A (kips)
Maximum Installation Torque(6) T = 50,000 (ft-lb) Maximum Allowable Soil Capacity(6) Qa = N/A (kips)
soil capacity or the allowable capacity of the respective bracket (see additional bracket tables).
informational purposes only. Actual capacities (including any related to installation torque) will vary based on several project specific variables
such as coupler details, end termination details, site specific soil profiles, and even material availability. Full scale load tests are recommended
to confirm soil capacities determined in the design phase of the project.
Rev. 8/21/14

H-Style Plates
Plate
Area
Diameter
APPENDIX 2A
(ft2)
(inches)
10 0.28
12 0.52
14 0.80
16 1.13
V-Style Plates(1)
Plate
Area
Diameter
(ft2)
(inches)
10* 0.27
12 0.49
14 0.75
16 1.04

Helix Plate Capacities
The capacity of an individual helix plate is limit the working load distributed to each helix
determined through laboratory testing in plate to much less than 41 kips. Even in light load
accordance with Section 4.3 of ICC-ES AC358. applications, multi-helix pile configurations are
This test is completed by placing a short section commonly utilized to increase bearing area, lower
of shaft with a single helix plate in a laboratory load contact pressures within the soil, and minimize
APPENDIX 2A
frame or universal machine. The helix plate bears on pile deflections due to soil deformation. Multi-
a helix-shaped fixture or on an adjustable mandrill helix pile configurations are also typically easier to
with five or more pins. The line of bearing varies and install due to the downward thrust provided by the
is pre-determined for each helix plate and pile shaft additional helix plates. For additional discussion
combination. Load is applied to be coaxial with the about helix plates see Section 2.3.1 of this manual.
longitudinal axis of the pile shaft and normal to the
bearing surface of the helix plate.
Foundation Supportworks® completed helix

capacity testing for several pile shaft/helix plate
configurations in accordance with AC358 (See
Figure 2A.1). HP288 and HP350 shafts were tested
with 8, 10, 12 and 14-inch diameter helix plates.
The helix plates were 3/8-inch thick Grade 50 (50
ksi min. yield) steel. Load was applied until (1) the
test sample refused any additional load by reaching
a failure mechanism such as weld shear, plate
bending, or shaft buckling, or (2) a practical, usable
resistance was exceeded. Test results (ultimate helix
plate capacities) ranged from 101 kips to 200 kips,
with most tests being terminated at loads of 140
kips (HP288) or 200 kips (HP350) since these values
greatly exceed a practical usable pile capacity.
Considering even the lowest atypical test result,
the allowable individual helix plate capacity for both
shafts and all plate diameters would exceed 41 kips
with a factor of safety of 2.0 and a scaling factor to
normalize for 50 years of plain steel corrosion.
An allowable individual helix plate capacity of 41

kips will rarely be approached in practice since
most heavily-loaded applications will include pile
designs with multiple helix plates. Exceptions
could be installations in hard clay, dense granular
soils or bedrock, where ½-inch thick helix plates
would then likely be considered to increase
individual plate capacities and minimize plate
deflections under load. In most soil conditions,
the torque-correlated allowable soil capacity will
Figure 2A.1 Helix capacity testing of HP288
with 14-inch diameter helix plate

APPENDIX 2B
LIFT ASSEMBLY SPECIFICATIONS
Appendix 2B
Lift Assembly Specifications

Model 238 Lift Assembly Specifications
Compatible Brackets(3):
FS238B
Lift Cylinder (FS256LC):

Stroke = 4”
Cylinder action = single
Bore = Ø2.56”
APPENDIX 2B
Hydraulic area = 5.15 in2
Max operating pressure(2) = 8,000 psi
Lift Assembly Hardware(1):

(2) - Ø5/8” x 16” long coil rod
with nuts and hex couplers, or
with nuts and hex couplers
Lift Assembly
Rated Lifting Load(2,3)
27.6 kips
Hydraulic Lift Hydraulic Lift

Pressure Force(2,3) Pressure Force(2,3)
(psi) (kips) (psi) (kips)
400 2.1 3,200 16.5

800 4.1 3,400 17.5
1,200 6.2 3,600 18.6
1,400 7.2 3,800 19.6
1,600 8.3 4,000 20.6
1,800 9.3 4,200 21.7
2,000 10.3 4,400 22.7
2,200 11.3 4,600 23.7
2,400 12.4 4,800 24.8
2,600 13.4 5,000 25.8
2,800 14.4 5,200 26.8
3,000 15.5 5,350 27.6
(1) Hardware used in the lift assembly must be selected to match the hardware used with the installed bracket assembly.
(2) Do not operate at pressures that produce lift forces in excess of the lift assembly’s rated lifting load. Max operating pressure of the lift cylinder
produces forces that exceed this value and is given for informational purposes only.
(3) Rated lifting load is given for the lift assembly only. Do not operate at pressures that exceed the allowable capacities of the system which are
governed by the allowable capacities of the bracket and other system components, as well as the torque correlated soil capacity, or installed
driving force divided by an appropriate factor of safety. All of these governing limits are outlined in places elsewhere in this appendix.

Model 288 Lift Assembly(2) Specifications
HP238B2, HP288B2, FS288B
FS288BV, FS288BL, FS288BFM

Stroke = 4”
Cylinder action = double
APPENDIX 2B
Bore = Ø3.50”
Lift Assembly Hardware(1,2):

Lift Assembly
39.7 kips

200 1.9 2,600 25.0

400 3.8 2,800 26.9
600 5.8 3,000 28.9
800 7.7 3,200 30.8
1,000 9.6 3,400 32.7
1,200 11.5 3,600 34.6
1,400 13.5 3,700 35.6
1,600 15.4 3,800 36.6
1,800 17.3 3,900 37.5
2,000 19.2 4,000 38.5
2,200 21.2 4,100 39.4
2,400 23.1 4,130 39.7
(2) Note that the only difference between the model 288 and model 350 lift assemblies is the diameter of the threaded rod hardware. All other
components of the two assemblies are identical.
(3) Do not operate at pressures that produce lift forces in excess of the lift assembly’s rated lifting load. Max operating pressure of the lift
cylinder produces forces that exceed this value and is given for informational purposes only.

HP350BS, HP350B,
FS350BV, FS400BV

Stroke = 4”
APPENDIX 2B
Bore = Ø3.50”

Lift Assembly
56.3 kips

400 3.8 3,800 36.6

800 7.7 4,000 38.5
1,200 11.5 4,200 40.4
1,600 15.4 4,400 42.3
2,000 19.2 4,600 44.3
2,400 23.1 4,800 46.2
2,600 25.0 5,000 48.1
2,800 26.9 5,200 50.0
3,000 28.9 5,400 52.0
3,200 30.8 5,600 53.9
3,400 32.7 5,800 55.8
3,600 34.6 5,850 56.3

APPENDIX 2C
HELIXPRO® HELICAL FOUNDATION DESIGN SOFTWARE FOR PROFESSIONALS
Appendix 2C
HelixPro® Helical Foundation Design
Software for Professionals

HELIXPRO® HELICAL FOUNDATION DESIGN
SOFTWARE FOR PROFESSIONALS
HelixPro is a state-of-the-art web-based program • Links to case studies, current and previous
that allows the user to calculate bearing and uplift issues of the Foundation Nation for Design
capacities of helical piles as well as tension capacities Professionals (FNDP) newsletter, and technical
of helical tiebacks as they pertain to project specific content on the FSI website
APPENDIX 2C
site conditions and soil profiles. The program is
The software’s layout and functionality are
ideal for analyzing both vertical and battered piles
illustrated in the following guide and design
for deep foundations of new structures, seismic
example. The example utilizes real soil and project
retrofitting applications, tension/uplift elements
information for a guyed tower project completed
of guyed structures, tiebacks for earth retention
in St. Louis, Missouri. The tower supports were
systems, tiedowns, and more. HelixPro calculates
retrofitted with helical piles and anchors to provide
capacities of helical piles and tiebacks using the
additional support and stability. The example is for
Individual Bearing Method, which is referenced in
the design of the southwest guy support where
Chapter 2 of the FSI Technical Manual.
two Model 150 square shaft helical anchors were
HelixPro allows the user to quickly perform installed at a 40 degree batter.
multiple trials with varying soil profiles and helix
configurations to select the most economical and Software Guide and Design Example
practical solution for the project. The program
provides a step-by-step “wizard” approach through
the design process, making the program intuitive Step 1
and easy to navigate. Some of the many features of
Following log-in, the program opens to the Home
the software include:
page where the user can create a new project or
• Video tutorials available on the FSI website: view saved projects. The top menu bar also allows
www.OnStableGround.com access to My Profile where user information
is input. User name and company name are
• Help menus and buttons along the way to further automatically incorporated into the final report.
assist the user through the design process
The Home page also has links to FSI case studies,
• Pop-up warnings to alert the user when the newsletters and other technical information.
torsional rating of the shaft is exceeded, when For this example the “Create A New Project” button
non-standard helix plate configurations are is selected.
selected, when minimum depth or embedment
criteria are violated, etc.
• Graphical representation of soil layers and

helix plate depths
• Graphical representation of installation torque

with depth, along with boundary lines to
represent the torsional rating of the shaft
• Generation of a summary report with a graphical

representation of the proposed installation
• Ability to save and manage projects and sort these

projects by date, application and project status

Step 2 Montgomery Tower project located in St. Louis,
MO. Select “Continue” to navigate to the next
The New Project page allows the user to choose screen of data entry.
between the “Helical Piles” or “Helical Tiebacks”
modules. The helical piles module is selected to
Step 4
determine capacities of vertical and battered
piles in both tension and compression. The Required fields on the Soil Profile Inputs page
helical tiebacks module allows the user to create include soil boring ID, depth to groundwater,
multiple wall configurations, define the active critical depth and at least one soil layer. Seven
APPENDIX 2C
zone (failure plane) for each wall and determine soil types are available including sand, clay,
capacities for multiple rows of tiebacks. mixed, organics, sand fill, clay fill and mixed fill.
The “Helical Piles” button is selected. Soil strength parameter fields for clay, sand, clay
fill and sand fill are populated automatically by
correlation to SPT N-values; however, the user can
manually override these values by entering new
data. Selection of organic or mixed soils requires
manual entry of the soil strength parameters. The
soil profile is graphically displayed as the data
is entered. Multiple borings can be entered and
saved. The help menu is accessed by clicking
on the question mark icons next to various entry
fields. In this example, the user has entered and
saved the information from Boring B-1 and is
Step 3
ready to continue to the next page.
The General Project Information page allows
the user to enter project information and select
either English or Metric units. The project name
and project number are required fields for this
page. The buttons at the bottom allow the user
to save the information on this page, go back
to the previous page or continue to the next
page. Information has been entered for the
Step 5
The Pile Design Inputs page requires input for

boring ID, pile ID, pile shaft type, helix plate
configuration and geometry, pile length, batter
angle and pile head depth. After required fields

have been filled, pile capacity is determined by If you have any questions regarding the
the program by clicking the “Calculate” button. software, please feel free to contact FSI through
The ultimate tension and compression capacity, the Contact Us page of the software.
maximum installation torque, final installation
torque and depth to maximum installation
torque are calculated and displayed. Installation
Boring ID/Pile ID: B-1/P1
torque versus depth is displayed graphically Torque (ft-lbs)
0 650 1300 1950 2600 3250 3900 4550 5200 5850 6500
next to the soil profile. Multiple pile types can
HA150 Rated Capacity

be entered and saved.
APPENDIX 2C
4
8
An ultimate tension capacity of 45.9 kips is
12
Depth (ft)
16
determined for the HA150 (1.5-inch round
20
corner square bar) with an 8”-10”-12” helix
24
3
2
plate configuration, a 40 degree batter, 37 1
28
feet of installed length and the soil conditions
32
36
represented by Boring B-1.
40
Torque
The engineers at Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

utilize HelixPro every day to prepare preliminary
design recommendations for design professionals
and our contractor network. We are confident
that you will also find HelixPro to be a valuable
tool for your design of helical foundations.
Prepared By: Don Deardorff

Company Name: Foundation Supportworks
Project Name: Montgomery Tower Date: September 26, 2012
Project Number: FSI #11257
Application: Helical Piles Ultimate Compression Capacity: 52.7 kips
Boring ID/Pile ID: B-1/P1 Ultimate Tension Capacity: 45.9 kips
Shaft Type: HA150 Final Installation Torque: 5,265 ft-lbs
Head Depth: 0 ft Maximum Installation Torque: 5,270 ft-lbs
Batter Angle: 40° Depth at Max Torque: 28.0 ft
Pile Length: 37 ft
Tip Depth: 28.3 ft
Step 6
Diameter (in) Geometry Depth (ft)
Helix 1 8 H 27.9
Helix 2 10 H 26.4
Helix 3 12 H 24.5
Groundwater Depth: 12 ft
Continuing to the Summary of Results Critical Depth: 20 ft
Depth Soil Type SPT 'N' Value C (psf) γ eff. (pcf) φ deg Nc Nq
page allows the user to select the boring/pile 0

2
Clay
Clay
10
10
1250
1250
100
100
0
0
9
9
0
0
5 Mixed 16 0 112 28.4 22 13
combinations to include in the final report, and 7.5

9.5
12
Clay
Clay
Clay
6
8
8
750
1000
1000
92
96
53
0
0
0
9
9
9
0
0
0
also the order in which to present the results. 14.5

19.5
24.5
Clay
Clay
Mixed
11
17
30
1375
2125
0
54
58
70
0
0
31.9
9
9
30
0
0
19.8
Output reports are generated in PDF format for

29.5 Mixed 100 0 72 49.3 163 191.1
Refer to the latest version of the FSI Technical Manual for appropriate termination devices including threaded rod adapters, retrofit brackets and new
construction brackets. The application and design of termination devices should be confirmed by the design professional of record.
each boring/pile (pile module) or each boring/ FSI helical pile and tieback lead sections are manufactured in true lengths of 5, 7 and 10 feet. FSI helical extension sections have nominal lengths of
3, 5, 7 and 10 feet. These nominal lengths are the true measured lengths for HP349, HP350 and HP450 shafts, and are the net lengths (total length
minus coupler overlap) for HA150 and HA175 shafts. The net lengths for HP287 and HP288 extension shafts are 6 inches less than the nominal
wall/tieback row (tieback module). The reports

lengths. Helical leads and extensions are available in other non-standard lengths upon request.
FSI helical piles feature helix plates manufactured with a helix shape conforming to the geometry criteria of ICC-ES AC358. A helix plate thickness of
3/8-inch is standard for plate diameters of 6 to 14 inches. A helix plate thickness of 1/2-inch is standard for a plate diameter of 16 inches. A plate
steel yield strength of at least 36 ksi (A36) is standard for the HA150 shaft, while a plate steel yield strength of at least 50 ksi (Grade 50) is standard for
are formatted to include all of the input data, the HA175, HP287, HP288, HP349, HP350 and HP450 shafts.
FSI offers helical piles and tiebacks as either black (uncoated) steel or as hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Hardware is provided as
hot-dip galvanized (ASTM A153), mechanically-galvanized (ASTM B695) or zinc-plated (ASTM B633).
calculated results and other design information

needed for project submittals. A graphical Register now to use this FREE state-of-the-art
representation of the soil profile, helical pile software program by going to www.helixpro.
batter and depth, and installation torque with foundationsupportworks.com. Within two
depth is created. For the tieback module, the working days, you should receive an email
graphical representation also includes the wall stating that your account has been activated. No
and failure plane geometry. gimmicks. No strings attached.

APPENDIX 2D
PILE BUCKING CONSIDERATIONS
Appendix 2D
Pile Bucking Considerations

PILE BUCKLING CONSIDERATIONS
Buckling of helical piles is generally only I = Moment of Inertia of the Pile Shaft
considered when soil conditions consist of very Cross Section
soft clays or very loose sands with SPT N-values
K = Effective Length Factor
less than 4 blows per foot (bpf). Research has
shown that soils with SPT N-values greater than L = Unsupported Length
or equal to 4 bpf provide sufficient lateral support
An ideal column is one that is perfectly straight,
to prevent buckling, however, determination
homogeneous, and free from any initial residual
APPENDIX 2D
of pile buckling is a complex problem that is
stresses. Since an ideal column can only exist in
affected by coupling strength/stiffness, pile
theory, AISC utilizes an adjustment coefficient to
batter, shaft section and elastic properties, load
normalize the theoretical elastic buckling with
type and eccentricity, length of exposed pile
the results observed in testing research. The
shaft and soil strength.
elastic critical buckling load then becomes:
The methods described in this section for
buckling evaluation may not account for dynamic
loading, partial embedment (exposed pile), pile
Where,
geometry changes, and stiffness variations
due to pile shaft couplings. The methods may Pcrit = Critical Buckling Load
be applicable for cases where fully-embedded
It should be noted that the Euler Method is only
grout filled pipe piles (with couplings) are used,
suitable for intermediate length to longer
or for fully-embedded piles without couplings.
columns that produce values of Pe less than
The design professional should be aware of the
0.44FyA. When the Euler load (Pe) is greater than
buckling design method assumptions as they
this value, then inelastic buckling will govern
apply to the helical pile design.
and Pcrit becomes:
After the critical buckling load is calculated, a
factor of safety (FOS) is applied to determine the
allowable pile capacity to prevent buckling. A FOS
of 1.67 would be consistent with AISC design
methods, although helical pile designers routinely
Where,
use factors of safety in the range of 1.5 to 2.0.
Fy = Yield Stress
Euler Method A = Cross Sectional Area
The Euler equation shown below provides an These equations for elastic and inelastic
estimation of the elastic critical buckling load for buckling would be applicable to helical piles
a long, slender, ideal column: installed without lateral soil support; e. g., piles
with exposed lengths above the ground surface
or piles penetrating fluid soils (SPT N-values =
0). In most other conditions, the critical buckling
load determined using these equations may be
Where,
overly conservative.
Pe = Elastic Critical Buckling Load
E = Modulus of Elasticity of the Pile Shaft

Cross Section

Davisson Method The dimensionless variables are the critical axial
load coefficient (Ucr) and the maximum value of
The Davisson Method (1963) considers lateral the depth coefficient ( Imax) and are defined as:
support from the surrounding soil and variable
boundary conditions for the pile. This method is
based on manipulation of the governing
differential equation which assumes the
subgrade modulus of the soil is constant with
depth along the pile:
APPENDIX 2D
Where,
Where,
EI = Flexural Stiffness of the Pile
Pcr = Critical Axial Load
P = Axial Load
R = Relative Stiffness Factor
k = Subgrade Modulus
EpIp = Flexural Stiffness of the Pile
The differential equation was solved for various
boundary conditions using non-dimensional kh = Horizontal Subgrade Modulus
variables. The boundary conditions are free (f),
d = Pile Diameter
pinned (p) and fixed-translating (ft). For initial
conditions where the pile is fully-embedded, L = Shaft Length over which kh is constant
initially straight and the axial load is assumed
Typical values of kh for design purposes are
constant (no skin friction), the dimensionless
shown in Figure 2D.2.
solutions are shown in Figure 2D.1. For further
discussion of the derivation of these solutions
SPT
the reader is advised to see the paper by Soil Type- Cohesion Design kh
N-value
Consistency (psf) (pci)
Davisson (1963). (bpf)
Clay-Very Soft <250 0-1 <30
Clay-Soft 250-500 2-4 30
Clay-Medium Stiff 500-1000 5-8 100
Sand-Very Loose
NA 0-4 <25
(above GWT)
Sand-Very Loose
NA 0-4 <20
(below GWT)
Sand-Loose
NA 5-10 25
(above GWT)
Sand-Loose
NA 5-10 20
(below GWT)
Figure 2D.2 Typical design values for horizontal subgrade modulus

(Reese, Wang et al. 2004b)
Figure 2D.1 Buckling load (load coefficient) vs. length

(depth coefficient) for kh = constant (Davisson 1963)

Example
Consider a fully embedded pile installed to a

depth of 25 feet within a soil profile consisting
of 15 feet of very soft clay with an average SPT
N-value = 1 bpf and an average cohesion value
= 200 psf. The very soft clay layer is underlain
by a dense sand which extends beyond the pile
tip. Based on the pile design, a pinned-pinned
boundary condition is selected. A HP287 pile is
APPENDIX 2D
considered with the following parameters:
Ep = 29(106) psi
Ip = 1.445 in4 for plain steel (plain corroded

or galvanized corroded could also be
considered)
d = 2.875 in. for plain steel (plain corroded

or galvanized corroded could also be
considered)
L = 15 ft. = 180 in.
Based on the cohesion of 200 psf, a design

value of kh = 20 pci is selected from Figure 2D.2.
From Figure 2D.1, with Imax = 6.2 and assuming

pinned-pinned (p-p) boundary conditions, Ucr =
2.0. The critical buckling load (Pcr) can then be
calculated from the design equation:
Divide the critical buckling load by an appropriate

FOS to determine the allowable pile capacity to
prevent buckling.

APPENDIX 2E
CORROSION CONSIDERATIONS
Appendix 2E
Corrosion Considerations

The term “corrosion” is used to describe the (or lowers resistivity) of the electrolyte, thereby
degradation of a material or its properties due increasing corrosion potential.
to reaction with its environment. Although
There is still much discussion and debate about
most materials are known to corrode over
how much corrosion actually occurs for buried
time, corrosion is typically considered as the
metal, with the central argument typically being
destructive attack of a metal by chemical or
the amount of available oxygen. The amount of
electrochemical reaction. During this process,
oxygen within soil decreases significantly just a
ions from the base metal migrate from the
few feet from the surface, unless the material is
APPENDIX 2E
surface, resulting in material loss. As the
loosely-placed fill or an open-graded, granular
corrosion process and metal loss continues,
soil. Relatively speaking, we would then expect
there can be a reduction in material thickness
these materials to present a higher potential for
and area, which could result in loss of structural
corrosion than undisturbed clayey soils. The
capacity of a given member.
presence of a water table further complicates
Romanoff (1957): “For electrochemical corrosion the discussion as you’d expect less oxygen
to occur there must be a potential difference below the water table than above. It is also
between two points that are electrically important to note that although oxygen-starved
connected and immersed in an electrolyte. environments inhibit rusting, which is a specific
Whenever these conditions are fulfilled, a small type of corrosion, other types of galvanic or
current flows from the anode area through the bacterial corrosion are still possible.
electrolyte to the cathode area and then through
ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) Acceptance
the metal to complete the circuit, and the anode
Criteria 358 (AC358) and ICC-ES AC406 define
area is the one that has the most negative
corrosive soil environments by: (1) soil resistivity
potential, and is the area that becomes corroded
less than 1,000 ohm-cm; (2) soil pH less than 5.5;
through loss of metal ions to the electrolyte. The
(3) soils with high organic content; (4) soil sulfate
cathode area, to which the current flows through
concentrations greater than 1,000 ppm; (5) soils
the electrolyte, is protected from corrosion
located in landfills, or (6) soil containing mine
because of the deposition of hydrogen or other
waste. In such environments, the steel can be
ions that carry the current.”
protected with a hot-dip galvanized zinc coating
The following conditions must be met in order or with other means such as sacrificial anodes.
for corrosion to occur: A site-specific evaluation of the soil can be
conducted in order to determine an appropriate
1) There must be two points (anode and
level of protection. Foundation Supportworks®,
cathode) on a metal structure with different
Inc. (FSI) recommends that a corrosion engineer
electrical potential and these two points must
be consulted when site or project conditions
be electrically connected to complete the
warrant further evaluation.
circuit. The difference in electrical potential
could be caused by inconsistencies in the FSI helical products and hardware may be ordered
metal, varying stress/strain points, contact as plain (black, uncoated) steel or with a protective
with dissimilar metals or materials, etc. coating to further prolong the anticipated service
life. Helical pile capacity ratings are therefore
2) There must be an electrolyte to carry current,
provided for plain, plain corroded, and galvanized
and for below ground pile applications, soil
corroded pile sections. Scheduled corrosion
moisture serves this purpose. The presence of
losses are for a period of 50 years and are in
soluble salts increases the electrical conductivity
accordance with ICC-ES AC358. Helical products

(leads, extensions and bracket assemblies) are axial capacity of 74.0 kips on the day the pile
available hot-dip galvanized in accordance with: is installed. However, the overall allowable pile
capacity would remain at 35 kips, limited by the
• ASTM A123, Standard Specification for Zinc
installation torque and the correlated allowable
(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
soil capacity, even though the steel section in the
Steel Products
ground is capable of a great deal more.
Hardware and fasteners may be hot-dip
Following installation, we can now consider the
galvanized, electro-plated, or mechanically
effects of corrosion. ICC-ES AC358 provides
galvanized in accordance with:
scheduled losses or “sacrificial thicknesses” for
• ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc black steel or steel with protective coatings, and
APPENDIX 2E
Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware these sacrificial thicknesses must be considered
for design purposes. These sacrificial thicknesses
• ASTM B633, Standard Specification for
are based on moderately corrosive soils over a
Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron
period of 50 years. This is a design criteria only
and Steel
and should not be confused with service life.
• ASTM B695, Standard Specification for In our example, after 50 years in the ground, a
Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on black, uncoated steel pile would have lost a steel
Iron and Steel thickness of 0.036 inch due to corrosion. The pile
would have a remaining cross-sectional area of
A Common Sense Discussion the shaft of 1.82 in2 and an allowable (mechanical)
axial capacity of 63.6 kips. This is the value that
Potential corrosion may be an objection for Foundation Supportworks lists as the “plain
specifiers considering helical piles. These corroded” allowable mechanical axial capacity in
specifiers may feel that helical piles may not be compression for the HP288. The overall allowable
an appropriate option because of their concerns pile capacity still remains 35 kips, limited by the
about the steel corroding away and leaving installation torque that was applied 50 years earlier.
the supported structure on a compromised
So how much steel would have to be lost before
foundation. While it’s true that steel does corrode
corrosion would begin to govern the design? See
over time, it is actually quite rare that corrosion
Figure 2E.1. The remaining allowable mechanical
will govern the design of new construction
capacity does not fall below the allowable pile
helicals. This is because of the nature of how
capacity of 35 kips from our example until the
helical piles are designed and installed. To state
sacrificial thickness reaches 0.135 inch. This is
it simply, the amount of steel which is required to
nearly four times greater than the scheduled 50-
develop the necessary torque during installation
year corrosion loss rate for black steel and over
far exceeds the amount of steel that is required to
eight times greater than the scheduled 50-year
resist the design axial compressive forces. This
corrosion loss rate for hot-dip galvanized steel.
can be demonstrated in the following example.
Corrosion is a very complex subject involving
A helical pile is required to resist an allowable
many factors which can affect loss rates.
compressive load of 35 kips. The FSI Model
With some understanding, it quickly becomes
HP288 helical pile is selected for the project (see
apparent that even if the corrosive properties
Appendix 2A, Helical Product Ratings, Properties
of the soil at a particular site are especially
and Details). The pile is installed to a torque
aggressive, it is still quite rare for corrosion to
of 7,800 ft-lb to provide an ultimate torque-
govern the design of a helical pile solution.
correlated soil capacity of 70 kips (FOS = 2.0). The
pile has an uncorroded cross-sectional area of
the shaft of 2.11 in2 and an allowable mechanical

Allowable Allowable
Sacrificial Steel Mechanical Sacrificial Steel Mechanical
Thickness Area Capacity Thickness Area Capacity
(in) (in2) (k) (in) (in2) (k)
Day of installation ♦ 0.000 2.11 74.0 0.090 1.37 48.1

0.005 2.07 72.5 0.095 1.33 46.6
0.100 1.29 45.2 0.100 1.29 45.2
APPENDIX 2E
0.015 1.99 69.7 0.105 1.25 43.8
Scheduled 50 year corrosion loss for ♦ 0.016 1.98 69.4 0.110 1.21 42.3
zinc coated steel per AC358 0.020 1.95 68.2 0.115 1.17 40.9
0.025 1.91 66.8 0.120 1.13 39.4
0.030 1.87 65.3 0.125 1.09 38.0
0.035 1.83 63.9 0.130 1.04 36.6
Scheduled 50 year corrosion loss for ♦ 0.036 1.82 63.6 0.135 1.00 35.1
plain black steel per AC358 0.040 1.78 62.5 0.140 0.96 33.7
0.045 1.74 61.0 0.145 0.92 32.2
0.050 1.70 59.6 0.150 0.88 30.8
0.055 1.66 58.1 0.155 0.84 29.4
0.060 1.62 56.7 0.160 0.80 27.9
0.065 1.58 55.3 0.165 0.76 26.5
0.070 1.54 53.8 0.170 0.72 25.0
0.075 1.50 52.4 0.175 0.67 23.6
0.080 1.46 51.0 0.180 0.63 22.2
0.085 1.41 49.5 0.185 0.59 20.7
Figure 2E.1 HP288 steel areas and allowable mechanical
capacities for increasing sacrificial thicknesses

APPENDIX 2F
MODEL SPECIFICATIONS
Appendix 2F
Model Specifications

MODEL SPECIFICATION FOR
HELICAL PILE FOUNDATIONS
COMPRESSION APPLICATIONS
1 SCOPE
1.1 The work consists of designing, furnishing and installing helical piles and load transfer devices
used to support compressive loads according to the project Plans and these specifications.
APPENDIX 2F
1.2 The parties and contract terms referred to in this specification are as follows:
1.2.1 The Owner is the person or entity that owns the facility or will own the facility once it
is completed. The Owner may have contractual agreements with, and be represented
by, other parties such as engineers, architects or contractors that perform services
under the direction of the Owner. Where Owner is used in this specification, it refers
to the Owner or the Owner’s contracted representatives separate from the Installing
Contractor.
1.2.2 The Pile Designer is the individual or firm generally hired by the Installing Contractor to
design the helical piles.
1.2.3 The Installing Contractor installs and tests (if necessary) the helical piles, and possibly
performs other tasks associated with the project.
1.2.4 The Plans refer to the contract documents; including but not limited to the drawings and
specifications for the project.
1.3 The work may include helical pile load testing.
1.4 The Owner will be responsible for obtaining any right-of-way or easement access permits
necessary for the helical pile installation.
1.5 Unless otherwise noted, the Installing Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment and
materials necessary to accomplish the work.
1.6 The Owner will provide suitable access to the construction site for the Installing Contractor’s
personnel and equipment.
1.7 Unless specifically noted otherwise in the contract documents, the Owner will remove and
replace any structures, utilities, pavements, landscaping or other surficial improvements in the
work area as necessary to facilitate the work.
1.8 The Owner will be responsible for overall construction oversight to preclude the development of
unsafe conditions.
1.9 The Owner will be responsible for a horizontal field survey of the helical pile locations prior to
helical pile installation and an elevation survey to determine pile shaft cutoff height subsequent
to helical pile installation.
1.10 The work does not include any post-construction monitoring of pile performance unless
specifically noted otherwise in the contract documents.

2 REFERENCES
2.1 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
2.1.1 AISC 360: Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
2.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2.2.1 ASTM A36: Carbon Structural Steel
2.2.2 ASTM A123: Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
2.2.3 ASTM A153: Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
2.2.4 ASTM A307: Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
APPENDIX 2F
2.2.5 ASTM A325: Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
2.2.6 ASTM A500: Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Rounds and Shapes
2.2.7 ASTM A513: Electric-Resistance Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing
2.2.8 ASTM A572: High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbian-Vanadium Structural Steel
2.2.9 ASTM B633: Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel
2.2.10 ASTM D1143: Deep Foundations Under Static Axial Compressive Load
2.3 International Code Council Evaluation Services (ICC-ES)
2.3.1 Acceptance Criteria 358 (AC358): Acceptance Criteria for Helical Pile Systems and
Devices
2.4 Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)
2.4.1 SAE J429: Mechanical and Material Requirements for Externally Threaded Fasteners
3 DEFINITIONS
3.1 The following terms apply to helical piles used to support compressive loads:
3.1.1 Allowable Stress Design: A structural and geotechnical design methodology that states
that the summation of the actual estimated loads (nominal loads) must be less than or
equal to the allowable design load (required strength). Allowable loads are obtained by
dividing a nominal resistance (strength) by an appropriate factor of safety.
3.1.2 Bearing Stratum: The soil layer (or layers) that provide the helical pile end-bearing
capacity through load transfer from the helical plates.
3.1.3 Crowd: Axial compressive force applied to the helical pile shaft as needed during
installation to ensure the pile advances at a rate approximately equal to the helix pitch
for each revolution.

3.1.4 Design Loads: A generic and ambiguous term used to describe any load used in design.
It is not specific to factored or unfactored loads or any particular design methodology.
It is a term; therefore, that should be avoided when specifying load requirements. FSI
recommends using the term service load, nominal load or factored load, as described
herein, where applicable.
3.1.5 Design Strength: A term used in structural design which is defined as the product of the
nominal strength and the applicable resistance factor. An equivalent term typically used
in geotechnical design is, also sometimes referred to as factored resistance (Load and
Resistance Factor Design).
3.1.6 Extension Section: Helical pile shaft sections connected to the lead section or other
extension sections to advance the helix plates to the required bearing depth. Plain
APPENDIX 2F
extensions (without helix plates) or helical extensions (with one or more helix plates)
may be used depending upon soil conditions or project requirements.
3.1.7 Factor of Safety: The ratio of the ultimate pile capacity or nominal resistance (strength)
to the nominal or service load used in the design of any helical pile component or
interface (Allowable Stress Design).
3.1.8 Factored Load: The product of a nominal load and an applicable load factor (Load and
3.1.9 Factored Resistance: The product of a nominal resistance and an applicable resistance
factor (Load and Resistance and Factor Design).
3.1.10 Geotechnical Capacity: The maximum load or the load at a specified limit state, that can
be resisted through the piles interaction with the bearing soils (see also Ultimate Pile
Capacity).
3.1.11 Helical Pile: Consists of a central steel shaft with one or more helix-shaped bearing
plates and a load transfer device (bracket) that allows attachment to structures. Helical
piles are installed into the ground by application of torque and axial compressive force
(“crowd”).
3.1.12 Helix (Helical) Plate: Generally round steel plate formed into a helical spiral and welded
to the central steel shaft. When rotated in the ground, the helix shape provides thrust
along the pile’s longitudinal axis thus aiding in pile installation. The plate transfers axial
load to the soil through bearing.
3.1.13 Helix Pitch: The distance measured along the axis of the shaft between the leading and
trailing edges of the helix plate.
3.1.14 Lead Section: The first helical pile shaft component installed into the soil. It consists of
one or more helical plates welded to a central steel shaft.
3.1.15 Limit State: A condition beyond which a helical pile component or interface becomes unfit
for service and is judged to no longer be useful for its intended function (serviceability
limit state) or to be unsafe (ultimate limit state (strength)).
3.1.16 Load and Resistance Factor Design: A structural and geotechnical design methodology
that states that the Factored Resistance (Design Strength) must be greater than or equal
to the summation of the applied factored loads.

3.1.17 Load Factor: A factor that accounts for the probability of deviation of the actual load
from the predicted nominal load due to variability of material properties, workmanship,
type of failure and uncertainty in the prediction of the load (Load and Resistance Factor
Design).
3.1.18 Load Test: A process to test the ultimate pile capacity and relation of applied load to pile
head settlement by application of a known load on the helical pile head and monitoring
movement over a specific time period.
3.1.19 Loads: Forces that result from the weight of all building materials, occupants and their
possessions, environmental effects, differential movement, and restrained dimensional
changes. Permanent loads are those loads in which variations over time are rare or of
small magnitude. All other loads are variable loads (see also Nominal Loads).
APPENDIX 2F
3.1.20 Mechanical Strength: The maximum load or the load at a specified limit state that can
be resisted by the structural elements of a helical pile.
3.1.21 Net Deflection: The total settlement at the pile head minus the theoretical elastic
deformation of the pile shaft during a load test.
3.1.22 Nominal Loads: The magnitude of the loads specified, which include dead, live, soil,
wind, snow, rain, flood and earthquakes (also referred to as service loads or working
loads).
3.1.23 Nominal Resistance: The pile capacity at a specified ultimate limit state (Load and
Resistance Factor Design). See Ultimate Pile Capacity.
3.1.24 Nominal Strength: A term used in structural design which is defined as the structure or
member capacity at a specified strength limit state. See Ultimate Pile Capacity.
3.1.25 Resistance Factor: A factor that accounts for the probability of deviation of the actual
resistance (strength) from the predicted nominal resistance (strength) due to variability
of material properties, workmanship, type of failure and uncertainties in the analysis
(Load and Resistance Factor Design).
3.1.26 Service Loads: See “Nominal Loads” above.
3.1.27 Ultimate Pile Capacity: The helical pile capacity based on the least capacity determined
from applicable ultimate limit states for mechanical and geotechnical capacity.
4 APPROVED HELICAL PILE MANUFACTURERS

4.1 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc., 12330 Cary Circle, Omaha, NE 68128; Phone: (800) 281-8545;
Fax: (402) 393-4002.
4.2 Due to the special requirements for design and manufacturing of helical piles, the piles shall
be obtained from Foundation Supportworks®, Inc., or other qualified manufacturer with an
approved equivalent product. A request to substitute any other manufactured helical product
must be submitted to the Owner for review not less than seven (7) calendar days prior to the bid
date. The request must include:
4.2.1 Documentation of at least five years of production experience manufacturing helical

piles,

4.2.2 Documentation that the manufacturer’s helical piles have been used successfully in at
least five engineered construction projects within the last three years,
4.2.3 Product acceptance by the local building code official(s) having jurisdiction over the
project, and/or
4.2.4 Current ICC-ES product evaluation report or complete description of product testing
and manufacturing quality assurance programs used to assess and maintain product
quality and determine product mechanical strength and geotechnical capacity.
5 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
5.1 Hollow Round Shaft Helical Pile Models HP237, HP287, HP288, HP350, HP450, HP662
APPENDIX 2F
and HP700 manufactured in accordance with the requirements of Sections 5 and 6 of this
specification.
5.1.1 Hollow round shaft helical piles shall be used to resist compression loads. Round shaft
helical piles are generally more resistant to bending or buckling over solid square shaft
counterparts due to superior cross-sectional properties and coupling details.
5.1.2 Pile shaft sections shall be in full, direct contact within couplings so as to remove
coupling bolts and coupling welds from the “in-service” axial load path.
5.1.3 Pile shafts and couplings shall have a fit-up tolerance of 1/16 inch or less.
5.1.4 Helix plates shall meet the following geometry and spacing criteria to minimize soil
disturbance:
5.1.4.1 True helix-shaped plates that are normal to the shaft such that the leading and
trailing edges are within ¼ inch of parallel.
5.1.4.2 Helix pitch is 3 inches ± ¼ inch.
5.1.4.3 All helix plates have the same pitch.
5.1.4.4 Helix plates have generally circular edge geometry.
5.1.4.5 Helix spacing along the shaft shall be between 2.4 and 3.6 times the helix
diameter.
5.1.4.6 Helix plates are arranged along the shaft such that they all theoretically track
the same path as the proceeding plate.
6 MATERIALS
6.1 Model HP237 Helical Pile System
6.1.1 Central Steel Shaft: The central steel shaft of the lead and extension sections are 2.375-
inch outer diameter by 0.154-inch nominal wall thickness, hollow structural section in
conformance with ASTM A500 Grade B or C with a minimum yield strength of 60 ksi
and a minimum tensile strength of 70 ksi. The shaft finish is either plain steel or hot-dip
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.

6.1.2 Shaft Coupling Material: The shaft coupling material is factory welded to the extension
shaft and consists of 2.750-inch outer diameter by 0.156-inch nominal wall thickness,
hollow structural section in conformance with ASTM A513 Type 5, Grade 1026 with a
minimum yield strength of 70 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 80 ksi. The shaft
coupling finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
6.1.3 Helix Plate Material: The helix plates are factory welded to the lead or extension shaft
sections and consist of either 0.313 or 0.375-inch thick ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with
a minimum yield strength of 50 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi. Helix plate
outer diameters are 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14 inches. The helix plate finish is either plain steel or
hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
6.1.4 Shaft Coupling Hardware: The lead and extension shaft sections are coupled with two
APPENDIX 2F
(2) bolts and nuts per coupled shaft section. The coupling hardware consists of 0.625-
inch standard hex bolts conforming to ASTM A325 and heavy hex jam nuts. The bolts
and nuts are hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.
6.1.5 Brackets: New construction bracket HP238NCB and retrofit brackets HP238B2 and
HP238BML are designed for use with the HP237 shaft. Bracket finishes are either plain
steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bracket hardware finishes
for the new construction brackets are hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A153. Bracket hardware finishes for the retrofit brackets are zinc coated in accordance
with ASTM B633.
6.2 Model HP287 and Model HP288 Helical Pile Systems
inch outer diameter by 0.203-inch nominal wall thickness (HP287) or 0.276-inch nominal
wall thickness (HP288), hollow structural section in conformance with ASTM A500
Grade B or C with a minimum yield strength of 60 ksi and a minimum tensile strength
of 70 ksi. The shaft finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A123.
sections. Helix plates with outer diameters of 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14 inches are either 0.375 or
0.500-inch thick and 16-inch diameter helix plates are 0.500-inch thick. The helix plates
are manufactured with ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with a minimum yield strength of 50
ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi. The helix plate finish is either plain steel or
inch standard hex bolts conforming to SAE J429 Grade 8 and standard jam nuts. The
bolts and nuts are zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633.

6.2.5 Brackets: New construction brackets HP288NCB or HP288NCB8 shall be used for
tension and compression applications and HP288NCBE or HP288NCBE8 shall be used
for compression only applications with the HP287 or HP288 shafts. Retrofit brackets
FS288B, FS288BL, HP288B2, and HP288BML are designed for use with the HP287 or
HP288 shafts. Bracket finishes are either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A123. Bracket hardware finishes are zinc coated in accordance with ASTM
B633.
6.3.1 Central Steel Shaft: The central steel shaft of the lead and extension sections are
3.500-inch outer diameter by 0.340-inch nominal wall thickness, hollow structural
section in conformance with ASTM A500 Grade B or C with a minimum tensile strength
APPENDIX 2F
ASTM A123.
6.3.2 Shaft Coupling Material: The shaft coupling material consists of 4.250-inch outer
diameter by 0.344-inch nominal wall thickness, hollow structural section in conformance
with ASTM A513 Type 5, Grade 1026 with a minimum yield strength of 70 ksi and a
minimum tensile strength of 80 ksi. The shaft coupling finish is either plain steel or hot-
dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
6.3.4 Shaft Coupling Hardware: The lead and extension shaft sections are coupled with four
inch standard hex bolts conforming to SAE J429 Grade 5 and standard hex jam nuts.
The bolts and nuts are zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633.
6.3.5 Brackets: New construction brackets HP350NCB or HP350NCB8 shall be used for
tension and compression applications and HP350NCBE or HP350NCBE8 shall be used
for compression only applications with the HP350 shaft. Retrofit brackets HP350B and
HP350BS are designed to use with the HP350 shaft. Bracket finishes are either plain
steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bracket hardware finishes
are zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633.
Rev. 10/14/16

sections. Helix plates with outer diameters of 8, 10, 12 or 14 inches are either 0.375 or
APPENDIX 2F
6.4.5 Brackets: New construction bracket HP450NCB8 shall be used for tension and
compression applications and HP450NCBE8 shall be used for compression only
applications with the HP450 shaft. Bracket finishes are either plain steel or hot-dip
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bracket hardware finishes are zinc coated
in accordance with ASTM B633.
6.5.1 This section is for general information purposes only. Larger diameter product lines,
such as Model HP662, are typically customized on a project specific basis.
6.5.1.1 Central Steel Shaft: The central steel shaft of the lead and extension sections
are 6.625-inch outer diameter by 0.280-inch nominal wall thickness, hollow
structural section in conformance with ASTM A500 Grade B or C with a
minimum yield strength of 60 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 70 ksi. The
shaft finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A123.
6.5.1.2 Shaft Coupling Material: The shaft coupling material consists of 6.000-inch
outer diameter by 0.375-inch nominal wall thickness, hollow structural section
in conformance with ASTM A513 Type 5, Grade 1026 with a minimum yield
strength of 70 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 80 ksi. The shaft coupling
finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
6.5.1.3 Helix Plate Material: The helix plates are factory welded to the lead or extension
shaft sections. Helix plates with outer diameters of 10, 12 or 14 inches are
either 0.375 or 0.500-inch thick; 16-inch diameter helices are 0.500-inch thick.
Helix plates are manufactured with ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with a minimum
yield strength of 50 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi. The helix
plate finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A123.

6.5.1.4 Shaft Coupling Hardware: The lead and extension shaft sections are coupled
with four (4) bolts and nuts per coupled shaft section. The coupling hardware
consists of 1.750-inch standard hex bolts conforming to SAE J429 Grade 5
and standard hex nuts. The bolts and nuts are zinc coated in accordance with
ASTM B633.
APPENDIX 2F
structural section in conformance with ASTM A252 Grade 3 with a minimum
yield strength of 60 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 70 ksi. The shaft
shaft sections. Helix plates with outer diameters of 10, 12 or 14 inches are
either 0.375 or 0.500-inch thick; 16-inch diameter helices are 0.500-inch thick.
Helix plates are manufactured with ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with a minimum
yield strength of 50 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi. The helix
plate finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A123.
consists of 2.000-inch heavy hex bolts conforming to ASTM A307 and heavy
hex nuts. The bolts and nuts are zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633.
7 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

7.1 Helical piles shall be designed to support the specified compressive load(s) as shown on the
project Plans. The overall length, helix configuration and minimum torsional resistance of a
helical pile shall be such that the required capacity is developed by the helix plate(s) in an
appropriate bearing stratum.
7.2 All structural steel pile components shall be designed within the limits provided by the American
Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (AISC-360).
Either Allowable Stress Design (ASD) or Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) are
acceptable methods of analysis. Product testing in accordance with ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria
358 may also be considered as an acceptable means of establishing system capacities.

7.3 Except where noted otherwise on the project Plans, all piles shall be installed to provide an
ultimate torque-correlated capacity based on an ASD or LRFD analysis. For ASD, a minimum
factor of safety of 2 applied to the service or nominal loading shall be required. When an LRFD
analysis is required, the Owner shall provide applicable pile design information including but not
limited to; factored loads, resistance factors and/or the required ultimate pile capacity. Factors
of safety (ASD) or resistance factors (LRFD) may require modification to meet specific deflection
criteria stated on the Plans or drawings.
7.4 The required ultimate torque-correlated capacity shall be verified at each pile location by
monitoring and recording the final installation torque and applying default torque correlations per
ICC-ES AC358. Site specific torque correlation factors may be determined by field compression
load testing as specified in Section 14.
APPENDIX 2F
7.5 Except where noted otherwise on the project Plans, each pile shall be designed to meet a
corrosion service life of 50 years in accordance with ICC-ES AC358.
7.6 The pile design shall take into account group efficiency from pile spacing, pile buckling potential,
soil stratification, and strain compatibility issues.
8 QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLING CONTRACTOR AND DESIGNER

8.1 The Installing Contractor and/or Pile Designer shall submit to the Owner, a proposal including the
documentation required in this Section. Work shall not begin until all the submittals have been
received and approved by the Owner. All costs associated with incomplete or unacceptable
submittals shall be the responsibility of the Installing Contractor.
8.2 Evidence of Installing Contractor’s competence in the installation of helical piles shall be
provided to the Owner’s satisfaction and may include any or all of the following:
8.2.1 Pile manufacturer’s certificate of competency for the installation of helical piles,
8.2.2 A list of at least three projects completed within the previous three years wherein the
Installing Contractor installed helical piles similar to those shown in the project Plans.
Such list to include names and phone numbers of those project representatives who
can verify the Installing Contractor’s participation in those projects, and/or
8.2.3 A letter from the pile manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative expressing ability
and intent to provide on-site supervision of the pile installation.
8.3 A listing of all safety violations lodged against the Installing Contractor within the previous three
years and the current status or final resolutions thereof. Descriptions of safety improvements
instituted within the previous three years may also be submitted, at the Installing Contractor’s
discretion.
8.4 Evidence of Pile Designer’s competence shall be provided to the Owner’s satisfaction and may
include any or all of the following:
8.4.1 Registration as a Professional Engineer or recognition by the local jurisdictional authority,

Pile Designer designed helical piles similar to those shown in the project Plans. The list
shall include names and phone numbers of those project representatives who can verify
the Pile Designer’s participation in those projects, and/or
8.4.3 Recommendation from the pile manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative.
9 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
9.1 Within 2 weeks of receiving the contract award, the Installing Contractor and/or Pile Designer
shall submit the following helical pile design documentation:
9.1.1 Certification from the Pile Designer that the proposed piles meet the requirements of
APPENDIX 2F
this specification.
9.1.2 Qualifications of the Installing Contractor and Pile Designer per Section 8.
9.1.3 Product designations for helical lead and extension sections and all ancillary products
to be supplied at each helical pile location.
9.1.4 Individual pile nominal loads, factors of safety, LRFD load and resistance factors and
required ultimate torque correlated capacities, where applicable.
9.1.5 Individual pile loading requirements (if any).
9.1.6 Manufacturer’s published allowable system capacities for the proposed pile assemblies,
including load transfer devices.
9.1.7 Calculated mechanical and theoretical geotechnical capacities of the proposed piles.
9.1.8 Minimum pile termination torque requirements.
9.1.9 Maximum estimated installation torque and allowable installation torque rating of the
proposed piles.
9.1.10 Minimum and/or maximum embedment lengths or other site specific embedment depth
requirements as may be appropriate for the site soil profiles.
9.1.11 Inclination angle and location tolerance requirements.
9.1.12 Load test procedures and failure criteria, if applicable.
9.1.13 Copies of certified calibration reports for torque measuring equipment and load test
measuring equipment to be used on the project. The calibrations shall have been
performed within one year of the proposed helical pile installation starting date or as
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
9.1.14 Provide proof of insurance coverage as stated in the general specifications and/or
contract.
10 PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
10.1 Helical piles shall be installed within 3 inches of the indicated plan location.
10.2 Helical pile shaft alignment shall be within 2 degrees of the inclination angle shown on the Plans.

10.3 Top elevation of the helical piles shall be within 2 inches of the design vertical elevation.
11 PILE INSTALLATION
11.1 Installing Contractor shall furnish and install all helical piles per the project Plans and approved
pile design documentation. In the event of conflict between the project Plans and the approved
pile design documentation, the Installing Contractor shall not begin construction on any affected
items until such conflict has been resolved.
11.2 The Installing Contractor shall conduct their construction operations in a manner to insure the
safety of persons and property in the vicinity of the work. The Installing Contractor’s personnel
shall comply with safety procedures in accordance with OSHA standards and any established
APPENDIX 2F
project safety plan.
11.3 The Owner shall request marking of underground utilities by an underground utility location
service as required by law, and the Installing Contractor shall avoid contact with all marked
underground facilities.
11.4 The portion of the construction site occupied by the Installing Contractor, including equipment
and material stockpiles shall be kept reasonably clean and orderly.
11.5 Installation of helical piles may be observed by representatives of the Owner for quality assurance
purposes. The Installing Contractor shall give the Owner at least 24 hours’ notice prior to the
pile installation operations.
11.6 The helical pile installation technique shall be such that it is consistent with the geotechnical,
logistical, environmental, and load carrying conditions of the project. The lead section shall be
positioned at the appropriate site survey stake location as determined from the plan drawings.
11.7 The helical pile sections shall be advanced into the soil in a continuous manner at a rate of
rotation less than 25 revolutions per minute (rpm). Sufficient crowd shall be applied to advance
the helical pile sections at a rate approximately equal to the pitch of the helix plate per revolution.
The rate of rotation and magnitude of down pressure shall be adjusted for different soil conditions
and depths. Extension sections shall be provided to obtain the required minimum overall length
and minimum torsional resistance as shown on the project Plans.
12 TERMINATION CRITERIA
12.1 The minimum final torsional resistance and/or any required pile length and embedment depth
criteria, as specified in the Pre-Construction Submittals, must be satisfied prior to terminating
the pile installation. In the event any helical pile fails to meet these production quality control
termination criteria, the following remedies may be suitable if authorized by the Owner:
12.1.1 If the installation fails to meet the minimum torsional resistance criterion at the minimum
embedment length:
12.1.1.1 Continue the installation to greater depths until the torsional resistance criterion
is met, provided that, if a maximum length constraint is applicable, continued
installation does not exceed said maximum length constraint, or

12.1.1.2 Demonstrate acceptable pile performance through pile load testing, or
12.1.1.3 Replace the pile with one having a different helix plate configuration. The
replacement pile must not exceed any applicable maximum embedment length
criteria and either: (A) be embedded to a length that places the last helix plate
at least equal to its own diameter beyond the depth of the first helix plate of the
replaced pile and meet the minimum torsional resistance criterion; or (B) pass
pile load testing criteria.
12.1.2 If the torsional resistance during installation reaches the helical pile’s allowable torque
rating prior to satisfaction of the minimum embedment length criterion:
12.1.2.1 Terminate the installation at the depth obtained, or
APPENDIX 2F
12.1.2.2 Replace the pile with one having a shaft with a higher torsional strength rating.
The replacement pile must be installed to satisfy the minimum embedment
length criterion. It must also be embedded to a length that places the last helix
plate at least equal to its own diameter beyond the depth of the first helix plate
of the replaced pile without exceeding any applicable maximum embedment
length requirements and it must meet the minimum final torsional resistance
criterion, or
replacement pile must be installed to satisfy the minimum embedment length
criterion. It must also be embedded to a length that places the last helix plate
at least equal to its own diameter beyond the depth of the first helix plate
of the replaced pile without exceeding any applicable maximum embedment
length requirements, and it must meet the minimum final torsional resistance
criterion.
12.1.3 If the installation reaches a specified maximum embedment length without achieving
the minimum torsional resistance criterion:
12.1.3.1 If allowed, remove and reinstall the pile at a position at least three times
the diameter of the largest helix plate away from the initial location. Original
embedment length and torsional resistance criteria must be met. The pile
repositioning may require the installation of additional helical piles with nominal
loads adjusted for these spacing changes, or
12.1.3.2 Demonstrate acceptable pile performance through pile load testing, or
12.1.3.3 De-rate the load capacity of the helical pile based on default or site specific
torque correlation factors and install additional piles as necessary, or
replacement pile must be installed to satisfy the minimum and/or maximum
embedment length criterion and it must meet the minimum final torsional
resistance criterion.

12.1.4 If a helical pile fails to meet the acceptance criteria in a pile load test:
12.1.4.1 Install the pile to a greater depth and installation torque and re-test; provided
that, if a maximum embedment length constraint is applicable, continued
installation will not exceed said maximum length constraint, or
12.1.4.2 Replace the pile with one having more and/or larger helix plates. The
replacement pile must be embedded to a length that places the last helix plate
at equal to its own diameter beyond the depth of the first helix plate of the
replaced pile without exceeding any applicable maximum embedment length
requirements. The replacement pile must be re-tested, or,
12.1.4.3 De-rate the load capacity of the helical pile based on the results of the load
APPENDIX 2F
test and install additional piles. Additional piles must be installed at positions
that are at least three times the diameter of the largest helix plate away from
any other pile locations.
12.1.5 If a helical pile fails a production quality control criterion as described in this Section
or for any reason other than described in this Section, any proposed remedy must be
approved by the Owner prior to initiating its implementation at the project site.
13 INSTALLATION RECORD SUBMITTALS

13.1 The Installing Contractor shall provide the Owner copies of the individual helical pile installation
records within 24 hours after each installation is completed. Formal copies shall be submitted
within 30 days following the completion of the helical pile installation. These installation records
shall include, but are not limited to, the following information:
13.1.1 Date and time of installation
13.1.2 Location of helical pile and pile identification number
13.1.3 Installed helical pile model and configuration
13.1.4 Termination depth, pile head depth, and length of installed pile
13.1.5 Actual inclination of the pile
13.1.6 Final torsional resistance
13.1.7 Calculated geotechnical capacity based on final torsional resistance
13.1.8 Comments pertaining to interruptions, obstructions, or other relevant information

14 FIELD COMPRESSION LOAD TESTING
14.1 If field compression load testing is required, the Installing Contractor shall furnish all labor,
equipment and pre-production helical piles necessary to accomplish the testing as shown in
the approved pile design documentation. Installing Contractor shall apply the specified loads
for the specified durations and record the specified data, for the specified number of piles.
No deviations from the test plan(s) will be allowed without explicit approval in writing from the
Owner. Pile testing shall be in general accordance with the ASTM D1143 quick test method and
the following criteria:
14.1.1 Failure criteria shall be in accordance with AC358 and is when plunging occurs or when
the net deflection exceeds 10% of the average helix plate diameter, whichever occurs
APPENDIX 2F
first.
14.1.2 An alignment load equal to 5% of the anticipated failure load or maximum anticipated
test load may be applied prior to the start of the test to take out slack in the load test
frame.
14.1.3 Loading increments shall be performed at 5% of the anticipated failure load or maximum
anticipated test load with a minimum hold time of 4 minutes at each increment.
14.1.4 Upon completion of the maximum test load hold increment, the pile shall be unloaded
in 5 to 10 even increments with minimum hold times of 4 minutes at each increment.
14.2 Installing Contractor shall provide the Owner copies of raw field test data within 24 hours after
the completion of each load test. Formal test reports shall be submitted within 30 days following
test completion. Formal test reports shall include the following information:
14.2.1 Name of project and Installing Contractor’s representative(s) present during load testing.
14.2.2 Name of manufacturer’s representative(s) present during load testing, if any.
14.2.3 Name of third party test agency and personnel present during load testing, if any.
14.2.4 Date, time, duration and type of the load test.
14.2.5 Unique test identifier and map showing the test pile location.
14.2.6 Pile model and installation information including shaft type, helix configuration, lead and
extension section quantities and lengths, final pile tip depth, installation date, total test
pile length and final termination torque.
14.2.7 Calibration records for applicable pile installation and test equipment.
14.2.8 Tabulated test results including cumulative pile head movement, loading increments
and hold times.
14.2.9 Plots showing load versus deflection for each loading/unloading interval.
15 CLEANUP
15.1 Within one week of completion of the work, the Installing Contractor shall remove any and all
material, equipment, tools, debris or other items belonging to the Installing Contractor or used
under the Installing Contractor’s direction.

HELICAL ANCHOR FOUNDATIONS
TENSION APPLICATIONS
1 SCOPE
1.1 The work consists of designing, furnishing and installing helical anchors and load transfer
devices used to support tension loads according to the project Plans and these specifications.
APPENDIX 2F
Contractor.
1.2.2 The Anchor Designer is the individual or firm generally hired by the Installing Contractor
to design the helical anchors.
1.2.3 The Installing Contractor installs and tests (if necessary) the helical anchors, and
possibly performs other tasks associated with the project.
1.3 The work may include helical anchor load testing.
necessary for the helical anchor installation.
unsafe conditions.
1.9 The Owner will be responsible for a horizontal field survey of the helical anchor locations prior to
helical anchor installation and a post installation survey to determine anchor shaft cutoff lengths
(if necessary).
1.10 The work does not include any post-construction monitoring of anchor performance unless

2 REFERENCES
2.2.1 ASTM A29: Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought
2.2.3 ASTM A123: Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
APPENDIX 2F
2.2.5 ASTM A307: Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
2.2.6 ASTM A325: Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
Rounds and Shapes
2.2.11 ASTM B695: Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel
2.2.12 ASTM D3689: Deep Foundations Under Static Axial Tensile Load
Devices
3 DEFINITIONS
3.1 The following terms apply to helical anchors used to support tension loads:
3.1.2 Bearing Stratum: The soil layer (or layers) that provides the helical anchor end-bearing
3.1.3 Crowd: Axial compressive force applied to the helical anchor shaft as needed during
installation to ensure the anchor advances at a rate approximately equal to the helix
pitch for each revolution.

3.1.6 Extension Section: Helical anchor shaft sections connected to the lead section or other
extension sections to advance the helix plates to the required bearing depth. Plain
APPENDIX 2F
extensions (without helix plates) or helical extensions (with one or more helix plates)
may be used depending upon soil conditions or project requirements.
3.1.7 Factor of Safety: The ratio of the ultimate anchor capacity or nominal resistance (strength)
to the nominal or service load used in the design of any helical anchor component or
3.1.10 Geotechnical Capacity: The maximum load or the load at a specified limit state, that
can be resisted through the anchors interaction with the bearing soils (see also Ultimate
Anchor Capacity).
3.1.11 Helical Anchor: Consists of a central steel shaft with one or more helix-shaped bearing
plates and a load transfer device (bracket) that allows attachment to structures. Helical
anchors are installed into the ground by application of torque and axial compressive
force (“crowd”).
along the anchor’s longitudinal axis thus aiding in anchor installation. The plate transfers
axial load to the soil through bearing.
3.1.14 Lead Section: The first helical anchor shaft component installed into the soil. It consists
of one or more helical plates welded to a central steel shaft.
3.1.15 Limit State: A condition beyond which a helical anchor component or interface
becomes unfit for service and is judged to no longer be useful for its intended function
(serviceability limit state) or to be unsafe (ultimate limit state (strength)).

Design).
3.1.18 Load Test: A process to test the ultimate anchor capacity and relation of applied load to
anchor head movement by application of a known load on the helical anchor head and
monitoring movement over a specific time period.
APPENDIX 2F
be resisted by the structural elements of a helical anchor.
3.1.21 Net Deflection: The total movement at the anchor head minus the theoretical elastic
deformation of the anchor shaft during a load test.
loads).
3.1.23 Nominal Resistance: The anchor capacity at a specified ultimate limit state (Load and
Resistance Factor Design). See Ultimate Anchor Capacity.
member capacity at a specified strength limit state. See Ultimate Anchor Capacity.
3.1.27 Ultimate Anchor Capacity: The helical anchor capacity based on the least capacity
determined from applicable ultimate limit states for mechanical and geotechnical
capacity.
4 APPROVED HELICAL ANCHOR MANUFACTURERS

Fax: (402) 393-4002.
4.2 Due to the special requirements for design and manufacturing of helical anchors, the anchors
shall be obtained from Foundation Supportworks®, Inc., or other qualified manufacturer with an

4.2.1 Documentation of at least five years of production experience manufacturing helical
anchors,
4.2.2 Documentation that the manufacturer’s helical anchors have been used successfully in
at least five engineered construction projects within the last three years,
project, and/or
APPENDIX 2F
5 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS FOR TENSION ONLY APPLICATIONS
5.1 Solid Square Shaft Helical Anchor Models HA150 and HA175 manufactured in accordance with
the requirements of Sections 5 and 7 of this specification.
5.1.1 Solid round corner square shaft helical anchors may be used for tension only applications.
disturbance:
diameter.
the same path as the proceeding plate.
6 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS FOR COMBINED COMPRESSION AND

TENSION APPLICATIONS
6.1 Hollow Round Shaft Helical Pile/Anchor Models HP237, HP287, HP288, HP350, HP450, HP662
and HP700 manufactured in accordance with the requirements of Sections 6 and 7 of this
specification.
6.1.1 Hollow round shaft helical piles/anchors shall be used in applications of alternating
compression and tension loads. During compression loading, round shaft helical piles/
anchors are generally more resistant to bending or buckling over solid square shaft
counterparts due to superior cross-sectional properties and coupling details.
6.1.2 During compression loading, pile/anchor shaft sections shall be in full, direct contact
within couplings so as to remove coupling bolts and coupling welds from the “in-service”
axial load path.

6.1.3 Pile/anchor shafts and couplings shall have a fit-up tolerance of 1/16 inch or less.
disturbance:
APPENDIX 2F
diameter.
the same path as their proceeding plate.
7 MATERIALS
7.1 Model HA150 Helical Anchor System
inch, solid, round-corner square (RCS) hot-rolled steel bars conforming to ASTM A29
with a minimum yield strength of 90 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 115 ksi. The
shaft finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
7.1.2 Shaft Coupling Material: The extension shaft sections have an internally forged upset
socket coupling at one end. Since the socket coupling is internally forged from the parent
shaft material, the material properties of the coupling are similar to the central steel
shaft. The shaft coupling finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A123.
7.1.3 Helix Plate Material: The helix plates are factory welded to the shaft lead or extension
shaft sections. Helix plates with outer diameters of 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14 inches are either
0.375 or 0.500-inch thick and 16-inch diameter helix plates are 0.500-inch thick. The
helix plates are manufactured with ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with a minimum yield
strength of 50 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi. The helix plate finish is either
plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
7.1.4 Shaft Coupling Hardware: The lead and extension shaft sections are coupled with one
(1) bolt and nut per coupled shaft section. The coupling hardware consists of 0.750-inch
standard hex bolts conforming to SAE J429 Grade 8 and jam nuts. The bolts and nuts
are mechanically galvanized in accordance with ASTM B695.
7.1.5 Brackets: New construction bracket HA150NCB and thread rod adaptor HA150TRA
are suitable for tension applications with the HA150 shaft. Bracket finishes are either
plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bracket shaft coupling
hardware finishes are mechanically galvanized in accordance with ASTM B695.

7.2 Model HA175 Helical Anchor System
with ASTM A123.
APPENDIX 2F
The bolts and nuts are mechanically galvanized in accordance with ASTM B695.
7.2.5 Brackets: New construction bracket HA175NCB and thread rod adaptor HA175TRA
are suitable for tension applications with the HA175 shaft. Bracket finishes are either
plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bracket shaft coupling
hardware finishes are mechanically galvanized in accordance with ASTM B695.
7.3 Model HP237 Helical Pile/Anchor System
sections and consist of either 0.313 or 0.375-inch thick ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with
a minimum yield strength of 50 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi. Helix plate
outer diameters are 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14 inches. The helix plate finish is either plain steel or

inch standard hex bolts conforming to ASTM A325 and heavy hex jam nuts. The bolts
and nuts are hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.
7.3.5 Brackets: New construction bracket HP238NCB shall be used for both tension and
compression applications with the HP237 shaft. Bracket finishes are either plain steel
or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bracket hardware finishes are
7.4 Model HP287 and Model HP288 Helical Pile/Anchor Systems

APPENDIX 2F
inch outer diameter by 0.203-inch nominal wall thickness (HP287) or 0.276-inch nominal
wall thickness (HP288), hollow structural section in conformance with ASTM A500
ASTM A123.
inch standard hex bolts conforming to SAE J429 Grade 8 and standard jam nuts. The
bolts and nuts are zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633.
7.4.5 Brackets: New construction brackets HP288NCB or HP288NCB8 shall be used for both
tension and compression applications with the HP287 or HP288 shafts. Bracket finishes
are either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bracket
hardware finishes are zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633.
Rev. 10/14/16

APPENDIX 2F
7.5.5 Brackets: New construction brackets HP350NCB or HP350NCB8 shall be used for both
tension and compression applications. Bracket finishes are either plain steel or hot-dip
sections. Helix plates with outer diameters of 8, 10, 12 or 14 inches are either 0.375 or
Rev. 10/14/16

7.6.5 Brackets: New construction bracket HP450NCB8 shall be used for both tension and
compression applications with the HP450 shaft. Bracket finishes are either plain steel or
hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bracket hardware finishes are zinc
coated in accordance with ASTM B633.
structural section in conformance with ASTM A500 Grade B or C with a minimum
APPENDIX 2F
yield strength of 60 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 70 ksi. The shaft finish
is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
shaft sections. Helix plates with outer diameters of 10, 12 or 14 inches are either
0.375 or 0.500-inch thick; 16-inch diameter helices are 0.500-inch thick. Helix
plates are manufactured with ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with a minimum yield
strength of 50 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi. The helix plate finish
consists of 1.750-inch standard hex bolts conforming to SAE J429 Grade 5
and standard hex nuts. The bolts and nuts are zinc coated in accordance with
ASTM B633.
structural section in conformance with ASTM A252 Grade 3 with a minimum
yield strength of 60 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 70 ksi. The shaft

shaft sections. Helix plates with outer diameters of 10, 12 or 14 inches are either
0.375 or 0.500-inch thick; 16-inch diameter helices are 0.500-inch thick. Helix
plates are manufactured with ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with a minimum yield
strength of 50 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi. The helix plate finish
consists of 2.000-inch heavy hex bolts conforming to ASTM A307 and heavy
hex nuts. The bolts and nuts are zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633.
APPENDIX 2F
8.1 Helical anchors shall be designed to support the specified tension load(s) as shown on the
project Plans. The overall length, helix configuration and minimum torsional resistance of a
helical anchor shall be such that the required geotechnical capacity is developed by the helix
plate(s) in an appropriate bearing stratum.
8.2 All structural steel anchor components shall be designed within the limits provided by the
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
(AISC-360). Either Allowable Stress Design (ASD) or Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)
are acceptable methods of analysis. Product testing in accordance with ICC-ES Acceptance
Criteria 358 may also be considered as an acceptable means of establishing system capacities.
8.3 Except where noted otherwise on the project Plans, all anchors shall be installed to provide an
ultimate torque-correlated capacity based on an ASD or LRFD analysis. For ASD, a minimum
factor of safety of 2 applied to the service or nominal loading shall be required. When an LRFD
analysis is required, the Owner shall provide applicable anchor design information including but
not limited to; factored loads, resistance factors and/or the required ultimate anchor capacity.
Factors of safety (ASD) or resistance factors (LRFD) may require modification to meet specific
deflection criteria stated on the Plans or drawings.
8.4 The required ultimate torque-correlated capacity shall be verified at each anchor location by
monitoring and recording the final installation torque and applying default torque correlations
per ICC-ES AC358. Site specific torque correlation factors may be determined by field tension
load testing as specified in Section 15.
8.5 Except where noted otherwise on the project Plans, each anchor shall be designed to meet a
8.6 The anchor design shall take into account group efficiency from anchor spacing, soil stratification,
and strain compatibility issues.

9 QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLING
CONTRACTOR AND ANCHOR DESIGNER
9.1 The Installing Contractor and/or Anchor Designer shall submit to the Owner, a proposal including
the documentation required in this Section. Work shall not begin until all the submittals have
been received and approved by the Owner. All costs associated with incomplete or unacceptable
9.2 Evidence of Installing Contractor’s competence in the installation of helical anchors shall be
9.2.1 Anchor manufacturer’s certificate of competency in installation of helical anchors,

APPENDIX 2F
Installing Contractor installed helical anchors similar to those shown in the project
Plans. Such list to include names and phone numbers of those project representatives
who can verify the Installing Contractor’s participation in those projects, and/or
9.2.3 A letter from the anchor manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative expressing

ability and intent to provide on-site supervision of the anchor installation.
discretion.
9.4 Evidence of Anchor Designer’s competence shall be provided to the Owner’s satisfaction and
may include any or all of the following:
Anchor Designer designed helical anchors similar to those shown in the project Plans.
The list shall include names and phone numbers of those project representatives who
can verify the Anchor Designer’s participation in those projects, and/or
9.4.3 Recommendation from the anchor manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative.
10.1 Within 2 weeks of receiving the contract award, the Installing Contractor and/or Anchor Designer
shall submit the following helical anchor design documentation:
10.1.1 Certification from the Anchor Designer that the proposed anchors meet the requirements
of this specification.
10.1.2 Qualifications of the Installing Contractor and Anchor Designer per Section 9.
10.1.3 Product designations for helical lead and extension sections and all ancillary products
to be supplied at each helical anchor location.
10.1.4 Individual anchor nominal loads, factors of safety, LRFD load and resistance factors and
required ultimate torque-correlated capacities, where applicable.

10.1.5 Individual anchor loading requirements (if any).
10.1.6 Manufacturer’s published allowable system capacities for the proposed anchor
assemblies, including load transfer devices.
10.1.7 Calculated mechanical and theoretical geotechnical capacity of anchors.
10.1.8 Minimum anchor termination torque requirements.
10.1.9 Maximum estimated installation torque and allowable installation torque rating of
anchor.
APPENDIX 2F
performed within one year of the proposed helical anchor installation starting date or as
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
contract.
11.1 Helical anchors shall be installed within 3 inches of the indicated plan location.
11.2 Helical anchor shaft alignment shall be within 2 degrees of the inclination angle shown on the Plans.
11.3 Top elevation of helical anchors shall be within 2 inches of the design vertical elevation.
12 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
12.1 Installing Contractor shall furnish and install all helical anchors per the project Plans and
approved anchor design documentation. In the event of conflict between the project Plans
and the approved anchor design documentation, the Installing Contractor shall not begin
construction on any affected items until such conflict has been resolved.
and material stockpiles shall be kept reasonably clean and orderly.

12.5 Installation of helical anchors may be observed by representatives of the Owner for quality
assurance purposes. The Installing Contractor shall give the Owner at least 24 hours’ notice
prior to the anchor installation operations.
12.6 The helical anchor installation technique shall be such that it is consistent with the geotechnical,
logistical, environmental, and load carrying conditions of the project. The lead section shall be
positioned at the appropriate site survey stake location as determined from the plan drawings.
12.7 The helical anchor sections shall be advanced into the soil in a continuous manner at a rate of
rotation less than 25 revolutions per minute (rpm). Sufficient crowd shall be applied to advance
the helical anchor sections at a rate approximately equal to the pitch of the helix plate per
revolution. The rate of rotation and magnitude of down pressure shall be adjusted for different
soil conditions and depths. Extension sections shall be provided to obtain the required minimum
APPENDIX 2F
overall length and minimum torsional resistance as shown on the project Plans.
13.1 The minimum final torsional resistance and/or any required anchor length and embedment depth
criteria, as specified in the Pre-Construction Submittals, must be satisfied prior to terminating
the anchor installation. In the event any helical anchor fails to meet these production quality
control termination criteria, the following remedies may be suitable if authorized by the Owner:
13.1.1 If the installation fails to meet the minimum torsional resistance criterion at the minimum
embedment length:
13.1.1.1 Continue the installation to greater depths until the torsional resistance criterion
is met, provided that, if a maximum length constraint is applicable, continued
installation does not exceed said maximum length constraint, or
13.1.1.2 Demonstrate acceptable anchor performance through anchor load testing, or
13.1.1.3 Replace the anchor with one having a different helix plate configuration. The
replacement anchor must not exceed any applicable maximum embedment
length criteria and either: (A) be embedded to a length that places the last
helix plate at least three times its own diameter beyond the depth of the first
helix plate of the replaced anchor and meet the minimum torsional resistance
criterion; or (B) pass anchor load testing criteria.
13.1.2 If the torsional resistance during installation reaches the helical anchor’s allowable
torque rating prior to satisfaction of the minimum embedment length criterion:
13.1.2.1 Terminate the installation at the depth obtained, or
13.1.2.2 Replace the anchor with one having a shaft with a higher torsional strength
rating. The replacement anchor must be installed to satisfy the minimum
embedment length criterion. It must also be embedded to a length that places
the last helix plate at least three times its own diameter beyond the depth of
the first helix plate of the replaced anchor without exceeding any applicable
maximum embedment length requirements and it must meet the minimum final
torsional resistance criterion, or

replacement anchor must be installed to satisfy the minimum embedment
length criterion. It must also be embedded to a length that places the last
helix plate at least three times its own diameter beyond the depth of the first
helix plate of the replaced anchor without exceeding any applicable maximum
embedment length requirements, and it must meet the minimum final torsional
the minimum torsional resistance criterion:
13.1.3.1 If allowed, remove and reinstall the anchor at a position at least three times
the diameter of the largest helix plate away from the initial location. Original
APPENDIX 2F
embedment length and torsional resistance criteria must be met. The anchor
repositioning may require the installation of additional helical anchors with
nominal loads adjusted for these spacing changes, or
13.1.3.2 Demonstrate acceptable anchor performance through anchor load testing, or
13.1.3.3 De-rate the load capacity of the helical anchor based on default or site specific
torque correlation factors and install additional anchors as necessary, or
replacement anchor must be installed to satisfy the minimum and/or maximum
embedment length criterion and it must meet the minimum final torsional
13.1.4 If a helical anchor fails to meet the acceptance criteria in an anchor load test:
13.1.4.1 Install the anchor to a greater depth and installation torque and re-test; provided
that, if a maximum embedment length constraint is applicable, continued
installation will not exceed said maximum length constraint, or
13.1.4.2 Replace the anchor with one having more and/or larger helix plates. The
replacement anchor must be embedded to a length that places the last helix
plate at least three times its own diameter beyond the depth of the first helix
plate of the replaced anchor without exceeding any applicable maximum
embedment length requirements. The replacement anchor must be re-tested,
or,
13.1.4.3 De-rate the load capacity of the helical anchor based on the results of the
load test and install additional anchors. Additional anchors must be installed
at positions that are at least three times the diameter of the largest helix plate
away from any other anchor locations.
13.1.5 If a helical anchor fails a production quality control criterion as described in this Section

14.1 The Installing Contractor shall provide the Owner copies of the individual helical anchor
installation records within 24 hours after each installation is completed. Formal copies shall
be submitted within 30 days following the completion of the helical anchor installation. These
installation records shall include, but are not limited to, the following information:
14.1.2 Location of helical anchor and anchor identification number
14.1.3 Installed helical anchor model and configuration
14.1.4 Termination depth, anchor head depth, and length of installed anchor
APPENDIX 2F
14.1.5 Actual inclination of the anchor
14.1.6 Final torsional resistance
14.1.7 Calculated geotechnical capacity based on final torsional resistance
15 FIELD TENSION LOAD TESTING

15.1 If field tension load testing is required, the Installing Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment
and pre-production helical anchors necessary to accomplish the testing as shown in the
approved anchor design documentation. Installing Contractor shall apply the specified loads
for the specified durations and record the specified data, for the specified number of anchors.
Owner. Anchor testing shall be in general accordance with the ASTM D3689 quick test method
and the following criteria:
15.1.1 Failure criteria shall be in accordance with AC358 and is when plunging occurs or when
the net deflection exceeds 10% of the average helix plate diameter, whichever occurs
first.
15.1.2 An alignment load equal to 5% of the anticipated failure load or maximum anticipated
test load may be applied prior to the start of the test to take out slack in the load test
frame.
15.1.3 Loading increments shall be performed at 5% of the anticipated failure load or maximum
anticipated test load with a minimum hold time of 4 minutes at each increment.
15.1.4 Upon completion of the maximum test load hold increment, the anchor shall be unloaded
in 5 to 10 even increments with minimum hold times of 4 minutes at each increment.
15.2 Installing Contractor shall provide the Owner copies of raw field test data within 24 hours after
the completion of each load test. Formal test reports shall be submitted within 30 days following

15.2.5 Unique test identifier and map showing the test anchor location.
15.2.6 Anchor model and installation information including shaft type, helix configuration, lead
and extension section quantities and lengths, final anchor tip depth, installation date,
total test anchor length and final termination torque.
15.2.7 Calibration records for applicable anchor installation and test equipment.
15.2.8 Tabulated test results including cumulative anchor head movement, loading increments
and hold times.
APPENDIX 2F
15.2.9 Plots showing load versus anchor head movement for each loading/unloading interval.
16 CLEANUP

HELICAL SOIL NAILS
EARTH RETENTION APPLICATIONS
1 SCOPE
1.1 The work consists of designing, furnishing and installing helical soil nails and load transfer
devices for helical soil nail walls or slopes according to the project Plans and these specifications.
APPENDIX 2F
Contractor.
1.2.2 The Soil Nail Designer is the individual or firm generally hired by the Installing Contractor
to design the helical soil nails.
1.2.3 The Installing Contractor installs and tests (if necessary) the helical soil nails, and
possibly performs other tasks associated with the project.
1.3 Helical soil nail walls or slopes are built from the top down in existing ground. The work consists
of the following items as shown on the Plans:
1.3.1 Excavating in staged lifts in accordance with federal, state or local safety guidelines.
1.3.2 Installing helical soil nails to the specified minimum length, orientation and minimum
final termination torque.
1.3.3 Providing and placing drainage elements at the specified locations.
1.3.4 Placing wall or slope face steel reinforcement, attaching bearing plates and connection
devices and applying shotcrete or other specified facing over the reinforcement.
1.4 The work may include helical soil nail load testing.
1.5 The Owner will be responsible for obtaining right-of-way or easement access permits necessary
for the helical soil nail installation.

unsafe conditions.
1.10 The Owner will be responsible for a horizontal field survey of the helical soil nail locations prior
to helical soil nail installation and an elevation survey to determine soil nail shaft cutoff height
subsequent to helical soil nail installation.
1.11 The work does not include any post-construction monitoring of soil nail performance unless
APPENDIX 2F
2 REFERENCES
2.2.1 ASTM A29: Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought
2.2.3 ASTM A123: Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Products
2.2.5 ASTM A185: Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete
2.2.7 ASTM A615: Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
2.2.9 ASTM B695: Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel
2.2.10 ASTM D1785: Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
2.3 Federal Highway Administration (FHWA)
2.3.1 FHWA Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 7, “Soil Nail Walls”
Devices
Rev. 10/14/16

3 DEFINITIONS
3.1 The following terms apply to helical soil nails:
3.1.2 Bearing Stratum: The soil layer (or layers) that provides helical soil nail end bearing
3.1.3 Crowd: Axial compressive force applied to the helical soil nail shaft as needed during
APPENDIX 2F
installation to ensure the soil nail advances at a rate approximately equal to the helix
pitch for each revolution.
3.1.6 Extension Section: Helical soil nail shaft sections connected to the lead section or other
extension sections to advance the helix plates to the required bearing strata and nail
length. Helical soil nail extension have helix plates.
3.1.7 Factor of Safety: The ratio of the ultimate soil nail capacity or nominal resistance (strength)
to the nominal or service load used in the design of any helical soil nail component or
be resisted through the soil nails interaction with the bearing soils (see also Ultimate Soil
Nail Capacity).
3.1.11 Helical Soil Nail: Consists of a central steel shaft with multiple helix-shaped bearing
plates and a load transfer device that allows attachment to wall or slope facing
components. Helical soil nails are installed into the ground by application of torque and
axial compressive force (“crowd”).

along the soil nail’s longitudinal axis thus aiding in soil nail installation. The plate transfers
axial load to the soil through bearing.
3.1.14 Lead Section: The first helical soil nail shaft component installed into the soil. It consists
of multiple helical plates welded to a central steel shaft.
3.1.15 Limit State: A condition beyond which a helical soil nail component or interface
becomes unfit for service and is judged to no longer be useful for its intended function
APPENDIX 2F
(serviceability limit state) or to be unsafe (ultimate limit state (strength)).
Design).
3.1.18 Load Test: A process to test the ultimate soil nail capacity and relation of applied load
to soil nail head movement by application of a known load on the helical soil nail head
and monitoring movement over a specific time period.
small magnitude. All other loads are variable loads (see also Nominal Load).
be resisted by the structural elements of a helical soil nail.
3.1.21 Net Deflection: The total deflection at the helical soil nail head minus the theoretical
elastic deformation of the soil nail shaft during a load test.
loads).
3.1.23 Nominal Resistance: The soil nail capacity at a specified ultimate limit state (Load and
Resistance Factor Design). See Ultimate Soil Nail Capacity.
member capacity at a specified strength limit state. See Ultimate Soil Nail Capacity.

3.1.27 Ultimate Soil Nail Capacity: The helical soil nail capacity based on the least capacity
determined from applicable ultimate limit states for mechanical and geotechnical
capacity.
4 APPROVED HELICAL SOIL NAIL MANUFACTURERS

Fax: (402) 393-4002.
4.2 Due to the special requirements for design and manufacturing of helical soil nails, the soil nails
APPENDIX 2F
4.2.1 Documentation of at least five years of production experience manufacturing helical soil
nails,
4.2.2 Documentation that the manufacturer’s helical soil nails have been used successfully in
at least three engineered construction projects within the last three years,
project, and/or
5.1 Solid Square Shaft Helical Soil Nail Models HS150 and HS175 manufactured in accordance with
disturbance:
diameter.
the proceeding plate.
5.2 Wall Reinforcement, Anchorage, Bearing Plates, Nuts and Washers.

5.2.1 The wall anchorage shall consist of a bearing plate, or other fabricated bearing device
connected to the helical soil nail with threaded rod adaptors.
5.2.2 A spherical seat nut or beveled washer and nut may be required at the connection
of the helical soil nail to the bearing device to accommodate soil nail inclination per
manufacturer recommendations.
5.2.3 Bearing devices shall be fabricated from steel conforming to ASTM A36 or A572
specifications, or equivalent.
5.2.4 Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185 or equivalent.
5.2.5 Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 420 deformed.
APPENDIX 2F
5.3 Drainage Material
5.3.1 Vertical Wall Drains: Provide prefabricated, fully wrapped preformed geocomposite
drains as required and shown on the Plans. The drainage core shall be either a preformed
grid of embossed plastic or a system of plastic pillars and interconnections forming a
semi-rigid mat, not less than 0.25-inch or more than 0.50-inch thick. The core material,
when covered with filter fabric, shall be capable of maintaining a drainage void for
the entire length of the permeable liner. Preformed drains shall be no wider than 12
inches unless special methods are used to ensure adherence of the shotcrete to the
fabric and to preclude the fabric from sagging under the weight of the shotcrete. They
shall be suitably outletted or connected to a longitudinal drain at the base of the wall.
When splicing of drains is required, full flow through the splice shall be maintained and
splices shall be suitably protected from damage and contamination during subsequent
shotcreting. The shotcrete shall be the full design thickness over the drain.
5.3.2 Horizontal Drains: Provide as required and shown on the Plans, slotted and unslotted
PVC pipe conforming to ASTM D1785 or equal. When horizontal drains are installed in
bored holes, the Installing Contractor shall make provisions to assure that the drain-
hole annulus does not collapse prior to the insertion of the slotted drain. Only the front
12 inches of drain pipe shall be unslotted.
5.4 Shotcrete Wall Facing
5.4.1 The Installing Contractor shall submit for approval by the Owner, materials, methods
and control procedures for this work. Shotcrete design shall be in accordance with
the shotcrete specifications in FHWA Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 7, “Soil
Nail Walls”, except as otherwise specified on the Plans. If facing material other than
shotcrete is specified, the Installing Contractor shall submit for approval by the Owner,
materials, methods and control procedures for this work.
5.5 Materials Handling and Storage
5.5.1 Store cement to prevent moisture degradation and partial hydration. Do not use cement
that has become caked or lumpy. Store aggregates so that segregation and inclusion
of foreign materials are prevented. Store un-galvanized helical soil nails on supports to
keep the steel from contacting the ground. Light rust that has not resulted in pitting is
acceptable for temporary applications.

6 HELICAL SOIL NAIL MATERIALS
6.1 Model HS150 Helical Soil Nail System
APPENDIX 2F
with ASTM A123.
6.1.3 Helix Plate Material: The helix plates are factory welded to the lead or extension
shaft sections. The helix plates have outer diameters of either 6 or 8 inches and are
manufactured from 0.375-inch thick, ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with a minimum yield
6.1.4 Shaft Coupling Hardware: The lead and extension shaft sections are coupled with one
(1) bolt and nut per coupled shaft section. The coupling hardware consists of 0.750-inch
standard hex bolts conforming to SAE J429 Grade 8 and jam nuts. The bolts and nuts
are mechanically galvanized in accordance with ASTM B695.
6.1.5 Thread Rod Adapter: Thread rod adaptor HA150TRA is suitable for use with the
HS150 shaft. Thread rod adapter finishes are either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized
in accordance with ASTM A123. Adapter shaft coupling hardware is mechanically
galvanized in accordance with ASTM B695.
6.2 Model HS175 Helical Soil Nail System
with ASTM A123.
6.2.3 Helix Plate Material: The helix plates are factory welded to the lead or extension
shaft sections. The helix plates have outer diameters of either 6 or 8 inches and are
manufactured from 0.375-inch thick, ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with a minimum yield

inch standard hex bolts conforming to SAE J429 Grade 8 and jam nuts. The bolts and
nuts are mechanically galvanized in accordance with ASTM B695.
6.2.5 Thread Rod Adapter: Thread rod adaptor HA175TRA is suitable for use with the
HS175 shaft. Thread rod adapter finishes are either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized
in accordance with ASTM A123. Adapter shaft coupling hardware is mechanically
galvanized in accordance with ASTM B695.

APPENDIX 2F
7.1 Helical soil nails shall be designed to support the specified load(s) as shown on the project
Plans. The overall length, helix configuration and minimum torsional resistance of a helical soil
nail shall be such that the required geotechnical capacity is developed by the helix plate(s) in an
appropriate bearing stratum.
7.2 All structural steel soil nail components shall be designed within the limits provided by the
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
(AISC-360). Either Allowable Stress Design (ASD) or Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)
are acceptable methods of analysis. Product testing in accordance with ICC-ES Acceptance
Criteria 358 may also be considered as an acceptable means of establishing system capacities.
7.3 Design of helical soil nail structures for excavation support, earth retention, slope stabilization,
or other applications shall consider the following (at a minimum):
7.3.1 Global and internal stability of the system
7.3.2 Surcharge loads from adjacent structures or other loading that will be present during
and/or after construction.
7.3.3 Helical soil nail torque correlated bearing capacity (bond strength) & load transfer
7.3.4 Structural capacity of individual helical soil nail components
7.3.5 Construction sequencing
7.3.6 Drainage conditions
7.3.7 Serviceability
7.4 The design of helical soil nail walls shall be in accordance with the FHWA Geotechnical
Engineering Circular No. 7, “Soil Nail Walls”.
7.5 Except where noted otherwise on the project Plans, all helical soil nails shall be installed to
provide an ultimate torque-correlated capacity based on an ASD or LRFD analysis. For ASD, a
minimum factor of safety of 2 for internal stability of the wall and slope stability at the elevation
of the toe of the wall shall be used for temporary or permanent applications. Lower factors of
safety may be considered if approved by the Owner. When an LRFD analysis is required, the
Owner shall provide applicable soil nail design information including but not limited to; factored
loads, resistance factors and/or the required ultimate soil nail capacity. Factors of safety (ASD)
or resistance factors (LRFD) may require modification to meet specific deflection criteria stated
on the Plans or drawings.

7.6 The required ultimate torque-correlated capacity shall be verified at each soil nail location by
monitoring and recording final installation torque and applying default torque correlations per
ICC-ES AC358. Site specific torque correlation factors may be determined by field load testing
as specified in Section 14.
7.7 Except where noted otherwise on the project Plans, each soil nail shall be designed to meet a
7.8 The soil nail design shall take into account group efficiency from soil nail spacing, soil
stratification, and strain compatibility issues.
APPENDIX 2F
8.1 The Installing Contractor and/or Soil Nail Designer shall submit to the Owner, a proposal
including the documentation required in this Section. Work shall not begin until all the submittals
have been received and approved by the Owner. All costs associated with incomplete or
unacceptable submittals shall be the responsibility of the Installing Contractor.
8.2 Evidence of Installing Contractor’s competence in the installation of helical soil nails shall be
8.2.1 Helical soil nail manufacturer’s certificate of competency in installation of helical soil
nails,
8.2.2 A list of at least three projects completed within the previous three years wherein
the Installing Contractor installed helical soil nails and/or helical tieback anchors in
comparable soil conditions for the nominal loads similar to those shown on the project
Plans. Such list to include names and phone numbers of those project representatives
who can verify the Installing Contractor’s participation in those projects, and/or
8.2.3 A letter from the helical soil nail manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative
expressing ability and intent to provide on-site supervision of the soil nail installation.
discretion.
8.4 Evidence of Soil Nail Designer’s competence shall be provided to the Owner’s satisfaction and
may include any or all of the following:
Soil Nail Designer designed helical soil nails similar to those shown in the project Plans.
can verify the Soil Nail Designer’s participation in those projects, and/or
8.4.3 Recommendation from the soil nail manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative.

9.1 Within 2 weeks of receiving the contract award, the Installing Contractor and/or helical Soil Nail
Designer shall submit the following helical soil nail design documentation:
9.1.1 Certification from the Soil Nail Designer that the proposed soil nails meet the requirements
of this specification.
9.1.2 Qualifications of the Installing Contractor and Soil Nail Designer per Section 8.
9.1.3 Product designations for helical soil nail lead and extension sections and all ancillary
products to be supplied at each helical soil nail location.
9.1.4 Individual soil nail nominal loads, factors of safety, LRFD load and resistance factors
APPENDIX 2F
and required ultimate torque-correlated capacities, where applicable.
9.1.5 Individual soil nail loading or post-tensioning requirements (if any).
9.1.6 Manufacturer’s published allowable system capacities for the proposed soil nail
assemblies, including load transfer devices, if any.
9.1.7 Calculated mechanical and theoretical geotechnical capacities including unit bond
stress of the proposed soil nails.
9.1.8 Minimum helical soil nail termination torque requirements.
9.1.9 Maximum estimated installation torque and allowable installation torque rating of soil
nail.
9.1.10 Minimum and/or maximum embedment lengths or other site specific embedment length
or depth requirements as may be appropriate for the site soil profiles.
performed within one year of the proposed helical soil nail installation starting date or
as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
contract.
10.1 Helical soil nails shall be installed within 3 inches of the indicated plan location.
10.2 Helical soil nail shaft alignment shall be within 2 degrees of the inclination angle shown on the
Plans.
10.3 Soil nail wall bearing plate edge distance from face of wall shall be within 1 inch of the design
placement as shown on the Plans.

11 EXECUTION
11.1 Installing Contractor shall furnish and install all helical soil nails per the project Plans and
approved soil nail design documentation. In the event of conflict between the project Plans
and the approved soil nail design documentation, the Installing Contractor shall not begin
construction on any affected items until such conflict has been resolved.
APPENDIX 2F
11.4 The portion of the construction site occupied by the Installing Contractor, his equipment and his
material stockpiles shall be kept reasonably clean and orderly.
11.5 Installation of helical soil nails may be observed by the Owner for quality assurance purposes.
The installing contractor shall give the Owner at least 24 hours’ notice prior to the soil nail
installation operations.
11.6 Construction Procedure
11.6.1 The wall or slope is to be constructed from the top down as the soil in front of the wall
is removed to specified depths and the helical soil nails are installed at each level.
11.6.2 The exposed soil face shall be retained with a construction facing consisting of mesh
reinforced shotcrete or other appropriate facing material. Drainage systems, when
required, shall be installed prior to applying shotcrete or other facing material.
11.7 Site Drainage Control
11.7.1 Provide positive control and discharge of all surface water that will affect construction
of the helical soil nail retaining wall or slope. Maintain all pipes and conduits used
to control surface water during construction. Surface water drainage network shall be
independent of the wall drainage network.
11.7.2 Contact the Owner if unanticipated subsurface drainage structures are discovered
during excavation.
11.8 Excavation
11.8.1 Excavation shall proceed in stages or lifts according to the Plans, exposing a minimum
amount of soil face which will still allow for the installation of the helical soil nails and
wall facing system while assuring stability of the excavated face.
11.8.2 The Owner shall be responsible for providing the necessary survey and alignment control
during excavation of each lift and for performing the excavation in a manner which will
allow for construction of the wall facing to the specified minimum thickness and to the
line and grade indicated on the Plans. The Installing Contractor shall be responsible
for locating and installing the helical soil nails within the allowable tolerances in this
specification or on the Plans, and for performing the excavation and nail installation

in a manner which will allow for constructing the wall facing to the specified minimum
thickness and to the line and grade indicated on the Plans.
11.8.3 The Owner shall perform the excavation for the soil nail wall under the direction of
the Installing Contractor. Care shall be taken to excavate to the final wall face using
procedures that: (1) prevent over-excavation; (2) prevent ground loss, swelling, air
slaking, or loosening; (3) prevent loss of support for completed portions of the wall; (4)
prevent loss of soil moisture at the face; and (5) prevent ground freezing.
11.8.4 The exposed unsupported final excavation face cut height shall not exceed the vertical
nail spacing plus the required reinforcing lap or the short-term stand-up height of the
ground, whichever is less. Excavation to the next level shall not proceed until helical soil
nail installation, reinforced shotcrete or other wall or slope facing placement, attachment
APPENDIX 2F
of bearing plates and connection means and nail testing has been completed and
accepted in the current lift. Shotcrete shall have cured for at least 72 hours or attained
at least its specified 3-day compressive strength before excavating the next lift.
11.9 Helical Soil Nail Installation
11.9.1 Installing Contractor shall determine the installation method necessary to achieve the
helical soil nail pullout resistance specified herein or on the Plans, in accordance with
the helical soil nail acceptance criteria in the Helical Soil Nail Testing section. Install
sacrificial helical soil nails for verification testing using the same equipment, methods,
nail inclination and soil nail models as planned for the production soil nails.
11.9.2 No installation of production helical soil nails will be permitted until successful pre-
production verification testing of nails is completed and approved by the Owner. The
number and location of the verification tests will be as indicated on the Plans or specified
herein.
11.9.3 During installation of the helical soil nails, the torque required to install each soil nail
shall be monitored and recorded. The installation records shall include the following
information:
11.9.3.1 Date and time of installation
11.9.3.2 Gear motor make and model
11.9.3.3 Location of helical soil nail and nail identification number
11.9.3.4 Actual helical soil nail model and configuration
11.9.3.5 Quantity and length of lead and extension sections installed
11.9.3.6 Installation torque log taken in minimum 5-foot increments of the total soil nail
length and the final installation torque
11.9.3.7 Actual inclination of the soil nail
11.9.3.8 Comments pertaining to interruptions, obstructions, or other relevant

information

11.9.4 When the final installation torque readings at the planned helical soil nail lengths do
not achieve the minimum final torque requirements per the design or Plans, the Owner
shall be notified to make recommendations for adding soil nails or extending the non-
conforming soil nail to greater lengths.
11.9.5 Helical soil nail installation shall be terminated when the planned length is achieved
as long as the final installation torque requirements per the design are met. When the
maximum torque rating of the helical soil nail shaft is achieved prior to reaching the
design length, the Soil Nail Designer shall be notified to make design recommendations
to the Owner.
11.9.6 The installation of the helical soil nails shall be made at the locations, inclinations, and
lengths shown on the Plans or as directed by the Owner. The installation techniques
APPENDIX 2F
and equipment used shall be such that it is consistent with the geotechnical, logistical,
environmental, and load carrying conditions of the project.
11.9.7 The helical soil nail sections shall be engaged and advanced into the soil in a smooth,
continuous manner at a rate of rotation less than 25 rpm. Sufficient crowd shall be
applied to advance the helical soil nail sections at a rate approximately equal to the
pitch of the helix plate per revolution. The rate of rotation and magnitude of crowd
shall be adjusted for different soil conditions and depths. Extension sections shall be
provided to obtain the required minimum overall nail length.
11.9.8 Helical soil nails that encounter unanticipated obstructions during installation shall be
relocated as approved by the Owner’s representative.

12.1 The Installing Contractor shall provide the Owner, or his authorized representative, copies of
individual helical soil nail installation records within 24 hours after each soil nail installation
is completed. Formal copies shall be submitted within 30 days following the completion of
the helical soil nail installation. These installation records shall include the information listed in
Section 11.9.3.
13 HELICAL SOIL NAIL TESTING

13.1 If helical soil nail testing is required, the Installing Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment
and pre-production helical soil nails necessary to accomplish the testing as shown in the
approved soil nail design documentation. Installing Contractor shall apply the specified loads
for the specified durations and record the specified data, for the specified number of soil nails.
Owner. Testing of any helical soil nail shall not be performed until the shotcrete facing has
cured for at least 72 hours or attained at least the specified 3-day compressive strength. Helical
soil nails may be tested immediately after installation without a shotcrete facing as long as
precautions to maintain face stability are made (i.e., temporary lagging, etc.).
13.2 The test equipment shall consist of:
13.2.1 A calibrated dial gauge capable of measuring to 0.001 inch shall be used to measure
movement.

13.2.2 A hydraulic cylinder and gauge calibrated as a unit shall be used to apply the test
load. The pressure gauge shall be graduated in 100 psi increments or less and used to
measure the applied load.
13.2.3 A reaction frame shall be used to distribute the load to the wall or slope facing without
causing excessive deformation to the testing equipment or cracking in the facing.
13.3 Apply and measure the test load with the hydraulic cylinder and pressure gauge. The stroke of
the hydraulic cylinder shall have sufficient travel to allow the test to be done without resetting
the equipment. Measure the soil nail head movement with the dial gauge. The dial gauge shall
have sufficient travel to allow the test to be done without having to reset the gauge. Support the
gauge independently from the hydraulic cylinder, wall, or reaction frame.
APPENDIX 2F
13.4 Pre-production verification testing of sacrificial test helical soil nails shall be performed prior to
installation of production helical nails to verify the Installing Contractor’s installation methods
and nail pullout resistance. The verification testing shall consist of:
13.4.1 Install sacrificial test helical nails as per Helical Soil Nail Installation Section 11.9.
13.4.2 Perform a minimum of two verification tests for each significantly different soil strata
within the bearing zones of the proposed helical soil nails.
13.4.3 Sacrificial helical test nails shall have lengths of shaft without helix plates (smooth shaft)
in addition to the test nail with helix plates. The length of smooth shaft is to be located
nearest to the wall or slope face and shall be at least three feet long. The quantity of
helix plates along the test nail shaft shall be determined based on the diameter of the
helix plates used and the soil nail shaft torsional rating such that the torque rating of
the shaft and the helical nail structural capacity is not exceeded during installation and
testing.
13.4.4 Isolate the test nail from the shotcrete facing and/or reaction frame used during testing.
13.4.5 Submit the proposed location and length of shaft sections with and without helix plates
prior to testing to the Owner for review and approval in accordance with the Pre-
Construction Submittals Section 9.
13.4.6 The Design Test Load (DTL) shall be determined by the Owner taking into consideration
the required ultimate soil nail capacity in the test region, or the helical soil nail with the
highest load as determined by the internal and external stability analysis.

13.4.7 Verification test nails shall be incrementally loaded to a maximum test load of 200% of
the DTL in accordance with the following loading schedule. The helical soil nail head
movements shall be recorded at each load increment.
VERIFICATION TEST LOADING SCHEDULE
Load Hold Time

AL (0.05 DTL max.) 1 minute
0.25DL 10 minutes
0.50DL 10 minutes
0.75DL 10 minutes
1.00DL 10 minutes
1.25DL 10 minutes
APPENDIX 2F
1.50DL (Creep Test) 60 minutes
1.75DL 10 minutes
2.00DL 10 minutes
The alignment load (AL) should be the minimum load required to align the testing
apparatus and should not exceed 5% of the DTL. Dial gages should be set to “zero”
after the alignment load has been applied. Each load increment shall be held for at
least 10 minutes. The verification test helical soil nail shall be monitored for creep at
1.50 DTL. Nail movements during the creep portion of the test shall be measured and
recorded at 1 minute, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 20, 30, 50, and 60 minutes.
13.5 Proof testing of production helical soil nails shall be performed on three percent (1 in 33) or more
of the production helical soil nails in each horizontal row or a minimum of 1 nail per row. The
quantity and size of helix plates along the soil nail shaft shall be determined such that the torque
strength rating and allowable helical nail structural capacity is not exceeded during installation
and testing. The minimum length of the proof tested production helical soil nail is 7 feet. The
following requirements for proof testing shall be followed:
13.5.1 The DTL shall be determined as shown in Section 14.4.6
13.5.2 Proof tests shall be performed by incrementally loading the helical soil nail to a maximum
test load of 150% of the DTL in accordance with the following loading schedule. At
load increments other than the maximum test load, the load shall be held long enough
to obtain a stable reading. A stable reading is defined as less than 0.010 inches of
movement between readings taken two minutes apart. The helical soil nail head
movements shall be recorded at each load increment.
PROOF TEST LOADING SCHEDULE
Load Hold Time

AL (0.05 DTL max.) Until Stable
0.25DL Until Stable
0.50DL Until Stable
0.75DL Until Stable
1.00DL Until Stable
1.25DL Until Stable
1.50DL (Max. Test Load) See Below

The alignment load (AL) should be the minimum load required to align the testing
apparatus and should not exceed 5% of the Design Test Load (DTL). The verification
test helical soil nail shall be monitored for creep at 1.50 DTL. At the discretion of the
Owner, either 10 minute or 60 minutes creep tests shall be performed at the maximum
test load (1.5 DTL). The creep period shall start as soon as the maximum test load is
applied, and the helical nail movement shall be measured and recorded at 1 minute,
2, 3, 5, 6, and 10 minutes. Where the helical nail movement between 1 minute and 10
minutes exceeds 0.08 inch, the maximum test load shall be maintained until the helical
nail movement is less than 0.08 inch for any one log cycle increment (i.e., 2 minutes and
20 minutes, etc.).
13.6 A helical soil nail shall be considered acceptable when the following criteria are met:
APPENDIX 2F
13.6.1 For verification tests, a total creep movement of less than 0.08 inch per log cycle of
time between the 6 and 60 minute readings, and the creep rate is linear or decreasing
throughout the creep test load hold period.
13.6.2 For proof tests, a total creep movement of less than 0.08 inch is measured between
the 1 and 10 minute readings, or a total creep movement of less than 0.08 inch is
measured between the subsequent log cycles, and the creep rate is linear or decreasing
throughout the creep test load hold period.
13.6.3 For verification and proof tests, a pullout failure does not occur at the maximum test
load. Pullout failure is defined as the load which results in continued pullout (creep)
movement of the test helical soil nail.
13.7 If the pre-production verification test nail does not meet the criterion in Section 13.6, it shall be
rejected and the Installing Contractor shall propose alternative methods and install replacement
verification test helical nails. Successful proof tested helical soil nails meeting the above test
acceptance criteria may be used as production nails, provided the number of helix plates on the
test nail is such that the helical nail length is equal to or greater than the specified length. If the
production proof test nail does not meet this criterion, it shall become sacrificial and shall be
replaced with an additional production helical nail installed.
13.8 The Owner may require the Installing Contractor to replace some or all of the installed production
soil nails between a failed proof test soil nail and the adjacent passing proof test nail. Or, the
Owner may require the installation and testing of additional proof test helical nails to verify that
adjacent previously installed production nails have sufficient load carrying capacity.
14 CLEANUP

APPENDIX 2G
GUIDELINES AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Appendix 2G
Guidelines and Recommendations

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION GUIDELINES FOR
HELICAL PILE, HELICAL ANCHOR AND PUSH PIER DESIGN
Design professionals rely on site-specific geotechnical investigations to provide soil strength
parameters for use in foundation design. However, when these investigations do not properly identify
a suitable bearing stratum, the project may be impacted with additional costs or delays until such
adequate information is obtained. At the very least, contractors left to bid on a project with little to
no usable soil information will do so conservatively. These bid proposals are then often filled with
clauses outlining potential change order items; e.g., additional footage, revisions to the shaft section,
revisions to the helix plate configuration, costs and responsibility due to failed load tests, etc. These
extras often add up to many times the cost to simply complete deep soil borings and obtain the
APPENDIX 2G
necessary soil information.
This document is not intended for incorporation into bid specifications, proposals or requests for
proposals. Ultimately, it is the role of the Owner and his/her team of Design Professionals and
Contractors to determine the scope of geotechnical investigation necessary based on considerations
that may include structure size and type, structure design category, anticipated design loads,
acceptable levels of risk and/or available funding.
This document is provided as a guide to assist Design Professionals, Contractors and Owners when
helical piles, helical anchors, or push piers are planned. Due to differences in design, fabrication,
and performance of seemingly equivalent products between manufacturers, these guidelines are
intended exclusively for products designed and manufactured by Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.
(FSI).
Hydraulically-Driven Push Piers
1. Push piers are advanced into the ground with hydraulic equipment exerting a steady but high
downward force at the top of the pier. With most push pier systems using 4-inch O.D. shafts or
smaller, this translates to high contact pressures with the soil. In order to provide competent
bearing and to also minimize the potential for the push pier to punch through a seemingly
competent but thin layer of soil, a minimum thickness of 10 to 15 feet of hard/dense material
should be identified or be known to exist. This material may consist of hard clays, dense to very
dense sands, or competent bedrock. The required thickness and strength of this layer would
increase with an increase in the required pier capacity.
2. The Standard Penetration Test (SPT) completed in accordance with ASTM D1586 is a common
method of retrieving disturbed soil samples in the field while also providing correlations to several
soil strength parameters. The SPT is performed by driving a 2-inch O.D. split barrel sampler 18
inches with a 140 pound hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. The number of blows required to
drive the sampler the final 12 inches is recorded as the standard penetration number, or N-value.
Typically, N-values of 35 to 40 blows per foot for clay soils and 30 to 35 blows per foot for sand
are required to provide end-bearing resistance for push piers. If the loading is extremely light or
the piers are long enough to develop significant skin friction, lower end-bearing resistance may
be required. However, these guidelines are good rules of thumb for most installations.
3. The standard penetration test provides a reasonable indication of strength and density of granular
soils with correlations available to relate SPT N-values to relative density, unit weight and internal

friction angle. Laboratory direct shear tests or triaxial tests provide even more accurate estimates
of soil strength which may be warranted for large projects. The additional cost of performing these
tests could be offset by a more economical pier design that would not have been considered
using SPT results alone.
4. SPT N-values may be inconsistent for fine-grained, cohesive soils and may not accurately reflect
the soil shear strength. Tests may also be conducted on intact cohesive soil samples with pocket
penetrometers. These results can vary widely between technicians depending upon the accuracy
of the instrument and how closely the test procedure is followed. Laboratory testing of cohesive
samples collected using undisturbed sampling methods, such as Shelby tube sampling (ASTM
D1587), provides more reliable results. The more common methods for laboratory testing of
undisturbed samples of cohesive soils are the unconfined compression test, the triaxial shear
test and the direct shear test. Undrained shear strengths in excess of 4,000 pounds per square
APPENDIX 2G
foot (psf) are typically required to provide end-bearing resistance for push piers.
5. The presence of very loose granular soil and very soft to soft cohesive soil should be identified.
Column buckling may be a concern when very loose or soft soil is present in layer thicknesses
of more than just a few feet, especially for a deep foundation element that derives its capacity
primarily from end-bearing. Column buckling should be considered when SPT N-values are less
than 4 blows/foot. When SPT sampling indicates weight-of-hammer (WOH) or weight-of-rod
(WOR) values, additional laboratory testing for soil strength is recommended to document the
shear strength in the WOH/WOR zone. Cone penetrometer tests (CPT) completed in accordance
with ASTM D3441 may also be considered to measure in situ soil strengths. The CPT is widely
used in lieu of, or as a supplement to, the SPT. The CPT is particularly suited for soft clays, soft
silts and fine to medium sand deposits.
6. The presence of rubble fill, construction debris, or fill soils containing cobbles or boulders should
be identified. Large, hard fractions within fill soils would likely stop advancement of the push pier.
Pre-drilling may be required to allow the push pier to penetrate these soils and reach a suitable
bearing stratum.
7. When project characteristics or site conditions warrant, the Owner and his/her team of Design
Professionals may elect to determine the corrosive characteristics of the soils. Geotechnical or
environmental consultants may classify soils as corrosive based on visual review of soil samples,
from soil survey maps of the area, or from the results of additional testing. At a minimum, pH and
resistivity testing are required for a corrosion analysis. Multi-directional field resistivity testing is
preferred over laboratory resistivity testing. For a more complete corrosion analysis, chemical
analyses may be completed to determine specific concentration levels. Corrosive characteristics
of the soil should be determined from the ground surface to the bearing elevation of the deep
foundation, if practical.
Helical Piles/Anchors
1. Helical piles and anchors are advanced into the ground by the application of torque and crowd.
Crowd (or force) is applied longitudinally with the shaft to initiate penetration into the soil with
the helix bearing plates. Less crowd is typically needed after the helix plates advance a few feet
below the surface. Additional crowd may be needed in order to maintain the proper penetration
rate of about 3 inches per revolution (for a helix plate with a 3-inch pitch) through stiffer/denser
soil layers. Helical piles and anchors are best suited for medium dense sands and stiff to very

stiff clay soils, although they can be effectively designed for bearing in very dense sands and
hard clay. With proper design and installation techniques, helical piles may also be considered for
bearing on or within soft or weathered bedrock. A competent bearing stratum should be identified
by the geotechnical investigation. Additional helix plates are often needed along the shaft as the
required pile/anchor capacity increases or when bearing in lower-strength soils. Therefore, with
higher pile/anchor capacities, the known or investigated thickness of the competent soil layer must
also increase to fully embed all of the helix plates along the shaft. For compression piles, the
geotechnical investigation should extend at least 5 to 10 feet below the anticipated termination
depth of the pile. Soil strength parameters for the soils within that 5 to 10 feet should be equivalent
to or greater than those strength parameters for the soils at the helix bearing depths.
2. The Standard Penetration Test (SPT) completed in accordance with ASTM D1586 is a common
method of retrieving disturbed soil samples in the field while also providing correlations to several
APPENDIX 2G
soil strength parameters. The SPT is performed by driving a 2-inch O.D. split barrel sampler 18
inches with a 140 pound hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. The number of blows required to
drive the sampler the final 12 inches is recorded as the standard penetration number, or N-value.
Typically, N-values of 15 to 30 blows per foot for clay soils and 10 to 25 blows per foot for
sand are preferred for providing the necessary end-bearing resistance for helical piles or helical
anchors. N-values higher or lower than those ranges may also be considered.
3. The standard penetration test provides a reasonable indication of strength and density of granular
soils with correlations available to relate SPT N-values to relative density, unit weight and internal
friction angle. Laboratory direct shear tests or triaxial tests provide even more accurate estimates
of soil strength which may be warranted for large projects. The additional cost of performing these
tests could be offset by a more economical pier design that would not have been considered
using SPT results alone.
4. SPT N-values may be inconsistent for fine-grained, cohesive soils and may not accurately reflect
the soil shear strength. Tests may also be conducted on intact cohesive soil samples with pocket
penetrometers. These results can vary widely between technicians depending upon the accuracy
of the instrument and how closely the test procedure is followed. Laboratory testing of cohesive
samples collected using undisturbed sampling methods, such as Shelby tube sampling (ASTM
D1587), provides more reliable results. The more common methods for laboratory testing of
undisturbed samples of cohesive soils are the unconfined compression test, the triaxial shear
test and the direct shear test. Undrained shear strengths ranging from 1,500 psf to 4,000 psf
are preferred for use of helical piles or anchors, although higher or lower values may also be
considered.
5. The presence of very loose granular soil and very soft to soft cohesive soil should be identified.
Column buckling may be a concern for compression piles when very loose or soft soil is present
in layer thicknesses of more than just a few feet, especially for a deep foundation element that
derives its capacity primarily from end-bearing. Column buckling should be considered when SPT
N-values are less than 4 blows/foot. When SPT sampling indicates weight-of-hammer (WOH) or
weight-of-rod (WOR) values, additional laboratory testing for soil strength is recommended to
document the shear strength in the WOH/WOR zone. Cone penetrometer tests (CPT) completed
in accordance with ASTM D3441 may also be considered to measure in situ soil strengths. The
CPT is widely used in lieu of, or as a supplement to, the SPT. The CPT is particularly suited for
soft clays, soft silts and fine to medium sand deposits.

6. Helical bearing within soft or sensitive clays should be avoided due to long term settlement or
creep effects. Pile/anchor capacities should be limited when helix plates bear within medium stiff
clay or loose sands, and a higher factor of safety (FOS ≥ 3) may also be considered to reduce
potential long term settlement or creep.
7. Groundwater levels should be accurately identified during the geotechnical investigation,

particularly for sites with granular soils. The presence of groundwater above the anticipated
bearing depths of the helix plates may significantly reduce the effective overburden stresses,
thereby reducing pile capacities in granular soils. Groundwater table fluctuations should
be considered for the pile/anchor design and installation. The highest potential groundwater
elevation should be used for design of the helix plate configuration and the current groundwater
elevation should be used for the determination of installation torque requirements with that given
plate configuration.
APPENDIX 2G
8. The presence of rubble fill, construction debris, or fill soils containing cobbles or boulders should
be identified. Large, hard fractions within fill soils would likely stop advancement of the helical
pile or anchor. Pre-drilling or removal of the hard fractions may be required to allow helical piles/
anchors to penetrate these soils and reach a suitable bearing stratum.
9. When project characteristics or site conditions warrant, the Owner and his/her team of Design
Professionals may elect to determine the corrosive characteristics of the soils. Geotechnical or
environmental consultants may classify soils as corrosive based on visual review of soil samples,
from soil survey maps of the area, or from the results of additional testing. At a minimum, pH and
resistivity testing are required for a corrosion analysis. Multi-directional field resistivity testing is
preferred over laboratory resistivity testing. For a more complete corrosion analysis, chemical
analyses may be completed to determine specific concentration levels. Corrosive characteristics
of the soil should be determined from the ground surface to the bearing elevation of the deep
foundation, if practical.
10. Soil strength parameters should be determined for the top 10 feet of the soil profile when helical
piles are subjected to lateral loading. Continuous sampling or continuous in situ testing methods
should be used within this zone in order to estimate the lateral load capacity of the pile. For
critical projects, consideration could be given to special sampling and testing techniques such
as pressuremeter testing; otherwise typical sampling and testing methods as described above
may be suitable.
Alternative Methods of Developing Geotechnical Design Information
For many projects, an appropriate level of geotechnical information has not been obtained prior
to initiating a preliminary design for helical piles and push piers. New construction helical piles are
often an afterthought following a shallow geotechnical investigation and discovery of weak, near-
surface soils. Helical piles are then listed in the geotechnical report or on the project plans as a
deep foundation alternative, but additional or deeper test borings are rarely completed to adequately
identify the soil strength parameters for the deeper bearing soils. In additional to a geotechnical
investigation, there are other potential sources or methods for obtaining geotechnical information for
a preliminary design.

1. Establish a relationship with a local geotechnical engineering firm. An established, local
geotechnical firm may have performed a previous investigation within the area of the proposed
project, or have knowledge of the general soil profile. A discussion with the geotechnical firm
would allow the installing contractor to, at a minimum, determine if soil conditions are suitable
for use of helical piles or push piers.
2. Contact local well drilling firms for any information regarding local ground/geologic conditions.
3. Contact the Geologic Survey for the applicable State jurisdiction. This agency often maintains
records of test borings and wells throughout a given state, and this information may be used to
support a preliminary design effort.
4. Conduct a test installation of a helical pile/anchor, also called a “helical test probe”. A typical helical
test probe consists of a Model HA150 or Model HA175 lead section with a single 10 or 12-inch
APPENDIX 2G
helix plate and multiple extensions to reach the required depth. For some soil profiles, a double
helix may be necessary to provide the thrust needed to penetrate stiff or dense strata or advance
through particularly soft zones. For these situations, a double 8/10 or 10/12 helix configuration
generally works well. Torque must be monitored in one foot intervals during installation of the
test probe(s) from the ground surface to the termination depth. The torque readings must be
taken with calibrated equipment such as a certified gear motor and calibrated pressure gages or
by using a calibrated torque transducer in line with the drive tooling. The depth of investigation
would be similar to that described above; i.e., 5 to 10 feet below the anticipated depth of the
production piles. A general understanding of the soil profile and depth to groundwater may be
required to back-calculate soil strength from a helical test probe. The proposed number of helical
test probes for a given project is dependent upon the project characteristics and the variability
of site soil conditions. Factors of safety greater than 2.0 must be considered when the helical
pile/anchor design is based solely or in large part on the results of helical test probes. The
following information is required when evaluating the results of helical test probes: make and
model of the gear motor, calibrated torque readings, test probe shaft size, and test probe helix
plate configuration. For push pier projects, the installation of a test push pier typically provides
sufficient information for a push pier preliminary design.
5. Perform a load test. If site access allows the setup of a load test frame, the results from compression
or tension load tests can determine helical pile or anchor capacity without soil information. The
required number of load tests would again be dependent upon project characteristics and should
be determined by design professionals. The helical piles or anchors used for the load test(s) shall
be installed with calibrated equipment so the true installation torque is known. The load tests
should be performed in general accordance with applicable ASTM standards. A site-specific
torque correlation factor can be determined from the results of the load test(s), which would then
allow the final installation torque readings to be used for pile capacity verification.
Helical piles, helical anchors and hydraulically-driven push piers are installed routinely on residential
projects without adequate site-specific soil information available. The homeowner is often unwilling
to pay for deep soil borings, laboratory tests and recommendations from a geotechnical consultant.
In these cases, the installing contractor typically proposes a specific pile or anchor system with
depth/length and product spacing based upon experience from doing previous work in the area. The
contractor then follows rules-of-thumb guidelines for installation.
FSI offers a software tool called “Foundation View” to assist FSI installing contractors in estimating
structural residential loads and spacing of retrofit piers. This program assumes that the soils are

capable of providing adequate support to the piering system in order to achieve its full rated allowable
capacity with a suitable factor of safety. The contractor should request that adequate soil information
be provided, or have at least some general knowledge of the local and/or site-specific soil conditions
to reduce potential risks associated with unknowns or unforeseen conditions.
DISCLAIMER
The information contained in this document is provided for Design Professionals, Contractors,
Owners and Foundation Supportworks®, Inc. (FSI) Installing Contractors to assist in the application
of FSI products. Copying or distributing all or part of this document for any other purpose, without
the prior written consent of FSI, is expressly forbidden.
The guidelines provided in this document are not intended to become part of bid specifications,
APPENDIX 2G
proposals, requests for proposals, or to override the requirements of appropriate national, state
or local regulatory agencies or the recommendations of qualified design professionals. Due to the
wide variation in building codes, regulations and rules that apply to construction between regions
and countries, FSI should not be relied upon for and shall not be responsible for the development or
approval of final design documents. Development and submittal of final design documents shall be
completed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state of the project.

PRELIMINARY DESIGN SERVICES
Foundation Supportworks®, Inc. (FSI) offers Preliminary Design Services for new construction and
retrofit piering and anchoring projects at no cost to design professionals and FSI installing contractors.
This service includes a review of available soil information, plans and specifications, and development
of preliminary design recommendations for the load and deflection criteria specified. FSI commits
time and resources for each project submitted. In order to make efficient use of time and potentially
expedite a response, the Preliminary Design Request Form should be completely filled out each time
a request is made for project assistance. The Preliminary Design Request Form can also be provided
in an editable PDF format where the information can be typed into the appropriate fields and emailed
to FSI along with the pertinent project documents. Contact the FSI engineering department for the
electronic version of the request form.
APPENDIX 2G
The preliminary design recommendations provided by FSI are intended for use by design
professionals and FSI installing contractors for estimating and bidding purposes only and should not
be incorporated into project bid documents or specifications. Please see disclaimer language below
which will in part or whole be included with preliminary design recommendations provided by FSI.
Project specifications typically require that formal pile/pier design submittals be completed by an
engineer licensed in the project’s state or jurisdiction. FSI engineers cannot serve as the engineer of
record by signing and stamping project-specific documents and details.
Preliminary Design Request Process:
1. Assemble all project information (all three items must be provided)
a. Plans
b. Specifications
c. Geotechnical Report
2. Completely fill out the Preliminary Design Request Form
a. Step 1: Select request recipient
b. Step 2: Fill out your contact information
c. Step 3: Fill out the required project information
d. Step 4: Identify which documents are being provided and how they are being sent
3. Send the Preliminary Design Request Form and all required documents to FSI by
a. Mail
b. Fax
c. Email (preferred)
All requests shall be addressed or copied to James Malone for project tracking purposes. Please
allow up to five working days for a preliminary design or up to two working days for bid preparation
assistance. A response may be delayed if critical information is missing from the request.

DISCLAIMER
(To Accompany FSI Preliminary Design Recommendations)
The information and preliminary design recommendations contained in this document are provided
to design professionals and/or Foundation Supportworks®, Inc. (“FSI”) dealers to assist in the
application of FSI products. Copying or distributing all or part of this document for any other purpose,
without the prior written consent of FSI, is expressly forbidden.
The preliminary design recommendations provided in this document are based on information
collected from/by outside agencies or parties. FSI is not responsible for the completeness, accuracy
or applicability of any such information. FSI DOES NOT WARRANT THE INFORMATION OR
PRELIMINARY DESIGN
RECOMMENDATIONS CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL

APPENDIX 2G
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED MERCHANTABILITY AND

WARRANTIES OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The preliminary
design recommendations provided in this document are not intended to become part of contract
bid documents or specifications or to override the requirements of appropriate national, state or
local regulatory agencies or the recommendations of qualified design professionals. Due to the wide
variation in building codes, regulations and rules that apply to construction between regions and
countries, FSI should not be relied upon for and shall not be responsible for the development or
approval of final design documents. Development and submittal of final design documents shall be
completed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state of the project.
The design and application of foundation support products (including helical and push pier systems
manufactured by FSI) are dependent upon site conditions, including without limitation geotechnical
properties of soil which can vary significantly between sampling points. If there is an identified change
in site conditions or revision or addition to the information used for the basis of this preliminary
design, FSI should be contacted to provide alternative recommendations based on such changing
site conditions or information.

PRELIMINARY DESIGN REQUEST FORM
Step 1: Attention
□ James Malone james.malone@foundationsupportworks.com 402.861.4773
□ Don Deardorff don.deardorff@foundationsupportworks.com 402.861.4756
□ Jake Blessen jake.blessen@foundationsupportworks.com 402.885.6608
□ Jordan Larsen jordan.larsen@foundationsupportworks.com 402.916.4222
Step 2: Contact Information
APPENDIX 2G
Date of request:
Dealer: Contact name:
Phone: Cell: Email:
Step 3: Project Information

Project Name: City: State:
Bid Date: Date Needed By (allow up to 5 working days):
Project Engineer: Phone:
Geotechnical Engineer: Phone:
Product Allowable/Working Loads (kips) Factor of

Type Model # Quantity Compression Tension Lateral Safety
New Construction
Helical Piles
Retro Helical Piers
Helical Tiebacks
Soil Nails
Push Piers
Other
Define scope of the project:

Step 4: Attachments:
Plans or Design Drawings □ None □ Mail □ Email □ Fax
Soil Borings or Geotechnical Reports □ None □ Mail □ Email □ Fax
Project Specifications □ None □ Mail □ Email □ Fax
Photos (Provide drawing to show photo location and direction.) □ None □ Mail □ Email □ Fax

POLICY FOR AXIAL COMPRESSION OR AXIAL TENSION
LOAD TESTS ON HELICAL PILES AND ANCHORS
Foundation Supportworks®, Inc. (FSI) is equipped and staffed to provide the FSI contractor network
with the necessary equipment, support and assistance for completing axial compression and axial
tension field load tests on helical piles and anchors. Given FSI’s investment in time and resources to
provide this level of support, we ask that all parties communicate, understand and be in agreement
with the statements outlined in this document. This document is intended to set realistic expectations
of FSI’s involvement in such projects and to guide the FSI installing contractor, the general contractor,
the design team, and the owner through the load test process. The design team member in charge
of the load test is hereafter referred to as the “engineer of record”. Ultimately, FSI’s goal is to bring
APPENDIX 2G
all possible positive results to fruition in the various steps of the load test process, while maintaining
reasonable costs and minimizing frustrations. Contact an FSI representative should any questions
arise or special circumstances require consideration.
FSI Field Staff Responsibility
1. FSI field staff may act in an advisory capacity for the installation of test piles, test anchors and
reaction piles and also oversee setup of the load test frame and test equipment.
2. Upon request by the FSI installing contractor or engineer of record, FSI field staff will advise or
train personnel in recording load and deflection readings during the load test, or otherwise assist
in data collection.
3. FSI field staff does not interpret load test results nor do they offer opinions concerning pass/
fail criteria. The load test information must be forwarded to FSI engineering for evaluation if
interpretation has been requested.
4. FSI assumes no responsibility, economically or otherwise, should the load tests fail to achieve the
desired results.
5. FSI is not responsible for site safety issues and shall not be held liable for any breach in site safety
protocol. If FSI representatives feel site safety procedures are not followed or are inadequate, said
representatives have the authority to immediately terminate the field load test oversight services.
Qualifications for FSI Engineering Involvement with Field Load Tests
1. FSI engineering may provide a preliminary design recommendation and/or a document review
prior to the test pile/anchor installation. Project specifications, test loads, applicable failure
criteria, and adequate subsurface information must be provided in order to develop the preliminary
design recommendation.
2. FSI shall be provided an open line of communication with the project design team, including
owners, architects, engineers, and contractors during the preliminary design phase and
throughout the load test process.

3. FSI engineering shall have access to all documents and information relating to the load test
and the load test results, including project specifications, test loads, failure criteria, subsurface
information, installation field logs for all test piles/anchors and reaction piles, calibrations of test
equipment, and field logs of load tests.
4. The engineer of record understands and considers opinions and recommendations by FSI
engineering regarding options to proceed in the event of unsatisfactory load test results.
FSI Engineering Role and Limitations
1. FSI engineering acts in an advisory capacity only, whether in preliminary design, on site issues
and adjustments, use of FSI products and equipment, or interpretation of load test data.
2. FSI engineering assumes no liability in the event that capacity is not achieved, piles/anchors
APPENDIX 2G
require increased depth or length, or a revised helix plate configuration is needed.
3. FSI and FSI engineering reserve the right to refuse participation in any preliminary design, project
review, or field load test operation at its discretion.
Review of Load Test Data
1. Upon request of the FSI installing contractor or the engineer of record, FSI engineering may offer
opinions and recommendations regarding the results of the load test. The field installation logs for
the test pile/anchor and reaction piles, the test pile/anchor deflection versus load measurements,
and all other applicable information should be scanned and emailed to FSI engineering at the
earliest opportunity to allow adequate time for review.
2. Please allow at least 24 hours per test from the time of submittal of the field logs for FSI engineering to
evaluate the information and offer an interpretation and opinion of the load test results. If the information
submitted is incomplete or illegible, additional time may be required for interpretation of data.
Suggested Installation Procedure for Test Piles/Anchors, Reaction Piles and

Load Frame
1. If FSI engineering will be involved with interpretation of load test data, the following information
shall be provided prior to installation of the test pile/anchor and reaction piles: make and model
of installation equipment with ratings for hydraulic fluid pressure and flow rate; make and model
of the drive head; method of torque monitoring with any back-up information and/or calibrations,
expected ultimate pile capacity, and the load test failure criteria. Provide same information to
engineer of record for review and approval.
2. In the event that no soil information or inadequate soil information is provided, it is recommended
that helical test probes be installed on the proposed site to a depth at least 10 feet beyond
the anticipated pile tip depth using calibrated torque monitoring equipment. See Geotechnical
Investigation Guidelines in Appendix 2G for helical test probe installation procedures.
3. It is highly recommended that field installation torque/differential pressure recordings be logged in

one-foot increments for the test pile/anchor and reaction piles. At a minimum, torque/differential
pressure readings must be recorded on five-foot intervals up to the last ten feet of installation,
where then one foot interval readings are required to the termination depth. Field installation logs

shall further note depths and magnitudes of high torque/pressure spikes, apparent encounters
with obstructions, or any other difficulties in advancing the helical piles.
4. Test piles/anchors and reaction piles shall be installed as close to vertical and plumb as possible,
unless battered or angled elements will be tested. Maintain installation speed under 25 rpm
during installation of the test and reaction piles. Installation speed should be further reduced
to 10 rpm or less for the final three to five feet of installation or when there is a risk of abruptly
exceeding the torque rating of the helical shaft.
5. The test frame shall have an allowable structural capacity greater than the maximum test load.
The test frame reaction piles shall have a combined ultimate soil capacity at least two times the
anticipated maximum test load. The maximum test load shall be determined by multiplying the
design working load by the appropriate factor of safety. Ultimate soil capacities for reaction piles
are determined by multiplying the installation torque by the applicable default torque correlation.
APPENDIX 2G
6. The test frame shall be installed with the main beam centered over the test pile. The main beam
and the reaction beams shall be as close to horizontal (level) as possible and the reaction piles
shall be as close to vertical as possible.
7. Tests procedures should generally follow ASTM D1143 (Compression) and ASTM D3689 (Tension).
Criteria for evaluating the ultimate capacity of the pile is provided in AC358, Acceptance Criteria
for Helical Pile Systems and Devices, by the International Code Council Evaluation Service, Inc.
(ICC-ES). Alternative failure criteria may be proposed by the engineer of record. Such criteria
must be provided to FSI prior to installation of the test piles/anchors and reaction piles.
Load Test Communication and Responsibilities
1. A representative of the Engineer of Record or the Owner should be on site prior to initiation of the
load test and should remain through completion of the test cycles.
2. When an extended or long term test is required, procedures and data recording should be detailed
by the Engineer of Record.
3. The Engineer of Record, the Owner, or the Owner’s Representative shall have the opportunity to
physically read dial gauges and record measurements.
4. Engineer of record and FSI engineering shall be provided with a copy of the proposed test pile/
anchor installation procedures and load test procedures for review and comment prior to the start
of any site work.
FSI Travel and Expenses
1. FSI has a vested interest in the success of all FSI installing contractor load test operations and
offers field assistance when necessary to support its contractor network. FSI typically requires
the FSI installing contractor to pay travel costs and expenses for FSI representatives to travel to
the project site to provide support. In special cases, FSI may choose to assume some or all of the
travel costs and expenses for the FSI representative to be on site for the load test. In the event
that the FSI installing contractor fails to be prepared to a reasonable degree and this contributes
to extensive delays and extended or repeat trips, FSI reserves the right to pass unnecessary
costs on to the FSI installing contractor. Proper communication and organization should prevent
additional costs that are within control.

APPENDIX 2H
DOCUMENTATION
Appendix 2H
Documentation

ICC-ES Evaluation Report ESR-3074
Reissued May 2014
This report is subject to renewal July 1, 2015.
www.icc-es.org | (800) 423-6587 | (562) 699-0543 A Subsidiary of the International Code Council ®
DIVISION: 31 00 00—EARTHWORK 3.2.1 Helical Lead Sections and Extensions: The FSI
Section: 31 63 00—Bored Piles helical pile lead sections consist of one or more helical-
shaped circular steel plates factory-welded to a central
REPORT HOLDER: steel shaft. The depth of the helical piles in soil is typically
extended by adding one or more steel shaft extensions
FOUNDATION SUPPORTWORKS, INC. that are mechanically connected together by couplings, to
12330 CARY CIRCLE form one, continuous steel pile.
OMAHA, NEBRASKA 68128 The central steel shaft of the lead and extension
APPENDIX 2H
DOCUMENTATION
(800) 281-5845 7
sections is a round, 2 /8-inch-outside-diameter (73 mm),
www.foundationsupportworks.com 0.276-inch-nominal-wall-thickness, hollow structural
jeff.kortan@foundationsupportworks.com section. The various shaft lead and extension
configurations are listed in Table 5.
EVALUATION SUBJECT:
Each helical steel bearing plate (helix) is 0.375 inch
FOUNDATION SUPPORTWORKS HELICAL (9.5 mm) thick, and has a 3-inch (76 mm) pitch and
FOUNDATION SYSTEMS spiral edge geometry with an outer diameter of 8, 10, 12
or 14 inches (203, 254, 305 or 356 mm). The helices are
1.0 EVALUATION SCOPE welded to the helical shaft. The lead helix is located about
4 inches from the tip of the shaft lead section. The
Compliance with the following codes: extensions may consist of the shaft only or include helix
®
2012, 2009 and 2006 International Building Code (IBC) plates.
Properties evaluated: The extension section couplings consist of a round,
1
 Structural 6-inch-long (152.4 mm), 3 /2-inch-outside-diameter
(89 mm), 0.281-inch-nominal-wall-thickness, hollow
 Geotechnical structural section outer sleeve, and two 3/4-inch-diameter
2.0 USES (19.1 mm) standard hex threaded bolts and matching
standard hex jam nuts. The pipe sleeve is factory-welded
Foundation Supportworks, Inc. (FSI), Model HP288 to the end of the extension section. (See Figure 3.)
Helical Foundation Systems are used either to underpin
foundations of existing structures or to form deep 3.2.2 Brackets: Brackets are constructed with factory-
foundations for new structures, and are designed to welded steel plate and steel pipe components. The
transfer axial compression and axial tension loads from different brackets are described in Sections 3.2.2.1
the supported structures to suitable soil bearing strata. through 3.2.2.2.
3.0 DESCRIPTION 3.2.2.1 Retrofit Bracket Assemblies FS288B and
FS288BL: The FS288B and FS288BL bracket
3.1 General: assemblies are designed for use with the HP288 helical
The FSI Model HP288 helical foundation systems consist shaft and are used to transfer axial compressive loading
of a central lead shaft with one or more helical-shaped from existing concrete foundations to the HP288 helical
steel bearing plates, extension shafts, which may or may piles. The bracket assembly consists of an FS288B or
not consist of helical bearing plates, shaft couplings that FS288BL bracket, an external pipe sleeve (FS288ES30
connect multiple shaft sections, and a bracket that allows or FS288ES48), a cap plate (FS288C), two threaded rods
for attachment to the supported structure. The shafts with and matching nuts. (See Figure 1.)
helix bearing plates are screwed into the ground by The FS288B and FS288BL brackets are constructed
application of torsion and the shaft is extended until a from factory-welded, 0.250-inch-, 0.375-inch- and
desired depth and/or a suitable soil or bedrock bearing 0.500-inch-thick (6.4 mm, 9.5 mm, and12.7 mm) steel
stratum is reached. plates.
3.2 System Components: The external sleeve (FS288ES30) is manufactured from
1
The FSI Model HP288 helical foundation systems include a 30-inch-long (762 mm), 3 /2-inch-outside-diameter
a lead shaft (HP288L), extension shafts (HP288E), Type (89 mm) and 0.216-inch-nominal-wall-thickness pipe with
A side-load brackets (FS288B and FS288BL), and Type B a factory-welded end ring which consists of a 3/4-inch-long
direct-load brackets (HP288NCB and HP288NCB8), for (19.1 mm), 4.0-inch-outside-diameter (102 mm) and
attachment to concrete foundations. 0.226-inch-nominal-wall-thickness pipe. The FS288ES48
ICC-ES Evaluation Reports are not to be construed as representing aesthetics or any other attributes not specifically addressed, nor are they to be construed
as an endorsement of the subject of the report or a recommendation for its use. There is no warranty by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC, express or implied, as
to any finding or other matter in this report, or as to any product covered by the report.
1000
Copyright © 2014 Page 1 of 9

ESR-3074 | Most Widely Accepted and Trusted Page 2 of 9
external sleeve is identical to the FS288ES30 except that bracket finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in
the FS288ES48 is 48 inches (1219 mm) long. accordance with ASTM A123.
The FS288C cap plate assembly is manufactured from 3.3.4.2 FS288ES30 and FS288ES48 Sleeves: The
a 1/2-inch-long (12.7 mm), 31/2-inch-outside-diameter carbon steel structural round tubing, used for the 30-inch-
(89 mm), 0.216-inch-nominal-wall-thickness steel pipe and 48-inch-long (762 mm and 1219 mm) sleeves,
that is factory-welded to a 1-inch-thick (25.4 mm), 5-inch- conforms to ASTM A500, Grade B or C, having a
wide (127 mm), 9-inch-long (229 mm) steel plate. The cap minimum yield strength of 50 ksi (345 MPa) and a
plate is attached to the retrofit bracket with two 3/4-inch- minimum tensile strength of 62 ksi (427 MPa). The
3
diameter-by-16-inch-long (19.1 mm by 406 mm) threaded /4-inch-long (19.1 mm) steel ring (collar) conforms to
3
rods, and matching /4-inch (19.1 mm) heavy hex nuts. ASTM A53, Types E and S, Grade B, having a minimum
(See Figure 1.) yield strength of 35 ksi (241 MPa) and a minimum tensile
strength of 60 ksi (413 MPa). The sleeve finish is either
3.2.2.2 New Construction Brackets HP288NCB and plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
HP288NCB8: HP288NCB and HP288NCB8 brackets are ASTM A123.
designed for embedment in cast-in-place concrete
foundations. The brackets are used to support axial 3.3.4.3 FS288C Cap Plate Assembly: The 1/2-inch-long
tensile and compressive loads that are concentric with the (12.7 mm) steel pipe conforms to ASTM A53, Types E
longitudinal axis of the shaft. (See Figure 2.) and S, Grade B, having a minimum yield strength of
35 ksi (241 MPa) and a minimum tensile strength of
The HP288NCB bracket is manufactured from a 60 ksi (413 MPa). The steel cap plate conforms to ASTM
5.06-inch-long (128.5 mm), 31/2-inch-outside-diameter A572, Grade 50, having a minimum yield strength of
(89 mm), 0.250-inch-nominal-wall-thickness steel pipe
DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX 2H

sleeve which is factory-welded to a 3/4-inch-thick 65 ksi (448 MPa). The cap plate assembly finish is either
(19.1 mm), 6-inch-square (152 mm) steel cap plate. The plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM
bracket is attached to the shaft with two 3/4-inch-diameter A123.
(19.1 mm) standard hex threaded bolts and with matching
3
/4-inch (19.1 mm) standard hex jam nuts. (See Figure 2.) 3.3.4.4 Threaded Rods and Nuts: The 3/4-inch-diameter
steel threaded rods conform to ASTM A193, Grade B7,
The HP288NCB8 bracket is identical to the HP288NCB having a minimum yield strength of 105 ksi (724 MPa)
bracket except that the HP288NCB8 cap plate is an and a minimum tensile strength of 125 ksi (862 MPa). The
8-inch-square (203 mm) steel plate. (See Figure 2.) matching 3/4-inch-diameter steel heavy hex nuts conform
3.3 Material Specifications: to ASTM A563 Grade DH or DH3, or ASTM A194
Grade 2H. The threaded rods and nuts are zinc-coated in
3.3.1 Lead and Extension Shafts: The leads and accordance with ASTM B633, with coating classification
extensions are carbon steel round structural tubes that Fe/Zn 8.
conform to ASTM A500, Grade B or C, having a minimum
yield strength of 60 ksi (413 MPa) and a minimum tensile 3.3.5 New Construction Brackets HP288NCB and
strength of 70 ksi (483 MPa). The shaft finish is either HP288NCB8:
plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with 3.3.5.1 Plates: The steel plates conform to ASTM A36,
ASTM A123. having a minimum yield strength of 36 ksi (248 MPa) and
a minimum tensile strength of 58 ksi (400 MPa). The plate
3.3.2 Shaft Coupling:
finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in
3.3.2.1 Pipe Sleeves: The sleeves are carbon steel accordance with ASTM A123.
round structural tubing that conforms to ASTM A513, 3.3.5.2 Pipe Sleeves: The pipe sleeves are steel round
Type 5, Drawn Over a Mandrel (DOM), Grade 1026, structural tubes that conform to ASTM A513, Type 5,
having a minimum yield strength of 70 ksi (483 MPa) and Drawn Over a Mandrel (DOM), Grade 1026, having a
a minimum tensile strength of 80 ksi (552 MPa). The minimum yield strength of 70 ksi (483 MPa) and a
sleeve finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in minimum tensile strength of 80 ksi (552 MPa). The sleeve
accordance with ASTM A123. finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in
3.3.2.2 Bolts and Nuts: The steel coupling bolts are accordance with ASTM A123.
3
/4–10 UNC 2A standard hex bolts conforming to SAE 3.3.5.3 Bolts and Nuts: The steel bolts and nuts are
J429, Grade 8, having a minimum yield strength of those described in Section 3.3.2.2.
150 ksi (1034 MPa). The matching steel nuts are 3/4–10 4.0 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION
UNC 2B standard hex jam nuts, conforming to SAE J995, 4.1 Design:
Grade 5. The bolts and nuts are zinc-coated in
4.1.1 General: Structural calculations (analysis and
accordance with ASTM B633, with coating classification
design) and drawings, prepared by a registered design
Fe/Zn 8.
professional, must be approved by the code official for
3.3.3 Helix Plates: The steel plates conform to ASTM each project, and must be based on accepted
A572, Grade 50, having a minimum yield strength of engineering principles as described in IBC Section
50 ksi (345 MPa) and a minimum tensile strength of 1604.4, and must conform to Section 1810 of the 2012
65 ksi (448 MPa). The helix finish is the same as that of and 2009 IBC (Section 1808 of the 2006 IBC). The design
the shaft to which the helix is factory-welded. method for the steel components is Allowable Strength
Design (ASD), described in IBC Section 1602 and AISC
3.3.4 Retrofit Bracket Assemblies FS288B and
360 Section B3.4. The structural analysis must consider
FS288BL:
all applicable internal forces due to applied loads,
3.3.4.1 FS288B and FS288BL Brackets: The steel structural eccentricity, and maximum spans between
plates used in the brackets conform to ASTM A36, having helical foundations. The result of this analysis, and the
a minimum yield strength of 36 ksi (248 MPa) and a structural capacities, shall be used to select a helical
minimum tensile strength of 58 ksi (400 MPa). The foundation system.

The ASD capacities of FSI helical foundation system defined as any soil with an SPT blow count greater than
components are indicated in Tables 1, 2, 3, and 5. The zero and less than five. Fluid soil is defined as any soil
geotechnical analysis must address the suitability of the with an SPT blow count of zero [weight of hammer (WOH)
helical foundation system for the specific project. It must or weight of rods (WOR)]. The SPT blow counts must be
also address the center-to-center spacing of the helical determined in accordance with ASTM D1586. For fully
piles, considering both effects on the supported braced conditions where the pile is installed in
foundation and structure and group effects on the pile-soil accordance with Section 1810.2.2 of the 2012 and 2009
capacity. The analysis must include estimates of the axial IBC (Section 1808.2.5 of the 2006 IBC) and piles do not
tension and/or compression capacities of the helical piles, stand in air, water, or fluid soils, the allowable shaft
whatever is relevant for the project, and the expected total capacities must not exceed the maximum design loads
and differential foundation movements due to single pile shown in Tables 1, 2 and 5. Shaft capacities of helical
or pile group, as applicable. foundation systems in air, water or fluid soils must be
determined by a registered design professional. The ASD
A written report of the geotechnical investigation must
shaft tension capacities are shown in Tables 3 and 5, the
be submitted to the code official as one of the required
ASD shaft compression capacities are shown in Tables 1,
submittal documents, prescribed in Section 107 of the
2 and 5, and the shaft torsional rating is shown in Table 5.
2012 and 2009 IBC (Section 106 of the 2006 IBC), at the
time of the permit application. The geotechnical report The elastic shortening/lengthening of the pile shaft will
must include, but need not be limited to, the following be controlled by the applied loads and the mechanical
information: and geometrical properties of the 27/8-inch-diameter
(73 mm) round structural tubing and the shaft coupling.
1. A plot showing the location of the soil investigation.
The shaft elastic shortening or lengthening can be
APPENDIX 2H
DOCUMENTATION
2. A complete record of the soil boring and penetration determined from the equation:
test logs and soil samples. P×L
∆shaft = A×E
(Eq. 1)
3. A record of soil profile.
where:
4. Information on groundwater table, frost depth and
corrosion-related parameters, as described in Section ∆shaft = change in shaft length due to elastic shortening
5.5 of this report. or lengthening (inches)
5. Soil properties, including those affecting the design P = applied axial compression or tension load (lbf)
such as support conditions for the piles. L = pile shaft length (inches)
6. Recommendations for design criteria, including but A = shaft cross-sectional area (in2) (see Table 4)
not limited to mitigations of effects of differential E = shaft steel modulus of elasticity (psi) (see
settlement and varying soil strength, and effects of Table 4)
adjacent loads.
4.1.4 Helix Plate Capacity (P3): The allowable axial
7. Field inspection and reporting procedures (to include compression and tension load capacities (P3) for each
procedures for verification of the installed bearing individual helical plate diameter (8, 10, 12 or 14 inches) is
capacity when required). 55 kips (244.6 kN). (See Tables 1, 2, 3 and 5.) For helical
8. Load test requirements. piles with more than one helix, the allowable helix
capacity (P3) for the helical foundation system may be
9. Any questionable soil characteristics and special taken as the sum of the allowable capacity of each
design provisions, as necessary. individual helix.
4.1.2 Bracket Capacity (P1): Only the localized limit 4.1.5 Soil Capacity (P4): The allowable axial
state of concrete bearing strength in compression has compressive or tensile soil capacity (P4) can be
been evaluated for this evaluation report. All other limit estimated by a registered design professional in
states related to the concrete foundation, such as those accordance with a site-specific geotechnical report, as
limit states described in ACI 318 Appendix D, punching described in Section 4.1.1, combined with the individual
(two-way) shear, beam (one-way) shear, and flexural helix bearing method (Method 1), or from field loading
(bending) related limit states, have not been evaluated for tests conducted under the supervision of a registered
this evaluation report. The concrete foundation must be design professional (Method 2). For either Method 1 or
designed and justified to the satisfaction of the code Method 2, the predicted axial load capacities must be
official with due consideration to all applicable limit states, confirmed during the site-specific production installation,
and the direction and eccentricity of applied loads, such that the axial load capacities predicted by the torque
including reactions provided by the brackets acting on the correlation method are equal to or greater than those
concrete foundation. (See Tables 1, 2 and 3.) predicted by Method 1 or 2, described above.
4.1.3 Shaft Capacity (P2): The tops of shafts must be With the individual helix bearing method, the total
braced as prescribed in Section 1810.2.2 of the 2012 and nominal axial load capacity of the helical pile is
2009 IBC (Section 1808.2.5 of the 2006 IBC). In determined as the sum of the individual areas of the
accordance with Section 1810.2.1 of the 2012 and 2009 helical bearing plates times the ultimate bearing
IBC (Section 1808.2.9 of the 2006 IBC), any soil other capacities of the soil or rock comprising the respective
than fluid soil must be deemed to afford sufficient lateral bearing strata for the plates.
support to prevent buckling of systems that are braced.
When piles are standing in air, water or fluid soils, the The design allowable axial load must be determined
unbraced length is defined as the length of pile that is by dividing the total ultimate axial load capacity predicted
standing in air, water or fluid soils plus an additional 5 feet by either Method 1 or 2, above, by a safety factor of at
(1524 mm) when embedded into firm soil, or an additional least 2.0.
10 feet (3048 mm) when embedded into soft soil. Firm With the torque correlation method, the total ultimate
soils are defined as any soil with a Standard Penetration and allowable axial load capacities are predicted as
Test (SPT) blow count of five or greater. Soft soil is follows:

Qult = Kt T (Eq. 2) specified in the approved plans. The helical piles must be
installed in a continuous manner with the pile advancing
Qall = 0.5 Qult (Eq. 3)
at a rate equal to at least 85 percent of the helix pitch
Where: per revolution at the time of final torque measurement.
Installation speeds must be limited to less than
Qult = Ultimate axial tensile or compressive capacity
25 revolutions per minute (rpm). The lead and extension
(lbf or N) of the helical piles. For axial tension,
sections must be attached to the drive head with a
pile ultimate axial load capacity must be limited to
product adaptor supplied by FSI. Torque readings must
55.1 kips (245.0 kN).
be taken at minimum intervals corresponding to each lead
Qall = Allowable axial tensile or compressive capacity or extension section length and at final termination depth.
(P4) (lbf or N) of the helical piles. For axial tension, The lead and extension sections are connected with the
pile allowable axial load capacity must be limited coupling bolts and nuts described in Section 3.2.1, and
to 27.6 kips (122.5 kN). tightened to a snug-tight condition as defined in Section
Kt = Torque correlation factor. (See Table 5.) J3 of AISC 360. The final installation torque must equal or
exceed that as specified by the torque correlation method,
T = Final installation torque, which is the final torque to support the allowable design loads of the structure
recorded at the termination (final) depth of the using a torque correlation factor (Kt) of 9 ft-1 (29.5 m-1).
installed pile during the field installations (lbf-ft The installation torque must not exceed 7,898 ft-lbs
or N-m). (10 708 N-m). See Section 5.0 for further installation
4.1.6 Foundation System: The ASD allowable capacity conditions of use.
of the FSI helical foundation system in tension and 4.2.3 Retrofit Bracket Installation:
DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX 2H
compression depends upon the analysis of interaction of

brackets, shafts, helical plates and soils; must be the 1. An area must be excavated to expose the footing with
lowest value of P1, P2, P3 and P4; and must be no larger an excavation approximately 3 feet (914 mm) square
than 60 kips (266.9 kN). and with a depth of about 13 inches (330 mm) below
the bottom of the footing. The soil is removed below
4.1.6.1 Foundation System (2012 and 2009 IBC): the bottom of the footing to about 9 inches (229 mm)
Under the 2012 and 2009 IBC, the additional from the footing face in the area where the bracket
requirements described in this section (Section 4.1.6.1) bearing plate will be placed. The vertical and bottom
must be satisfied. For all design methods permitted under faces of the footing must, to the extent possible, be
Section 4.1.1 of this report, the allowable axial smooth and at right angles to each other for the
compressive and tensile load of the helical pile system mounting of the support bracket.
must be based on the least of the following conditions in
accordance with 2012 and 2009 IBC Section 2. Notching of footings may be needed to place the
1810.3.3.1.9: retrofit bracket directly under the wall/column.
Notching must be performed, however, only with the
 Allowable load predicted by the individual helix bearing acceptance of the registered design professional and
method (or Method 1) described in Section 4.1.5 of this the approval of the code official.
report.
3. The bearing surfaces of the concrete (bottom and side
 Allowable load predicted by the torque correlation of footing) must be prepared so that they are smooth
method described in Section 4.1.5 of this report. and free of all soil, debris and loose concrete so as to
 Allowable load predicted by dividing the ultimate provide a full and firm contact of the retrofit bracket
capacity determined from load tests (Method 2 plates.
described in Section 4.1.5) by a safety factor of at least 4. The edge of the lead section shaft must be located
2.0. This allowable load will be determined by a 1
about 1 /2 inches (38 mm) from the bottom edge of the
registered design professional for each site-specific footing with a required angle of inclination of 3.0 ± 1.0
condition. degrees from the vertical. Installation must be as
 Allowable capacities of the shaft and shaft couplings. described in Section 4.2.2.
See Section 4.1.3 of this report. 5. When the final bearing depth is reached, the pile
 Sum of the allowable axial capacity of helical bearing shafts are cut to approximately 13 inches (330 mm)
plates affixed to the pile shaft. See Section 4.1.4 of this above the bottom of footing.
report. 6. The external sleeve must be placed through the
 Allowable axial load capacity of the bracket. See bracket body and over the shaft. Once under the
Section 4.1.2 of this report. footing, the bracket must be rotated 180 degrees
toward the footing. The bracket must be raised up to
4.2 Installation: the footing and held in place while the thread rods and
4.2.1 General: The FSI helical foundation systems must cap plate are attached.
be installed by FSI trained and certified installers. The 7. The cap plate and all thread rods and tightening nuts
FSI helical foundation systems must be installed in must be installed to snug the bracket to the bottom of
accordance with Section 4.2, 2012 and 2009 IBC Section the footing.
1810.4.11, site-specific approved construction documents
(engineering drawings and specifications), and the 8. Soil must be placed and compacted adequately up to
manufacturer’s written installation instructions. In case of the bottom of the bracket prior to structural lift or load
conflict, the most stringent requirement governs. transfer.
4.2.2 Helical Pile Installation: The helical piles are 9. A lift cylinder can be used to lift the structure to
typically installed using hydraulic rotary motors having desired elevation and to transfer the designated
forward and reverse capabilities. The foundation piles portion of the foundation load to the helical pile
must be aligned both vertically and horizontally as system.

10. Lifting of the existing foundation structure must be 5.2 The FSI helical foundation systems have been
verified by the registered design professional and evaluated for support of structures assigned to
is subject to approval of the code official to ensure Seismic Design Categories A, B and C in
that the foundation and superstructure are not accordance with IBC Section 1613. Helical
overstressed. foundation systems that support structures assigned
11. Field installation logs must be completed and to Seismic Design Category D, E or F, or that are
excavation pits or trenches must be backfilled and located in Site Class E or F, are outside the scope of
compacted. Proper compaction procedures must this report, and are subject to the approval of the
comply with the approved construction documents for code official, based upon submission of an
any site-specific requirement. When possible or as engineering design in accordance with the code by a
registered design professional.
required by the approved construction document,
grades or other means must be constructed to allow 5.3 Installations of the helical foundation systems are
proper, positive surface drainage away from the limited to regions of concrete members where
structure. analysis indicates no cracking occurs at service load
4.2.4 New Construction Bracket Installation: levels.
1. The helical pile must be installed in accordance with 5.4 Retrofit and new construction brackets must be used
Section 4.2.2 with an allowable angular tolerance of only to support structures that are laterally braced as
± 1 degree from the vertical. defined in Section 1810.2.2 of the 2012 and 2009
IBC (Section 1808.2.5 of the 2006 IBC).
2. The top of pile elevation must be established and
must be consistent with the specified elevation. If 5.5 The helical foundation systems must not be used in
APPENDIX 2H
DOCUMENTATION
necessary, the pile can be cut off in accordance with soil conditions that are indicative of a potential
the manufacturer’s instructions at the required pile deterioration or corrosion situation as defined
elevation. by the following: (1) soil resistivity of less than
1,000 ohm-cm; (2) soil pH of less than 5.5; (3) soils
3. The new construction bracket must be placed over the with high organic content; (4) soil sulfate
top of the pile, with the bracket cap plate in full, direct concentrations greater than 1,000 ppm; (5) soils
contact (bearing) with the top of the pile shaft. located in a landfill; or (6) soil containing mine waste.
4. If the pile is used to resist tension forces, the new
5.6 Zinc-coated steel and bare steel components must
construction bracket must be embedded with proper
not be combined in the same system. All helical
distance into the footing or grade beam as required to
foundation components must be galvanically isolated
resist the tension loads as determined by a registered
from concrete reinforcing steel, building structural
design professional, and must be through-bolted to
steel, or any other metal building components.
the helical pile shaft with two bolts and matching nuts
as specified in Sections 3.2.2.2 and 3.3.5.3, and 5.7 The new construction helical piles (piles with new
installed to a snug-tight condition in accordance with construction brackets) must be installed vertically
Section 4.2.2. Refer to Tables 2 and 3 for the proper plumb into the ground with a maximum allowable
embedded edge distance requirements for the shaft angle of inclination tolerance of 0° ± 1°. To comply
and bracket. with requirements found in Section 1810.3.1.3 of the
4.3 Special Inspection: 2012 and 2009 IBC (Section 1808.2.8 of the 2006
IBC), the superstructure must be designed to resist
Continuous special inspection in accordance with Section the effects of helical pile mislocation.
1705.9 of the 2012 IBC (Section 1704.10 of the 2009 IBC,
and Section 1704.9 of the 2006 IBC) must be provided for 5.8 The retrofit helical piles must be installed at a
the installation of foundation piles and foundation maximum angle of inclination of 3.0 ± 1.0 degrees
brackets. Where on-site welding is required, special from the vertical.
inspection in accordance with Section 1705.2 of the 2012 5.9 Special inspection is provided in accordance with
IBC (Section 1704.3 of the 2009 and 2006 IBC) is also Section 4.3 of this report.
required. Items to be confirmed by the special inspector
include, but are not limited to, the manufacturer’s 5.10 Engineering calculations and drawings, in
certification of installers, verification of the product accordance with recognized engineering principles
manufacturer, helical pile and bracket configuration and as described in IBC Section 1604.4, and complying
identification, inclination and position of the helical pies, with Section 4.1 of this report and prepared by a
the installation torque and depth of the foundation registered design professional, are provided to, and
piles, compliance of the installation with the approved approved by, the code official.
construction documents and this evaluation report. 5.11 The adequacy of the concrete structures that are
5.0 CONDITIONS OF USE connected to the FSI brackets must be verified by a
registered design professional, in accordance with
The Foundation Supportworks, Inc. (FSI), Model HP288 applicable code provisions, such as Chapter 15 of
Helical Foundation Systems described in this report ACI 318 and Chapter 18 of IBC. The adequacy is
comply with the 2012 and 2009 IBC, and are suitable subject to the approval of the code official.
alternatives to what is specified in the 2006 IBC, subject
to the following conditions: 5.12 A geotechnical investigation report for each project
site must be provided to the code official for approval
5.1 The FSI helical foundation systems are
in accordance with Section 4.1.1 of this report.
manufactured, identified and installed in accordance
with this report, approved construction documents 5.13 When using the alternative basic load combinations
(engineering drawings and specifications), and the prescribed in Section 1605.3.2, the allowable stress
manufacturer’s written installation instructions. In increases permitted by material chapters of the IBC
case of conflict, the most stringent requirement (including Chapter 18) or the referenced standards
governs. are prohibited.

5.14 The minimum helical pile center-to-center spacing evaluation report. Such compliance must be
must be three times the largest helical bearing plate addressed by a registered design professional for
diameters. For piles with closer spacing, the pile each site, and the work of the design professional is
allowable load reductions due to pile group effects subject to approval of the code official.
must be included in the geotechnical report
5.18 Requirements listed in the footnotes to Tables 1, 2,
described in Section 4.1.1 of this report, and must be
3, and 5 must be satisfied.
considered in the pile design by a registered design
professional. The spacing and load reductions, if 5.19 Settlement of helical piles is beyond the scope of this
applicable, are subject to the approval of the code evaluation report, and must be determined by a
official. registered design professional as required in Section
1810.2.3 of the 2012 and 2009 IBC (Section
5.15 For piles supporting tension loads, the piles must be
1808.2.12 of the 2006 IBC).
installed such that the minimum depth from the
ground surface to the uppermost helix is 12D, where 5.20 The FSI helical foundation systems are
D is the diameter of the largest helix. In cases where manufactured at the following facilities: Distefano
the installation depth is less than 12D, the minimum Technology & Manufacturing Company, 3838 South
th
embedment depth must be determined by a 108 Street, Omaha, Nebraska; Behlen
rd
registered design professional based on site-specific Manufacturing Company, 4025 East 23 Street,
soil conditions, and the determination is subject to Columbus, Nebraska; and TSA Manufacturing,
the approval of the code official. For tension 14901 Chandler Road, Omaha, Nebraska.
applications where the helical pile is installed at an Manufacturing is done under a quality control
embedment depth of less than 12D, the torque- program with inspections by ICC-ES.
DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX 2H
correlation soil capacity, P4, is outside of the scope

6.0 EVIDENCE SUBMITTED
of this evaluation report.
Data in accordance with the ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria
5.16 Piles supporting compression loads must be
for Helical Pile Systems and Devices (AC358), dated
installed such that the minimum depth from the
June 2013.
bottom of the pile-supported footing to the
uppermost helix is no less than 5 feet (1524 mm). 7.0 IDENTIFICATION
For compression piles with a shallower helix depth,
The FSI helical foundation system components described
the actual helix depth must be considered in the pile
in this report are identified by labels that include the report
design by a registered design professional. The
holder’s name (Foundation Supportworks, Inc.); the name
depth is subject to approval of the code official.
and address of Distefano Technology & Manufacturing
5.17 Evaluation of compliance with Section 1810.3.11.1 of Company, Behlen Manufacturing Company, or TSA
the 2012 and 2009 IBC (Section 1808.2.23.1.1 of the Manufacturing; the product name; the model number
2006 IBC) for buildings assigned to Seismic Design (HP288); the part number; the evaluation report number
Category (SDC) C, and with Section 1810.3.6 of the (ESR-3074).
2012 and 2009 IBC (Section 1808.2.7 of the 2006
IBC) for all buildings, is outside the scope of this
TABLE 1—HP288 (WITH RETROFIT BRACKETS) ASD COMPRESSION CAPACITIES
Allowable Compression Capacity (kips)

Bracket Part 1
1 Sleeve Part No. HP288 Bracket Description Bracket Shaft Helix Soil Foundation
No. 2 3 4 5 6
(P1) (P2) (P3) (P4) System
FS288B FS288ES30 24.9 60 55 35.5 24.9
Standard Bracket w/30" Sleeve
FS288B-G FS288ES30-G 27.9 60 55 35.5 27.9
FS288B FS288ES48 31.4 60 55 35.5 31.4
Standard Bracket w/48" Sleeve
FS288B-G FS288ES48-G 35.1 60 55 35.5 35.1
FS288BL FS288ES30 25.3 60 55 35.5 25.3
Low Profile Bracket w/30" Sleeve
FS288BL-G FS288ES30-G 28.2 60 55 35.5 28.2
For SI: I inch = 25.4 mm, 1 kip = 1000 lbf = 4.448 kN.
1
Part numbers with “G” suffix indicate hot-dip galvanized coating. Part numbers without a “G” suffix indicate plain steel.
2
Bracket capacity is based on full scale load tests per AC358 with an installed 5'-0" unbraced pile length per Section 1810.2.1 of the 2012 and
2009 IBC (Section 1808.2.9.2 of the 2006 IBC), having a maximum of one coupling.
3
Shaft capacity is applicable only to the foundation systems that are fully braced as described in Section 4.1.3.
4
Helix capacity is based on a single helix plate with outer diameter of 8, 10, 12 or 14 inches (203, 254, 305 or 356 mm).
5
Soil capacity is based on torque correlation per Section 4.1.5 of this report, with piles installed at the maximum torsion rating.
6
Foundation system allowable capacity is based on the lowest of P1, P2, P3 and P4 listed in this table. See Section 4.1.6 for additional
requirements.

APPENDIX 2H
DOCUMENTATION
FIGURE 1—HP288 RETROFIT BRACKET AND SHAFT ASSEMBLIES
7
TABLE 2—HP288 (WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION BRACKETS) ASD COMPRESSION CAPACITIES
Minimum Allowable Compression Capacity (kips)

Bearing Plate Edge
Bracket Part Concrete
Dimensions Distance Bracket Soil Foundation
No.1 Compressive Shaft (P2)3 Helix (P3)4
(in) "A" (in) (P1)2 (P4)5 System6
Strength (psi)
3 33.1 60 55 35.5 33.1
HP288NCB or 2500
6 x 6 x 0.75 ≥4 44.1 60 55 35.5 35.5
HP288NCB-G
3000 ≥3 39.7 60 55 35.5 35.5
HP288NCB8 8 x 8 x 0.75 2500 ≥4 43.1 60 55 35.5 35.5
HP288NCB8-G 8 x 8 x 0.75 2500 ≥4 46.5 60 55 35.5 35.5
For SI: I inch = 25.4 mm, 1 kip = 1000 lbf = 4.448 kN.
1
2
Bracket capacity is based on localized limit state of concrete bearing only. All other limit states related to the concrete foundation, such as punching
shear, have not been evaluated in this evaluation report.
3
Shaft capacity is applicable only to the foundation systems that are fully braced as described in Section 4.1.3.
4
5
6
Foundation system allowable capacity is based on the lowest of P1, P2, P3 and P4 listed in this table. See Section 4.1.6 for additional requirements.
7
Reduction of plain concrete thickness described in Section 22.4.7 of ACI 318-11 for the 2012 IBC (Section 22.4.7 of ACI 318-08 for the 2009 IBC, and
22.4.8 of ACI 318-05 for the 2006 IBC) is assumed not applicable.
6
TABLE 3—HP288 (WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION BRACKETS) ASD TENSION CAPACITIES
Minimum Allowable Tension Capacity (kips)
Edge
Bracket Part Bearing Plate Concrete
Distance Bracket Soil Foundation
No.1 Dimensions (in) Compressive Shaft (P2) Helix (P3)3
"A" (in) (P1)2,7 (P4)4 System5
Strength (psi)
3 24.3 34.1 55 27.6 24.3
2500
≥4 32.4 34.1 55 27.6 27.6
HP288NCB
or 6 x 6 x 0.75 ≥3 29.1 34.1 55 27.6 27.6
HP288NCB-G 3000
3500 ≥3 34.0 34.1 55 27.6 27.6

HP288NCB8 8 x 8 x 0.75 2500 ≥4 34.1 34.1 55 27.6 27.6
HP288NCB8-G 8 x 8 x 0.75 2500 ≥4 38.2 38.2 55 27.6 27.6
For SI: I inch = 25.4 mm, 1 kip = 1000 lbf = 4.448 kN, 1 psi = 6.895 kPa.
1
2
Bracket capacity is based on localized limit state of concrete bearing only. All other limit states related to the concrete foundation, such as punching
shear, have not been evaluated in this evaluation report.
3
4
5
Foundation system allowable capacity is based on the lowest of P1, P2, P3 and P4 listed in this table. See Section 4.1.6 for additional requirements.
6
Reduction of plain concrete thickness described in Section 22.4.7 of ACI 318-11 for the 2012 IBC (section 22.4.7 of ACI 318-08 for the 2009 IBC, and
22.4.8 of ACI 318-05 for the 2006 IBC) is assumed not applicable.
7
Bolts must be installed in accordance with Sections 3.2.2.2 and 4.2.4 of this report.

DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX 2H
FIGURE 2—HP288 NEW CONSTRUCTION BRACKET ASSEMBLY
TABLE 4—MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF 2.875-INCH DIAMETER HELICAL SHAFTS

Un-corroded After 50 Year Corrosion Loss
Mechanical Properties
Plain Steel Plain Steel Hot-dip Galvanized Steel
Steel Minimum Yield Strength, Fy 60 ksi 60 ksi 60 ksi
Steel Minimum Ultimate Strength, Fu 70 ksi 70 ksi 70 ksi
Modulus of Elasticity, E 29,000 ksi 29,000 ksi 29,000 ksi
Nominal Wall Thickness 0.276 in. 0.276 in. 0.276 in.
Design Wall Thickness 0.257 in. 0.221 in. 0.247 in.
Outside Diameter, OD 2.875 in. 2.839 in. 2.865 in.
Inside Diameter, ID 2.361 in. 2.397 in. 2.371 in.
2 2 2
Cross Sectional Area, A 2.11 in 1.82 in 2.03 in
4 4 4
Moment of Inertia, I 1.83 in 1.57 in 1.76 in
Radius of Gyration, r 0.93 in. 0.93 in. 0.93 in.
3 3 3
Elastic Section Modulus, S 1.27 in 1.10 in 1.23 in
3 3 3
Plastic Section Modulus, Z 1.77 in 1.52 in 1.70 in
For SI: I inch = 25.4 mm, 1 ksi = 6.895 MPa, 1lbf-ft = 1.356 N-m, 1 lbf = 4.448 N.

1,6
TABLE 5—HP288 LEAD AND EXTENSION ASD TENSION AND COMPRESSION CAPACITIES
2 3 5
Lead/Extension Net Helix Diameter (in) (P2) (P2) (P3) Kt Shaft (P4) Torque
-1
Part No. Shaft Shaft Shaft Helix (ft ) Torsion Correlated Soil
4
Length Comp. Ten. (kips) Rating Capacity (kips)
"L" (in) (kips) (kips) (lbf-ft)
Com. Ten.
A B C D
HP288L5H8-3850 60 8 -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L5H0-3850 60 10 -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L5H2-3850 60 12 -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L5H4-3850 60 14 -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L5H80-3850 60 8 10 -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L5H02-3850 60 10 12 -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L5H24-3850 60 12 14 -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L7H8-3850 84 8 -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L7H0-3850 84 10 -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L7H2-3850 84 12 -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L7H4-3850 84 14 -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L7H80-3850 84 8 10 -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L7H02-3850 84 10 12 -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L7H24-3850 84 12 14 -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L7H802-3850 84 8 10 12 -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
APPENDIX 2H
DOCUMENTATION
HP288L7H024-3850 84 10 12 14 -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L0H80-3850 120 8 10 -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L0H02-3850 120 10 12 -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L0H24-3850 120 12 14 -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L0H802-3850 120 8 10 12 -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L0H024-3850 120 10 12 14 -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288L0H8024-3850 120 8 10 12 14 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288E3H4-3850 30 14 -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288E4H4-3850 42 14 -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288E5H4-3850 54 14 -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288E7H4-3850 78 14 -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288E0H4-3850 114 14 -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288E7H44-3850 78 14 14 -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288E0H44-3850 114 14 14 -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288E3 30 -- -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288E5 54 -- -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288E7 78 -- -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
HP288E0 114 -- -- -- -- 60 34.1 55 9 7898 35.5 27.6
For SI: I inch = 25.4 mm, 1 kip = 1000 lbf = 4.448 kN, 1lbf-ft = 1.356 N-m.
1
2
Shaft compression capacity (P2) is based on that the foundation system is fully braced as described in Section 4.1.3.
3
Helix capacity (P3) is applicable to both tension and compression loading and is based on a single helix plate with outer diameter of 8, 10, 12
or 14 inches (203, 254, 305 or 356 mm).
4
Shaft torsion rating is the maximum torsion that can be applied to the shaft during the helical pile installation.
5
Torque correlated soil capacity (P4) is applicable to both tension and compression loading and is based on torque correlation per Section
4.1.5, with piles installed at the maximum torsion rating.
6
For piles with extension(s), shaft coupling(s) must be installed in accordance with Sections 3.2.1 and 4.2.2 of this report.
FIGURE 3—TYPICAL HP288 SHAFT LEAD AND EXTENSION SECTIONS AND HELIX PLATES

ICC-ES Evaluation Report ESR-3074 FBC Supplement
Reissued May 2014
This report is subject to renewal July 1, 2015.
www.icc-es.org | (800) 423-6587 | (562) 699-0543 A Subsidiary of the International Code Council ®
DIVISION: 31 00 00—EARTHWORK
Section: 31 63 00—Bored Piles
REPORT HOLDER:
FOUNDATION SUPPORTWORKS, INC.

12330 CARY CIRCLE
OMAHA, NEBRASKA 68128
DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX 2H
(800) 281-5845
www.foundationsupportworks.com
jeff.kortan@foundationsupportworks.com
EVALUATION SUBJECT:
FOUNDATION SUPPORTWORKS HELICAL FOUNDATION SYSTEMS
1.0 REPORT PURPOSE AND SCOPE

Purpose:
The purpose of this evaluation report supplement is to indicate that the Foundation Supportworks, Inc. (FSI), Model HP288
Helical Foundation Systems, recognized in ICC-ES master report ESR-3074, have also been evaluated for compliance with
the codes noted below.
Applicable code editions:
 2010 Florida Building Code—Building
 2010 Florida Building Code—Residential
2.0 CONCLUSIONS
The Foundation Supportworks, Inc. (FSI), Model HP288 Helical Foundation Systems, described in Sections 2.0 through 7.0
of the master evaluation report ESR-3074, comply with the 2010 Florida Building Code—Building and the 2010 Florida
Building Code—Residential, provided the design and installation are in accordance with the International Building Code®
provisions noted in the master report and the following conditions apply:
1. Design wind loads must be based on Section 1609 of the 2010 Florida Building Code—Building or Section 301.2.1.1 of
the 2010 Florida Building Code—Residential, as applicable.
2. Load combinations must be in accordance with Section 1605.2 or Section 1605.3 of the 2010 Florida Building Code—
Building, as applicable.
Use of the Foundation Supportworks Inc. (FSI) Model HP288 Helical Foundation Systems for compliance with the High-
Velocity Hurricane Zone provisions of the 2010 Florida Building Code—Building and the 2010 Florida Building Code—
Residential has not been evaluated, and is outside the scope of this evaluation report.
For products falling under Florida Rule 9N-3, verification that the report holder’s quality assurance program is audited by a
quality assurance entity approved by the Florida Building Commission for the type of inspections being conducted is the
responsibility of an approved validation entity (or the code official when the report holder does not possess an approval by
the Commission).
This supplement expires concurrently with the master report, reissued May 2014.
ICC-ES Evaluation Reports are not to be construed as representing aesthetics or any other attributes not specifically addressed, nor are they to be construed
as an endorsement of the subject of the report or a recommendation for its use. There is no warranty by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC, express or implied, as
to any finding or other matter in this report, or as to any product covered by the report.
1000
Copyright © 2014 Page 1 of 1

APPENDIX 2H
DOCUMENTATION

DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX 2H

APPENDIX 2H
DOCUMENTATION

DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX 2H

REFERENCES
Adams, J. I., & Klym, T.W. (1972). A Study of Anchorages for Transmission Tower Foundations.
Canadian Geotechnical Journal, 9(1).
Bjerrum, L. (1957). Norwegian experiences with steel piles to rock. Geotechnique, 7, 73-96.
Cadden, A., & Gomez J. (2002). Buckling of Micropiles; A Review of Historic Research and Recent
Experiences. ADSC Micropile Committee, 18.
California Department of Transportation. (1999). Manual of Instructions for SNAILZ. Sacramento, CA:
CALTRANS
Davisson, M. T. (1963). Proceedings of the 2nd Pan-American Conference on Soil
Mechanics and Foundation Engineering: Estimating buckling loads for piles. Brazil.
REFERENCES
Deardorff, D. A. (2007). Proceedings from Deep Foundations Institute 32nd Annual
Conference on Deep Foundations: Torque Correlation Factors for Round Shaft Helical Piles. Colorado
Springs, CO.
Federal Highway Commission. (2003). Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 7 - Soil Nail Walls.
Washington D.C.: Lazarte, C.A., Elias, V., et al.
Golder (1996). GoldNail User Manual. Redmond, WA, Golder Associates: 34.
Hoyt, R. M., & Clemence, S.P. (1989). Proceedings from 12th International Conference
on Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering: Uplift Capacity of Helical Anchors in Soil. Rio de
Janeiro, Brazil.
Lutenegger, A. J., & Smith, B.L., et al. (1988). Proceedings of the Conference of Special
Topics in Foundations: Use of In Situ Tests to Predict Uplift Performance of Multihelix Anchors.
Nashville, TN, ASCE.
Meyerhof, G. G. (1976). Bearing Capacity and Settlement of Pile Foundations. Journal
of the Geotechnical Engineering Division, Proceedings of the American Society of Civil Engineers,
102(GT3), 197-227.
Mitsch, M. P., & Clemence, S.P., (1985). Proceedings of a session sponsored by the
Uplift Behavior of Anchor Foundations in Soil: Geotechnical Division of the American Society of Civil
Engineers: The Uplift Capacity of Helix Anchors in Sand. Detroit, Michigan, ASCE.
Reese, L., & Wang, T., et al. (2004b). A Program for the Analysis of Piles and Drilled
Shafts Under Lateral Loads. (Version 5.0). [Software]. Austin, Texas: ENSOFT, Inc.
Romanoff, M. (1989). Proceedings from National Association of Corrosion Engineers: Underground

Corrosion. Houston, TX. (Republished from National Bureau of Standards Circular 579, 1957).

CHAPTER 3 HYDRAULICALLY-DRIVEN PUSH PIERS
3.1. History of the drive equipment (Figure 3.1.a). The drive
equipment or “ram” would push steel piling
Commonly referred to as push piers, jacked sections using the weight of the structure until the
piles, resistance piers, or hydraulically driven desired resistance was achieved. The top of the
piers, these systems were developed to stabilize pier would then be shimmed with brick or other
buildings against further settlement and/or to structural elements to another header beam across
provide additional foundation support. Push pier the bottom of the foundation opening. The space
systems have patent history dating back to the between the structural headers would then be
late 1800s and had their early beginnings in the refilled with brick and mortar. The first application
populated areas of the northeast United States of this system was in New York City in 1896. The
(US). Several inventors from New York were piers supported a 4-story building during the
the pioneers of these systems, and utilized a excavation and construction of the basement
common methodology of pushing hollow tubular level of the new Commercial Cable Building on the
CHAPTER 3
HYDRAULICALLY-DRIVEN PUSH PIERS
iron columns in sections to a suitable load bearing adjacent property. Nine piers were installed along
stratum. They are considered retrofit systems a 57-foot long wall to allow excavation to a depth
since they require an existing structure to provide of about 10 feet below the underpinned structure.
the reaction necessary to push or drive the piers The piers were manufactured from 10-inch outside
to competent soils. These early pier systems diameter (O.D.) pipe with a 5/8-inch wall thickness.
were typically installed beneath opposing sides of Five-foot lengths of pipe were pushed to depths of
a building wall (staggered or in pairs), or directly about 33 feet using a 60-ton jack to its full capacity.
beneath the center of the wall. External couplings were used to maintain direct
bearing of the pier sections. An internal coupling
The first US patented push pier system was by
was first patented by Francis Pruyn (US Patent
Jules Breuchard (US Patent No. 563,130) on June
No. 1,188,485) on June 27, 1916. This internal
30, 1896, which specified removal of portions of
coupling concept allowed for a pre-manufactured
brick foundation walls to allow for placement of
connection with the same diameter as the pier
structural “headers” (stone or steel) and set up
pipe (Figure 3.1.b).
Figure 3.1.a Figure 3.1.b

Breuchard patented system (1896) Pruyn patented internal coupling (1916)

Hydraulically-Driven Push Piers All Rights Reserved
The Breuchard system did not specify a factor registered on May 2, 1961. This system had
of safety to be applied to the service loads and many similarities to current flush-mount pier
some problems resulted from underperformance systems, including attachment of a flush-mount
of the piers after construction. The first patented pier bracket to a foundation wall and using a
push pier system to recommend a factor of safety drive stand and hydraulic jack to provide the
was registered by Lazarus White (US Patent No. final drive and lock-off forces. This patent also
1,217,128) on February 20, 1917. Specifically, the recommended applying a factor of safety of 1.5
language in the patent recommends a final drive to the service load to determine the required
load about 50 percent greater than the service final drive load. The components and setup of
load applied to the pier, which equates to a factor this system are shown in Figure 3.1.d.
of safety of 1.5 against pier settlement. This patent
also describes using a pressure gauge on the
hydraulic jack to monitor final drive and lock-off
pressures. The White patent detailed geotechnical
considerations, including pier rebound, and
provided a drawing of the assumed pressure bulb
CHAPTER 3
formed under the pier tip upon loading (Figure

3.1.c). In a later patent registered on October 20,
1931 (US Patent No. 1,827,921), Lazarus White
recommended application of the drive force to each
pier individually and then simultaneous loading of
all piers to evenly distribute structural loads during
lock-off procedures. Mr. White also suggested
that previous performance problems with push
pier systems may have been due to overlap of the
assumed stress bulbs for closely spaced piers, Figure 3.1.d Revesz and Steinsberger
which was believed could be mitigated by using flush-mount push pier system (1961)
simultaneous loading during lock-off.

The first patent for a side-load, under-footing
bracket with vertical and horizontal bearing plates
positioned against and below a footing was issued
on September 2, 1975 to George Langenbach
(US Patent No. 3,902,326). The system was
further refined in subsequent patents to resemble
the eccentric push pier systems common today.
The ingenuity of these early inventors paved
the way for the development of numerous push
pier systems and an industry that has grown
dramatically since the 1970s. Manufacturers
and installers of underpinning systems continue
to provide innovative solutions capable of ever-
increasing load capacities and improved system
Figure 3.1.c Assumed stress bulb performance. Systems designed by reputable
under push pier tip (White, 1917)
manufacturers, installed by experienced
An eccentrically-loaded flush-mount bracket foundation repair contractors, and with a proven
system was presented in the Henry Revesz record of performance have become widely
and Jack Steinsberger Patent (US 2,982,103) accepted throughout the engineering community.

3.2. Summary Description
FSI push pier systems utilize high-strength
round steel tubes and a load transfer bracket
(retrofit foundation repair bracket) to lift and/
or stabilize sinking or settling foundations,
or to provide additional capacity to existing
foundation systems. The foundation bracket is
secured against and below the existing footing
(under-footing bracket), to the side of the footing
or to the foundation wall (flush-mount bracket),
or underneath existing slabs (slab pier bracket).
Pier sections are then hydraulically driven
through the bracket and into the soil below
using the combined structural weight and any
contributory soil load as drive resistance. Pier
CHAPTER 3
sections are added and driven until a suitable
load bearing stratum is encountered. At that
point, the structure either begins to lift or the
target pressure/load is achieved. The weight
of the structure is then transferred to the
foundation brackets, through the piers, and to
firm load bearing soil or bedrock. Typical under-
footing, flush-mount and slab pier brackets are
shown in Figure 3.2.a. A Model PP288 push pier
installation is shown in Figure 3.2.b.
Figure 3.2.b FSI PP288 push pier system

with an under-footing bracket
3.2.1. Applications
Push pier systems are typically used for
underpinning existing structures in the following
Figure 3.2.a Left to right; typical under-footing,flush-mount
and slab pier brackets (no relative scale) applications:
• Stabilization of settled foundations or slabs

• Stabilization and lifting of settled foundations
or slabs
• Providing increased capacity (additional support)
for existing foundations or slabs
• Providing foundation support while adjacent
excavations are made

3.3. Push Pier 3.3.1.1 Eccentric Loading
System Components Pier tubes of push pier systems utilizing under-
footing and flush-mount brackets are not
FSI push pier system components are
located directly under the structure’s footing.
manufactured to high quality control standards
Therefore, these systems are eccentrically
using ASTM grade steel and certified welding
loaded and in turn need to resist the bending
processes. The product line includes Models
forces generated by this loading condition
PP237, PP288, PP350 and PP400, corresponding
(Figure 3.3.1.1.a). The eccentricity generated by
to shaft sizes of 2.375-inch, 2.875-inch, 3.50-
under-footing and flush-mount bracket systems
inch and 4.00-inch O.D, respectively. Various
is in reality shared by the pier and the structure.
exterior sleeve and bracket options are available.
Push pier system capacities and specifications
are provided Appendix 3A. The FSI push pier
system components include the following:
CHAPTER 3
3.3.1 Bracket Assemblies

Bracket assemblies may include an under-footing
bracket, flush-mount bracket or a slab bracket.
Under-footing brackets are typically placed against
and below the footing and have vertical and
horizontal bearing plates. Under-footing brackets
have been designed to allow piers to be driven
vertically or at 2 degrees from vertical orientation.
Two-degree brackets are standard for the PP237 Figure 3.3.1.1.a Eccentric loading
condition for under-footing bracket
and PP288 systems as it allows the brackets to
In general, the more rigid the pier system and
be seated beneath foundation walls as much as
its connection to the foundation, the more the
practical and provides separation for the drive stand
system acts as an extension of that foundation
to miss common brick overhangs and window and
and the more eccentricity must be absorbed by
door trim on residential structures. Independent
the structure. This bending or twisting imparted
testing of the PP288 push pier system with both the
to the structure can be resisted by the internal
FS288B (2-degree) and FS288BV (vertical) brackets
strength of the foundations and connections
has shown less than 1 percent difference in the
to the superstructure, by passive resistance of
capacities. Flush-mount brackets have a vertical
the soil along the opposite face of the footing
bearing plate anchored to the vertical concrete face
and/or foundation wall, by bracing with internal
of the footing, grade beam or foundation wall. Slab
structural elements such as floor slabs and
pier brackets are plate assemblies constructed
shear walls, and by support generated at
under the concrete floor slab via holes cored in the
building corners. When the eccentricity cannot
slab. Pier sections driven through flush-mount and
be resisted by such conditions, the piers can
slab pier brackets are in a vertical orientation only.
be staggered or paired on opposing sides of
The FSI bracket assemblies generally include the
the foundation. Multiple piers are often needed
bracket, pier cap, external sleeve and associated
at column locations simply to balance the load
hardware. However, the Model PP400 push pier
and prevent tipping of the footing. Evaluation of
system and the Model PP288 slab pier system are
the eccentric loading condition on the structure
designed without external sleeves. See Appendix
should be completed by a qualified design
3A for mechanical ratings of the various push pier
professional on a case by case basis.
systems and bracket assemblies.

Overall dimensions of a push pier cross section diameter pipe or tube sections set inside the
are 4 inches or less in most applications. pier and generally spanning between the internal
These sections are therefore very sensitive to couplers of the pier shaft. Internal reinforcement
the bending moments introduced by eccentric can be of inconsistent length and not placed at
loading. Additionally, as pier bending moments the optimal location; i.e., extending through and
increase, the pier axial capacity will decrease. below the bracket, since final coupler location
This loss of axial capacity due to the addition of cannot be estimated or predetermined. Also,
bending stresses can be demonstrated with the internal reinforcement is not generally placed until
following example. A given pier section with a after the final drive load has been applied, when
3.50-inch O.D., 0.300-inch wall thickness and a the maximum bending moment may have already
yield strength of 35 ksi has a maximum allowable caused the pier shaft to deform or buckle. There
compressive capacity of 59.3 kips according is little chance for success when trying to insert a
to Allowable Stress Design. When a bending straight pipe section through a bent tube. External
moment of 40 kip-in is applied to the same reinforcement typically consists of larger round or
section, its allowable compressive capacity square hollow sections driven or placed around
drops to 24.7 kips. This is a reduction of nearly the pier, again after the pier has been exposed
CHAPTER 3
60 percent of the section’s full axial capacity. to the final drive force. Similar challenges exist
What’s more, this moment would equate to with placement of straight external reinforcement
an equivalent eccentricity of only 1.62 inches, elements over a bent pier.
which is a seemingly small eccentricity and is
Foundation Supportworks has developed
still within the envelope of a typical pier cross
a unique approach to address the issue of
section. Since, eccentricities for under-footing
eccentric loading on retrofit push pier systems…
bracket systems are generally within the range
the external sleeve (see next section).
of 3 to 4 inches, the loss of axial capacity due
to the resulting bending moments is a significant
design consideration. 3.3.1.2 External Sleeve
The bending moment created by eccentric The FSI PP237, PP288 and PP350 push pier
loading is dissipated by passive resistance systems incorporate a 48-inch long external
of the soil against the pier tube within the first sleeve to resist the bending forces generated
few feet of soil support, therefore, the bending by the eccentric loading on the under-footing
moment only needs to be considered for the pier and flush-mount brackets, thereby preserving
tubes directly below the bracket. One method of the axial capacity of the pier sections (Figure
providing the necessary bending resistance could 3.3.1.2.a). The external sleeve is hydraulically
involve using larger diameter and/or thicker pier driven with and around the pier starter tube
tube sections for the entire length of the pier. The section to extend through and below the bracket.
larger/thicker pier sections would resist bending, The effect of the sleeve essentially creates
yet still have sufficient axial capacity in reserve. a bracket that is 48 inches tall without any
Although a seemingly reasonable approach, it is additional excavation. A 30-inch long external
not an economical one since the extra steel is sleeve is available for the PP237 and PP288
only useful within the region of bending for the push pier systems for use in limited headroom
first few feet below the bracket where the bending and crawl space applications.
moment is dissipated into the surrounding soil.
The moment or bending force is localized within
Another method used by many manufacturers is
a relatively short distance below the bracket.
to utilize internal or external pier reinforcement
Although the bending force is dissipated quickly
after the pier has been exposed to the final drive
by the pier bearing against the confining soil,
force. Internal reinforcement is simply smaller
it is significant and cannot be ignored. The

• Sleeve is easy to install. It’s driven at the same
time as the starter tube.
• No cumbersome reinforcement to install after

driving pier tubes.
• The extra steel is where it needs to be. Much

more efficient than using thicker pier tube
sections for the entire length. It’s a local
solution to a local issue.
• Sleeve is in place during the system’s

maximum load (driving tubes).
• Relieves friction between pier bracket and pier

tube. Drive and lift pressures more accurately
reflect the load on the pier system.
CHAPTER 3
3.3.2 Starter Tube

The starter tube is the first pier section pushed into
the ground and is installed at the same time as the
external sleeve, where applicable. Under-footing
Figure 3.3.1.2.a External sleeve and pier bear and flush-mount bracket systems utilize a friction
against confining soil when system is under load reduction collar at the bearing end of the starter
depth or length of sleeve and pier over which tube. The friction reduction collar will be discussed
the bending force dissipates is a function of the in more detail in the following section. Models
soil stiffness. The depth is greater in soft clay PP237 and PP288 starter tubes come in standard
and loose sand, and less in stiff clay and dense lengths of 32 and 50 inches. The 32-inch starter
sand. Finite element analysis software was used tubes are used in limited access and low headroom
to analyze how the external sleeve and the pier applications, such as within a crawl space, along
interact with soils of various properties. Bracket with a modified (shorter) drive stand, shorter drive
rotation is resisted not only by the rigidity of the cylinder, a 30-inch long external sleeve and 18-inch
pier system, but also by the passive pressure long pier tubes. The PP350 system uses a 50-inch
of the soil surrounding the external sleeve and long starter tube only, to coincide with the standard
pier. Therefore, the capacity and performance 48-inch long external sleeve. The PP350 is a higher
of the pier system is in part governed by the capacity system and generally not ideal for crawl
stiffness of the confining soils. space applications. The PP400 system uses a
starter tube length consistent with the standard
Benefits/advantages of an external sleeve include: 36-inch pier tube length. The PP400 system is
• Sleeved system separates the bending forces unique in the FSI push pier product line in that the
from axial compression forces. under-footing bracket assembly does not include
the 48-inch long external sleeve and, therefore, no
• Sleeve resists most of the bending forces and special design or installation considerations have
behaves purely as a beam. to be made for starter tube length. The PP288 slab
• Pier tube is protected from the bending forces pier system does not utilize a starter tube with a
preserving its axial capacity so it can behave friction reduction collar. The first section advanced
more like a column. consists of a field-modified standard pier section
(see Section 3.12).

3.3.2.1 Friction Reduction Collar The soils displaced or remolded by the friction
reduction collar “heal” back around and against the
A friction reduction collar is included at the shaft over time, generating an additional frictional
bearing end of push pier system starter tubes component to the pier’s capacity. This effect is
(Figure 3.3.2.1.a). This collar consists of a 1-inch often referred to as pile “set up” when driving larger,
long slice of a slightly larger round shaft section higher capacity pipe piles or H-piles. Set up can
slid over and welded to the end of the starter occur within a matter of hours, days or weeks, and
tube, or a machined ring with a pressed fit. is the reason piering contractors generally try to
These friction reduction collars have outside start and finish installation of a push pier the same
diameters 1/2-inch larger than their respective day and, in some unique conditions, before a work
pier sections and serve to either create annular break is taken. Although this frictional capacity
space or remold the soil around the pier shaft as can be significant, it is conservatively ignored in
it is advanced through the soil. The reduction in most cases in the determination of the pier’s factor
frictional resistance on the outside surface of the of safety against settlement. The final drive force is
pier results in a driven pier that generates most measured and documented prior to development
of its capacity in end bearing. With reduced skin of the soils ultimate frictional resistance. Push pier
CHAPTER 3
friction and high bearing pressures generated system factors of safety are further discussed in
at the pier tip, push pier systems with friction Section 3.9.1.
reduction collars also generally penetrate
deeper into the ground (than a frictional pier)
and advance through weak or marginal soils to
3.3.3 Pier Tube
bear on competent material below. Pier tubes follow the starter tube during installation
and have a crimped or plug-welded slip-fit internal
coupling at the leading end (see next section). The
push pier tubes and couplings are manufactured
from hollow round structural steel sections.
Models PP237 and PP288 push pier tubes are
available in standard lengths of 18 and 36 inches.
The 18-inch long pier tubes are again used for
limited headroom or crawl space applications.
Models PP350 and PP400 pier tubes are available
in standard lengths of 36 inches only.
Figure 3.3.2.1.a PP288 starter tubes with pressed 3.3.3.1 Coupling

fit and welded friction reduction collars
Pier tube sections are coupled with an internal

It is common to think of push piers as being advanced
slip-fit connection (Figure 3.3.3.1.a). A hollow
through overburden soils to bear on bedrock. This
round shaft section with an outside diameter
may or may not be the case. For residential and
smaller than the inside diameter of the respective
light commercial projects with light to moderate pier
pier tube is crimped (button-punched) or plug-
loads, adequate resistance may be achieved within
welded to the leading end. The internal coupler
very stiff to hard clay soils or medium dense to
extends one-half its length inside the pier
dense sand and gravel. Allowable pier capacities of
tube and one-half its length beyond the end
15 to 20 kips, with a factor of safety of 1.5, may be
to maintain direct bearing of the pier sections.
achieved in soils having standard penetration test
The coupling is not pinned or bolted and is
N-values around 30 blows per foot. Higher strength
therefore generally considered and utilized for
soils or rock would therefore be required to develop
compression applications only.
higher pier capacities.

3.4 FSI Foundation
and Slab Push Pier
Bracket Assemblies
The FSI push pier product line includes multiple
shaft sizes and bracket assemblies to account
for most typical system uses and applications. A
summary table of the products and system use
categories is presented as Figure 3.4.a. Bracket
systems are categorized by their design or
system use and include under-footing brackets,
flush-mount brackets and slab pier brackets. The
bracket assemblies again include the bracket,
pier cap, external sleeve (if applicable), and
all associated hardware. Crawl space systems
CHAPTER 3
utilize under-footing bracket assemblies with

a shorter external sleeve. These systems are
designated with part numbers starting with
“CS”. Part numbers with a “CR” designation
identify assemblies with coil rods; otherwise, the
Figure 3.3.3.1.a
Push pier tube coupling assembly comes with threaded rods.
Push Pier Bracket Assembly Part

Bracket Description System Use
System No.
PP238CRBA FS238B - standard 2-degree Under-footing
PP237
CS238CRBA FS238B - standard 2-degree Crawl space
PP288BA FS288B - standard 2-degree
PP288CRBA FS288B - standard 2-degree
PP288BVA FS288BV – vertical
Under-footing
PP288CRBVA FS288BV – vertical
PP288BLA FS288BL - 2-degree low-profile
PP288CRBLA FS288BL - 2-degree low-profile
PP288 CS288BA FS288B – standard 2-degree
Crawl space
CS288CRBA FS288B – standard 2-degree
FS288BFM22A FS288BFM - with wedge anchors
FS288CRBFM22A FS288BFM - with wedge anchors
Flush-mount
FS288BFM31A FS288BFM - with adhesive anchors
FS288CRBFM31A FS288BFM - with adhesive anchors
SPBA Slab pier bracket (assembled on site) Slab Pier
PP350 PP350BA FS350BV - vertical
Under-footing
PP400 PP400BA FS400BV - vertical
Figure 3.4.a FSI push pier bracket assemblies

3.5 Benefits 3.6 Limitations
Some of the benefits of hydraulically-driven steel The use of push pier systems is limited to
push pier systems versus other underpinning structures that have sufficient structural
systems may include: load and/or contributory soil load to provide
adequate resistance to advance the piers to a
• Pre-manufactured components increase the
competent bearing stratum. Push pier systems
quality control of the installed system
are generally considered for compression-only
• Components available with zinc coating for
applications and are not considered for lateral
additional corrosion resistance
capacity. Foundation Supportworks published
• Laboratory testing of the push pier system and
system capacities are based on the following
components documents the system capacity
assumptions:
• Eccentricity between the shaft and bearing
area is minimized to reduce the bending • The systems should be used on structures
moment transferred to the pier system, that are fixed from translation or braced in
allowing superior performance when stabilizing some manner to prevent translation of the
CHAPTER 3
or lifting the structure foundation.
• Drive and lock-off forces easily determined
• Concrete bearing assumes a minimum
using hydraulic pumps and cylinders
compressive strength (f’c) of 2,500 psi. Local
• Documentation of the final drive force and
concrete bending and other local design
lock-off force is used to verify a factor of safety
checks should be evaluated on a case by case
at each pier location
basis.
• A proof load test is essentially completed for
each pier installation • The surrounding soils provide continuous
• End bearing pier is driven deep through lateral support with SPT N-values greater
problem soils than or equal to 4 blows per foot. Piers with
• Additional skin friction develops after exposed unbraced lengths or piers placed in
installation increasing the factor of safety weaker or fluid soils should be evaluated on a
against pier settlement case by case basis.
• Steel reinforcement and grout added within
• The maximum recommended drive load is not
hollow pier sections improves lateral capacity
exceeded during installation.
and pier stiffness
• Installs with portable hydraulic equipment
• Can be installed within areas of limited or
difficult access
• Can be installed in areas of low overhead
clearance (crawl spaces)
• Easy to install
• No vibration
• Installs quickly from inside or outside the structure
• Cost-effective solution

3.7 Corrosion Protection 3.8 Push Pier
Foundation Supportworks’ hydraulically-driven Installation Equipment
steel push pier systems have been designed The equipment needed to first drive the piers
following the guidelines of ICC-ES AC358 and individually and then transfer the structural load
ICC-ES AC406 for corrosion loss rates and to the multiple pier locations consists of hydraulic
design period (50 years). cylinders, a hydraulic pump, a remote valve
The starter and pier tube sections used for assembly (or other control device), hoses and
Models PP288 and PP350 push pier systems fittings, drive stands and lift cylinder assemblies.
are manufactured with a triple-layer, in-line Safety precautions must be followed when using
galvanized coating. The triple-layer coating high pressure hydraulics. The pressure rating
process consists of a uniform galvanized zinc of each system component must be verified
coating, an intermediate conversion coating to prior to use to ensure that all components
inhibit the formation of white rust and enhance meet the maximum pressure rating required
corrosion resistance, and a clear organic during the installation. Hoses and fittings
CHAPTER 3
polymer top coating which interacts with the should be checked periodically for damage and
intermediate coating to further enhance the replaced when in question. Failure to follow
corrosion protection and durability. The insides of manufacturer’s specifications may result in
the PP288 and PP350 starter and pier tubes also equipment failure and/or personal injury.
have a zinc-rich coating. Although the triple-layer
coating offers significant corrosion resistance,
the process is not specifically recognized within
AC358 and AC406. The PP288 and PP350 push
pier system capacities provided in Appendix 3A
are therefore conservatively based on corrosion
losses for plain steel.
The starter and pier tube sections for the PP237

and PP400 push pier systems are available in either
plain steel or with a hot-dip galvanized coating in
accordance with ASTM A123. The FSI push pier
system brackets, external sleeves, and pier caps
are also available as either plain steel or hot-dip
galvanized (ASTM A123). The bracket hardware is
electro-plated in accordance with ASTM B633.
Additional corrosion protection may be achieved

by filling the pier tubes with a fluid grout or concrete
mix following installation. With a dry hole and using
a neat or sand mix, the grout may be gravity fed
from the top of the pier. In a wet hole, to prevent
segregation of aggregate, or to prevent bridging
effects, the grout may be placed by tremie tube
from the bottom of the pier toward the surface.
Pier tubes can also be filled with concrete or grout
at intervals during the installation; i.e., piers are
gravity filled from the top after advancement of
every one or two sections.

3.8.1 Drive and Lift Cylinders 3.8.2 Hydraulic Pumps
Hydraulic drive cylinders (also commonly referred Hydraulic pumps used to drive pier tube
to as “rams”) are used to push (drive) pier sections can be electric or gasoline powered. The
below the existing footing until the target ultimate selection of the pump unit should take into
pressure or load is achieved or until the structure consideration the maximum drive pressure
begins to mobilize (lift response). Hydraulic lift (ultimate pier capacity) required and the rate
cylinders are then used at each of the multiple of pier installation desired. The flow rate of the
pier locations to provide the final lock-off load for hydraulic pump will affect how fast piers can be
stabilization or to lift the structure, if required. FSI advanced with higher flow units allowing faster
offers three drive cylinder (FS425DC, FS35CSDC pier installation. That said, gasoline pumps
and FS35DC) and two lift cylinder (FS256LC and generally provide greater flow than electric
FS35LC) options. The FS35CSDC drive cylinder pumps and are therefore preferred for deep
is a shorter version of FS35DC for use in limited foundation pier installation. Electric pumps
headroom and crawl space applications. The FSI are often recommended for the stabilization/
drive and lift cylinders are shown in Figures 3.8.1.a lift operation of foundation pier installation
CHAPTER 3
and for both the driving and stabilization/lift
operations of slab pier installation. With lower
flow rates, electric pumps install piers slower
and provide greater control to reduce potential
overstressing of the concrete slab or footing
should sudden spikes in pressure/load occur.
FSI offers two models of electric pumps and
two models of gas pumps.
The effective area of the hydraulic drive cylinder

used will also have an effect on installation speed.
FSI drive cylinders FS35DC and FS35CSDC have
Figure 3.8.1.a FSI drive cylinders. Left to Right;
FS425DC, FS35CSDC and FS35DC (no relative scale). an effective area of 9.62 in2 while operating in
extension mode and 6.48 in2 while operating in
and 3.8.1.b. Drive and lift cylinder specifications
retraction mode. FSI drive cylinder FS425DC has
are provided in Appendix 3B (Drive Stand
effective areas of 14.18 in2 and 11.04 in2 for the
Specifications) and Appendix 3C (Lift Assembly
extension and retraction modes, respectively.
Specifications), respectively.
With different effective areas, the drive cylinders
will have different extension and retraction rates
160
Extend or Retract Rate (inches/min)
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
Flow Rate (gpm)
FS35DC/FS35CSDC - Extended FS35DC/FS35CSDC - Retract
FS425DC - Extended FS425DC - Retract
Figure 3.8.1.b FSI lift cylinder assemblies. Left to Figure 3.8.2.a FSI drive cylinder
Right; FS238LCA (with FS256LC) and FS35LCA. extend and retract rates

at similar flow rates, as shown in Figure 3.8.2.a. Safety precautions must be followed when
Cylinders with less effective area will have faster using gasoline powered equipment. Ignition
extension or retraction rates than cylinders sources must be kept away from the gasoline
with more effective area. The effective area of tank and any gasoline vapor or fluid leakage
the cylinder in retraction mode is less than the must be stopped. Exhaust fumes from
effective area in extension mode due to the operation of gasoline engines require proper
presence of the internal drive rod. ventilation, particularly when used indoors or
in confined spaces.
3.8.2.1 FSI Gasoline Powered
Hydraulic Pumps 3.8.2.2 FSI Electric Powered
Hydraulic Pump Units
FSGP5A is a single-stage gear pump driven
by a variable speed, 11 HP, 4-cycle gasoline The FSEPZU4A hydraulic pump is driven by a
engine. Per manufacturer specifications, the single speed, 1.125 HP, 110 volt electrical motor
pump unit is capable of a 629 in3/min (2.7 capable of a 60 in3/min (0.26 gpm) flow rate at
CHAPTER 3
gpm) flow rate at the maximum rated output the maximum rated output pressure of 10,000
pressure of 4,000 psi and a speed of 3,600 psi. The FSEP554A hydraulic pump is driven by a
rpm. FSGPZG6A is a dual-stage piston pump single speed, 1.125 HP, 110 volt electrical motor
driven by a variable speed, 13 HP, 4-cycle capable of a 56 in3/min (0.24 gpm) flow rate at
gasoline engine. In the first stage of operation, the maximum rated output pressure of 10,000
with an output pressure up to about 1,800 psi. As can be seen by the pump performance
psi, the pump produces hydraulic flow of at curves in Figure 3.8.2.2.a, the FSEPZU4A
least 850 in3/min (3.7 gpm). The flow rate then and FSEP554A pump units have similar flow
drops significantly through the second stage performance above an output pressure of 1,500
of operation to 200 in3/min (0.87 gpm) at the psi. Again, pump performance is affected by the
maximum rated output pressure of 10,000 psi output pressure and pump speed and the output
and a speed of 3,600 rpm. Pump performance pressure may be limited by the pressure relief
is affected by the output pressure and pump valve setting.
speed. The output pressure may also be limited 800
by the pressure relief valve setting. The pump 4.0
700
output flow versus pressure curves for both 3.5
motors at a speed of 3,600 rpm are illustrated 600
3.0
in Figure 3.8.2.1.a. 500
Flow (in3/min)
Flow (gpm)
1000
2.5
4.0 400
900 2.0
800 3.5 300 1.5
700 3.0
200 1.0
Flow (in3/min)
600
Flow (gpm)
2.5
500 100 0.5
2.0
400
1.5 0 0.0
300 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000
1.0
200 Pressure (psi)
100 0.5 FSEPZU4A FSEP554A
0 0.0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000
Figure 3.8.2.2.a FSI Electric
Powered Hydraulic Pump Curves
Pressure (psi)
FSGPZG6A (3600 rpm) FSGP5A (3600 rpm)
Figure 3.8.2.1.a FSI gasoline

powered hydraulic pump curves

3.8.3 Remote Valve Assembly multiple pier sizes and bracket details. Figure
3.8.5.a shows crawl space and standard drive
The remote valve assembly is used to control the stand assemblies for the PP288 system. The
hydraulic fluid pressure from a gasoline pump to FSI drive stand assembly specifications, along
the drive cylinder during foundation pier and slab with general dimensioning, are included in
pier installation. The remote valve assembly is Appendix 3B.
typically placed near the bracket and drive stand
assembly to provide greater control and response
during the driving operation. The FSI remote valve
assembly is shown in Figure 3.8.3.a. The remote
valve assembly is not used with an electric pump.
CHAPTER 3
Figure 3.8.3.a
Remote valve assembly
3.8.4 Hoses and Fittings

Hoses and fittings should be designed for the
maximum system pressure. Hose lengths of 10,
50 and 100 feet are available to accommodate
either sequential connection of lift cylinder
assemblies or connection through a manifold
Figure 3.8.5.a Crawl space and standard drive stand
system. FSI offers both flush face and threaded assemblies for the PP288 push pier system
fittings for the cylinder and pump connections.
3.8.6 Lift Cylinder Assemblies
3.8.5 Drive Stands Lift cylinder assemblies are connected to the

thread rod or coil rod of the bracket assembly
Drive stands provide the means for advancing after the pier cap has been placed. Refer back
pier tubes through foundation and slab to Figure 3.8.1.b. The lift cylinder assemblies
brackets. The drive stand is positioned over provide the final application of force to first
and then secured to the bracket. Hydraulic drive stabilize and then lift the structure. After the
cylinders or rams are then set within the top stabilization or lift force has been applied, the
fixture of the drive stands. Lengths of the drive top nuts on the thread or coil rods of the bracket
stand legs have been specifically designed for assembly are tightened down to the pier cap,
the FSI standard pier tube lengths of 36 inches. thereby locking off the load. See Appendix 3C
The drive stand used for PP288 installation for lift assembly specifications.
within a crawl space has shorter legs designed
for 18-inch long pier sections. There are several
drive stand assembly options available for the

3.9 Push Pier AC406 and, as a result, our pier systems may
appear to be conservatively rated versus other
Capacity and Spacing published system capacities. Even so, AC406 is
Foundation Supportworks offers multiple pier an appropriate test method for determining push
sizes and bracket assembly combinations to pier system capacities, and the only standard
provide solutions for varying applications and currently available.
design loads. A main design consideration for Push pier system ultimate capacities may
eccentrically-loaded retrofit systems is minimizing be limited by the ability of the structure and
bracket rotation. This is accomplished not only surrounding soil to provide the necessary
by designing a stiffer pier system, but also by the reaction to drive the piers. Light structures
system’s interaction with the surrounding soil or structures with shallow footings may start
and the structure. Sections 3.3.1.1 and 3.3.1.2 to mobilize before the target drive load is
discuss the bending forces that are generated achieved. In such cases, it may prove beneficial
by the eccentric loading condition and how to excavate small, shallow holes at the pier
the FSI external sleeve resists the bending locations, instead of a full excavation, to allow as
force below the bracket. The near-surface soils
CHAPTER 3
much soil load as practical to remain around and

surrounding the bracket, the external sleeve and beneath the footing. The soil load can contribute
the upper sections of pier tube therefore act to significantly to “hold” a light structure down in
resist and dissipate the bending. Finite element order to achieve target pressures/loads. When
analysis software was used to analyze how the a structure experiences early lift, the project
external sleeve and pier interact with various soil engineer should evaluate if the drive pressure/
types and strengths. The standard 48-inch long load is adequate, if adjustments can be made
external sleeve was thereby selected to provide to the proposed piering plan, or if a change to
an efficient use of additional steel to resist most, retrofit helical piers should be considered. Helical
if not all, of the bending force when piers are piers are installed by the application of torque
installed within somewhat typical near-surface with machines independent of the structure.
soil conditions; i.e., loose sands and medium Helical piers are discussed in Chapter 2.
stiff clays, or stronger. Although laboratory
testing cannot exactly duplicate actual installed A structural assessment should be performed
field conditions with all possible soil types prior to installation to determine if the existing
and strengths, the results from the standard footing, stem wall or floor slab can resist the
test method utilized (ICC-ES AC406) generally estimated final drive force without structural
confirmed these calculated capacities. damage. Overstressing the concrete can be
prevented or at least minimized by following
Retrofit bracket testing in accordance with proper techniques and best practices for footing
AC406 also considers interaction of the bracket preparation and pier installation. The contractor
with a concrete block of known compressive should carefully monitor the installation and
strength (2,500 psi). Testing pier systems release the load at the first sign of foundation or
against concrete is completely logical as it slab distress.
includes concrete failure as a potential failure
mechanism of the “system”. Bracket testing Stone or cobble foundations, brick foundations,
within a rigid steel frame does little to simulate or foundations that are severely broken or
field behaviors and failure conditions, and these deteriorated may not be good candidates for
capacities could rarely be duplicated in the field retrofit foundation piers. Foundations and slabs
without first buckling the pier and/or breaking must be able to span between pier locations for
the concrete footing. FSI determines push pier the system to be effective. Pier locations and pier
capacities by testing in general accordance with spacing are often determined by the spanning

capability of unreinforced or under-reinforced be driven to loads greater than the calculated
footings, foundation walls and floor slabs, and service loads.
not by the pier’s capacity. Monolithic footings,
The drive or installation force on the piers is
footings with short stem walls or footings with
determined by calculating the structural load
masonry stem walls may require closer pier
(dead plus live) and the soil load on each pier,
spacing and/or additional support at the bracket
then multiplying by a factor of safety. Factors of
locations. Spanning capability of a footing may
safety of 1.5 to 2.0 are commonly used for push
be improved by using structural steel angles,
pier systems since the drive and lock-off loads
plate, tube, etc. sandwiched between the bottom
are easily measured and verified using hydraulic
of the footing and the horizontal bearing plate of
cylinders, pumps and gauges. Foundation
an under-footing bracket. In more severe cases;
Supportworks does not recommend the use of
e.g., stone, cobble, brick and highly deteriorated
bottle jacks for the drive or lift operations of a
foundations, the footings can be temporarily
push pier installation. Loads applied with bottle
undermined in short sections to construct a
jacks are unknown and not easily determined.
continuously reinforced concrete grade beam.
Higher factors of safety may be considered
The grade beam would then provide adequate
CHAPTER 3
at the discretion of the project engineer or as
spanning capability for the installation of the
dictated by local codes.
retrofit piers.
Piers are driven to the calculated “ultimate”
With all the discussion above, a push pier
load, or until lift of the structure occurs.
system can still only provide support for the
After all of the piers are driven, the piers are
structure if competent soils are encountered at
connected in series with hydraulic lift cylinders
the pier tip. Typically, SPT N-values of 35 to 40
and re-loaded to either the design service load
blows per foot for clay soils and 30 to 35 blows
to stabilize the structure, or until the desired
per foot for granular soils are needed to provide
lift is achieved. The total reaction load is then
the necessary end bearing resistance for light to
distributed over the multiple pier locations. The
moderate push pier loads. See Appendix 2G for
final factor of safety against pier settlement at
additional information regarding geotechnical
each pier location is calculated by dividing the
considerations for push pier systems.
drive load by the lock-off load.
Technical specifications and capacities for FSI
As discussed in Section 3.3.2.1, additional
push pier systems are provided in Appendix 3A.
skin friction develops over time as the soils
heal around the pier shaft. The factor of
3.9.1 Factor of Safety safety generally increases with an increase in
frictional capacity.
The push pier system develops a factor of safety
against pier settlement by the pier installation
methods used and the sequence with which 3.9.2 Bolting the Under-Footing
multiple piers are driven and then re-loaded. Piers Bracket to the Foundation
are first driven individually using the maximum
weight of the structure and any contributory soil Foundation Supportworks does not require nor
load as the reaction. The pier gathers load from recommend bolting of under-footing brackets
adjacent sections of the foundation, not just in to a concrete foundation with expansion or
the immediate area of the pier. The more rigid adhesive anchors. Experience has shown that
the structure, the more load can be transferred bolting to unreinforced or under-reinforced
to the pier during the drive process. It is for this concrete routinely causes concrete to crack
reason, along with consideration of contributory and spall during installation of the expansion
soil load against the foundation, that piers can or adhesive anchors, or during the repeated

loading and unloading procedure of driving 3.10 Under-footing
piers. At best, bolting provides little benefit to
the pier capacity and stability while introducing
Push Pier Installation
the potential to weaken the system by damaging The steps for under-footing push pier installation
the footing. Holes are included in the brackets include footing preparation, bracket mounting,
to be used at the discretion of the installer or if drive stand and drive cylinder attachment, pier
a project engineer or building official requires tube driving, application of the final drive force,
that the piering system be positively attached attachment of the lift cylinder assembly, structural
to the structure. lift (if applicable) and load transfer and lock off.
Actually, the manner in which a push pier system Safety precautions must be followed prior
is loaded and supported would tend to cause the to and during excavation activities. Locate
bracket to push against the structure, not pull underground utilities prior to excavation and
away from it. At the same time, however, while perform excavations at a distance away from
the bracket is pushing against the structure, it utilities as mandated by the utility owner.
also tends to rotate toward the structure. If the Follow OSHA guidelines for trench safety.
CHAPTER 3
pier system does not have adequate stiffness,

then the tendency for excessive bracket
Step 1 Footing Preparation
rotation will be evidenced by the bearing plate
being pried away from beneath the structure. Excavation is required in most cases to expose
This phenomenon does not mean that the the concrete footing and prepare it for under-
overall pier system is translating away from the footing bracket placement. The footing may
structure. Instead, it means the pier needs to be accessed from either inside or outside the
be much stiffer. The stiffness of FSI push pier structure using isolated “pocket” or continuous
systems greatly reduces this rotational tendency excavations. For structures with basements,
and precludes the need to positively attach it may be advantageous to access the footing
the bracket to the structure. When such an from within the basement of the structure by first
attachment is made due to preference or local removing sections of the basement floor slab.
requirements, FSI recommends the expansion or General steps for footing preparation include:
adhesive anchors be installed after completion
• For shallow pocket excavations, soil should
of the piering operations. Anchors were not
be hand or machine-excavated from against
used when the pier systems were tested in
the footing and foundation wall within an area
accordance with AC406.
approximately 3 feet square and to a depth
approximately 9 to 13 inches below the bottom
of footing. These excavations are made at
each pier location. Alternatively, soil could be
removed completely with a trench excavation.
Trench excavations are more common when a
lift is required.
• The soil under the footing and foundation wall

is removed to a distance that allows bracket
placement (Figure 3.10.a).
• Notch spread footings 16 to 22 inches wide

(depending upon the width of the retrofit
bracket) and approximately flush with the face
of the foundation wall. Notching of footings may

Figure 3.10.b1 Smoothing the vertical and horizontal
bearing surfaces with a chipping hammer
Figure 3.10.a Removing soil from beneath
the footing with a chisel attachment
CHAPTER 3
not be necessary depending upon the footing
geometry, strength, steel reinforcement and the
proposed piering plan. Notching of the footing
reduces the eccentricity between the applied
load and the pier section. The proposed pier
plan may consider pier installation on opposing
sides of the footing to better balance support
of the loads. Installing piers on opposing
sides of the footing in pairs or in a staggered
configuration can be an acceptable alternative
to notching. The design professional of record
should approve the notching, particularly when
notching will cut steel reinforcement. The outline
of the notch is typically first made by drilling a
Figures 3.10.b2 Checking underside of
series of closely-spaced holes with a concrete footing for proper preparation
drill bit. After the notch outline has been made, a
chipping hammer or jack hammer can be used to
impart energy to the perforated section, causing
it to separate from the rest of the footing. Drilling
the holes prior to using the chipping hammer
or jack hammer also reduces the likelihood of
concrete spalling from under the footing.
• Smooth the concrete surfaces with a chipping

hammer or other tool to produce similar results.
The vertical and horizontal surfaces of the
footing and foundation wall must be smooth and
clean to allow full contact with the vertical and
horizontal bearing plates of the under-footing
bracket (Figures 3.10.b1 and 3.10.b2). Footing
preparation should be completed to provide Figure 3.10.b3 Completed footing excavation and
proper bracket/pier alignment (Figure 3.10.b3). preparation; ready to position bracket

Step 2 Positioning the Bracket
• The bracket is placed under the footing and

raised into position with the horizontal and
vertical bearing plates in full contact with the
concrete surfaces. The bracket is temporarily
held in place using wood cribbing (Figure
3.10.c1). Alternatively, a bracket RAYser™ is
available from Foundation Supportworks for the
more commonly used brackets. The bracket
RAYser consists simply of a U-shaped plate
with bottle jacks to position the bracket and
hold it snug against the concrete during the
initial pier installation process (Figure 3.10.c2).
CHAPTER 3
Figure 3.10.c2
Bracket RAYserTM support system
from the repeated loading and unloading process

during pier installation and lock-off. Additionally,
drilling the anchor holes could compromise the
integrity of steel reinforcement. If mounting of the
Figure 3.10.c1 under-footing bracket with anchors is required,
Temporary bracket support with wood cribbing FSI recommends anchoring the bracket after the
system has been locked off.
Note: For the Model PP400 system without an
external sleeve, the starter tube with the friction
reduction collar needs to slide up through the Step 3 Mounting the Drive Stand and
bottom of the bracket before setting the bracket Hydraulic Drive Cylinder
against the footing.
• Slide the exterior sleeve over the starter tube and
• FSI under-footing brackets do not require insert the sleeve and starter together through
mechanical anchorage to the concrete the bracket (Figures 3.10.d1 and 3.10.d2). Care
foundation. The published capacities are based must be taken that the sleeve and starter are
on testing and analyses without anchors. There properly aligned and extend past both the top
are bolt holes that may be used to mount the and bottom plates of the bracket. The sleeve
bracket to the concrete with expansion or and starter could also be placed after mounting
adhesive anchors, if needed to meet the project the drive stand to the bracket. Installers may find
specifications. It should be noted, however, that it easier, however, to set the sleeve and starter
the use of anchors to mount the under-footing without being restricted by the drive stand legs.
bracket may cause concrete spalling and cracking

• The drive stand is fitted to the bracket and secured
with coil rod (PP237 system), L-pins (PP288
system) or bolts (PP350 and PP400 systems).
Figures 3.10.e1 and 3.10.e2 show setting of the
drive stand for the PP288 push pier system and
securing it to the bracket with L-pins.
CHAPTER 3
Figure 3.10.d1
Exterior sleeve slid over the starter tube
Figure 3.10.e1 Drive stand for PP288

push pier system fitted to the bracket
Figure 3.10.d2 Sleeve and starter Figure 3.10.e2 PP288 drive stand
inserted together through the bracket secured to the bracket with L-pins

• Slide the hydraulic drive cylinder into the • Connect the hydraulic hoses to the inlet and
top fixture of the drive stand and lock it in outlet of the drive cylinder and the inlet and outlet
position with the coil rod and nuts (Figures of the remote valve assembly (Figure 3.10.g).
3.10.f1 and 3.10.f2).
CHAPTER 3
Figure 3.10.g
Connect hydraulic hoses
• Align the drive stand by activating the

Figure 3.10.f1 Hydraulic drive cylinder
hydraulics and extending the drive cylinder
placed within top fixture of drive stand rod to make slight contact with the starter tube
section. Use a digital level, protractor or other
device to check alignment of the drive stand,
sleeve, starter and bracket (Figure 3.10.h).
Adjust the alignment as necessary for the
bracket system being utilized; i.e., 2-degree or
vertical brackets. Proper footing preparation is
critical for setting the bracket and system at the
correct installation angle. Temporary cribbing
may be used between the drive stand and the
foundation wall to set the correct installation
angle (Figure 3.10.i) while advancing the starter
tube and external sleeve.
Figure 3.10.f2 Drive cylinder locked in
position with coil rod and nuts

Step 4 Pier Tube Installation
• Drive the external sleeve and starter tube

together until the welded collar or trumpeted
end of the sleeve is seated at the top of the
bracket. Pier tubes are then coupled (see
coupling detail in Figure 3.3.3.1.a) and pushed
through the external sleeve (Figure 3.10.j). The
standard length for pier tubes is 36 inches
for all of the FSI push pier systems. Drive
cylinders FS35DC and FS425DC have 22-inch
strokes. The PP237 and PP288 crawl-space
pier tubes have lengths of 18 inches and
are generally pushed with FSI drive cylinder
FS35CSDC, which has a 13-inch stroke. The
drive process for the sleeve and starter tube,
CHAPTER 3
the standard 36-inch pier tubes, and the
18-inch crawl-space pier tubes therefore
requires a two stage process and the use
Figure 3.10.h Checking drive stand

alignment with digital level
Figure 3.10.i Temporary wood Figure 3.10.j

cribbing used to set installation angle Installing PP288 push pier tube

of a driving tube tool. When the maximum the cylinder rod which may result in a rapid
cylinder stroke has been reached, the cylinder increase in pressure, possibly resulting in
is retracted, the drive tube tool is set in place, cylinder damage or personal injury.
and the push is completed to the top of the
• Once the pre-determined drive pressure is
bracket or external sleeve (Figure 3.10.k).
achieved or the structure starts to lift, the
pressure is released from the hydraulic system
and the drive stand and drive cylinder are
removed from the bracket. The drive process is
repeated at each of the proposed pier locations.
Step 5 Assembling the Bracket and

Mounting Lift Cylinders
• The final pier tube extending up from the

bracket will often have to be cut to the desired
CHAPTER 3
elevation. FSI push pier systems with an

external sleeve offer a tremendous benefit over
systems without external sleeves. The final
pier tube is protected from bending and the
high pinching forces common between short
brackets and push pier tubes. The final pier tube
is then easily removed from within the external
sleeve and placed in a chop saw to achieve
Figure 3.10.k Driving tube tool set a square cut (Figure 3.10.n). Alternatively, a
in place for second stage of push
tube cutting guide can be positioned over the
• Record the drive pressure at final stroke of in-place pier section and a cut can be made
each pier tube section (Figure 3.10.m). with a reciprocating saw or portable band saw.
The last pier tube section is typically cut to a
length to extend above the external sleeve
approximately 4½ inches. The cutoff length may
vary depending upon the amount of structural
lift anticipated. The removed pier section is
replaced after the cut is made.
Figure 3.10.m Pressure readings

are recorded for each pier tube
Safety precautions must be followed when

driving pier tube sections to ensure that
body and clothing are away from pinch
points. Take caution and avoid over-stroking Figure 3.10.n Cutting pier tube to
desired length with a chop saw

• The pier cap is set on the pier tube and two • Lift cylinder assembly rods are coupled
threaded rods or coil rods are fed through the to the bracket assembly rods as shown in
holes of the pier cap and bracket. The pier cap Figure 3.10.p1. Adjacent lift cylinders (piers)
is connected to the bracket with nuts on each are connected in series to provide uniform
end of the rods (Figure 3.10.o1). There should application of load (Figure 3.10.p2).
be adequate thread left above the top nuts
Note: The hydraulic system shown in the figures
above the pier cap to allow coupling of the lift
is technically a “parallel” system. However, it is
cylinder assembly to the rods (Figure 3.10.o2).
common to say that the piers are connected in
“series,” which simply means hydraulic lines run
between adjacent pier locations and they are
often all connected together with one set up.
CHAPTER 3
Figure 3.10.p1
Connection of lift cylinder assembly
Figure 3.10.o1 Installation of pier cap

plate with threaded rods and nuts
Figure 3.10.p2 Hydraulic system connected

to provide uniform application of load
Step 6 Structural Lift and/or Lock Off
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the system to

either lift the structure to the proper elevation
or provide the required lock-off pressure/load.
The lock-off pressure/load is generally the
service load or design working load per pier.
It may be necessary to remove the soil from
above the footing if pocket excavations were
initially made. Removal of as much soil load as
possible around the foundation will increase
the potential to achieve a desired lift.
Figure 3.10.o2 PP288 bracket
ready for lift cylinder assembly

• The system is first equalized by opening
the valves at each cylinder in sequence and
adjusting the system pressure. The system
should be equalized to a pressure on the order
of 1,000 psi.
• Slowly raise the pump pressure to raise

the foundation. Monitor the lift at each pier
location and after achieving proper lift, close
the valve to the top of the cylinder. If the piers
Figure 3.10.r Benchmark established with a
are for stabilization only, close the valves as shallow hole drilled into the concrete block
soon as noticeable movement occurs.
Step 7 Backfill and Clean Up Work Area
• When the structure has been lifted to the
proper elevation or the piers reloaded to the • Backfill excavations and properly compact
required lock-off load (typically the design with a mechanical tamper (Figure 3.10.s).
working load), the load is locked off to the This may also be an ideal time to improve the
CHAPTER 3
piers by tightening the two nuts down to the drainage system around structures with below
top of the pier cap. grade living areas or working space. New
drain pipe can be installed along with free-
• The pressure is released from the hydraulic
draining granular backfill provided the drain
system and the lift cylinder assembly is
pipe is connected to an interior sump system
removed from the bracket (Figure 3.10.q). The
or drained by gravity to daylight discharge
pier system installation is essentially complete.
points. Interior pier installation may require
Permanent benchmarks may be established
concrete patching and finishing after soil
within and beyond the work area, if approved
compaction (Figure 3.10.t).
by the owner or client. These monitoring points
would allow relative movements to be measured
in the future, if necessary (Figure 3.10.r).
Figure 3.10.s
Backfill excavations and compact soil
Figure 3.10.q Figure 3.10.t

System locked off; pier installation complete Concrete placement at interior pier locations

3.11 PP288 Flush-Mount Steps 3 - 7
Push Pier Installation • The remaining steps for flush-mount push
pier installation are similar to those for the
The PP288 flush-mount bracket system may be
under-footing system described in Section 3.10.
used for applications where poured concrete
elements such as a foundation wall, column,
pile cap or grade beam have adequate strength, 3.12 PP288 Slab Push Pier
thickness and vertical dimensions to allow proper Installation
attachment of the bracket. PP288 flush-mount
system capacities are provided in Appendix 3A The PP288 slab push pier system is used to lift
for systems using either expansion or adhesive and/or stabilize settling concrete floor slabs.
anchors. Monometer survey equipment, a laser level, a
zip level, or other suitable equipment should be
used to identify low areas in the slab. Slab piers
Step 1 Concrete Preparation
should be located at these identified low points.
• Excavation may be necessary to expose the Slab piers should also be considered either
CHAPTER 3
vertical face of the concrete. If the bracket centered on or on alternating sides of significant
is mounted on a foundation wall or column floor cracks to ensure an even lift. Voids beneath
above a spread footing, the concrete footing a stabilized and lifted slab should be filled with
would have to be cored through or removed suitable material such as a cement grout or
entirely to allow for advancement of the pier PolyLEVEL® polyurethane foam.
tube sections. The vertical face of the concrete
to receive the bracket should be smooth of Step 1 Slab Preparation
surface irregularities and free of structural
cracks. A thin layer of leveling compound • Mark the slab pier locations with consideration
could be considered to create a smooth flat to possible underground utilities, overhead
surface prior to mounting the bracket. obstructions, maximum pier spacing, existing
floor cracks and lift requirements. Small paper
Safety precautions must be followed prior to plates may be used to mark preliminary slab
and during excavation. Locate underground pier locations since the plates can be easily
utilities prior to excavation activities and moved around the slab (Figure 3.12.a). Slab pier
perform excavations at a distance away
from utilities as mandated by the utility
owner. Follow OSHA guidelines for trench
safety during excavation and installation
activities.
Step 2 Mounting the Bracket
• The flush-mount bracket is secured to the

concrete vertical face using eight (8) ¾-inch
diameter anchors. Rather than attempting
to position and hold the bracket in place, a
template of the bracket bolt holes could be
considered to mark the anchor locations.
Figure 3.12.a
Marking slab pier locations

spacing can be estimated using the Slab Pier determined at the first cored hole. Remove the
Spacing Guide of Figure 3.12.b. A grid pattern concrete cores and use a hand probe to check
spacing is provided for various slab thickness for underground obstructions (Figure 3.12.d).
and live load combinations. The guide also Using a small hand tool, excavate all material
considers unreinforced concrete slabs having a beneath the slab to at least 4 inches below
minimum concrete strength of 2,500 psi. the bottom of the slab and extending at least
3 inches beyond the edges of the cored hole.
Live Load
Check with your hand to confirm that the bottom
30 40 50 60 80 of slab is relatively smooth and free of subgrade
psf psf psf psf psf material (Figure 3.12.e).
3.5” 5’-0” 4’-6” 4’-3” 4’-0” 3’-9”
4.0” 5’-6” 5’-0” 4’-9” 4’-6” 4’-3”

Slab Thickness
4.5” 6’-0” 5’-6” 5’-3” 5’-0” 4’-6”
5.0” 6’-6” 6’-0” 5’-9” 5’-6” 5’-0”

CHAPTER 3
6.0” 7’-3” 7’-0” 6’-6” 6’-3” 5’-9”
8.0” 8’-9” 8’-6” 8’-3” 7’-9” 7’-3”
Typical for Residential
Figure 3.12.b Slab pier spacing guide
• Core 8-inch diameter holes in the concrete slab Figures 3.12.d

Probing for utilities or obstructions
(Figure 3.12.c). Adjust slab pier locations and
spacings based on the actual concrete thickness
Figure 3.12.e
Excavating beneath the slab
Safety precautions must be followed during

concrete coring to ensure the core drill
is securely mounted to the floor slab and
proper safety equipment including safety
glasses are worn during coring operations.
Immediately remove any water from the
floor when coring to reduce potential for
electrical shock. Keep body parts and other
Figure 3.12.c objects away from core bit during operation.
Concrete coring

Step 2 Assembling the Bracket Below
the Slab
• The PP288 slab pier bracket assembly

consists of one (1) main plate, two (2) wing
plates, two (2) 14-inch long 5/8-inch diameter
threaded rods, four (4) 5/8-inch hex nuts and one
(1) pier cap. Set the main plate (first) and the
wing plates (second) through the cored hole.
Cover the welded nuts on the bottom of the
main plate with duct tape prior to placement
through the cored hole to ensure clean threads
for later insertion of the threaded rods. Locate Figure 3.12.g
Threaded rods installed
the wing plates above the main plate so that
the wing plate holes line up with the holes in Step 3 Mounting the Drive Stand and
the main plate (Figure 3.12.f). Align the straight
CHAPTER 3
Drive Cylinder
edges of the two wing plates to be essentially
parallel with each other. • Cut the coupler extension off a standard
36-inch long pier tube to use as your starter
tube (Figure 3.12.h). Insert the “coupler” end
Figure 3.12.h Starter tube made by cutting

coupler end of standard pier tube
Figure 3.12.f Main plate and wing plates
positioned and aligned beneath the slab
of the starter tube through the hole of the
main plate. Place the slab pier drive adaptor
• Install hex nuts on one end of the threaded
over the pier tube and fasten to the threaded
rods leaving about 2 ½ inches of thread below
rods using two hex nuts (Figure 3.12.i). Pull up
the nuts. Insert the threaded rods through
the wing plate holes and thread them into
the weld nuts below the main plate. Turn the
rods by hand until the nuts on the threaded
rods are seated against the top surface of the
wing plates. Continue to tighten the nuts with
a deep well socket to fasten the wing plates
firmly to the main plate (Figure 3.12.g).
Figure 3.12.i
Slab pier drive adaptor installed

on the threaded rods to bring the main plate Step 4 Pier Tube Installation
and wing plates against the bottom of slab.
Slide the PP288 drive stand onto the slab pier • Electric pumps are preferred for slab pier
drive adaptor and secure with L-pins (Figure installations since the application of drive force is
3.12.j). Set the hydraulic drive cylinder into more easily controlled and the risk of overstressing
the top fixture of the drive stand and lock it the concrete slab during pier driving is reduced.
in position with the coil rod and nuts (Figure • Pier tubes are driven using similar procedures
3.12.k). Connect the hydraulic hoses. as outlined in Section 3.10 (Step 4), including
recording of drive pressures at the end of each
driven tube. The drive stand should self-align
when force is applied by the drive cylinder to the
pier tubes; therefore, no cribbing or alignment
of the drive stand should be necessary if the
floor slab was prepared properly.
Safety precautions must be followed when

CHAPTER 3
driving pier tube sections to ensure that

body and clothing are away from pinch
points. Take caution and avoid over-stroking
the cylinder rod which may result in a rapid
increase in pressure, possibly resulting in
cylinder damage or personal injury.
• Drive pier tubes until the required termination

drive force is achieved or slab movement
(flexing) in excess of about ¼ inch occurs. Care
should be taken by the installer to slowly release
hydraulic pressure at the end of each cylinder
stroke. Once the pre-determined termination
Figure 3.12.j PP288 drive stand drive force is achieved or the slab starts to
mounted to slab pier drive adaptor
lift, the pressure is released from the hydraulic
system and the drive stand and drive cylinder
are removed from the slab pier drive adaptor.
The drive adaptor is then disconnected from
the threaded rods of the slab pier bracket.
Figure 3.12.k Drive cylinder set

into top fixture of drive stand

Step 5 Mounting the Lift Cylinder
• The last pier tube section is pulled from the

hole, cut to desired length in a chop saw and
replaced. The desired top of pier elevation
relative to the top of slab depends upon the
slab thickness and the maximum amount of
lift anticipated. If the slab will be stabilized
without lifting, the top of pier tube can be
approximately two inches below the top of
floor slab. It is imperative that the pier tube
is cut correctly to ensure that the pier cap,
threaded rod and nuts are below the top of the
slab after lift and/or lock-off operations.
Figure 3.12.n Lightly tighten
• Place the pier cap over the threaded rods and pier cap down onto pier tube
CHAPTER 3
lightly tighten it against the top of the pier tube
with two 5/8-inch hex nuts (Figures 3.12.m and
3.12.n). Set the lift cylinder assembly onto the
pier cap (Figure 3.12.o). Couple the threaded
rods of the lift cylinder plate assembly to
the threaded rods of the slab bracket to
hold the lift cylinder in place (Figure 3.12.p).
Note: The threaded rods of the lift cylinder

assembly are larger than the 5/8-inch rods
of the slab pier bracket and are not used in
this application.
Figure 3.12.o Lift cylinder

assembly set on pier cap
Figure 3.12.m Pier tube cut Figure 3.12.p Lift plate assembly coupled
to length; pier cap placed to threaded rods of slab pier bracket

Step 6 Slab Lift and/or Lock off to the top of the cylinder. If the piers are for
stabilization only, close the valves as soon as
• Connect hydraulic hoses to the top and noticeable slab movement occurs. Once all the
bottom fittings on the lift cylinders (Figure cylinder valves are closed, the piers are locked
3.12.q). The lift cylinders are all hydraulically off by tightening the 5/8-inch hex nuts to the tops
connected as a system (Figure 3.12.r) in of the pier caps (Figure 3.12.s).
order to provide simultaneous lift pressure at
each cylinder. The system is first equalized
by opening the valves at each cylinder in
sequence and adjusting the system pressure.
The system should be equalized to pressures
on the order of 100 to 300 psi.
CHAPTER 3
Figure 3.12.s Pier load locked off by

tightening nuts on top of pier cap
• The system pressure is released and the lift

cylinder assemblies are removed. Cut the
threaded rods flush with the tops of the hex
nuts with a grinder or saw (Figure 3.12.t). The
tops of the nuts must be below the surface
Figure 3.12.q elevation of the slab.
Hydraulic connections at lift cylinder
Figure 3.12.r
Lift cylinders in series
• Slowly raise the pump pressure to raise the slab.

Monitor the slab for lift at each pier location
Figure 3.12.t
and after achieving proper lift, close the valve Cutting the threaded rods

Step 7 Void Fill and Finish Surface 3.13 Push Pier Load Testing
• Place concrete and trowel finish at each pier The push pier installation process is essentially
location (Figures 3.12.u and 3.12.v). Voids equivalent to performing a proof load test at each
under the slab should be filled completely with push pier location and, therefore, prescribed
grout or PolyLEVEL® polyurethane foam. Void “official” load testing of push pier systems is
filling is typically completed before patching not common. The piers are advanced to a drive
the core holes with concrete, but can be done or ultimate load, then reloaded to the specified
either before or after the concrete is placed. lock-off load (typically at or near the service
Concrete patches should be allowed to cure load) or until the desired lift is achieved. The
before void filling. drive and lock-off loads are easily calculated
from the effective area of the hydraulic cylinder
and the pressure gauge reading at the hydraulic
pump. Pile head movements are not typically
monitored during the proof loading process of a
typical push pier installation.
CHAPTER 3
The deflection to load response of the push pier
system can be determined by field load testing
using calibrated equipment either directly at
the bracket location or with sacrificial piers
installed away from the structure. The loading
methodology in ASTM D1143 may be used to
verify pier deformation (elastic compression and
settlement) and creep effects. The preferred
method is to perform the load test at the bracket
location with the bracket attached to the
structure. If a sacrificial test pier is used away
Figure 3.12.u from the structure, a compression load test
Patching holes at pier locations frame must be constructed.
Figure 3.12.v
Finishing concrete

APPENDIX 3A
BRACKET SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Appendix 3A
Bracket Specifications and Capacities

when used with the PP237 Push Pier System
Bracket: Pier Starter Tube: Cap Plate:
Weldment manufactured from 1/4” Pier tube section with Ø2.875” friction 3/4” x 3.75” x 5.75” ASTM A572 Grade 50
and 3/8” ASTM A36 plate. reduction collar welded at leading end. with confining ring welded to one side.
Pier Tube: External Sleeve: Bracket Hardware(3):

Ø2.375” x 0.154” wall x 36” long Ø2.875” x 0.203” wall x 30” or x 48” long (2) - Ø5/8”x 16” long contour (coil) rod
ASTM A500 Grade B or C with welded collar at one end. AISI 1045, tensile strength = 120 ksi (min)
Yield strength = 60 ksi (min) ASTM A500 Grade B or C Electrozinc plated per ASTM B633
Tensile strength = 70 ksi (min) Yield strength = 60 ksi (min)
Available plain or hot-dip galvanized(2) Tensile strength = 70 ksi (min) Bracket Finish:
Pier Tube Coupler:
Ø2.000” x 0.187” wall x 5” long
Allowable Bracket Capacity(4,5,6,7) Rn/Ω

with 30” with 48”
APPENDIX 3A
Sleeve Sleeve
(kips) (kips)
Plain 13.0 17.0
Plain Corroded (1)
9.9 12.9
Galvanized Corroded (1)
12.1 15.9
Maximum Drive Force
22.1 28.9
During Installation(7)
(1) Corroded capacities include a 50-year scheduled sacrificial loss

in thickness per ICC-ES AC406.
(3) Optional hardware utilizes similar sized all-thread made from

Grade B7, tensile strength = 125 ksi.
(4) Brackets shall be used for support of structures that are

considered to be fixed from translation. Structures that are not
fixed from translation shall be braced in some manner prior to
installing retrofit brackets systems.
(5) Allowable compression capacities consider continuous lateral

soil confinement in soils with SPT blow counts ≥ 4. Piers with
exposed unbraced lengths or piers placed in weaker or fluid
soils should be evaluated on a case by case basis by the project
engineer.
(6) Concrete bearing assumes a minimum compressive strength

(f’c) of 2,500 psi. Local concrete bending and other local design
checks should be evaluated on a case by case basis by the
project engineer.
(7) Push Piers shall be installed with a driving force exceeding the
required allowable service load by a sufficient factor of safety
(FOS). FOS is most commonly between 1.5 and 2.0, although
a higher or lower FOS may be considered at the discretion
of the pier designer or as dictated by local code or project
requirements.
Rev. 5/26/15

Weldment manufactured from 1/4”, 3/8”, Pier tube section with machined Ø3.375” 1” x 5.00” x 9.00” ASTM A572 Grade 50
and 1/2” ASTM A36 plate. friction reduction collar pressed around with confining ring welded to one side.
leading end.
Pier Tube: Bracket Hardware(3):
Ø2.875” x 0.165” wall x 36” long External Sleeve: (2) - Ø3/4” x 16” long all-thread rod
Triple-coated in-line galvanized Ø3.500” x 0.216” wall x 30” or 48” long with Grade B7, tensile strength = 125 ksi (min)
ASTM A500 Grade C welded collar or trumpet flare at one end. Electrozinc plated per ASTM B633
Yield strength = 50 ksi (min) ASTM A500 Grade B or C
Tensile strength = 55 ksi (min) Yield strength = 50 ksi (min) Bracket Finish:
Tensile strength = 62 ksi (min) Available plain or hot-dip galvanized(2)
Pier Tube Coupler:
Ø2.250” x 0.180” wall x 6” long

APPENDIX 3A
Sleeve Sleeve
(kips) (kips)
Plain 23.9 36.7
Plain Corroded (1)
18.5 28.4
Grout Filled Corroded (1)
20.9 32.1
Maximum Drive Force
48.1 60.0

in thickness per ICC-ES AC406. Grout filled piers consider a loss
in thickness at the outside diameter only.
(3) Optional hardware utilizes similar sized contour (coil) thread

made from AISI 1045, tensile strength = 120 ksi. Slightly lower
tensile strength material does not govern the listed capacities.

(5) Allowable compression capacities consider continuous lateral soil

confinement in soils with SPT blow counts ≥ 4. Piers with exposed
unbraced lengths or piers placed in weaker or fluid soils should be

project engineer.
requirements.

FS288BV Bracket Specifications and Capacities
leading end.
Pier Tube Coupler:
Ø2.250” x 0.180” wall x 6” long

APPENDIX 3A
Sleeve Sleeve
(kips) (kips)
Plain 23.9 36.7
Plain Corroded (1)
18.5 28.4
20.9 32.1
Maximum Drive Force
48.1 60.0




engineer.

project engineer.
requirements.

leading end.
Pier Tube Coupler:
Ø2.250” x 0.180” wall x 6” long

APPENDIX 3A
Sleeve Sleeve
(kips) (kips)
Plain 21.4 32.9
Plain Corroded (1)
16.6 25.4
18.7 28.8
Maximum Drive Force
48.1 60.0




engineer.

project engineer.
requirements.

FS288BFM Bracket Specifications and Capacities
Bracket: External Sleeve: Bracket Finish:
Weldment manufactured from 1/4”, 3/8”, Ø3.500” x 0.216” wall x 30” or 48” long with Available plain or hot-dip galvanized(2)
and 1/2” ASTM A36 plate. welded collar or trumpet flare at one end.
ASTM A500 Grade B or C Concrete Anchorage(7)
Pier Tube: Yield strength = 50 ksi (min)
Ø2.875” x 0.165” wall x 36” long Tensile strength = 62 ksi (min) (Option 1):
(8) - Ø3/4” x 7” Simpson Wedge-All
Triple-coated in-line galvanized
Mechanically galvanized per ASTM B695)
ASTM A500 Grade C Cap Plate:
Yield strength = 50 ksi (min) 1” x 5.00” x 9.00” ASTM A572 Grade 50
Tensile strength = 55 ksi (min) with confining ring welded to one side. Concrete Anchorage(8)
(Option 2):
Pier Tube Coupler: Bracket Hardware(3): Adhesive = Simpson AT
Ø2.250” x 0.180” wall x 6” long (2) - Ø3/4”x 16” long all-thread rod Quantity = approximately 1.25 oz per hole
Grade B7, tensile strength = 125 ksi (min) (8) - Ø3/4” x 7” long all-thread rod
Pier Starter Tube: Electrozinc plated per ASTM B633 Grade B7, tensile strength = 125 ksi (min)
Pier tube section with Ø3.375” friction Electrozinc plated per ASTM B633
reduction collar pressed around leading end.
APPENDIX 3A
with
with Wedge
Adhesive
Anchors(7)
Anchors(8)
(kips)
(kips)
Plain 22.0 31.0
Plain Corroded (1)
17.0 24.0
19.3 27.1
Maximum Drive Force
44.2 60.0
(1) Corroded capacities include a 50-year scheduled sacrificial loss in thickness per ICC-ES AC406. Grout filled piers consider a loss in thickness
at the outside diameter only.
(5) Allowable compression capacities consider continuous lateral soil confinement in soils with SPT blow counts ≥ 4. Piers with exposed unbraced
lengths or piers placed in weaker or fluid soils should be evaluated on a case by case basis by the project engineer.
(6) Bracket is strictly intended to be mounted to poured concrete structures. Bracket should never be mounted to CMU concrete block.
Anchorage assumes a minimum concrete compressive strength (f’c) of 2,500 psi and a minimum concrete thickness of 8”. Local concrete
bending and other local design checks should be evaluated on a case by case basis by the project engineer.
(7) When the bracket is mounted with wedge anchors, the bracket shall be located with a minimum distance of 6” from the edge of the bracket to
any concrete edge. Wedge anchors require the use of a Ø3/4” drill bit and a minimum embedment depth of 5”. Wedge anchors shall be installed
to a torque of 150 ft-lbs.
(8) When the bracket is mounted with adhesive anchors, the bracket shall be located with a minimum distance of 9” from the edge of the bracket
to any concrete edge. Wedge anchors require the use of a Ø13/16” drill bit and a minimum embedment depth of 5.50”. Adhesive anchors shall
be tightened to a snug tight condition after sufficient curing time.
(9) Push Piers shall be installed with a driving force exceeding the required allowable service load by a sufficient factor of safety (FOS). FOS is
most commonly between 1.5 and 2.0, although a higher or lower FOS may be considered at the discretion of the pier designer or as dictated
by local code or project requirements.

Weldment manufactured from 3/8” Pier tube section with Ø4.000” friction 1-1/4” x 4.00” x 8.50” ASTM A572 Grade 50
and 1/2” ASTM A36 plate. reduction collar welded at leading end. with capture plate welded to one side.
Pier Tube: External Sleeve: Bracket Hardware:

Ø3.500” x 0.165” wall x 36” long Ø4.000” x 0.226” wall x 48” long with (2) - Ø7/8”x 18” long all-thread rod
Triple-coated in-line galvanized welded collar at one end. Grade B7, tensile strength = 125 ksi (min)
ASTM A500 Grade C ASTM A500 Grade B or C Electrozinc plated per ASTM B633
Yield strength = 50 ksi (min) Yield strength = 50 ksi (min)
Tensile strength = 55 ksi (min) Tensile strength = 62 ksi (min) Bracket Finish:
Pier Tube Coupler:
Ø3.125” x 0.180” wall x 6” long
(kips)
APPENDIX 3A
Plain 48.7
Plain Corroded(1) 37.6
Grout Filled Corroded(1) 42.7
Maximum Drive Force During Installation (6)
77.0



engineer.

project engineer.
requirements.

Bracket: Pier Tube Coupler: Cap Plate:
Weldment manufactured from 3/8” Ø3.500” x 0.216” wall x 8” long 1-1/4” x 4.00” x 8.50” ASTM A572 Grade 50
and 1/2” ASTM A36 plate. with capture plate welded to one side.
Pier Starter Tube:
Pier Tube: Pier tube section with Ø4.500” friction Bracket Hardware:
Ø4.000” x 0.226” wall x 36” long reduction collar welded at leading end. (2) - Ø7/8”x 18” long all-thread rod
ASTM A500 Grade B or C Grade B7, tensile strength = 125 ksi (min)
Yield strength = 50 ksi (min) External Sleeve: Electrozinc plated per ASTM B633
Tensile strength = 62 ksi (min) None
Available plain or hot-dip galvanized(2) Bracket Finish:
(kips)
Plain 43.6
APPENDIX 3A
Plain Corroded (1)
36.5
Galvanized Corroded(1) 41.6
Maximum Drive Force During Installation (6)
77.0

in thickness per ICC-ES AC406.


engineer.

project engineer.
requirements.

APPENDIX 3B
DRIVE STAND SPECIFICATIONS
Appendix 3B
Drive Stand Specifications

Model 238 Drive Stand Specifications
when used with the RED(4) Drive Cylinder (FS35DC)
FS238B
Drive Cylinder(4) (FS35DC):

Stroke = 22”
Bore = Ø3.50”
Drive Cylinder Adaptor:

FSDCA238
Drive Stand Hardware(1):

(1) - Ø3/4” x 12” long coil rod with nuts
(2) - Ø5/8” x 12” long coil rods with nuts
(4) - 1-1/2” Flanged Pins
APPENDIX 3B
Drive Stand Rated Drive Load(2,3)
30.0 kips
Hydraulic Drive Hydraulic Drive

200 1.9 2,100 20.2

400 3.8 2,200 21.2
600 5.8 2,300 22.1
800 7.7 2,400 23.1
1,000 9.6 2,500 24.1
1,200 11.5 2,600 25.0
1,400 13.5 2,700 26.0
1,600 15.4 2,800 26.9
1,700 16.4 2,900 27.9
1,800 17.3 3,000 28.9
1,900 18.3 3,100 29.8
2,000 19.2 3,120 30.0
(1) Drive stand should never be operated without all hardware components firmly in place.
(2) Do not operate at pressures that produce drive forces in excess of the drive stand’s rated drive load. Max operating pressure of the drive
(3) Do not operate at pressures that produce drive forces in excess of the “maximum drive force during installation” values specified for the
bracket being installed (see Bracket Specifications and Capacities).
(4) Note that the mounting flange dimensions are different between the RED and GRAY cylinders (FS35DC and FS425DC) and thereby require
the use of unique top fixture weldments that correspond to the appropriate drive cylinder.

when used with the GRAY(4) Drive Cylinder (FS425DC)
FS238B

Stroke = 22”
Bore = Ø4.25”
Drive Cylinder Adaptor:

FSDCA238

(2) - Ø5/8” x 12” long coil rods with nuts
(4) - 1-1/2” Flanged Pins
APPENDIX 3B

30.0 kips

100 1.4 1,300 18.4

200 2.8 1,400 19.9
300 4.3 1,500 21.3
400 5.7 1,600 22.7
500 7.1 1,700 24.1
600 8.5 1,800 25.5
700 9.9 1,900 27.0
800 11.3 2,000 28.4
900 12.8 2,100 29.8
1,000 14.2 2,115 30.0
1,100 15.6
1,200 17.0

when used with the RED(5) Drive Cylinder (FS35DC)
FS288B, FS288BV,
FS288BL, FS288BFM

Stroke = 22”
Bore = Ø3.50”
Drive Cylinder Adaptor(4):

FSDCA (reversible)

(2) - Ø1” x 15” long L-pins
APPENDIX 3B
60.0 kips

400 3.8 4,200 40.4

800 7.7 4,400 42.3
1,200 11.5 4,600 44.3
1,600 15.4 4,800 46.2
2,000 19.2 5,000 48.1
2,400 23.1 5,200 50.0
2,800 26.9 5,400 52.0
3,200 30.8 5,600 53.9
3,400 32.7 5,800 55.8
3,600 34.6 6,000 57.7
3,800 36.6 6,200 59.7
4,000 38.5 6,235 60.0
(4) Drive cylinder adaptor FSDCA is a reversible adaptor that is compatible with both PP288 and PP350 push pier systems. Assemble the
adaptor to the cylinder rod in the appropriate orientation for the corresponding pier size being installed.

when used with the GRAY(4) Drive Cylinder (FS425DC)
FS288B, FS288BV,
FS288BL, FS288BFM

Stroke = 22”
Bore = Ø4.25”
Max operating pressure = 4,000 psi

FSDCA (reversible)

APPENDIX 3B
Drive Stand Rated Drive Load(2)

56.7 kips

Pressure Force(2) Pressure Force(2)
200 2.8 2,600 36.9

400 5.7 2,800 39.7
600 8.5 3,000 42.6
800 11.3 3,200 45.4
1,000 14.2 3,300 46.8
1,200 17.0 3,400 48.2
1,400 19.9 3,500 49.7
1,600 22.7 3,600 51.1
1,800 25.5 3,700 52.5
2,000 28.4 3,800 53.9
2,200 31.2 3,900 55.3
2,400 34.0 4,000 56.7

Model 288 Crawl Space Drive Stand Specifications
when used with the SHORT RED Drive Cylinder (FS35CSDC)
FS288B, FS288BV,
FS288BL, FS288BFM
Drive Cylinder (FS35CSDC):

Stroke = 13”
Bore = Ø3.50”

FSDCA (reversible)

APPENDIX 3B
60.0 kips

400 3.8 4,200 40.4

800 7.7 4,400 42.3
1,200 11.5 4,600 44.3
1,600 15.4 4,800 46.2
2,000 19.2 5,000 48.1
2,400 23.1 5,200 50.0
2,800 26.9 5,400 52.0
3,200 30.8 5,600 53.9
3,400 32.7 5,800 55.8
3,600 34.6 6,000 57.7
3,800 36.6 6,200 59.7
4,000 38.5 6,235 60.0

when used with the RED Drive Cylinder (FS35DC)
Compatible Brackets(2,3):
FS350BV, FS400BV
Drive Cylinder (FS35DC):

Stroke = 22”
Bore = Ø3.50”
Max operating pressure = 8,000 psi
Drive Cylinder Adaptors(3):

FSDCA (reversible) with FS350BV
FSDCA400 with FS400BV

(2) - Ø3/4” grade 8 bolts with nuts
APPENDIX 3B
Drive Stand Rated Drive Load(2)

77.0 kips

Pressure Force(2) Pressure Force(2)
400 3.8 5,200 50.0

800 7.7 5,600 53.9
1,200 11.5 6,000 57.7
1,600 15.4 6,400 61.6
2,000 19.2 6,600 63.5
2,400 23.1 6,800 65.4
2,800 26.9 7,000 67.3
3,200 30.8 7,200 69.3
3,600 34.6 7,400 71.2
4,000 38.5 7,600 73.1
4,400 42.3 7,800 75.0
4,800 46.2 8,000 77.0
(3) PP350 and PP400 push pier systems require the use of different drive cylinder adaptors. Assemble the appropriate adaptor to the cylinder
rod for the corresponding pier size being installed. Also note that drive cylinder adaptor FSDCA is reversible and needs to be assembled in
the appropriate orientation when installing PP350 systems.

APPENDIX 3C
Appendix 3C
Lift Assembly Specifications

Model 238 Lift Assembly Specifications
FS238B

Stroke = 4”
Cylinder action = single
Bore = Ø2.56”

Lift Assembly
27.6 kips
APPENDIX 3C
400 2.1 3,200 16.5

800 4.1 3,400 17.5
1,200 6.2 3,600 18.6
1,400 7.2 3,800 19.6
1,600 8.3 4,000 20.6
1,800 9.3 4,200 21.7
2,000 10.3 4,400 22.7
2,200 11.3 4,600 23.7
2,400 12.4 4,800 24.8
2,600 13.4 5,000 25.8
2,800 14.4 5,200 26.8
3,000 15.5 5,350 27.6

HP238B2, HP288B2, FS288B
FS288BV, FS288BL, FS288BFM

Stroke = 4”
Bore = Ø3.50”
Lift Assembly Hardware(1,2):

Lift Assembly
39.7 kips
APPENDIX 3C

200 1.9 2,600 25.0

400 3.8 2,800 26.9
600 5.8 3,000 28.9
800 7.7 3,200 30.8
1,000 9.6 3,400 32.7
1,200 11.5 3,600 34.6
1,400 13.5 3,700 35.6
1,600 15.4 3,800 36.6
1,800 17.3 3,900 37.5
2,000 19.2 4,000 38.5
2,200 21.2 4,100 39.4
2,400 23.1 4,130 39.7
(3) Do not operate at pressures that produce lift forces in excess of the lift assembly’s rated lifting load. Max operating pressure of the lift

HP350BS, HP350B,
FS350BV, FS400BV

Stroke = 4”
Bore = Ø3.50”

Lift Assembly
56.3 kips

APPENDIX 3C
400 3.8 3,800 36.6

800 7.7 4,000 38.5
1,200 11.5 4,200 40.4
1,600 15.4 4,400 42.3
2,000 19.2 4,600 44.3
2,400 23.1 4,800 46.2
2,600 25.0 5,000 48.1
2,800 26.9 5,200 50.0
3,000 28.9 5,400 52.0
3,200 30.8 5,600 53.9
3,400 32.7 5,800 55.8
3,600 34.6 5,850 56.3

Appendix 3D
APPENDIX 3D
MODEL SPECIFICATION – HYDRAULICALLY-DRIVEN PUSH PIER SYSTEMS
Model Specification – Hydraulically-Driven
Push Pier Systems

PUSH PIER FOUNDATIONS
COMPRESSION APPLICATIONS
1 SCOPE
1.1 The work consists of designing, furnishing and installing push piers and load transfer devices
used to support compressive loads according to the project Plans and these specifications.
by, other parties such as engineers, architects, or contractors that perform services
Contractor.
1.2.2 The Pier Designer is the individual or firm generally hired by the Installing Contractor to
design the push piers.
APPENDIX 3D
1.2.3 The Installing Contractor installs and tests (if necessary) the push piers, and possibly
performs other tasks associated with the project.
1.3 The work may include push pier load testing.
necessary for the push pier installation.
replace any structures, utilities, pavements, landscaping, or other surficial improvements in the
unsafe conditions.
1.9 Unless specifically noted otherwise in the contract documents, the Owner will be responsible for
a horizontal field survey of the push pier locations prior to push pier installation and an elevation
survey to determine final structural lift subsequent to push pier installation (if necessary).
1.10 The work does not include any post-construction monitoring of pier performance unless

2 REFERENCES
Rounds and Shapes
2.2.7 ASTM D1143: Deep Foundations Under Static Axial Compressive Load
2.3 Council Evaluation Services (ICC-ES)
APPENDIX 3D
Devices
2.3.2 Acceptance Criteria 406 (AC406): Acceptance Criteria for Belled Segmented Pipe
Foundation Systems and Devices
3 DEFINITIONS
3.1 The following terms apply to push piers used to support compressive loads.
3.1.2 Bearing Stratum: The soil layer (or layers) that provide the push pier end bearing
capacity.
Rev. 10/14/16

3.1.5 External Sleeve: Hollow steel shaft section installed through the bracket assembly and
around the pier starter tube to provide additional bending strength at and directly below
the bracket.
3.1.6 Factor of Safety: The ratio of the ultimate pier capacity or nominal resistance (strength)
to the nominal or service load used in the design of any push pier component or interface
(Allowable Stress Design).
be resisted through the push piers interaction with the bearing soils (see also Ultimate
Pier Capacity).
3.1.10 Limit State: A condition beyond which a push pier component or interface becomes unfit
for service and is judged to no longer be useful for its intended function (serviceability
limit state) or to be unsafe (ultimate limit state (strength)).
APPENDIX 3D
type of failure, and uncertainty in the prediction of the load (Load and Resistance Factor
Design).
3.1.13 Load Test: A process to test the ultimate pier capacity and relation of applied load to pier
head settlement by application of a known load on the push pier head and monitoring
movement over a specific time period.
be resisted by the structural elements of a push pier.
3.1.16 Net Deflection: The total settlement at the pier head minus the theoretical elastic
deformation of the pier shaft during a load test.
wind, snow, rain, flood, and earthquakes (also referred to as service loads or working
loads).
3.1.18 Nominal Resistance: The pier capacity at a specified ultimate limit state (Load and
Resistance Factor Design). See Ultimate Pier Capacity.

member capacity at a specified strength limit state. See Ultimate Pier Capacity.
3.1.20 Pier Tube: Hollow steel shaft sections that follow the starter tube section. The pier tubes
have slip-fit internal couplings and are hydraulically advanced to the required bearing depth.
3.1.21 Push Pier System: A hydraulically-driven retrofit deep foundation that utilizes high-
strength round steel tube and a load-transfer bracket (retrofit bracket) to stabilize and/or
lift sinking or settling foundations. The system uses the weight of the structure and any
contributory soil load above the footings to create the reaction to hydraulically advance
(push) the pier tubes.
3.1.23 Safety Factor: The ratio of the ultimate pier capacity to the nominal or service load used
for the design of any push pier component or interface (Allowable Stress Design).
3.1.24 Service Load: See “Nominal Load” above.
3.1.25 Starter Tube: The lead pier tube that is hydraulically driven to the bearing stratum to
create end bearing resistance of the push pier system. The starter tube has a friction
APPENDIX 3D
reduction collar at the pier tip to create a temporary annular space between the shaft
and the surrounding soil during installation.
3.1.26 Ultimate Pier Capacity: The push pier capacity based on the least capacity determined
from applicable ultimate limit states for mechanical and geotechnical capacity.
4 APPROVED PUSH PIER MANUFACTURERS

4.1 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc., 12330 Cary Circle, Omaha, NE 68128; Phone: (800) 281-
8545; Fax: (402) 393-4002.
4.2 Due to the special requirements for design and manufacturing of push pier systems, the systems
approved equivalent product. A request to substitute any other manufactured push pier product
4.2.1 Documentation of at least five years of production experience manufacturing push piers
systems,
4.2.2 Documentation that the manufacturer’s push pier systems have been used successfully
in at least five engineered construction projects within the last three years,
project, and/or
4.2.4 Current ICC-ES or IAPMO product evaluation report or complete description of product
testing and manufacturing quality assurance programs used to assess and maintain
product quality and determine product mechanical strength and geotechnical capacity.

5.1 Push Pier System Models PP237, PP288, PP350 and PP400 manufactured in accordance with
5.2 Model PP237 Push Pier System
5.2.1 Starter and Pier Tube Sections: The central steel shaft of the starter and pier tube sections
are 2.375-inch outer diameter by 0.154-inch nominal wall thickness hollow structural
section in conformance with ASTM A500 Grade B or C with a minimum yield strength
of 60 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 70 ksi. The starter tube includes a 1.00-
inch long factory-welded friction reduction collar manufactured from 2.875-inch outer
diameter by 0.203-inch nominal wall thickness hollow structural section conforming to
ASTM A53 Grade B, Type E & S with a minimum yield strength of 35 ksi and a minimum
tensile strength of 60 ksi. The starter tube and pier tube shaft finishes are either plain
steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
5.2.2 Shaft Coupling Material: The shaft coupling material is factory crimped or plug-welded
to one end of the tube section and consists of 2.00-inch outer diameter by 0.187-inch
nominal wall thickness hollow structural section in conformance with ASTM A500 Grade
B with a minimum yield strength of 42 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 58 ksi. The
pier tube shaft coupling finish is plain steel.
APPENDIX 3D
5.2.3 External Sleeve: The central steel shaft of the external sleeve is 2.875-inch outer diameter
by 0.203-inch wall thickness hollow structural section in conformance with ASTM A500
of 70 ksi. A 0.75-inch long collar, welded to one end is manufactured with 3.375-inch
by 0.188-inch wall thickness hollow structural section conforming to ASTM A53 Grade
B, Type E & S with a minimum yield strength of 35 ksi and a minimum tensile strength
of 60 ksi. The external sleeve shaft finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A123.
5.2.4 Bracket: Retrofit bracket PP238B is suitable for use with the PP237 push pier system.
Bracket finishes are either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A123. Bracket hardware finishes are zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633.
section in conformance with ASTM A500 Grade C with a minimum yield strength of 50
ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 55 ksi. The starter tube includes a 1.00-inch long
factory-welded friction reduction collar manufactured from 3.375-inch outer diameter
by 0.188-inch nominal wall thickness hollow structural section conforming to ASTM
A53 Grade B, Type E & S with a minimum yield strength of 35 ksi and a minimum tensile
strength of 60 ksi. The starter tube and pier tube shaft finishes are triple coated in-line
galvanized.
5.3.2 Shaft Coupling Material: The shaft coupling material is factory crimped or plug-welded
to one end of the tube section and consists of 2.50-inch outer diameter by 0.180-inch
nominal wall thickness hollow structural section in conformance with ASTM A53 Grade

B, Type E & S with a minimum yield strength of 35 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of
60 ksi. The pier tube shaft coupling finish is plain steel.
Grade B or C with a minimum yield strength of 50 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of
62 ksi. A 0.75-inch long collar, welded to one end, is manufactured with 4.000-inch by
0.226 wall thickness hollow structural section conforming to ASTM A53 Grade B, Type
E & S with a minimum yield strength of 35 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 60 ksi
or the end of the external sleeve is trumpeted without a collar. The external sleeve shaft
5.3.4 Brackets: Retrofit brackets FS288B, FS288BL, FS288BV and FS288BFM are suitable for
use with the PP288 push pier system. Bracket finishes are either plain steel or hot-dip
section in conformance with ASTM A500 Grade C with a minimum yield strength of 50
ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 55 ksi. The starter tube includes a 1.00-inch long
APPENDIX 3D
factory-welded friction reduction collar manufactured from 4.00-inch outer diameter by

0.226-inch nominal wall thickness hollow structural section conforming to ASTM A53
Grade B, Type E & S with a minimum yield strength of 35 ksi and a minimum tensile
strength of 60 ksi. The starter tube and pier tube shaft finishes are triple coated in-line
galvanized and the friction reduction collar shaft finish is plain steel.
5.4.2 Shaft Coupling Material: The pier tube shaft coupling material is factory crimped or plug-
welded to one end of the pier tube section and consists of 3.125-inch outer diameter by
0.180-inch nominal wall thickness hollow structural section in conformance with ASTM
A53 Grade B, Type E & S with a minimum yield strength of 35 ksi and a minimum tensile
strength of 60 ksi. The pier tube shaft coupling finish is plain steel.
of 62 ksi. Two (2) bent steel stop plates are factory welded to one end of the external
sleeve. The plates are manufactured from 0.75-inch wide by 2.88-inch long by 0.25-
inch thick plate conforming to ASTM A36 with a minimum yield strength of 36 ksi and a
minimum tensile strength of 58 ksi. The external sleeve shaft finish is either plain steel
or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
5.4.4 Bracket: Retrofit bracket FS350BV is suitable for use with the PP350 push pier system.
The bracket finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM

section in conformance with ASTM A500 Grade B or C with a minimum yield strength
of 50 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 62 ksi. The starter tube includes a 1.00-inch
long factory-welded friction reduction collar welded to one end and is manufactured
from 4.50-inch outer diameter by 0.237-inch nominal wall thickness hollow structural
section conforming to ASTM A53 Grade B, Type E & S with a minimum yield strength of
35 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 60 ksi. The starter shaft and pier tube shafts
are either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
5.5.2 Shaft Coupling Material: The pier tube shaft coupling material is factory plug-welded to
the pier tube sections and consists of 3.50-inch outer diameter by 0.216-inch nominal
wall thickness hollow structural section in conformance with ASTM A500 Grade B with
a minimum yield strength of 42 ksi and a minimum tensile strength of 58 ksi. The pier
tube shaft coupling finish is plain steel.
5.5.3 Bracket: Retrofit bracket FS400BV is suitable for use with the PP400 push pier system.
The bracket finish is either plain steel or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM
APPENDIX 3D
6.1 Push piers shall be designed to support the nominal compressive load(s) as shown on the
project Plans.
6.2 All structural steel pier components shall be designed within the limits provided by the American
Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (AISC-360).
Either Allowable Stress Design (ASD) or Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) are
acceptable methods of analysis. Bracket testing in accordance with ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria
358 and/or Acceptance Criteria 406 may be considered as an acceptable means of establishing
system capacities.
6.3 Except where noted otherwise on the project Plans, all piers shall be installed to provide an
ultimate pier capacity based on an ASD or LRFD analysis. For ASD, a minimum factor of safety
of 1.5 applied to the service or nominal loading shall be required. Higher ASD factors of safety
may be required based on the project Plans or at the direction of the Owner. When an LRFD
analysis is required, the Owner shall provide applicable pier design information including but not
limited to; factored loads, resistance factors and/or the required ultimate pier capacity.
6.4 The required ultimate pier capacity shall be verified at each pier location by monitoring and
recording final drive forces using the installation hydraulic pressure and the effective area of the
drive cylinder. The maximum drive force shall not exceed the maximum drive force rating of the
push pier system and installation tooling.
6.5 Except where noted otherwise on the project Plans, each pier shall be designed to meet a
corrosion service life of 50 years in accordance with ICC-ES AC358 and AC406.
6.6 The pier design shall take into account pier buckling potential, soil stratification, and strain
compatibility issues.

7.1 The Installing Contractor and Pier Designer shall submit to the Owner, a proposal including the
documentation required in this Section. Work shall not begin until all the submittals have been
received and approved by the Owner. All costs associated with incomplete or unacceptable
7.2 Evidence of Installing Contractor’s competence in the installation of push piers shall be provided
to the Owner’s satisfaction and may include any or all of the following:
7.2.1 Pier manufacturer’s certificate of competency in installation of push piers,
Installing Contractor installed push piers similar to those shown in the project Plans.
can verify the Installing Contractor’s participation in those projects, and/or
7.2.3 A letter from the pier manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative expressing ability
and intent to provide on-site supervision of the pier installation.
APPENDIX 3D
discretion.
7.4 Evidence of Pier Designer’s competence shall be provided to the Owner’s satisfaction and may
include any or all of the following:
Pier Designer designed push piers similar to those shown in the project Plans. The list
shall include names and phone numbers of those project representatives who can verify
the Pier Designer’s participation in those projects, and/or
7.4.3 Recommendation from the pier manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative.
8.1 Within 2 weeks of receiving the contract award, the Installing Contractor and/or Pier Designer
shall submit the following push pier design documentation:
8.1.1 Certification from the Pier Designer that the proposed piers meet the requirements of
this specification.
8.1.2 Qualifications of the Installing Contractor and Pier Designer per Section 7.
8.1.3 Product designations for system components and ancillary products to be supplied at
each push pier location.
8.1.4 Individual pier nominal loads, factors of safety, LRFD load and resistance factors and
required ultimate pier capacities, where applicable.
8.1.5 Individual pier loading requirements (if any).

8.1.6 Manufacturer’s published allowable system capacities for the pier assemblies, including
load transfer devices.
8.1.7 Calculated mechanical and theoretical geotechnical capacity of the proposed piers.
8.1.8 Minimum final drive and lock-off force requirements.
8.1.9 Structural lift requirements, if applicable
8.1.11 Pier location tolerance requirements.
8.1.13 Copies of certified calibration reports for load test measuring equipment to be used
on the project, if applicable. The calibrations shall have been performed within one
year of the proposed starting date for push pier installation or as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer.
contract.
9 PIER INSTALLATION
APPENDIX 3D
9.1 Installing Contractor shall furnish and install all push piers per the project Plans and approved
pier design documentation. In the event of conflict between the project Plans and the approved
pier design documentation, the Installing Contractor shall not begin construction on any affected
items until such conflict has been resolved.
9.4 The portion of the construction site occupied by the Installing Contractor, his equipment and his
material stockpiles shall be kept reasonably clean and orderly.
9.5 Installation of push piers may be observed by representatives of the Owner for quality assurance
purposes. The Installing Contractor shall give the Owner at least 24 hours’ notice prior to the
pier installation operations.
9.6 The push pier installation technique shall be such that it is consistent with the geotechnical,
logistical, environmental, and load carrying conditions of the project. The push pier shall be
positioned at the appropriate site survey location as determined from the plan drawings.
9.7 Push pier installation procedures specified in the manufacturer’s technical literature and/or code
agency approved evaluation report shall be followed.

10.1 The final drive force and any required pier length and embedment depth criteria as specified
in the Pre-Construction Submittals shall be satisfied prior to terminating the pier installation.
Push pier installation will be halted if excessive lift of the structure occurs prior to reaching
the specified final drive force or pier length/depth criteria and the Owner will be notified of this
occurrence prior to continuation of the work. The Owner shall be notified in the event any push
pier fails to meet the production quality control termination criteria as specified on the Plans.
In the event that the pier does not meet the production quality control termination criteria, the
following remedies may be appropriate if approved by the Owner:
10.1.1 If the installation fails to meet the minimum final drive force criterion at the specified
embedment length:
10.1.1.1 Continue the installation to greater depths until the minimum final drive force
criterion is met, provided that, if a maximum length constraint is applicable,
continued installation does not exceed said maximum length constraint
10.1.2 If the maximum drive force rating of the push pier system is achieved prior to satisfaction
of a minimum embedment length criterion:
10.1.2.1 Terminate the installation at the depth obtained

APPENDIX 3D
10.1.2.2 Pre-drill to a depth that allows termination at or below the minimum embedment
length
the minimum final termination force criterion:
10.1.3.1 De-rate the load capacity of the push pier based on the final drive force
recorded at termination depth and install additional piers as necessary.
10.1.4 If a push pier fails a production quality control criterion as described in this Section

11.1 The Installing Contractor shall provide the Owner copies of individual push pier installation
records within 24 hours after each installation is completed. Formal copies shall be submitted
within 30 day from the completion of the push pier installation. These installation records shall
include, but are not limited to, the following information:
11.1.2 Location of push pier and pier identification number
11.1.3 Installed push pier model and configuration
11.1.4 Total length and tip depth of installed pier
11.1.5 Actual inclination of the pier
11.1.6 Hydraulic pressure reading at the end of each tube section installed

11.1.7 Final hydraulic pressure/force at the termination depth
11.1.8 Lift and/or lock-off pressure/force readings
11.1.9 Amount of lift achieved at each pier location (if applicable)
11.1.10 Calculated geotechnical capacity based on final drive and lock-off force resistance
12 FIELD COMPRESSION LOAD TESTING

12.1 If field compression load testing is required, the Installing Contractor shall furnish all labor,
equipment and pre-production push piers necessary to accomplish the testing as shown in
the approved pier design documentation. Installing Contractor shall apply the specified loads
for the specified durations and record the specified data, for the specified number of piers.
Owner. Pier testing shall be in general accordance with the ASTM D1143 quick test method and
the following criteria:
12.1.1 Failure criteria shall be determined by the Owner prior to load testing
12.1.2 The test pier shall have been installed to the required final drive force and then unloaded
prior to start of test
APPENDIX 3D
12.1.3 The reaction frame requirements in ASTM D1143 shall not apply. The test setup will
include calibrated pressure gages with a calibrated hydraulic ram installed in-line with
the bracket and pier shaft to enable using the existing structure’s weight as the reaction
force during testing.
12.1.4 An alignment load equal to 5% of the maximum anticipated test load may be applied
prior to the start of the test to take out slack in the test equipment.
12.1.5 Loading increments shall be in accordance with the ASTM D1143 quick test method
with a maximum loading increment of 5% of the maximum anticipated test load and a
minimum hold time of 4 minutes at each increment.
12.1.6 The maximum test load shall not exceed the final pier drive force determined in Section
12.1.2.
12.1.7 Upon completion of the maximum test load hold increment, the pier shall be unloaded
in 5 to 10 even increments with minimum hold times of 4 minutes at each increment
12.2 Installing Contractor shall provide the Owner, copies of raw field test data within 24 hours after
completion of each load test. Formal test reports shall be submitted within 30 days following

12.2.5 Unique test identifier and map showing the test pier location.
12.2.6 Pier model and installation information including drive pressure/force records of each
pier tube, final drive pressure/force, drive tube quantities and lengths, final pier tip
depth, installation date, and total test pier length.
12.2.7 Calibration records for applicable pier installation and test equipment
12.2.8 Tabulated test results including cumulative pier head movement, loading increments
and hold times
12.2.9 Plots showing load versus deflection for each loading/unloading interval
13 CLEANUP
APPENDIX 3D

CHAPTER 4 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL
SUPPORT PRODUCTS
4.1 - Introduction 4.2 Geo-Lock®
Foundation Supportworks’ helical foundation Wall Anchor System
systems and hydraulically-driven push pier systems
are widely-accepted, proven deep foundation 4.2.1 Summary Description
support options for both residential and commercial
loading conditions. FSI is also the manufacturer or The Geo-Lock Wall Anchor System designed
exclusive distributor of a number of other products and manufactured by Foundation Supportworks
that are more commonly marketed for and installed is a proven method to laterally support bowed,
on residential projects, yet are occasionally leaning and sheared foundation walls and
considered for commercial applications as well. retaining walls subject to unbalanced earth
pressures. Similar-type “plate anchor” systems
The Geo-Lock® Wall Anchor System, PowerBrace™ have been used successfully since the late 1970s
System and CarbonArmor® Wall Reinforcing to stabilize foundation walls and retaining walls
System are used to stabilize foundation walls against further appreciable lateral movement.
that are experiencing inward movement and/ The system consists of an earth anchor buried
or distress due to excessive lateral earth or in the ground an adequate distance from the
hydrostatic pressures generated by unbalanced structure, an interior wall plate set against the
soil conditions. The Geo-Lock wall anchor
CHAPTER 4
MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL SUPPORT PRODUCTS
wall face being supported, and an anchor rod
system is also routinely used to stabilize failing to connect the two (Figure 4.2.1.a). The passive
retaining walls. These systems may prove to be resistance of the soil in front of the earth anchor
ideal solutions for certain commercial projects resists lateral forces on the wall and further
when compared to helical tiebacks (see Section inward movement. Technical specifications for
2.8) or other proposed options because of the the Geo-Lock Wall Anchor System are included
smaller equipment/tools needed for installation, in Appendix 4A.
the ability to install the systems in areas of limited
or difficult access, and smaller penetrations or
4.2.1.1 Advantages
no penetrations needed through the walls. While
the system capacity ratings are generally better- Some of the advantages to installing Geo-Lock
suited to residential loading conditions for which wall anchors over other wall bracing systems
they were originally considered and designed, may include:
these products have all found practical uses and
applications elsewhere. • Can be installed year-round
• Most jobs completed in one day
The SmartJack® System provides supplemental • Minimal disturbance to home, lawn and
support within a crawl space. SmartJacks are landscaping
installed adjacent to existing settling columns • Can straighten walls over time (in many cases)
or along the span of sagging beams and floor • Will not damage interior flooring
joists. Again, while not used as frequently in • Easily hidden within framing of walls
commercial stabilization projects, FSI has seen
applications for SmartJacks in churches, office
buildings, and hospitals where the structure is
built on a crawl space foundation.

Miscellaneous Structural Support Products All Rights Reserved
Figure 4.2.1.a General Geo-Lock®
Wall Anchor System Arrangement
CHAPTER 4
4.2.2 Design Theory evaluations of a wall anchor system define soil

load as an equivalent fluid pressure gradient.
Wall anchor systems have been proven over the Most often about 60 psf/ft is used and sometimes
years to be both an effective and economical adjustments are made for the potential existence
repair solution. Wall anchors not only arrest of hydrostatic pressure from a water table. Soil
further appreciable inward movement of the is obviously not perfectly rigid so it will tend to
wall, but in many cases can improve the wall’s deform and migrate laterally when subjected to
position and partially or fully straighten it. In fact, the compressive forces produced by gravity.
in 1992, wall anchor systems were identified by When designing a wall, soil is placed against a
the Chief Appraiser for the U.S. Department of static structure. The soil will exert these lateral
Housing and Urban Development as the most forces produced by gravity against the wall which
effective means of stabilizing bowing foundation makes the equivalent fluid pressure method a
walls. Despite its tremendous track record, it seemingly reasonable approach. However, soil
remains, however, a system that in some ways is obviously not a fluid so when evaluating a
is misunderstood by many design professionals, system being used to actively push back against
building departments and code officials. the soil, the equivalent fluid pressure model
Why is this? Although the general concepts quickly breaks down.
about how anchor systems work are simple to This can be demonstrated in the following
grasp, detailed evaluations are more elusive example: A bowing block wall will typically
than many designers initially suspect. manifest a long horizontal crack at a mortar bed
The first and most significant misstep that is joint. The soil pressure tends to produce tensile
made is in the way the soil loads on the wall stresses on the inside face of the wall. These
are defined and quantified. Most mathematical stresses have exceeded the capacity of the

material, thus resulting in a crack. If the top and bottom and with a third “support” at the anchor
bottom of the wall are considered laterally fixed location. They then model a gradient load to
and the soil loads are modeled using equivalent represent equivalent fluid pressure. This is now a
fluid pressure, a designer could calculate how statically indeterminate structure which requires
much lateral force needs to be applied from the a more complex analysis. Unfortunately, this
interior side of the wall at the elevation of the effort is wasted for a couple of reasons. The first
crack to reverse the bending in the wall. This reason is that, as has already been discussed,
mathematically results in compressive stress the equivalent fluid pressure model will yield
on the interior face and tensile stress on the erroneous results. The second reason is that
exterior face. With compressive stress on the the load in the anchor should already be known
interior face, the horizontal crack would be because it is actually an applied force and not a
expected to close. In practice, however, if this calculated reaction. Anchors are supplied with
calculated resistance force were to be applied a threaded rod and nut with wax typically used
per the described analysis, the crack will likely as a lubricant. The nuts are tightened with a
remain. Even if this applied resistance force torque wrench to a specific torque value. This
exceeded the calculated value by several orders installed torque relates directly to tension in the
of magnitude, the crack will likely remain. What is rod. There is no need to calculate the load in
actually happening is the anchor forces applied the anchor since it is already known with the
at the interior are tending to impose translational application of torque.
displacement of the wall and the soil. The soil
Some designers recognize the wall anchors as
is resisting movement, and the force it exerts
applied forces but still find it necessary to treat
on the exterior of the wall (passive resistance)
them as calculated reactions. They are aware
increases to match the forces applied on the
CHAPTER 4
that the forces that are applied at the anchors
interior face of the wall. The equivalent fluid
are far in excess of those that will be calculated
pressure assumption has therefore led us to an
as reactions. The designer may then make a
erroneous solution.
comparative rationalization demonstrating that,
There are other phenomena that are difficult to for example, the force applied at the anchor is
explain with an equivalent fluid pressure model. twice as much as a middle support would offer
One would expect the aforementioned wall crack and therefore, the anchor system should be more
to appear at the point of maximum bending. The than adequate. Once again, the soil pressure
crack often appears at a higher elevation than the distribution exerted on the wall after the anchors
equivalent fluid pressure model would predict. are installed will bear little resemblance to an
In fact, it can be very close to the elevation of equivalent fluid pressure gradient so applying
the exterior grade. In this case, frost is often the twice as much force than a fictional calculated
culprit. Although a true water table is most often reaction value really serves no purpose.
not present, there can be significant soil moisture
near the surface. When frozen, this can exert very
large forces on the wall resulting in a horizontal
crack much higher on the wall than an equivalent
fluid pressure model would predict. These forces
are not only large, but difficult to quantify.
The second item that is often misrepresented

in analysis is the load in the anchors. Many
designers will attempt to treat the anchors as
reaction points in their analysis. They treat
the wall as being laterally fixed at the top and

4.2.3 Why It Works 4.2.4 Installation Guidelines
With all these caveats in the analysis it might Although many of the forces involved are difficult
appear that providing a plausible explanation to quantify, the successful performance of the
for why these systems are so effective would be product is undeniable. This therefore leaves us
impossible. Actually, it’s quite the opposite. Without with experience. In the following subsections, we
the discussion above, one may find it difficult to offer general installation guidelines for spacing,
understand why these systems work so well. After tightening, and depth and location of the earth
all, the wall often straightens over time when the anchor. Deviations to these guidelines may be
anchors are tightened to the recommended torque considered by a qualified design professional
and at the recommended schedule. This is a based on project-specific variables.
measurable effect. The wall is contacting a great
Literally thousands of basement walls have been
deal more soil than the earth anchors, so how is it
stabilized with these guidelines and with great
possible to straighten the wall without pulling the
results. Non-typical applications, walls that
earth anchors through the soil?
are significantly compromised, walls that have
The answer is actually quite simple. Structures evidence of shear displacement at the bottom,
with below ground basements are typically or walls that are more than 2 to 3 inches out of
constructed in areas where clay soils are present plumb should be given special consideration.
near the surface. Clay soils have cohesive
properties as well as the potential for volume 4.2.4.1 Spacing
changes with variations in moisture levels. This
means that during dry periods, the soils can shrink The designer will consider several factors when
away from the foundation wall. The cohesive providing recommendations for anchor spacing.
CHAPTER 4
properties in the soil allow it to stand on its own These factors include the wall height and thickness,
and create thin spaces between the soil and the the retained height of the backfill, and the general
foundation wall. The tension on installed anchor condition and position of the wall. One of the most
rods then decreases. This creates an opportunity common situations is for an 8-inch-thick concrete
to tighten the anchors and take advantage of the block residential basement wall that is 9 feet tall
gaps that have formed between the foundation with 8 feet of unbalanced fill. This scenario most
wall and soil. This moves the wall slightly closer commonly results in a spacing recommendation of
to a straight position. This cycle can be repeated 5 feet between anchors and 3 feet from corners.
until the desired result is achieved. This also Another common situation would be for an 8-inch-
explains why some walls will see better results thick poured concrete residential basement wall
than others. If the soil is particularly sandy, it will that is also 9 feet tall with 8 feet of unbalanced fill.
not generally be as cohesive meaning that even This scenario most commonly results in a spacing
during dry periods, the soil will not relieve the recommendation of 6 feet between anchors and
pressure on the anchors. Although wall anchor 3.5 feet from corners.
systems are still effective in arresting further
appreciable movement in these types of soils, 4.2.4.2 Torque Recommendations
the likelihood that the position of the wall will
improve is reduced. Torque applied to the nuts during the tightening
process of the wall anchor system correlates
The most important functional consideration
directly to tension in the rod and force applied to
for an “active” resistance system such as earth
the wall. FSI recommends that applied torque not
anchors is to provide steady, constant pressure
exceed 80 foot-pounds (ft-lb) for block walls and
to the wall during the wall straightening process.
90 ft-lb for poured concrete walls. These torque
values assume that FSI Anchor Wax is applied

to the threads on the rod which significantly 4.2.4.3 Depth and Location of Earth
reduces friction between the rod and nut and
Anchor
results in a higher applied force than nuts
tightened to similar torque in a dry condition. The The Geo-Lock Wall Anchor System is designed
average applied force noted in Figure 4.2.4.2.a with two (2) ¾-inch diameter, 80-inch long all-
was generated from dozens of test samples with thread rods coupled together. This total rod length
testing completed at an independent test facility. of 13 feet 4 inches allows the earth anchor to be
Due to product variations, these values should approximately 12 feet from the stabilized wall, far
only be considered applicable to products enough to prevent load from the anchor being
supplied by Foundation Supportworks. transferred back to the wall. Considering the
backfill height, the vertical placement of the earth
Average Applied Force (lb)
anchor, and a range of soil types and strengths,
Applied Torque
(ft-lb) Waxed the coupled rod length of 13 feet 4 inches would
Dry Condition
Condition be adequate for typical applications with backfill
80 11,900 6,100 heights up to about 8 feet. Additional all-thread
90 12,900 6,900 rod sections can easily be added as necessary
Figure 4.2.4.2.a Average applied force on the anchor rod versus for backfill heights greater than 8 feet.
applied torque on the anchor rod nut
The following tables provide the horizontal
Installers shall closely monitor the tightening location of the earth anchor from the exterior face
process of the wall anchor installation and of the foundation wall (Ah) and the earth anchor
reduce the applied torque as necessary for depths (Avt and Avb) considering a variety of soil
atypical conditions. conditions. Refer to Figure 4.2.1.a when using
CHAPTER 4
these tables. One quickly observes that soil type
has little effect and changes Ah and Avb only
slightly. Rather, values of Ah and Avb are driven
more by minimum depth criteria and geometry.
Soil Description: Medium Dense Sand and Gravel

Internal angle of friction (Φ) = 34 degrees
“Ah” Minimum Required Horizontal Location to Anchor (ft)
“Pv” Depth Below 1 2 3 4 5

Grade to Center of Anchor Size Anchor Size Anchor Size Anchor Size Anchor Size
Wall Plate (ft)
Small Med/Lrg Small Med/Lrg Small Med/Lrg Small Med/Lrg Small Med/Lrg
10 12.2 13.0 12.2 13.0 13.0 13.8 14.9 15.7 16.8 17.5
9 11.7 12.5 11.7 12.5 12.5 13.2 14.4 15.1
“F” Unbalanced
Fill Depth (ft)
8 11.2 11.9 11.2 11.9 11.9 12.7 13.8 14.6

7 10.6 11.4 10.6 11.4 11.4 12.2
6 10.1 10.9 10.1 10.9 10.9 11.7
5 9.6 10.3 9.6 10.3
4 9.0 9.8 9.0 9.8
3 8.5 9.3
“Avb & Avt” Minimum Required Depths Below Grade to Anchor (ft)
Bottom - Avb: 3.7 4.1 3.7 4.1 4.1 4.5 5.1 5.5 6.1 6.5
Top - Avt: Depth as needed to prevent frost effects

Soil Description: Loose Sand and Gravel

Wall Plate (ft)
10 12.1 12.8 12.1 12.8 12.9 13.6 14.6 15.3 16.3 17.0
9 11.6 12.3 11.6 12.3 12.3 13.0 14.0 14.7
“F” Unbalanced
Fill Depth (ft)
8 11.0 11.7 11.0 11.7 11.7 12.4 13.4 14.1

7 10.4 11.1 10.4 11.1 11.1 11.8
6 9.8 10.5 9.8 10.5 10.5 11.3
5 9.2 10.0 9.2 10.0
4 8.7 9.4 8.7 9.4
3 8.1 8.8
Bottom - Avb: 3.7 4.1 3.7 4.1 4.1 4.5 5.1 5.5 6.1 6.5
Soil Description: Silt, Silty/Clayey Sand and Gravel

CHAPTER 4

Wall Plate (ft)
10 12.1 12.8 12.1 12.8 12.8 13.5 14.4 15.1 16.0 16.7
9 11.5 12.2 11.5 12.2 12.2 12.8 13.8 14.4
“F” Unbalanced
Fill Depth (ft)
8 10.9 11.5 10.9 11.5 11.5 12.2 13.1 13.8

7 10.2 10.9 10.2 10.9 10.9 11.6
6 9.6 10.3 9.6 10.3 10.3 11.0
5 9.0 9.7 9.0 9.7
4 8.4 9.0 8.4 9.0
3 7.7 8.4
Bottom - Avb: 3.7 4.1 3.7 4.1 4.1 4.5 5.1 5.5 6.1 6.5

Soil Description: Silty Clay, Clay with Sand

Wall Plate (ft)
10 12.3 12.9 12.3 12.9 12.9 13.5 14.3 14.8 15.6 16.2
9 11.6 12.2 11.6 12.2 12.2 12.7 13.5 14.1
“F” Unbalanced
Fill Depth (ft)
8 10.9 11.4 10.9 11.4 11.4 12.0 12.8 13.4

7 10.1 10.7 10.1 10.7 10.7 11.3
6 9.4 10.0 9.4 10.0 10.0 10.6
5 8.7 9.2 8.7 9.2
4 8.0 8.5 8.0 8.5
3 7.2 7.8
Bottom - Avb: 3.7 4.1 3.7 4.1 4.1 4.5 5.1 5.5 6.1 6.5
Soil Description: Saturated Clay Soils

CHAPTER 4

Wall Plate (ft)
10 13.7 14.1 13.7 14.1 14.1 14.7 15.1 15.5 16.1 16.5
9 12.7 13.1 12.7 13.1 13.1 13.7 14.1 14.5
“F” Unbalanced
Fill Depth (ft)
8 11.7 12.1 11.7 12.1 12.1 12.7 13.1 13.5

7 10.7 11.1 10.7 11.1 11.1 11.7
6 9.7 10.1 9.7 10.1 10.1 10.7
5 8.7 9.1 8.7 9.1
4 7.7 8.1 7.7 8.1
3 6.7 7.1
Bottom - Avb: 3.7 4.1 3.7 4.1 4.1 4.5 5.1 5.5 6.1 6.5

4.2.5 Installation Steps Step 3 – Earth anchor is placed in the augered hole
and attached to the anchor rod (Figure 4.2.5.a3).
The following steps provide a broad overview
of a typical Geo-Lock Wall Anchor System
installation. Intermediate steps, installation
equipment and tools used, and considerations
for unusual conditions or applications are not
addressed.
Step 1 – Sod is carefully removed and a hole is

excavated or augered (Figure 4.2.5.a1). The front
face of the hole (toward structure) is cut flat to
accept the earth anchor.
CHAPTER 4
Figure 4.2.5.a3
Step 4 - Interior wall plate is positioned over the

anchor rod and tightened to the specified torque,
seating the earth anchor and engaging the
Figure 4.2.5.a1
passive resistance of the soils (Figure 4.2.5.a4).
Step 2 – A small 1 1/8-inch hole is drilled through
the basement wall and the anchor rod is driven out
to penetrate the augered hole (Figure 4.2.5.a2).
Figure 4.2.5.a2 Figure 4.2.5.a4

Step 5 - Augered hole is backfilled and compacted 4.2.5.1 Solutions for Extreme Wall
and the sod is replaced (Figure 4.2.5.a5).
Problems
An owner may wish to have a basement wall or

retaining wall straightened immediately, rather
than follow the periodic tightening procedure.
The soil behind the wall must then be completely
removed down to the footing. With the soil load
temporarily removed, the wall can be straightened.
The Geo-Lock system then stabilizes the wall
against future inward movement. See Figures
4.2.5.1.a1 and 4.2.5.1.a2.
Figure 4.2.5.a5
Step 6 - Anchors can be tightened at specified

intervals to straighten wall over time, if desired
(Figure 4.2.5.a6). Tightening of the anchors
CHAPTER 4
generally occurs during drier seasons of the
year when there is less pressure on the wall and
shrinkage gaps may have formed between the Figure 4.2.5.1.a1 Before: Poured concrete
basement wall severely leaning in at the top
wall and the soil.
Figure 4.2.5.1.a2 After: Wall is immediately returned to original straight

position after backfill soil is removed and Geo-Lock anchors installed
Block walls in later stages of distress may

show inward shear movement at the bottom
Figure 4.2.5.a6 of the wall. The bottom row of the block wall is
restrained by the basement floor slab while the
wall section above continues to deflect inward.
The movement at the mortar joint between

the first and second courses of block is often
obvious and measureable. In order to recover this
movement and straighten the wall, the backfill
soil must again be completely excavated down to
the footing. The base of the wall is pushed back
and Geo-Lock wall anchors are installed (Figures
4.2.5.1.b1 and 4.2.5.1.b2). In circumstances such
as these, the interior wall plate of the Geo-Lock
system is often replaced with a steel channel
connected to the anchor rod and bolted to the
concrete floor (Figure 4.2.5.1.b3).
CHAPTER 4
Figure 4.2.5.1.b1 Before: Shear movement

of a block wall evident from exterior
Figure 4.2.5.1.b2 After: Shear movement recovered and Figure 4.2.5.1.b3 Geo-Lock channel anchor
wall stabilized with Geo-Lock anchors system installed to prevent shear movement

4.2.5.2 Hide-A-Way®
Wall Anchor Cover
An optional final step of installation is to

install Hide-A-Way Wall Anchor Covers. These
covers are ideal for those situations where the
customer has a finished basement but would
like to have continued access to the Geo-Lock
system for tightening and wall straightening
over time. The cover conceals the anchor, but
then allows for easy access (Figures 4.2.5.2.a1,
4.2.5.2.a2 and 4.2.5.2.a3).
Figure 4.2.5.2.a1 Geo-Lock wall anchor installed through Figure 4.2.5.2.a2 Frame for Hide-A-Way
drywall penetration and between wood studs cover installed around drywall opening
CHAPTER 4
Figure 4.2.5.2.a3 Hide-A-Way

wall anchor cover installed

4.3 PowerBrace™ System steps, installation equipment and tools used,
considerations for obstructions along the wall,
and considerations for variable joist details
4.3.1 Summary Description are not addressed. It is critical that adequate
The PowerBrace ™ System is designed blocking be installed along and between floor
and manufactured by PowerBrace, LLC to joists supporting the first floor so loads are
laterally support bowed, leaning and sheared adequately and effectively transferred into
foundation walls. The system has been used the floor system without damage. Contact
for over a decade with thousands of successful PowerBrace, LLC at (800) 556-5697 with technical
installations throughout the United States questions and for a copy of the manufacturer’s
and Canada. The PowerBrace™ System is a installation guidelines.
patented system that, when installed properly, Step 1 – Measure from the top of the basement
will not only stabilize foundation walls against slab to 1 inch from the underside of the first
further appreciable lateral movement, but floor. Cut the PowerBrace™ beam to this length
also in many cases will improve the wall’s (Figure 4.3.2.a1).
position over time. A steel beam is positioned
against the foundation wall and braced at the
top and bottom with brackets. The bottom
angle bracket is bolted to the concrete floor.
The adjustable top bracket is connected to
the joists supporting the floor system above
(See Figure 4.3.1.a). Technical specifications
and spacing guidelines for the PowerBrace ™
CHAPTER 4
System can be found in Appenix 4B.
4.3.2 Installation Steps

The following steps provide a broad overview for
a typical PowerBrace™ installation. Intermediate Figure 4.3.2.a1
Figure 4.3.2.a1
Rendering of PowerBrace™ installation

Step 2 – The top bracket is attached to the floor Step 4 – The bottom bracket is positioned at
joist and the top of the beam is positioned within the bottom of the beam and anchored to the
the bracket (Figure 4.3.2.a2). Install blocking concrete floor (Figure 4.3.2.a4).
along and within floor joists in accordance with
the manufacturer’s installation guidelines.
Figure 4.3.2.a4
Step 5 – The PowerBrace™ System can be

tightened over time for possible wall improvement
(Figure 4.3.2.a5).
Figure 4.3.2.a2
CHAPTER 4
Step 3 – PowerBrace™ beam is plumbed
(Figure 4.3.2.a3).

4.4 CarbonArmor® Wall used in conjunction with concrete substrates,
like basement walls, significant increases to
Reinforcing System both structural integrity and load capacity can
be achieved (Figure 4.4.1.a).
4.4.1 Summary Description
The materials used in the CarbonArmor system
Foundation Supportworks offers high-strength achieve the highest strength-per-ply available,
fiber-reinforced polymer (FRP) composite and are supported by the most extensive
materials to reinforce concrete block and application and durability testing in the industry.
poured concrete foundation walls. These The CarbonArmor Wall Reinforcing System is
high-strength composite systems effectively a proven method to laterally support bowing
combine the benefits of epoxies and high- foundation walls. Technical specifications and
strength carbon fibers to create materials that spacing recommendations are included in
are both extremely reliable and versatile. When Appendix 4C.
CHAPTER 4
Figure 4.4.1.a
Rendering of CarbonArmor® installation with optional ArmorLock™ connection to rim joist

4.4.1.1 Advantages Step 2 – Measure the wall and cut strap to
proper length (Figure 4.4.2.a2).
• Ideal to reinforce the inside face of block walls
and prevent further bowing in the middle
• Optional ArmorLock™ system resists
movement at the top of the wall
• Flexible material allows the strap to contour
tight against the wall
• May be installed around obstructions on the
wall such as piping, electric conduit and HVAC
ductwork
• Completed installations are suitable for painting
• Low profile system can be concealed by wall
framing
4.4.2 Installation Steps

Step 1 – Prepare the wall surface for the
CarbonArmor strap. Concrete surfaces must be
structurally sound and free from contaminants
such as dust, dirt, or oil. Surfaces must be
mechanically abraded to remove protrusions
Figure 4.4.2.a2
from the wall that may trap air behind the
installed CarbonArmor strap (Figure 4.4.2.a1).
CHAPTER 4
Step 3 – Thorough and complete mixing of
the epoxy is critical for the performance of the
product. Mix with a wooden paint stirrer for
at least two minutes until a consistent color is
achieved. Scrape the mixing container sides and
bottom and mix until no stripes, streaks or color
variations are visible. Do not mix more material
than may be applied within 30 minutes. Apply
mixed resin to the prepared surface using the
roller provided (Figure 4.4.2.a3).

Step 4 - Completely saturate the CarbonArmor 4.4.2.1 ArmorLock™ System
strap with epoxy resin (Figure 4.4.2.a4).
The optional ArmorLock™ bracket and FRP
system essentially splices with CarbonArmor
straps to extend reinforcement to the building’s
rim joist framing. ArmorLock provides additional
reinforcement and stabilization in situations where
either movement is observed at the top of the wall,
or the owner wishes to prevent such movement.
Step 1 - Bracket is secured to the rim joist with

heavy-duty lag screws (Figure 4.4.2.1.a1).
Figure 4.4.2.a4
Step 5 – Adhere the CarbonArmor strap to the

wall (Figure 4.4.2.a5).
Figure 4.4.2.1.a1
Step 2 – ArmorLock strap is saturated with

CHAPTER 4
epoxy resin (Figure 4.4.2.1.a2).
Figure 4.4.2.a5
Step 6 – Apply a final topcoat of epoxy. Use the

provided roller to apply pressure to the surface
Figure 4.4.2.1.a2
of the fabric to ensure good bonding to the wall
and to roll out any trapped air before the epoxy Step 3 – ArmorLock system is connected to
sets (Figure 4.4.2.a6). the bracket and tensioned into position (Figure
4.4.2.1.a3).
Figure 4.4.2.a6 Figure 4.4.2.1.a3

Step 4 – Strap is adhered to the prepared foundation Step 6 – Installation of CarbonArmor Wall
wall (Figure 4.4.2.1.a4). See Step 1 of Section 4.4.2 Reinforcing System with optional ArmorLock
for wall preparation recommendations. system complete (Figure 4.4.2.1.a6).
CHAPTER 4
Figure 4.4.2.1.a4 Figure 4.4.2.1.a6
Step 5 – CarbonArmor strap is installed over

and bonded to the ArmorLock by saturating 4.4.2.2 Special Installation
both with epoxy (Figure 4.4.2.1.a5). Considerations
• Do not apply to concrete less than 30 days old.

• Do not apply to concrete with curing or sealing
membranes.
• Do not apply to concrete with a surface
temperature less than 45°F.
• Do not thin epoxy with solvent.
• High temperature environments may require
a special hardener selection. Consult with a
FSI representative for recommendations in
these situations.
Figure 4.4.2.1.a5

4.5 SmartJack® System steel tube, threaded rod and top plate (Figure
4.5.1.a). A concrete footing could be considered
in lieu of, or as a partial replacement for, the
4.5.1 Summary Description cube of crushed stone. The crushed stone not
The Foundation Supportworks SmartJack is a only absorbs and dissipates the structural loads
supplemental support system most commonly to the surrounding soils, but it also allows for
used for crawl space applications. The SmartJack SmartJack installation to often be completed
effectively supports sagging beams and floor in one day. Model 288 (2.875-inch O.D. tube)
joists caused by: and Model 350 (3.50-inch O.D. tube) SmartJack
technical specifications and design guides are
• length of span greater than spanning capability included in Appendix 4D.
of the members,
• floor load added after construction exceeding
4.5.1.1 Advantages
design values, and
• weakening of members over time due to high • Installs in tight conditions where height or
moisture and rot. access is limited
• Crushed stone footing “system” effectively
The SmartJack may also be used as a
transfers load to existing soils
supplemental column support where an existing
• Can usually be installed in less than one day
column and pier foundation has settled. The
• Immediate stabilization and results
system generally consists of a two-foot square
• Can be installed in conjunction with a crawl
by two-foot deep excavation backfilled with
space liner
crushed stone, a precast concrete footing, round
CHAPTER 4
Figure 4.5.1.a
Rendering of SmartJacks providing supplemental support for a beam in a crawl space

4.5.2 Installation Steps Step 3 – Galvanized steel tube is cut to the
appropriate length (Figure 4.5.2.a3).
The following steps provide a broad overview
of a typical SmartJack system installation.
Intermediate steps, installation equipment and
tools used, and considerations for unusual
conditions or applications are not addressed.
Step 1 – Two-foot cube of soil is excavated

and backfilled with compacted crushed stone
(Figure 4.5.2.a1).
Figure 4.5.2.a3
Step 4 – Steel column and components are

assembled and connected to the beam or floor
joists (Figure 4.5.2.a4).
CHAPTER 4
Figure 4.5.2.a1
Step 2 – Pre-cast concrete or cast-in-place

footing installed above the crushed stone
(Figure 4.5.2.a2).

Step 5 – SmartJack System is tightened in
place, stabilizing the beams and potentially
lifting the above floors and walls back toward
level (Figure 4.5.2.a5). The excavation can be
made deeper to set the pre-cast footing below
grade and then cover it with crushed stone.
Figure 4.5.2.a5
CHAPTER 4
Step 6 – SmartJack System can be installed

in conjunction with a crawl space liner (Figure
Figure 4.5.2.a6
4.5.2.a6).

Appendix 4A
APPENDIX 4A
GEO-LOCK® WALL ANCHOR SYSTEM
Geo-Lock® Wall Anchor System

Geo-Lock® WALL ANCHOR SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
Plate Steel:
ASTM A1011 C1008-C1010, 10 gauge plate
embossed with two (2) longitudinal ribs.
Wall Plates: Standard Wall Plate Detail

Two sizes: 12” x 18” and 12” x 28”
Earth Plates:
Fabricated from two wall plates
welded in a cross pattern. One inch
on each end of wall plates are bent
90 degrees. Three sizes: 16” x 16”,
16” x 26”, and 26” x 26”.
All-Thread Rod:
Medium Carbon Steel. Tensile strength = 85
ksi (min.), ¾ - 10 UNC 2A, 80” long
(assembly consists of two rods). Allowable
tensile capacity = 14 kips.
Alternate Channel Detail
Rod Coupler:
AISI 1144 Yield strength = 100 ksi
(min.), Tensile strength = 115 ksi (min.)
¾ - 10 UNC 2B, oversized tap, 3” long x
0.984” diameter.
APPENDIX 4A
GEO-LOCK® WALL ANCHOR SYSTEM
Termination Hardware:
SAE J995 Grade 2 heavy square nuts
¾ - 10 UNC 2B, oversized tap.
Finish:
All components are hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A123 or ASTM A153.
Alternate Wall Bracing Detail:

C6 x 8.2 steel channel, ASTM A36.
Channel secured at base with steel bracket
or cast into concrete. Bracket is 3.75” x
1.75” x 0.25” thick x 4.5” long bent plate,
ASTM A36, with (2) Ø0.875 holes.
(2) Ø0.75” x 2.5” sleeve anchors.
1. Installation of any tieback or anchor system in potential landslide or hillside creep soils should be designed by a professional engineer.
2. Refer to Section 4.2.4 of the FSI Technical Manual for recommendations on anchor spacing, depth and location of earth plate, and installation
torque.

Appendix 4B
APPENDIX 4B
POWERBRACE™ SYSTEM
PowerBrace™ System

PowerBrace™ System
Technical Specifications & Spacing Guidelines
Steel Beam:
S4x7.7 ASTM A572 Grade 50 with length of 8 or 9 feet.
Top Bracket Assembly:

3/8” ASTM A36 L-shaped bent plate 3.50” x 3.50” x 5” long
with holes for bracket hardware field cut to length.
2.50” long ASTM A36 bent plate beam capture
(1) - Ø1” x 5” long ASTM A307 bolt with nut
(2) - Ø3/4” x 3” long ASTM A307 bolts with nuts and washers
Top assembly also available as a larger bracket with 4 bolts instead of 2.
Bottom Bracket Assembly:

1/4” ASTM A36 L-shaped bent plate 2.50” x 1.75” x 5.50” long
with holes for bracket hardware.
(2) - Ø3/4” Red Head Dynabolt sleeve anchor with effective length = 2.50”
Surface Finish:
All components of the bracket assemblies and the steel beam are electrozinc plated per ASTM B633.
Wall Height (ft.)
4 5 6 7 8 9
APPENDIX 4B
POWERBRACE™ SYSTEM
4 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0
Unbalanced fill Height (ft.)
5 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.5 5.0
6 6.0 5.5 5.0 4.5
7 5.0 4.5 4.0
8 4.0 3.5
9 3.0
1. Maximum recommended spacing from corners is 2 feet.
2. Spacing could be less than listed in the above chart based on the condition of the wall and severity of wall displacement.
3. Because variations in building design and construction materials are common, PowerBrace™ applications should be reviewed by a qualified
professional.
4. Torque applied to the adjustment bolt at the top bracket should not exceed 45 ft-lb.
Rev. 8/03/16

Appendix 4C
CarbonArmor® Wall Reinforcing System
APPENDIX 4C
CARBONARMOR® WALL REINFORCING SYSTEM

Technical Specifications of Carbon Composite
Tensile Strength:
Design Value = 121.7 ksi, Test method in accordance with ASTM D3039
Modulus of Elasticity:
Design Value = 10,401.7 ksi, Test method in accordance with ASTM D3039
Effective Ply Thickness:

0.062 inches
Strap Width:
7 inches

Technical Specifications of Saturant Epoxy
Tensile Strength:
9-10 ksi
Tensile Modulus:
441.7 ksi
Elongation at Break Percentage:

4.99%
Flexural Strength:
417.1 ksi
APPENDIX 4C
Note: Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for the
CarbonArmor™ carbon fabric, saturating resin and saturating
hardener are available upon request. Rendering of the CarbonArmor® system
installed within a basement
Spacing Recommendations:
CarbonArmor® spacing tables have been determined with consideration for the recommendations of ACI 440, design
calculations, and current industry state of practice. The carbon straps are to be installed per the installation instructions and
must be the full height of the wall.
8” Masonry Block Wall Height (ft.)
5 6 7 8 9 10
5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0

6 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
7 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5
8 3.5 3.0 2.5
9 2.5 2.5
10 2.5
Rev. 5/26/16

10” Masonry Block Wall Height (ft.)
5 6 7 8 9 10
5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0

6 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
7 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.5
8 4.0 3.5 3.5
9 3.0 2.5
10 2.5
8” Concrete Wall Height (ft.)
5 6 7 8 9 10
5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0

6 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
7 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
8 5.0 5.0 5.0
9 5.0 4.5
10 3.5
APPENDIX 4C
10” Concrete Wall Height (ft.)
5 6 7 8 9 10
5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0

6 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
7 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
8 5.0 5.0 5.0
9 5.0 5.0
10 4.5
1. Maximum recommended spacing from corners is 3 feet but should also not exceed the spacing of the interior straps.
2. Spacing could be less than listed in the above chart based on the condition of the wall and the severity of wall displacement.
Rev. 1/15/16

Appendix 4D
SmartJack® Systems
APPENDIX 4D
SMARTJACK® SYSTEMS

Model 288 SmartJack® System
Typical Crawlspace Detail Detail Variations
APPENDIX 4D
SMARTJACK® SYSTEMS
Technical Specifications
SJ288TP (Top Plate): SJ288TBBS4, SJTBTS4

1/4” x 4.00” x 4.00” ASTM A 36 plate with (PowerBrace™ Bracket):
Ø1.500” x 0.250” wall x 1.375” long ASTM A53 For use in combination with PowerBrace™ beams.
Grade B confining ring. (2) - 3/8” x 4.50” x 5.00” ASTM A36 plates,
Allowable compression with sawn lumber girder = 4.2 k Ø1.500” x 0.250” wall x 1.375” long ASTM A53 Grade B
Allowable compression with structural steel girder = (will confining ring, (4) - Ø 1/2” x 5.50” bolts with nuts.
not govern) Allowable compression = 8.3 k
SJ288TPS4 (Top Plate): SJ100ATR (All-Thread Rod):

For use in combination with PowerBrace™ beams Ø1” x 8” long ASTM A 108 Grade 1018 all-thread rod with
3/16” x 3.00” x 6.00” ASTM A36 bent plate with welded heavy hex nut. Yield strength = 70 ksi (min.), tensile
Ø1.500” x 0.250” wall x 1.375” long ASTM A53 strength = 85 ksi (min.).
Grade B confining ring. Allowable compression for system heights up to 9 feet = 11.0 k
Allowable compression = (will not govern)
Rev. 1/15/16

SJ288TI (Threaded Insert): SJ288BP (Bottom Plate):
Ø3.00” OD x 1.00” thick machined and tapped insert, 1/4” x 3.50” square ASTM A36 plate and HSS
ASTM A108 Grade 1018. Yield strength = 56 ksi (min.), 2.00 x 2.00 x 0.25 tube x 0.75” long ASTM A5 on Grade B.
tensile strength = 90 ksi (min.). Allowable compression (when used against concrete with
Allowable compression for system heights up to 9 feet = (will minimum f’c = 2,500 psi) = 10.7 k
not govern)
Precast Concrete Footing:
SJ288T36, SJ288T60, SJ288T84 (Tube): Typical base dimensions approx. 12” x 12”. Exact
Ø2.875” OD x 0.165” wall x 36”, 60”, or 84” long field dimensions and capacities vary with manufacturer. Item
cut to length, ASTM A500 Grade C triple-coated in-line purchased at local building supply center.
galvanized. Yield strength = 50 ksi (min.),
tensile strength = 55 ksi (min.).
Allowable compression for system heights up to 9 feet = 11.0 k
SJAFT6 (Cast Aluminum Base):

0.85” x 12.00” square AISI/AA 356.0-T6 cast aluminum.
Yield strength = 20.0 ksi (min),
tensile strength = 30.0 ksi (min.).
Allowable compression = 8.0 k
Allowable Capacity
The allowable system compression capacity of the assembled 288 SmartJack® system is limited to the least
value of the component capacities used in the system assembly. The component capacities are listed in the
technical specifications section.
The allowable load applied to the SmartJack® system may be limited by the bearing capacity
of the existing soil. The well-compacted crushed stone or recycled concrete base is a proven
method to increase support for the higher bearing pressure condition immediately below the cast
aluminum base or the concrete footing, and then to absorb and distribute lower pressures to the
existing soils. Should settlement of the SmartJack® system occur, adjustments are made easily by
APPENDIX 4D
SMARTJACK® SYSTEMS
extending the all-thread rod.
The SmartJack® is designed to support axial compression loads only. The SmartJack® should
not be used in applications where the system is intended to resist lateral loads.
Corrosion Protection
The tube steel used for the SmartJack® is manufactured with a triple-layer, in-line galvanized coating.
This coating process consists of: (1) a uniform hot-dip zinc galvanizing layer; (2) an intermediate
conversion coating to inhibit the formation of white rust and enhance corrosion resistance; and (3) a
clear organic top coating to further enhance appearance and durability. The inside of the pier tube
also has a zinc-rich coating.
The cast aluminum base is far less susceptible to corrosion than the steel components that
surround it. There are, however, chlorides in some concrete that can be reactive with aluminum. It
is recommended that a 20 mil x 16” square inert membrane be placed under the aluminum base to
seperate it from recycled or poured concrete. Crushed limestone or other crushed stone alternatives
do not have similar considerations.
The remaining steel components of the SmartJack® system come standard as electrozinc plated per
ASTM B633.
Rev. 1/15/16

Design Example
Step 1 - Determine the load which will be supported by the girder in pounds per linear foot:
Girder Load (plf) = (Span 1 (ft) + Span 2 (ft)) x Floor Load (psf) ÷ 2
Note 1: Typical residential wood-framed construction may have an approximate floor load (dead
load + live load) = 55 psf
Note 2: This equation assumes a floor system which does not support any load bearing walls or
columns.
Step 2 - Determine the load on the SmartJacks® by multiplying the calculated Girder Load (plf) by the
spacing of the SmartJacks®:
APPENDIX 4D
SMARTJACK® SYSTEMS
SmartJack Load (lbs) = Girder Load (plf) x SmartJack® Spacing (ft)
Step 3 - Verify that the calculated SmartJack® load is less than the allowable capacity provided by the
various system components as well as the well-compacted crushed stone base and the bearing soils.
Note 3: Without a detailed soil investigation, typical installations should assume no more than
1,500 psf allowable soil bearing pressure. This would equate to an allowable soil capacity of
6,000 lbs for a 2’x2’ poured concrete footing or a 2’ cube of well-compacted crushed stone.
Extremely soft soils may prohibit the use of a crushed stone base or require that a larger poured
concrete footing be utilized.
Step 4 - Size the new girder by entering the following table with both the SmartJack® Spacing (ft)
and the calculated Girder Load (plf). Choose a girder that has an Allowable Load (plf) greater than the
calculated Girder Load (plf).
Rev. 9/23/15

Girder Allowable Load (plf)(1,2,3)
Girder Size SmartJack®
4 ft 5 ft 6 ft 7 ft 8 ft
Spacing
(3) – 2 x 8 1,170 750 520 380 290
(3) – 2 x 10 1,760 1,120 780 570 440

Sawn
(3) – 2 x 12 2,360 1,510 1,050 770 590
Lumber(4)
(1) – 4 x 6 850 550 380 280 210
(1) – 6 x 6 1,030 660 460 330 250
Engineered
3.5 x 5.5 1,250 740 420 270 180
Lumber(5)
S4 x 7.7
(PowerBrace™ 3,780 2,070 1,200 750 500
Beam)
Structural W4 x 13 6,820 3,850 2,240 1,400 940

Steel(6) 5,190 2,650 1,530 960 640
HSS 4 x 4 x 1/4
HSS 4 x 2 x 1/4
(Lying Flat in Plank 990 500 290 180 120
Orientation)
(1) This table makes no evaluation of the components of the existing structure.
(2) Allowable loads in this table assume the girder is sufficiently restrained against lateral torsional buckling at an interval equal to or less than
the SmartJack® spacing.
(3) The new girder may be cantilevered over the end support by a distance of 30 inches or by a distance of approximately 40% of the adjacent
SmartJack® spacing, whichever is less.
(4) Sawn lumber is assumed to be Douglas Fir Larch - No. 2 or better.
(5) Engineered lumber is assumed to be iLevel 1.3E TimberStrand LSL or equivalent.

APPENDIX 4D
SMARTJACK® SYSTEMS
(6) Structural steel is assumed to be ASTM A572 Grade 50 or equivalent for wide flange shapes, and ASTM A500 Grade B or equivalent for
HSS tube shapes.
Step 5 - If the required girder size is undesirable, adjust spacing of the SmartJacks® and return to
Step 2.
Rev. 9/23/15

Model 350 SmartJack® System
Typical Crawlspace Detail Detail Variations
APPENDIX 4D
SMARTJACK® SYSTEMS
Technical Specifications SJ350TBBS4, SJTBTS4
(PowerBrace™ Bracket):
SJ350TP (Top Plate): For use in combination with PowerBrace™ beams.
1/2” x 5.00” x 6.00” ASTM A36 plate with (2) - 3/8” x 4.50” x 5.00” ASTM A36 plates,
Ø1.750” x 0.250” wall x 1.375” long Ø1.750” x 0.250” wall x 1.375” long
ASTM A53 Grade B confining ring. ASTM A53 Grade B confining ring,
Allowable compression with sawn lumber girder = 10.8 k (4) - Ø 1/2” x 5.50” bolts with nuts.
Allowable compression with structural steel girder = (will Allowable compression = 8.3 k
not govern)
SJ125ATR (All-Thread Rod):
SJ350TPS4 (Top Plate): Ø1-1/4” diameter x 10” long ASTM A108
For use in combination with PowerBrace™ beams Grade 1018 all-thread rod with welded heavy hex nut.
3/16” x 3.00” x 6.00” ASTM A36 bent plate with Yield strength = 70 ksi (min.), tensile strength = 85 ksi (min.).
Ø1.750” x 0.250” wall x 1.375” long Allowable compression for system heights up to 9 feet = 20.0 k
ASTM A53 Grade B confining ring.
Allowable compression = (will not govern)
Rev. 1/15/16

SJ350TI (Threaded Insert): Typical Basement Detail
Ø3.500” x 1.00” thick machined and tapped insert,
ASTM A108 Grade 1018.
Yield strength = 56 ksi (min.), tensile strength = 90 ksi (min.).
Allowable compression for system heights up to 9 feet = (will
not govern)
SJ350T36, SJ350T60,
SJ350T84, SJ350T108, SJXT350T108 (Tube):
Ø3.500” x 0.165” wall x 36”, 60”, 84”, or 108” long,
field cut to length, ASTM A500 Grade C
triple-coated in-line galvanized.
Yield strength = 50 ksi (min.), tensile strength = 55 ksi (min.).
Allowable compression for system heights up to 9 feet = 20.0 k
SJAFTG (Cast Aluminum Base):

0.85” x 12.00” square AISI/AA 356.0-T6
cast aluminum. Yield strength = 20.0 ksi (min),
tensile strength = 30.0 ksi (min.).
Allowable compression = 8.0 k
SJ350BP (Bottom Plate):

1/2” x 3.50” square ASTM A36 plate and Ø3.125” x 0.187”
wall x 0.75” long ASTM A53 Grade B confining ring.
Allowable compression (when used against concrete with
minimum f’c = 2,500 psi) =10.7 k
Precast Concrete Footing

Typical base dimensions approx. 12” x 12”. Exact
dimensions and capacities vary with manufacturer. Item
purchased at local building supply center.
APPENDIX 4D
SMARTJACK® SYSTEMS
Note: Threaded insert is welded to tube

for basement applications (SJXT350T108).
Remaining details are consistent with those
shown for crawlspace applications.
Allowable Capacity
The allowable system compression capacity of the assembled SmartJack® system is limited to the
least value of the component capacities used in the system assembly. The component capacities are
listed in the technical specifications section.
The allowable load applied to the SmartJack® system may be limited by the bearing capacity of the
existing soil. The well-compacted crushed stone or recycled concrete base is a proven method to
increase support for the higher bearing pressure condition immediately below the cast aluminum base
or the concrete footing, and then to absorb and distribute lower pressures to the existing soils. Should
settlement of the SmartJack® system occur, adjustments are made easily by extending the all-thread rod.
Rev. 1/15/16

The SmartJack® is designed to support axial compression loads only. The SmartJack® should
not be used in applications where the system is intended to resist lateral loads.
Corrosion Protection
The tube steel used for the SmartJack® is manufactured with a triple-layer, in-line galvanized coating.
This coating process consists of: (1) a uniform hot-dip zinc galvanizing layer; (2) an intermediate
conversion coating to inhibit the formation of white rust and enhance corrosion resistance; and (3) a
clear organic top coating to further enhance appearance and durability. The inside of the pier tube
also has a zinc-rich coating.
The cast aluminum base is far less susceptible to corrosion than the steel components that
surround it. There are, however, chlorides in some concrete that can be reactive with aluminum. It is
recommended that a 20 mil x 16” square inert membrane be placed under or around the aluminum
base to seperate it from recycled or poured concrete. Crushed limestone or other crushed stone
alternatives do not have similar considerations.
The remaining steel components of the SmartJack® system come standard as electrozinc plated per
ASTM B633.
Design Example
APPENDIX 4D
Step 1 - Determine the load which will be supported by the girder in pounds per linear foot: SMARTJACK® SYSTEMS
Girder Load (plf) = (Span 1 (ft) + Span 2 (ft)) x Floor Load (psf) ÷ 2
Note 1: Typical residential wood-framed construction may have an approximate floor load (dead
load + live load) = 55 psf
Note 2: This equation assumes a floor system which does not support any load bearing walls
or columns.
Step 2 - Determine the load on the SmartJacks® by multiplying the calculated Girder Load (plf) by the
spacing of the SmartJacks:
SmartJack Load (lbs) = Girder Load (plf) x SmartJack® Spacing (ft)

Rev. 9/23/15

Step 3 - Verify that the calculated SmartJack® load is less than the allowable capacity provided by the
various system components as well as the well-compacted crushed stone base and the bearing soils.
Note 3: Without a detailed soil investigation, typical installations should assume no more than
1,500 psf allowable soil bearing pressure. This would equate to an allowable soil capacity of
6,000 lbs for a 2’x2’ poured concrete footing or a 2’ cube of well-compacted crushed stone.
Extremely soft soils may prohibit the use of a crushed stone base or require that a larger poured
concrete footing be utilized.
Step 4 - Size the new girder by entering the following table with both the SmartJack® Spacing (ft)
and the calculated Girder Load (plf). Choose a girder that has an Allowable Load (plf) greater than the
calculated Girder Load (plf).
Girder Allowable Load (plf)(1,2,3)

Girder Size SmartJack®
4 ft 5 ft 6 ft 7 ft 8 ft
Spacing
(3) – 2 x 8 1,170 750 520 380 290
(3) – 2 x 10 1,760 1,120 780 570 440

Sawn
(3) – 2 x 12 2,360 1,510 1,050 770 590
Lumber(4)
(1) – 4 x 6 850 550 380 280 210
(1) – 6 x 6 1,030 660 460 330 250
Engineered
3.5 x 5.5 1,250 740 420 270 180
Lumber(5)
S4 x 7.7
(PowerBrace™ 3,780 2,070 1,200 750 500
Beam)
W4 x 13 6,820 3,850 2,240 1,400 940

APPENDIX 4D
SMARTJACK® SYSTEMS
Structural
Steel(6) 5,190 2,650 1,530 960 640
HSS 4 x 4 x 1/4
HSS 4 x 2 x 1/4
(Lying Flat in Plank 990 500 290 180 120
Orientation)
(1) This table makes no evaluation of the components of the existing structure.
(2) Allowable loads in this table assume the girder is sufficiently restrained against lateral torsional buckling at an interval equal to or less than
the SmartJack® spacing.
(3) The new girder may be cantilevered over the end support by a distance of 30 inches or by a distance of approximately 40% of the adjacent
SmartJack® spacing, whichever is less.
(4) Sawn lumber is assumed to be Douglas Fir Larch - No. 2 or better.
(5) Engineered lumber is assumed to be iLevel 1.3E TimberStrand LSL or equivalent.
(6) Structural steel is assumed to be ASTM A572 Grade 50 or equivalent for wide flange shapes, and ASTM A500 Grade B or equivalent for
HSS tube shapes.
Step 5 - If the required girder size is undesirable, adjust spacing of the SmartJacks® and return to
Step 2.
Rev. 9/23/15

CHAPTER 5
POLYLEVEL® POLYURETHANE FOAM AND RESIN
5.1 Summary Description for three quarters of a century in a variety of
products and materials. Polyurethanes are
The PolyLEVEL product line consists of best known to the public in the form of flexible
polyurethane foams and resins for use in a foams; i.e., upholstery cushions, mattresses,
wide range of geotechnical and structural caulking, weatherstripping, vehicle door and
applications. The more commonly used dash moldings, tires for toddler bikes and
products are two-part urethanes that expand wheelborrows, etc. Spray foam insulation
into rigid foam to fill voids, stabilize concrete, and foam filler within shells of watercraft are
and lift concrete. The product is injected at the examples most similar to the line of two-part
interface between the concrete slab and the PolyLEVEL products.
subgrade soils (Figure 5.1.a). Variations in the
Polyurethane foam is created by the reaction
formulas of the two-part foams allow for uses in
of a diisocyanate (the “A” or “Iso” side) with
even more specific applications, as mentioned in
a polyol (the “R” or “Resin” side) to form a
Section 5.2. Outside of the general offerings of
urethane linkage. Diisocynates are organic
two-part products, single-part, non-expanding
compounds that are specifically manufactured
PolyLEVEL resin is injected deep into loose
to react with polyols. The A side varies little
soil as a binder material, thereby stabilizing the
between polyurethanes of similar product lines
soil from further consolidation/densification, or
or use groups. Polyols are simply alcohols with
allowing vertical excavations to be made.
multiple hydroxyl groups. The polyols and other
Polyurethane is not a new material. The additives within the R side may vary significantly
chemistry of polyurethanes was discovered and between products to control characteristics
patented in 1937 and has been used extensively such as color, density and speed of reaction.
CHAPTER 5
Figure 5.1.a Rendering of PolyLEVEL foam

injection beneath concrete pavement

PolyLEVEL® Polyurethane Foam and Resin All Rights Reserved
5.2 Applications
PolyLEVEL expanding foams are most often
used beneath exterior concrete sidewalk and
pavement sections for stabilization or re-
leveling, but are also utilized for interior work
and other specialty applications. PolyLEVEL is
often considered as an alternative to mudjacking
or removal and replacement.
In residential applications, PolyLEVEL foam Figure 5.2.b1 Before: Driveway settled

is used to stabilize, lift and re-level sidewalks up to 4 inches relative to garage slab
(Figure 5.2.a), patios, driveways (Figures 5.2.b1

and 5.2.b2), garages slabs, and slab-on-grade
concrete floors. Concrete decks surrounding
swimming pools also often settle over time due
to poor compaction of fill soils, soil consolidation/
densification, and erosion. These repairs can often
be completed in a matter of hours with immediate
results, less mess, and no “wait time” for typical
use of the areas. When the work is done, all the
concrete sections will still match and not take on Figure 5.2.b2 After: Driveway lifted
the appearance of a checker board, as is the case back to near original elevation
with typical removal and replacement.

Commercial/industrial applications include
similar types of projects as residential, but
also include areas and facilities with heavier
use pavements. More common PolyLEVEL
applications include re-support of concrete
pavement at and around loading docks, and
CHAPTER 5
concrete floor slabs within warehouses (Figure

5.2.c), plants and manufacturing facilities.
Heavy wheel loads from semi-tractor trailers and
from fork trucks within buildings can overstress
subgrade soils and lead to pavement/slab
cracking, settlement and faulted sections.
Figure 5.2.a PolyLEVEL foam injected to Figure 5.2.c

re-level faulted sidewalk sections PolyLEVEL stabilizes warehouse floor slab

Municipal applications of PolyLEVEL foam Specialty applications of PolyLEVEL foam
include void-filling and lifting of roadway include void-filling after slabs and foundations
sections, runways and taxi-ways at airports, are lifted with the piering systems described in
and floor slabs within schools and other city Chapters 2 and 3, and pipeline/utility projects
buildings. Dips and sags along roads can be as a ditch block or trench break material. Ditch
lifted and releveled (Figures 5.2.d1 and 5.2.d2). blocks prevent water from eroding soil as it
Approach slabs to bridges often settle relative to migrates through the backfill and along pipes
the bridge abutments due to poor compaction from higher to lower elevations of sloped terrain
of fill soils, consolidation of deep fill within the (Figure 5.2.e). PolyLEVEL is often a faster and
embankment, or consolidation of the native soils more economical alternative to concrete collars
beneath the embankment. The bumps before and even sand bags. PolyLEVEL Trench-Breaker
and after bridges can be removed or softened is a highly specialized product that dissipates
with the injection of PolyLEVEL. PolyLEVEL heat quickly during application so as not to create
is a great option for airports where sections a fire hazard as it is placed in wide, thick layers.
of runways or taxi-ways cannot be shut down Another specialty product is the single-part,
for long periods. Maintenance plans including non-expanding PolyLEVEL resin. As mentioned
ground penetrating radar can be implemented in Section 5.1, the singe-part resin is injected
to locate voids beneath the pavement and fill deep into loose soil as a binder to stabilize the
them with PolyLEVEL before there is a much soil from further consolidation/densification, or
larger issue. Terrazzo floors within schools and to allow vertical excavations (Figure 5.2.f).
other city buildings create an excellent wearing
surface, but are expensive to repair or replace.
PolyLEVEL is injected through small 5/8-inch
diameter holes drilled in the slabs.
CHAPTER 5
Figure 5.2.e Placement of
polyurethane foam trench breaks
Figure 5.2.d1PolyLEVEL injection while

maintaining an open lane for traffic
Figure 5.2.d2 Figure 5.2.f PolyLEVEL resin stabilizes loose sand to

Monitoring pavement lift with string lines prevent undermining of slab during column repair

5.3 Benefits
There are many benefits and advantages to
using PolyLEVEL foams over other products,
repair options, and stabilization methods.
• Lightweight – PolyLEVEL polyurethane foams

weigh only 4 to 7 pounds per cubic foot (pcf)
when installed and confined beneath slabs
and pavements. Mudjacking material and
compacted fill soil can weigh 100 to 140
pcf. Very little load is therefore added to the
underlying, supporting soils.
• High Capacity – Lifting action is the result of

the expansion of the polymer, not the pressure
at which PolyLEVEL is injected beneath the
slab. This generally allows for lifting of higher
loads than mudjacking. Mudjacking relies
on the hydraulic pressure being contained
beneath the slab. When mudjacking slurry
“blows out”, additional lift is not possible.
Figure 5.3.a2 Lifting precast concrete slabs and embedded
• Accurate Lift – Installer technique and rails while monitoring with survey equipment
product knowledge allows for precise lifting
(Figures 5.3.a1 and 5.3.a2). Each product has • Waterproof – PolyLEVEL foam will not soften,
a calculated reaction time. “dissolve” in water, or wash out. Material can
be used to under-seal slabs as well as stop a
variety of infrastructure leaks. PolyLEVEL slab
support products will not absorb water and are
therefore unaffected by freeze-thaw cycles.
CHAPTER 5
• Non-Invasive – PolyLEVEL installation

equipment allows placement in tight and
limited access areas. There is less mess than
mudjacking and smaller 5/8-inch holes required
for installation. Mudjacking typically requires 2
to 3-inch holes. PolyLEVEL installs quickly and
most small projects are completed in one day.
• Quick Cure Time – PolyLEVEL foam cures

quickly to allow even heavy traffic just 30
minutes after installation.
• Environmentally Friendly – The two parts (A

and R sides) react fully with each other and
create an inert product safe for the environment.
Use of PolyLEVEL to stabilize and re-level
slabs extends pavement life so less material is
Figure 5.3.a1 Commuter train track removed and hauled off to landfills.
settled up to 2 inches at intersection

5.4 Product Use and sags in roadway sections and settlement of
approach slabs. Deep injection of polyurethane
Considerations in such applications, especially in clay soils,
Special considerations for use of PolyLEVEL would provide little to no benefit. Rather, a
expanding foam products include: practical and economical option is periodic re-
leveling of the slabs as settlement occurs. Deep
• PolyLEVEL expanding foam is intended for use consolidation settlement generally slows and
beneath rigid concrete slabs and pavements decreases in magnitude over time, so these
with some spanning capability. The products periodic adjustments become less frequent
should not be used beneath flexible pavements; (generally years between applications).
e.g., asphalt, brick pavers, cobble stone, or
highly deteriorated and broken concrete.
5.5 Products
• Mixing of the A and R sides creates an exothermic
reaction. The heat that is generated generally The PolyLEVEL product line includes four
increases with the thickness of material placed. (4), two-part expanding foams and one (1)
When a void is deeper than about 6 inches, the single-part non-expanding resin. Brief general
material should be placed in thinner lifts to avoid descriptions and product uses are included
charring or ignition. The PolyLEVEL Trench- below. Additional product descriptions and
Breaker material is designed specifically for properties are included on the Technical
placement in thick, successive lifts. Information sheets in Appendix 5A.
• The chemical reaction generates off-gasses. • PolyLEVEL® 250 (PL 250) – Nominal 2.5 pcf
Fortunately, most applications are outside or density in a free-rise state; typical in-place
within large open and/or well-ventilated areas. density of 4 pcf confined beneath slabs and
The gasses are mostly contained under the slab pavements. Used mainly in residential and low
and dissipate slowly causing no adverse effect. load applications.
However, in poorly ventilated areas, the gasses • PolyLEVEL® 400 (PL 400) - Nominal 4 pcf
can displace or reduce breathing air. Long term density in a free-rise state, typical in-place
exposure can cause an allergic-like sensitivity density of 6.5 pcf confined beneath slabs or
CHAPTER 5
to the product. It is always best to arrange pavements. Used in commercial and moderate
proper ventilation and to wear a half mask to high load applications.
with Organic Vapor/Acid Gasses respirator
cartridges when working inside. • PolyLEVEL® 400H (PL 400H) – Similar properties
and uses as PL 400. Hydrophobic material used
• Care should be taken by the installer not to specifically in applications where water is likely
over-lift the slab or pavement sections. Should present beneath the slabs or pavements.
an over-lift situation occur, slight adjustments
may be possible in the elevations of adjacent • PolyLEVEL® Trench-Breaker – Used as a
sections. Otherwise, sections may have to be ditch block or trench break material due to
ground down or removed and replaced. its low exothermic reaction temperature and
quick dissipation of heat.
• Re-leveling slabs and pavements by injecting
PolyLEVEL at the interface of the concrete • PolyLEVEL® 100SS (PL 100SS) - Single-part
and subgrade soils will not address deep- stabilizer for loose soils.
seated problems such as consolidation of fill or Model specifications for PL 100SS and PL
native soils, erosion, or sinkhole development. 400 are included in Appendix 5B. The model
Experience has shown that deep consolidation specification for PL 400 can be easily modified
of fill or native soils is often the cause of dips for the other two-part expanding products.

5.6 Equipment 5.7 Installation Steps
PolyLEVEL is installed with custom-built The following installation steps provide a broad
installation rigs available as truck-mounted overview of PL 250, PL 400 and PL 400H
(Figure 5.6.a1), trailer units (Figure 5.6.a2), or ATV injection beneath a concrete slab or pavement.
buggies (Figure 5.6.a3). The basic components Intermediate steps, installation equipment and
of the system include material storage tanks, a tools used, and considerations for unusual
generator, an air compressor, pumps, a reactor, conditions or applications are not addressed.
and applicator(s)/gun(s). The reactor includes
Step 1 – 5/8-inch holes are drilled in strategic
a proportioner, heater, and insulated and
locations in the slab (Figure 5.7.a1). In general,
heated hoses. This ensures that the two parts
the holes are spaced 5 feet apart and 3 feet from
are delivered to the applicator at a consistent
edges of the slab. Locations and spacing are often
pressure and temperature.
modified in the field to achieve the desired result.
Figure 5.6.a1
Truck-mounted installation equipment
CHAPTER 5
Figure 5.7.a1
Step 2 – Injection ports are placed and

tightened with a socket and wrench to seal the
Figure 5.6.a2 hole (Figure 5.7.a2).
Enclosed trailer unit
Figure 5.6.a3 Figure 5.7.a2

ATV buggy

Step 3 – PolyLEVEL is injected to fill voids and
allow for lifting (Figure 5.7.a3).
Figure 5.7.a3
Step 4 – The injection ports are removed and the

holes are patched with mortar mix, polyurethane
sealant or epoxy sealant (Figure 5.7.a4).
CHAPTER 5
Figure 5.7.a4

Appendix 5A
Technical Information
APPENDIX 5A
TECHNICAL INFORMATION

PolyLEVEL® 100-SS
Description Storage and Cleanup
PolyLEVEL® 100-SS is a low viscosity, Activator MUST be agitated (shaken) before use.
polyurethane resin designed to penetrate and Flush equipment with acetone before and after
stabilize loose or sandy soil when medium or high use to clean equipment and remove moisture.
strength is required. It migrates through loose soil If work area temperatures are low, heat the
and into voids and reacts with moisture in the product to 55°F - 85°F to improve product
soil to form a polymer cement/soil matrix of high performance. Do not use open flame as a heat
strength and durability. PolyLEVEL® 100-SS is source. Store chemicals between 55°F - 85°F
resistant to most organic solvents, mild acids and in a dry atmosphere. Shelf life is 6 months, in
bases, and micro-organisms. The polyurethane original, unopened factory containers, under
encapsulates loose soil, fills voids, and forms a normal storage conditions of 55° to 85° F. Do
solid, water-tight barrier. not store in direct sunlight. Keep drums tightly
closed when not in use. Cured product may be
Unique Advantages disposed of without restriction. Excess liquid
• Contains no solvents material should be mixed together with sand or
• Very low viscosity for good penetration other absorbent material and allowed to cure,
• Fast cure time controlled by catalyst ratio and then disposed of in the normal manner.
moisture in the treated soil
• Encapsulates and strengthens loose soil Safe Handling of Liquid Components
• Forms a water-tight barrier to stop water
Use caution in removing caps and bungs from the
migration
container. Loosen caps and bungs first to let any
• Good resistance to chemicals
built up gas escape before completely removing.
• Excellent compressive strength (over 1,000
Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors. In case of
psi in sand) and thermal stability
chemical contact with eyes, flush with water for
Typical Resin Properties at least 15 minutes and get medical attention.
APPENDIX 5A
PolyLEVEL® 100-SS A PolyLEVEL® 100-SS R For further information refer to “MDI-Based
Soil Stabilizer Activator Polyurethane Foam Systems: Guidelines for
Viscosity(1) 25 – 50 cps 100 - 200 cps Safe Handling and Disposal” publication AX-119
Unit Weight 10.25 lb/gal 8.5 lb/gal published by the Center for the Polyurethanes
Industry 1300 Wilson Blvd, Suite 800, Arlington,
Shelf Life 6 months 6 months
VA 22209.
Typical Reaction Properties

Caution
% Activator Gel Time(1)
Polyurethane products manufactured or
0.5 12-16 min
produced from this liquid system may present a
1.0 8-11 min serious fire hazard if improperly used or allowed
2.0 6-7 min to remain exposed or unprotected. The character
and magnitude of any such hazard will depend
(1) At 77°F
on a broad range of factors which are controlled
and influenced by the manufacturing and

production process, by the mode of application
or installation and by the function and usage
of the particular product. Any flammability
rating or reference contained in this or other
PolyLEVEL® 100-SS literature is not intended
to reflect hazards presented by this or any
other material under actual fire conditions.
These ratings are used solely to measure and
describe the product’s response to heat and
flame under controlled laboratory conditions.
Each person, firm or corporation engaged
in the manufacture, production, application,
installation, or use of any polyurethane product
should carefully determine whether there is
a potential fire hazard associated with such
product in a specific usage, and utilize all
appropriate precautionary and safety measures.
DISCLAIMER
The information on our data sheets is to assist

customers in determining whether our products
are suitable for their applications. The customers
must satisfy themselves as to the suitability for
specific cases. Foundation Supportworks®,
Inc. warrants only that the material shall meet
its specifications; this warranty is in lieu of all
other written or unwritten, expressed or implied
warranties and Foundation Supportworks®,
Inc. expressly disclaims any warranty of
APPENDIX 5A
merchantability, fitness for a particular

purpose, or freedom from patent infringement.
Accordingly, buyer assumes all risks whatsoever
as to the use of the material. Buyer’s exclusive
remedy as to any breach of warranty, negligence
or other claim shall be limited to the purchase
price of the material. Failure to adhere strictly
to any recommended procedures shall relieve
Foundation Supportworks®, Inc. of all liability
with respect to the material or the use thereof.

PolyLEVEL® 250
PolyLEVEL® 250 is a two-component, water Shelf life is 6 months, in original, unopened

blown, nominal 2.5 pcf density, polyurethane factory containers, under normal storage
foam system designed to fill voids and lift conditions of 55° to 85° F. Do not store in direct
concrete slabs. sunlight. Keep drums tightly closed when not in
use. Cured product may be disposed of without
Typical Resin Properties restriction. Excess liquid “A” and “R” material
PolyLEVEL® 250 R PolyLEVEL® 250 A should be mixed together and allowed to cure,
then disposed of in the normal manner.
Viscosity(1) 850 cps 200 cps
Unit Weight 9.4 lb/gal 10.25 lb/gal

Safe Handling of Liquid Components
Mix Ratio
PolyLEVEL® 250 R PolyLEVEL® 250 A Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors. In case of
By Weight 100 parts 109 parts chemical contact with eyes, flush with water for
at least 15 minutes and get medical attention.
By Volume 100 parts 100 parts
For further information refer to “MDI-Based
Polyurethane Foam Systems: Guidelines for
Typical Reaction Properties Safe Handling and Disposal” publication AX-119
Cream Time(1) 7.5 sec published by the Center for the Polyurethanes
Rise Time (1)
25 sec
VA 22209.
Density(2) 2.5 pcf
Typical Compressive Strength
APPENDIX 5A
35 psi
(2)
Caution

Typical Physical Properties(3)
Typical In-Place Density (ASTM D1622) 4 pcf
serious fire hazard if improperly used or allowed
Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621) 70 psi to remain exposed or unprotected. The character
Closed Cell Content >90% and magnitude of any such hazard will depend
Water Absorption (ASTM D2842) <0.02 lb/sq ft
Resistance to Solvents Excellent production process, by the mode of application
Resistance to Mold and Mildew Excellent or installation and by the function and usage
Maximum Service Temp 200°F
(1) At 77°F PolyLEVEL® 250 literature is not intended
(2) FRC = Free Rise Condition to reflect hazards presented by this or any
(3) Average value from laboratory testing and should serve only as other material under actual fire conditions.
a guideline.
These ratings are used solely to measure and

DISCLAIMER

APPENDIX 5A


PolyLEVEL® 400
PolyLEVEL® 400 is a two-component, water Shelf life is 6 months, in original, unopened

blown, nominal 4 pcf density, polyurethane factory containers, under normal storage
foam system designed for concrete slab raising, conditions of 55° to 85° F. Do not store in direct
under-slab void fill and cavity fill applications. sunlight. Keep drums tightly closed when not in
Typical Resin Properties restriction. Excess liquid ‘A’ and ‘R’ material
PolyLEVEL® 400 R PolyLEVEL® 400 A should be mixed together and allowed to cure,
Unit Weight 9.4 lb/gal 10.25 lb/gal.

Mix Ratio
PolyLEVEL® 400 R PolyLEVEL® 400 A Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors. In case of
By Weight 100 parts 109 parts chemical contact with eyes, flush with water for
at least 15 minutes and get medical attention.
Typical Reaction Properties Safe Handling and Disposal” publication AX-119
Cream Time(1) 25 sec published by the Center for the Polyurethanes
Rise Time (1)
90 sec
VA 22209.
Density(2) 4 pcf
Typical Compressive Strength
APPENDIX 5A
60 psi
(2)
Caution

Typical Physical Properties(3)
Typical In-Place Density (ASTM D1622) 6.5 pcf
serious fire hazard if improperly used or allowed
Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621) 100 psi to remain exposed or unprotected. The character
Shear Strength (ASTM C273) 140 psi and magnitude of any such hazard will depend
Closed Cell Content >90%
Water Absorption (ASTM D2842) <0.02 lb/sq ft production process, by the mode of application
Resistance to Solvents Excellent or installation and by the function and usage
Resistance to Mold and Mildew Excellent
PolyLEVEL® 400 literature is not intended
(1) At 77°F to reflect hazards presented by this or any
(2) FRC = Free Rise Condition other material under actual fire conditions.
(3) Average value from laboratory testing and should serve only as These ratings are used solely to measure and
a guideline.

DISCLAIMER

APPENDIX 5A


PolyLEVEL® 400H
PolyLEVEL® 400H is a two-component Shelf life is 6 months, in original, unopened

hydrophobic, closed cell, water blown, nominal 4 factory containers, under normal storage
pcf density, polyurethane foam system designed conditions of 55° to 85° F. Do not store in direct
for concrete slab raising, under-slab void fill and sunlight. Keep drums tightly closed when not in
cavity fill applications. use. Cured product may be disposed of without
restriction. Excess liquid ‘A’ and ‘R’ material
Typical Resin Properties should be mixed together and allowed to cure,
PolyLEVEL® 400H R PolyLEVEL® 400H A then disposed of in the normal manner.

Shelf Life 6 months 6 months Use caution in removing caps and bungs from the
Mix Ratio built up gas escape before completely removing.
PolyLEVEL® 400H R PolyLEVEL® 400H A
By Weight 100 parts 106 parts at least 15 minutes and get medical attention.
Safe Handling and Disposal” publication AX-119
Typical Reaction Properties
published by the Center for the Polyurethanes
Cream Time(1) 20 sec Industry 1300 Wilson Blvd, Suite 800, Arlington,
Rise Time (1) 95 sec VA 22209.
Density(2) 4 pcf
APPENDIX 5A
Typical Compressive Strength (2)
60 psi Caution

Typical Physical Properties(3) produced from this liquid system may present a
Typical In-Place Density (ASTM D1622) 6.5 pcf serious fire hazard if improperly used or allowed
Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621) 100 psi
to remain exposed or unprotected. The character
and magnitude of any such hazard will depend
Shear Strength (ASTM C273) 140 psi
Closed Cell Content >90% and influenced by the manufacturing and
Water Absorption (ASTM D2842) <0.02 lb/sq ft production process, by the mode of application
Resistance to Solvents Excellent or installation and by the function and usage
PolyLEVEL® 400H literature is not intended
(1) At 77°F to reflect hazards presented by this or any
(2) FRC = Free Rise Condition other material under actual fire conditions.
(3) Average value obtained from laboratory testing and should These ratings are used solely to measure and
serve only as a guideline.

DISCLAIMER

APPENDIX 5A


PolyLEVEL® Trench-Breaker
PolyLEVEL® Trench-Breaker is a two-component, Shelf life is 6 months, in original, unopened

water blown, nominal 2.2 pcf density, polyurethane factory containers, under normal storage
foam system designed for exterior applications conditions of 55° to 85° F. Do not store in direct
around utilities and pipelines. sunlight. Keep drums tightly closed when not in
PolyLEVEL® Trench-Breaker is applied as a
restriction. Excess liquid “A” and “R” material
liquid mixture that reacts almost immediately
should be mixed together and allowed to cure,
to expand approximately 35 times in volume in
15 to 20 seconds. PolyLEVEL® Trench-Breaker
exhibits low exothermic reaction temperature
and therefore can be placed in continuous, Safe Handling of Liquid Components
successive lifts well beyond 2 inches in thickness
without danger of charring or ignition.
Typical Resin Properties built up gas escape before completely removing.
Trench-Breaker R Trench-Breaker A
Viscosity(1) 800 cps 225 cps at least 15 minutes and get medical attention.
Safe Handling and Disposal” publication AX-119
published by the Center for the Polyurethanes
Mix Ratio Industry 1300 Wilson Blvd, Suite 800, Arlington,
Trench-Breaker R Trench-Breaker A
VA 22209.
By Weight 100 parts 110 parts
APPENDIX 5A
Caution
Typical Reaction Physical Properties produced from this liquid system may present
a serious fire hazard if improperly used or
Cream Time(1) 4.5 sec
allowed to remain exposed or unprotected. The
Rise Time(1) 17 sec character and magnitude of any such hazard will
Typical In-Place Density 2.2 pcf depend on a broad range of factors which are
controlled and influenced by the manufacturing
Tensile Strength (ASTM D1623)(2) 71 psi
and production process, by the mode of
application or installation and by the function
(1) At 77°F and usage of the particular product. Any
(2) Average value from laboratory testing and should serve only as flammability rating or reference contained
a guideline. in this or other PolyLEVEL® Trench-Breaker
literature is not intended to reflect hazards
presented by this or any other material under
actual fire conditions. These ratings are used

solely to measure and describe the product’s
response to heat and flame under controlled
laboratory conditions. Each person, firm
or corporation engaged in the manufacture,
production, application, installation, or use
of any polyurethane product should carefully
determine whether there is a potential fire hazard
associated with such product in a specific
usage, and utilize all appropriate precautionary
and safety measures.
DISCLAIMER

APPENDIX 5A


Appendix 5B
Model Specifications
APPENDIX 5B

POLYURETHANE VOID FILLING OR
SOIL STABILIZATION APPLICATIONS
1 SCOPE
1.1 The work consists of designing, furnishing, and installing single-part, high-density polyurethane
material according to the project plans and this specification.
1.2.1 The Owner is the person or entity that owns the facility or will own the facility once it is
completed. The Owner may have contractual agreements with, and be represented by,
other parties such as engineers, architects, or contractors that preform services under the
direction of the Owner. Where Owner is used in the specification, it refers to the Owner or
the Owner’s contracted representatives separate from the Installing Contractor.
1.2.2 The Installing Contractor installs the polyurethane material and possibly performs other
tasks associated with the project.
1.3 The work may include void filling, stabilizing loose or sandy soil, or undersealing pavement and
faulted joints.
1.5 Unless otherwise noted, the Installing Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, and
material necessary to accomplish the work.
APPENDIX 5B
replace structures, utilities, or other surficial improvements in the work area as necessary to
facilitate the work.
unsafe conditions.
1.8 The Owner will be responsible for any soil density testing subsequent to the polyurethane
injection, unless otherwise noted.
1.9 The work does not include and post-installation monitoring unless specifically noted otherwise
in the contract documents.
2 APPROVED POLYURETHANE MANUFACTURERS

Fax (402) 393-4002.

2.2 Due to the special requirements for design and manufacturing of polyurethane products, the
system shall be obtained from Foundation Supportworks®, Inc., or other qualified manufacturer
with an approved equivalent product. A request to substitute any other manufactured polyurethane
product must be submitted to the Owner for review not less than seven (7) calendar days prior
to the bid date. The request must include:
2.2.1 Documentation of at least five years of production experience manufacturing

polyurethane products for similar applications,
2.2.2 Documentation that the manufacturer’s polyurethane products have been used
successfully on at least five similar projects within the last three (3) years, and/or,
project.
3.1 PolyLEVEL® 100-SS Single-part Polyurethane Foam manufactured in accordance with the
requirements of Section 4 of this specification.
4 MATERIALS
4.1 PolyLEVEL® 100-SS Single-part Polyurethane
4.1.1 Single-part polyurethane and activating agent must have at least the following material
properties:
4.1.1.1 Viscosity: The viscosities of the soil stabilizer and activator are 25 to 50 centipoise
(cps) and 100 to 200 cps, respectively, in accordance with ASTM D2196.
4.1.1.2 Unit Weight: The unit weights of the soil stabilizer and activator are 10.25 lb/
gal and 8.5 lb/gal, respectively, in accordance with ASTM D1475.
5 QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLING CONTRACTOR

APPENDIX 5B
5.1 The Installing Contractor shall submit to the Owner a proposal including the documentation
required in this section. Work shall not begin until all the submittals have been received and
approved by the Owner. All costs associated with incomplete or unacceptable submittals shall
be the responsibility of the Installing Contractor.
5.2 Evidence of the Installing Contractor’s competence in the installation of polyurethane materials
shall be provided to the Owner’s satisfaction and may include any or all of the following:
5.2.1 Polyurethane manufacturer’s certificate of competency in installation of polyurethane

materials,
5.2.2 A list of at least three projects completed in the previous three years wherein the
Installing Contractor installed polyurethane similar to those shown in the project Plans.
Such a list shall include names and phone numbers of those project representatives
who can verify the Installing Contractor’s participation in those projects, and/or,

5.2.3 A letter from the polyurethane manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative expressing
ability and intent to provide on-site supervision of the polyurethane installation.
discretion.
6.1 Within two (2) weeks of receiving the contract award, the Installing Contractor shall submit the
following documentation:
6.1.1 Certification that the proposed polyurethane material meets the requirements of Section 4.
6.1.2 Qualifications of the Installing Contractor per Section 5.2.
6.1.3 Minimum and/or maximum quantity of polyurethane material.
6.1.4 Soil testing procedures and failure criteria, if applicable.
contract.
7 POLYURETHANE INSTALLATION
7.1 Installing Contractor shall furnish and install polyurethane material per the project Plans. In the
event of conflict between the project Plans and the Installing Contractors proposed installation
method, the Installing Contractor shall not begin work until conflict has been resolved with the
Owner.
underground utilities.
APPENDIX 5B
and material stockpiles, shall be kept reasonably clean and orderly.
7.4 The installation of polyurethane may be observed by representatives of the Owner for quality
prior to starting the polyurethane installation.
7.5 The polyurethane will be installed with an industrial pumping unit capable of output pressures of
at least 3,000 psi. The pumping unit will be capable of controlling the pressure and rate of flow
of the material, as well as, measuring the total amount of material injected.
7.6 If 5/8 inch diameter holes are required for the placement of the polyurethane material, the hole
locations may be approved by the Owner prior to installation. After installation, the drilled holes
will be cleaned out and filled with non-shrink grout or high-strength mortar mix.
7.7 The polyurethane material will be injected until all known or encountered voids under the
pavement are filled or until the soil matrix has reached the required density.

7.8 The rate and quantity of material required will be determined by the Installing Contractor and
approved by the Owner.

8.1 The Installing Contractor shall provide the Owner copies of the polyurethane material usage
record within 24 hours after each installation section has been completed. Formal copies shall
be submitted within 30 days following the completion of the polyurethane installation. The
material usage record shall include, but is not limited to, the following information:
8.1.2 Location of installation
8.1.3 Total material used
8.1.4 Comments pertaining to interruptions, obstructions, other relevant information
9 CLEANUP
9.1 With one week of completion of the work, the Installing Contractor shall remove any and all
material, equipment, tools, debris, of other items belonging to the Installing Contractor or used
10 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
10.1 The high-density polyurethane material shall be measured by the pound. Weight of the injected
material will be recorded and documented at each location and at the end of each work shift.
APPENDIX 5B

POLYURETHANE INSTALLATION FOR CONCRETE
PAVEMENT/SLAB STABILIZATION APPLICATIONS
1 SCOPE
1.1 The work consists of designing, furnishing, and installing two-part, high-density polyurethane
material according to the project Plans and this specification.
1.2.1 The Owner is the person or entity that owns the facility or will own the facility once it is
completed. The Owner may have contractual agreements with, and be represented by,
other parties such as engineers, architects, or contractors that preform services under the
direction of the Owner. Where Owner is used in the specification, it refers to the Owner or
the Owner’s contracted representatives separate from the Installing Contractor.
1.2.2 The Installing Contractor installs the polyurethane material and possibly performs other
tasks associated with the project.
1.3 The work may include void filling, stabilizing and/or lifting pavement and slab structures, or
undersealing pavement and faulted joints where required.
1.5 Unless otherwise noted, the Installing Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, and
material necessary to accomplish the work.
APPENDIX 5B
replace structures, utilities, or other surficial improvements in the work area as necessary to
facilitate the work.
unsafe conditions.
1.8 The Owner will be responsible for any soil density testing subsequent to the polyurethane foam
injection, unless otherwise noted.
1.9 The work does not include any post-installation monitoring unless specifically noted otherwise
in the contract documents.
2 REFERENCES
2.1.1 ASTM S1621: Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics

2.1.2 ASTM D1622/D1622M: Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics
2.1.3 ASTM C273: Shear Properties of Sandwich Core Materials
2.1.4 ASTM D2842: Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics
3 APPROVED POLYURETHANE FOAM MANUFACTURERS

Fax (402) 393-4002.
3.2 Due to the special requirements for design and manufacturing of polyurethane foam, the system
shall be obtained from Foundation Supportworks®, Inc., or other qualified manufacturer with
an approved equivalent product. A request to substitute any other manufactured polyurethane
foam product must be submitted to the Owner for review not less than seven (7) calendar days
prior to the bid date. The request must include:
3.2.1 Documentation of at least five years of production experience manufacturing

polyurethane products for similar applications,
3.2.2 Documentation that the manufacturer’s polyurethane products have been used
successfully on at least five similar projects within the last three (3) years, and/or,
project.
4.1 Two-part, closed-cell, polyurethane foam products PolyLEVEL® 400 and PolyLEVEL® 400H
manufactured in accordance with the requirements of Sections 5.1 and 5.2 of this specification.
5 MATERIALS
5.1 PolyLEVEL® 400 Two-part, High-density Polyurethane Foam
APPENDIX 5B
5.1.1 Two-part, one to one ratio by volume, closed-cell, high-density polyurethane foam
system.
5.1.2 Viscosity: The viscosities of the resin and diisocyanate are 700 to 900 centipoise (cps)
and 150 to 250 cps, respectively, in accordance with ASTM D2196.
5.1.3 Unit Weight: The unit weights of the resin and diisocyanate are 9.4 lb/gal and 10.25 lb/
gal, respectively, in accordance with ASTM D1475.
5.1.4 Minimum free-rise density of at least 3.8 lb/cubic foot per ASTM D1622.
5.1.5 Minimum molded compressive strength of at least 85 psi per ASTM D1621.
5.1.6 Minimum molded shear strength of at least 120 psi per ASTM C273.
5.1.7 Maximum water absorption of less than or equal to 0.03 lb/square foot when tested per
ASTM D2842.
5.1.8 Achieve 90% compressive strength in 15 minutes.

5.2 POLYLEVEL® 400H Two-part, High-density, Hydrophobic Polyurethane Foam
5.2.1 Used in applications where water is present beneath the slab.
5.2.2 Viscosity: The viscosities of the resin and diisocyanate are 700 to 950 centipoise (cps)
and 150 to 250 cps, respectively, in accordance with ASTM D2196.
5.2.3 Unit Weight: The unit weights of the resin and diisocyanate are 9.7 lb/gal and 10.25 lb/
gal, respectively, in accordance with ASTM D1475.
5.2.4 Minimum free-rise density of at least 3.8 lb/cubic foot per ASTM D1622.
5.2.5 Minimum molded compressive strength of at least 85 psi per ASTM D1621.
5.2.6 Minimum molded shear strength of at least 120 psi per ASTM C273.
5.2.7 Maximum water absorption of less than or equal to 0.03 lb/square foot when tested per
ASTM D2842.
5.2.8 Achieve 90% compressive strength in 15 minutes.
6 QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLING CONTRACTOR

6.1 The Installing Contractor shall submit to the Owner a proposal including the documentation
required in this section. Work shall not begin until all the submittals have been received and
approved by the Owner. All costs associated with incomplete or unacceptable submittals shall
be the responsibility of the Installing Contractor.
6.2 Evidence of the Installing Contractor’s competence in the installation of polyurethane materials
shall be provided to the Owner’s satisfaction and may include any or all of the following:
6.2.1 Polyurethane manufacturer’s certificate of competency in installation of polyurethane

materials,
6.2.2 A list of at least three similar projects completed in the previous three years wherein the
Installing Contractor installed polyurethane similar to those shown in the project Plans.
Such a list shall include names and phone numbers of those project representatives
APPENDIX 5B
who can verify the Installing Contractor’s participation in those projects, and/or,
6.2.3 A letter from the polyurethane manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative expressing

ability and intent to provide on-site supervision of the polyurethane installation.
discretion.
7.1 Within two (2) weeks of receiving the contract award, the Installing Contractor shall submit the
following documentation:
7.1.1 Certification that the proposed polyurethane material meets the requirements of Section 5.
7.1.2 Qualifications of the Installing Contractor per Section 6.2.

7.1.3 Minimum and/or maximum quantity of polyurethane material.
7.1.4 Soil testing procedures and failure criteria, if applicable.
7.1.5 Provide proof of insurance coverage as stated in the general specifications and/or contract.
8 POLYURETHANE INSTALLATION
8.1 Installing Contractor shall furnish and install polyurethane material per the project Plans. In the
event of conflict between the project Plans and the Installing Contractors proposed installation
method, the Installing Contractor shall not begin work until conflict has been resolved with the
Owner.
underground utilities.
and material stockpiles, shall be kept reasonably clean and orderly.
8.4 The installation of polyurethane may be observed by representatives of the Owner for quality
prior to starting the polyurethane installation.
8.5 The polyurethane will be installed with a truck, trailer, or buggy mounted pumping unit capable of
injecting high-density polyurethane material under the concrete slab or pavement. The pumping
unit will be capable of controlling the temperature and rate of flow of the material, as well as,
measuring the total amount of material injected.
8.6 If 5/8 inch diameter holes are required for the placement of the polyurethane material, the hole
locations may be approved by the Owner prior to installation. After installation, the drilled holes
will be cleaned out and filled with non-shrink grout or high-strength mortar mix.
8.7 Provide laser levels, manometers, dial indicators, or other measuring devices capable of
detecting slab movement within 0.1 inches to verify stabilization and/or lift of the slab and/or
APPENDIX 5B
structure.
8.8 The rate, temperature, and amount of material required will be determined by the Installing
Contractor and approved by the Owner.

9.1 The Installing Contractor shall provide the Owner copies of the polyurethane material usage
record within 24 hours after each installation section has been completed. Formal copies shall
be submitted within 30 days following the completion of the polyurethane installation. The
material usage record shall include, but is not limited to, the following information:
9.1.2 Location of installation
9.1.3 Total material used
9.1.4 Comments pertaining to interruptions, obstructions, other relevant information

10 CLEANUP
10.1 With one week of completion of the work, the Installing Contractor shall remove any and all
material, equipment, tools, debris, of other items belonging to the Installing Contractor or used
11 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
11.1 The high-density polyurethane material shall be measured by the pound. Weight of the injected
material will be recorded and documented at each location and at the end of each work shift.
APPENDIX 5B

EXPECT EXCELLENCE
Foundation Supportworks®, Inc. (FSI), headquartered in Omaha, Nebraska,
is a leading manufacturer of helical pile systems, hydraulically-driven push
pier systems, wall anchoring and wall bracing systems, polyurethane injection
systems, and supplemental crawl space support systems. FSI places a strong
focus not only on innovative solutions that are appropriately designed and
tested, expertly installed and dependable to perform as promised, but also
on providing a level of support and assistance to design professionals and
installing contractors that is unparalleled in the industry.
When you work with FSI and our network of installing contractors, you can be
assured you are working with a team of people who take great pride in their
work and who are on a mission to change the level of service typically provided
by contractors. We understand that the excellent products we discuss in detail
in this technical manual are only half of the equation. The other half is being
committed to do whatever it takes to make your project a success, and that
includes sticking within project timeframes, communicating frequently and
effectively, and offering flexibility and problem solving when project conditions
change. We are committed to it all.
We believe that Foundation Supportworks is a different and special kind of

company, and we look forward to you experiencing it firsthand.

Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Helical Piles and Anchors

Hydraulically Driven Push Piers

Technical Manual pi © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Chapter 2 – Helical Foundation Systems

Technical Manual p ii © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Appendix 2A – Helical Product Ratings, Properties and Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Appendix 2B – Lift Assembly Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Appendix 2C – HelixPro® Helical Foundation Design Software for Professionals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Appendix 2D – Pile Bucking Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Appendix 2E – Corrosion Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Appendix 2F – Model Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Appendix 2G – Guidelines and Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Appendix 2H – Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Technical Manual p iii © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Appendix 3B – Drive Stand Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Appendix 3C – Lift Assembly Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Appendix 3D – Model Specification – Hydraulically-Driven Push Pier Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Technical Manual p iv © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Appendix 4A – Geo-Lock® Wall Anchor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Appendix 4B – PowerBrace™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Appendix 4C – CarbonArmor® Wall Reinforcing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Appendix 4D – SmartJack® Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Technical Manual pv © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Appendix 5A – Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Appendix 5B – Model Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Technical Manual p vi © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

the exclusive rights to market and distribute

Chapter 1 p1 © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

geotechnical and structural engineers on

Our Mission Statement: To simplify the design process for helical

Chapter 1 p2 © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

To register for any continuing education

Chapter 1 p3 © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Early patent of screw (helical) piles

product and the installation equipment. In

Chapter 2 p5 © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

the term “anchor” more often refers to a helical

Helical tieback installation

Helical tiebacks and helical soil nails are

Chapter 2 p6 © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

A true helix shape can be described as a three-

A helix plate is further defined by geometric

Chapter 2 p7 © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

• Helix spacing along the shaft shall be between

• The helix pitch is 3 inches ± ¼ inch.

• All helix plates have the same pitch.

theoretically track the same path as the

• Helical foundation shaft advancement equals

• Helix plates have generally circular edge

Non-conforming systems may also seek an

Chapter 2 p8 © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

The coupler detail is yet another extremely

Chapter 2 p9 © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Figure 2.3.2.1.d Coupler tolerances; (A) Competitor

Again, the greater the freedom allowed in the

Figure 2.3.2.1.e Competitor upset

FSI round shaft helical piles are manufactured

Chapter 2 p 10 © 2014 Foundation Supportworks®, Inc.

Figure 2.3.2.1.g Coupler detail showing

All of these systems are designed and manufactured